advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of 44
LGEMS_LH-W752TA_ENG DVD HOME THEATER MANUAL DE INSTRUÇÕES MODELO: LH-W752TA - LH-T752TB LH-W752, LHS-W75TAF, LHS-W75TAC, LHS-W75TAR, LHS-W75TAL, LHS-W75TAW, ACC75T,LHS-75TBS, LHS-75TBC, LHS-75TBW) R Por favor leia este manual cuidadosamente antes de operar seu aparelho. Mantenha-o para futuras referências. Desenhos e especificações estão sujeitos a mudanças sem prévio aviso. Índice light, as there may be a considerable temperature increase inside the car. Cleaning discs Introduction nd packing materials may protection, re-pack the d at the factory. Fingerprints and dust on the disc can distort the picture arby TV, VCR, or radio or reduce sound quality. Before playing, clean the disc ack. In thisÍndice case, position ................................................................................... 2 the centre out- Repetir ...................................................................... 21 with a clean cloth. Wipe the disc from Introduction R, or radio,Apresentação or turn off the wards. ...................................................................... A-B MP3/WMA ............................................................. AudioRepetir CD and Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 . . . 23 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. . . . 2 Busca por Playing an Tempo Audio..................................................... CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . 22 . . . 23 Marcador � Pausede . .Busca . . . ................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 . . . 23 ZOOM ...................................................................... � Moving to another Track . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 . . . 23 Recursos especiais do DVD. ......................................... 23 � Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Verificando � Search.o.conteúdo . . . . . . dos . . .discos . . . . de . . DVD: . . . ............. . . . . . 23 . . . 23 Tipos de VCDs ................................................................ 5 Menu Títulos (TITLE. .MENU) JPEG DiscdeOperation . . . . ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 . . . 24 About Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . 23 Precauções...................................................................... 6 Menu doaDisco (DISC Viewing JPEG discMENU) . . . . .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 . . . 24 . . . . . . . Front . . 24 Panel and Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Movendo a unidade .................................................... 6 Mudando o Idioma. do � Slide Show . . Áudio . . . . ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 . . . 24 Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . Remote . . 24 Do not use strong solvents such as6 alcohol, benzene,Legendas Limpando a unidade ................................................... (SUBTITLES) � Still Picture . . . . . .......................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 . . . 24 . . . . . . . . . 24 thinner, commercially available cleaners, or anti-static Notas sobre DVD� de Áudio ............................................................... faces dirty,discos .......................................................... 6 Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 . . . 24 . . . . are . . .extremely . . 24 Preparation spray intended for vinyl records. Manuseio dos discos .................................................. 6 ed with a mild detergent Mudando parapicture. outro Grupo � To rotate . . . ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 . . . 24 . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . dos . . .discos . . . ........................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 . 8-13 Armazenamento lvents suchConnections as alcohol, Assistindo uma outra Página Programmed Playback . . . . .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . 24 About Symbols Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . 8 might damage TV the surface Limpeza dos discos .................................................... Reproduzindo um CD de Áudio ou Disco Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . MP3/WMA . . . . . . . .... . . 24 . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . 25 Optional Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . 6. . . . 9 Sobre os Símbolos .......................................................... Pause ....................................................................... Erasing a Track from Programme List . . . . . 24 . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . 25 Aerial . .the . . . . .................................. . symbol . . . . . . .display . . . . . .6. . . 10 Sobre Connections a exibição do símbolo About Mudando deComplete Faixa ................................................... Erasing the Programme List . . . . 24 . . . 25 t . . . . . . . . 25 Speaker Connection . . . . . . ............ . . . . . 6. 11-12 Sobre os System símbolos de discos para .instruções Faixa/Tudo/Desl DivX Repetir Disc Operation . . . .......................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . 26 h-tech, st . . . precision . . . . 25 �device. “ ”. may Transmitter. ................................................... . . .appear . . . . . on . . the . . .TV . . screen . . . . .7during . . . 11operation. Search - Busca ....................................................... 24 Painéis Frontal e Traseiro Speaker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 disc dirty . . . drive . . . .parts . . 26are This icon means the function. explained � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . in 11this owner’s Controle Remoto..................................................................8 Operação Disco JPEG ................................................ Additional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . 28 .be . .poor. . . . . . . 27 � Setting a manual is not available disc. de Information ID of Transmitter . . . on . . that . . . .specific . .9. . . DVD-Video 11 Conexões ............................................................................ enance Visualizando umMemory Disco JPEG Last Condition . .................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . 28 . . . . .are . . .recommended . 28 � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11 Conexões da TV .............................................................. 9 . (This depends on the Demonstração Screen Saver .em . . Slides . . . . ......................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . 28 About the disc symbols for instructions . . . . . . . . . 28 � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 . . . . 12 Conexão do Equipamento Opcional. .............................. Imagem Congelada Controlling the TV ................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . 28 . . . . . . . Speaker . . 28 A section whose title has one of the following symbol is Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 ur nearest dealer. Conexões das Antenas ................................................. 10 Mudando de arquivo Operation with Radio ................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . 29 . . . . . . . Before . . 28 Operation by the symbol. . . . . . .-only .LH-T752TB................... . . to . . the . . .disc . . .represented . . . . .11. 14-19 Sistema de Caixasapplicable Acústicas Zoom ........................................................................ Presetting the radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . 29 . . . . . . . . . 29 DVD-V Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Surround Montando e Conectando as DVD Caixas Acústicas ............. 11 and finalized DVD±R/RW. ListeningProgramada to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 . . . 29 Reprodução ................................................. . . . . . . . . . 29 Mode a. Caixa . . . . Central . . DVD-A . . . na . . Parede............................... . . . .Audio . . . . discs. . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . 14 Fixando DVD Other Functions. . . . . ............................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 . . . 30 Reprodução Programada . . . . . . . . . 29 SounddeMode . . . da . .Caixa . . . .Acústica . . . . . ...................... . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . 14 Sistema Conexões VCD2.0 Video CDs with the PBC (playback control) Sleep Timer Setting . . . . . . ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 . . . 30 Repetir as Faixas Programadas . . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Sistema de Caixas Acústicas LH-W752TA ................. 12 function. e. of Dimmer . . uma . . . faixa . . . .da. .lista . . .de. .programação . . . . . . . . ......... . . . . 26 . . . 30 Apagando . .the . . disc. . . . . 30 Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12. 16-19 Transmissor .............................................................. that not VCD1.1 Video CDs without the PBC (playback control) Mute . . . . a. lista . . . de . . programação . . . . . . . . .por . . completo . . . . . . ...... . . . 26 . . . 30 Apagando . . . fingerprints . . . . . . 30will � General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Mudando o canal do transmissor ............................. 12 Usingcom the disco Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . . . 30 Operação DivX ............................................... . . . . . . . . . 30 � Language . . . . .function. . . . ................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . 16 Definindo a ID do CD transmissor the disc. CDs. Selecting theacústicas Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . 30 Ajuste das caixas ............................................ . . . . . . . . . 30 � Display . . . . . . . Audio . . . . .Acústicas . . . . . . ............. . . . . . .12. 16-17 Montando e Conectando as. Caixas XTS das (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . 30 MP3 disc. Ajuste caixas acústicas 5.1..................................... . . . . . . . . . 30 � Audio. . . . MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Conex. do sistema das caixas acústicas- LH-W752TA 13 XTS prodas . . caixas . . . . .acústicas . . . . . ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . 30 Ajuste WMA WMA disc. . . . . . . . . . 30 � Lock (Parental Control)............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . 18 Conexões das caixas acústicas Seleção das caixas acústicas ................................... 28 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Others . . .JPEG JPEG disc. . . . . acústicas . . . . . . ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . 19 Posicionamento das.caixas Reference Tamanho das caixas acústicas ................................ 28 DivX DivX disc. Antes da Operação ........................................................... 15 VolumeCode ..................................................................... Language List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . 31 Míni Glossário para Canal de Áudio & Modo Surround. 15 Operation Distância ................................................................... Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . 31 . . . . . . . . . Modo 31 de Som ................................................................ 15 DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 Teste......................................................................... Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2832-33 . . . . . . . . . Menu 31 de tela (OSD)....................................................... 16 Playing a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Informação adicional Specifications . . ......................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 . . . 34 . . . . . . . 32-33 Ajustes iniciais ............................................................... General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17. 20-22 Memória da condição anterior ....................................... 29 . . . . . . . . . 34Operações gerais ..................................................... 17 � Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20 Protetor de tela .............................................................. 29 IDIOMA ..................................................................... � Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK . 17 . . . . 20 Controlando a TV ......................................................... 29 DISPLAY ...................................................... � Slow (TELA) Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 . . . . 20 Operação com o Rádio .................................................... 30 Leitura (Progressive Scan) ................... 18 . 20 � StillProgressiva Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback 5 Prefixando as estações de rádio ................................... 30 ÁUDIO ...................................................................... � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 . . . . 20 Ouvindo o rádio ............................................................. 30 BLOQUEIO (Controle � Repeat . . . .de . .Censura) . . . . . ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . . . . 20 Outras funções ................................................................. 31 Classificação ............................................................ � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . . . . 21 Ajuste do Sleep Timer .................................................. 31 Senha (Código de Segurança)..................................19 � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 DIMMER ........................................................................ 31 Código Regional........................................................19 � Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Mute............................................................................... 31 OUTROS ....................................................................... 20 � Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Usando o conector do Fone ......................................... 31 PBC ............................................................................... Special DVD Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 . . . . 22 Selecionando a Fonte Entrada ...................................... 31 Operação de DVD ou Vídeo � Title Menu . . . . .CD . ........................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 . . . . 22 XTS (Verdadeiro Som Excelente) ................................. 31 Reproduzindo um DVD � Disc Menu . . .ou. .um . . VCD . . . .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 . . . . 22 XTS Pro ......................................................................... 31 Ajuste de Reprodução .............................................. � Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . 20 . . . . 22 Códigos de Idiomas ......................................................... 32 Recursos Gerais ............................................................ � Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . 21 . . . . 22 Códigos de Países............................................................ 32 Mudando de Título � Subtitles . . .(TITLE) . . . . . ...................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 . . . . 22 Resolvendo problemas .................................................... 33 Mudando para outro.Capítulo/Faixa DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . ......................... . . . . . . . . . 21 . . . . 22 Especificações.................................................................. 35 Câmera Lenta ........................................................... 21 Assistência Técnica ......................................................... 37 Imagem Congelada e Reprod Quadro-a-Quadro ..... 21 Certificado de Garantia .................................................... 42 Search (Busca ) ...................................................... 21 Introduction 2 Introduction Meio Ambiente .................................................................... 3 . . . . . . . Table . . 23 of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Precauções de Segurança ................................................. 4 sDisc clean. . . Before . . 23 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Antes do Uso ...................................................................... Playable Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. . . . 4 ch. .as. .insecticide spray, . . . . . 23 Discos reproduzíveis. bber products in Precautions . . . ....................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. . . . 5 . . . or . .plastic . . . . 23 Termos They relacionados will Notes on Discs aos . . . discos . . . . ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. . . . 5 .period . . . . of . . time. . . 23 Introduction Safety Precautions Introduction .........................2 Table Contents . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32 SafetyofPrecautions Before . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5 Table ofUse Contents .3 Playable .4 Before Use Discs . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4-5 Precautions . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54 Playable Discs Notes on Discs Precautions . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 About Notes Symbols on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 Front Panel and Rear About Symbols . . .Panel . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65 Remote Control . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76 Front Panel and Overview Rear Panel Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Preparation Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Preparation TV Connections ..8 Connections . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 8-13 Optional Equipment TV Connections . . Connections . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 98 Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10 Optional Equipment. .Connections .9 Speaker System Connection Aerial Connections . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12 . . 10 � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12 . . 11 Speaker System. Connection � a channel � Changing Transmitter. . . . . . . .of. Transmitter . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11 11 � a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11 � Setting Changing a channel of Transmitter 11 � Connecting. .to. .the � Assembling Setting a IDand of Transmitter . . Speakers . . . . . . . . 11 11 � Connections. . . . . . to . . the . . .Speakers . . . . . . . 12 � Speaker Assembling and Connecting 11 Speaker Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Before . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .14-19 SpeakerOperation Positioning. . . 13 Mini Operation Glossary for. .Audio Before . . . . Stream ......& . . Surround . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Mode . . . . . . . for . . .Audio . . . . Stream ......& . . Surround . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Mini Glossary Sound Mode . Mode . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14 14 On-Screen Sound Mode Display . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15 14 Initial SettingsDisplay . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-19 On-Screen . . 15 � General Operation . . 16 Initial Settings . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-19 � . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16 � Language General Operation 16 � . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-17 � Display Language . . 16 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 � (Parental � Lock Audio. . . . . . . Control) . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 18 17 � . . . . . . .Control) . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19 � Others Lock (Parental 18 � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Operation DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 Operation Playing a DVD Video CD. . . 19 DVD or Video CD and Operation . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19-22 General . . . . .CD. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22 Playing aFeatures DVD and. .Video . . 19 � Moving to another . . 20 General Features . . . .TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. 20-22 � � Moving Moving to to another another CHAPTER/TRACK TITLE/GROUP . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 20 � Motion. . . . . .CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 � Slow Moving to another 20 � and � Still SlowPicture Motion. . . Frame-by-Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Playback . . . . . . . .. 20 20 � . . . and . . . .Frame-by-Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playback . . . . . . . .. 20 � Search. Still Picture 20 � � Repeat Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20 20 � � Repeat Repeat A-B . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 20 � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 � Marker Time Search 21 � . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 � Zoom. Marker. Search 21 Special DVD � Zoom. . .Features . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 21 � TitleDVD MenuFeatures . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 Special 22 � � Disc Title Menu Menu .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 � � Changing Disc Menuthe . . Audio . . . . . Language . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 � . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 � Changing Changing the the Audio Audio Channel Language 22 � . . .Audio . . . . .Channel . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 � Subtitles Changing. the 22 DVD Audio Discs � Subtitles . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . Disc . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 � Pause . . . . .CD . . .and . . .MP3/WMA . . . . . . . . .Disc . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 Playing an .Audio 23 � � Moving Pause .to. .another . . . . . . Track . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 � . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 � Repeat Moving Track/All/Off. to another Track 23 � . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 � Search. Repeat Track/All/Off. 23 JPEG�Disc Operation Search. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 23 Viewing JPEG disc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 JPEG Disc aOperation 24 � SlideaShow . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 Viewing JPEG. disc 24 � � Still SlidePicture Show .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 24 � to another � Moving Still Picture . . . . . file . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 24 � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Repeat Programmed Programmed Playback Tracks. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 Erasing a Track from Programme Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 Erasing Complete Programme List List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 Erasing the a Track from Programme 25 DivX Disc Operation . . . Programme . . . . . . . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26 Erasing the Complete 25 Speaker Setup . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27 DivX Disc Operation 26 Additional Information Speaker Setup . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 27 Last Condition Memory Additional Information . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 Screen Saver . .Memory . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 Last Condition 28 Controlling the. TV Screen Saver . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Presetting theRadio radio stations Operation with . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 29 Listening theradio radiostations . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 Presettingtothe 29 Other Functions. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Listening to the. radio 29 Sleep Timer Setting Other Functions. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 Dimmer . . . .Setting . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Sleep Timer 30 Mute . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Dimmer 30 Using Mute .the . . Headphone . . . . . . . . . .Jack . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 Selecting Input Source Using thethe Headphone Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 XTS (Excellent TrueSource Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Selecting the Input 30 XTS . . . . . .True . . . .Sound) . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 XTS pro (Excellent 30 XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Reference Language Code List Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Country Code List . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31 Language Code List 31 Troubleshooting . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33 Country Code List . . 31 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 3 Introduction Introduction Introdução Apresentação Precauções de Segurança Introduction ....... Disc . . . ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . Remote . . 24 . . . . . . . . . 24 O símbolo do raio ao lado alerta o usuário da . . . . . . . Preparation . . 24 presença de voltagem perigosa não isolada no . . . . . . . Connections . .CAUTION: 24 . . do . . produto, . . . . . . .suficiente . . . . . . . para . . . .constituir . . . . . . 8-13 interior risco CAUTION: . . . . . . . . .This 24 receiver .employs CAUTION: TVDVD/CD Connections . . . . . a.a.laser . . . system. .system. .............8 de choque elétrico. This DVD/CD receiver employs laser . . . . . . . . .To 25 ensure proper use of this product, please read this owner’s This DVD/CD receiver employs a laser system. Equipment Connections . . read . . . .this . . owner’s ....9 ToOptional ensure proper use of this product, please . . . . . . . . .manual 25 carefully for Aerial Connections . .itit.product, . . future . . . please . reference. .reference. . . . read . . . Should .this . . owner’s . . the .the 10 To ensure properand useretain of .this manual carefully and retain for future Should require maintenance, contact an authorized service locat . . . . . . . .unit 25 manual carefully and retain it for future the Speaker System Connection . .authorized .reference. . . .alerta . . .service .Should . .usuário . 11-12 unit require maintenance, contact an locaO ponto de exclamação ao lado o (see service procedure). st . . . . . . .tion 25 unit require maintenance, contact an authorized service location � (see service procedure). Transmitter. . instruções . . . . . . . . importantes . . . . . . . . . . . manual, . . . . . 11 existem controls, adjustments, or carrying outno procedures tion (seeque service procedure). . . . . . . . . .Performing 26 � Performing controls, adjustments, or carrying out Changing a channel of Transmitter . .procedures . . . . . . 11 than those specified herein may result in hazardous sobre o funcionamento e a manutenção do radi. . . . . . . . .other 27 Performing controls, or carrying other�than those herein may hazardous Setting a specified ID adjustments, of Transmitter .result . . . .in.out . .procedures . . . . . .radi11 other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiequipamento. . . . . . . . . .ation 28 �exposure. ation exposure. Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11 To prevent direct exposure to laser beam, do not try to open ation exposure. . . . . . . . . .To 28prevent direct Connections. exposure to laser � Speaker . .beam, .when . . . .do . .not . . try . . to . .open . . 12 enclosure. Visible laser radiation open. NOT To direct exposure to laser beam, do not DO try to open . . . . . . . Speaker . .the 28prevent the enclosure. Visible laser Positioning. . . . .radiation . . . . . .when . . . .open. . . . . DO . . .NOT . . . 13 STARE INTO BEAM. Advertência: the enclosure. Visible laser radiation when open. DO NOT INTO BEAM. . . . . . . . Before . .STARE 28 Operation . . . . . . perigo . . . . . . . choque . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 STARE INTO Para prevenir incêndio TheBEAM. apparatusou should notde be exposedelétrico, to water . . . . . . . . .CAUTION: 29 CAUTION: The apparatus should not be to water Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & exposed Surround (dripping or The splashing) and should no objects filled with liquids, such não exponha esse produto à chuva ou à umidade. apparatus not be . . . . . . . . .CAUTION: 29 (dripping or splashing) and no objects filled Mode . should . . . . .be . . placed . . . . .on . .the . . apparatus. . . . . .exposed . with . . . liquids, . .to. water . . .such . 14 as vases, splashing) and no filled with liquids, such as vases,or should be placed on objects the apparatus. . . . . . . . . .(dripping 29 Sound .esse . placed . . .produto . . on . . the . .em .apparatus. . espaços . . . . . . .confinados, . . . . . . . 14 Aviso: Não Mode instalebe should . . . . . . . . .as 30vases, On-Screen Display . . .lugares . . . . . similares. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 como uma estante de livro ou This product may not be used outdoor, restricted to . . . . . . . . .CAUTION: 30 CAUTION: This product Initial Settings . . . . may . . . .not . . be . . used . . . .outdoor, . . . . . .restricted . . 16-19to only. CAUTION: This product may not be used outdoor, restricted to . . . . . . . . .indoor 30 � use indoor use only. General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 use only. . . . . . . . . .indoor 30 � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 AVISO: Esse Produto emprega sistema a laser. Operation . . . . . . . . . 31 DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 . . . . . . . Para . . 31garantir o uso correto desse produto, por favor leia Playing a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . . . . . . . 32-33 esseGeneral de instruções 2manual Features . . . cuidadosamente . . . . . . . . . . . . e. .guarde-o . . . . 20-22 . . . . . . . para . . 342 referência. Se a unidade necessitar � Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . .de . . reparo . . . . 20 2futura técnico, Autorizado. � contate Moving otoServiço another CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . 20 � Slow exposição Motion. . .direta . . . . ao . . .feixe . . . de . . .laser, . . . .não . . . abra . . 20 Para prevenir � Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame . 20 a tampa de proteção. Há radiação visível de Playback laser quando aberta.� Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 � Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 NÃO OLHE DIRETAMENTE PARA O FEIXE DE LUZ. � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 AVISO: aparelho não .deve �O Marker Search . . . ficar . . . .exposto . . . . . . à. água, . . . . .(gote. . . 21 jamento ou esguicho) � Zoom. . . . . .e. nenhum . . . . . . objeto . . . . . cheio . . . . .de. .líquidos, . . . . . 21 Special . . .sobre . . . . ele. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 como vasos,DVD deve Features ser colocado � Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 AVISO: Esse aparelho deve ser usado somente em � Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22 ambiente interno. � Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 2 4 About the symbols for About symbols for instructions instructions Sobre os the símbolos para instruções About the symbols for instructions Indicates hazards likely to cause harm to the Audio CD riscos andhazards MP3/WMA . . .causam . harm . . . . .danos . . the . . .àunit . 23 Indicates likelyDisc to cause to unit Indica que provavelmente itself or other material damage. Indicates likely to cause harm itself oran other material damage. Playing Audio CD and MP3/WMA Discto . the . . . unit . 23 unidade ouhazards a outros materiais. itself or other � Pause . . . material . . operating . . . . damage. . . . .features . . . . . . of . . this . . . unit. . . . . . 23 Indicates special Indica recurso de operação especial dessa unidade. Indicates operating � Movingspecial to another Trackfeatures . . . . . .of. this . . . .unit. . . . . 23 Indicates special operating features of this unit. � Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . the . . . task . . . .easier. . . . . 23 Indicates tips and hints for. .making Indicates tips and hints for making the task easier. Indica dicas e conselhos para tornar a tarefa mais � Search. . . and . . . hints . . . . for . . .making . . . . . .the . . task . . . .easier. . . . .fácil. 23 Indicates tips Manufactured under license .from JPEG Disc Operation . . . Dolby .Dolby . . . .Laboratories. . . . . . . . . .“Dolby”, . . . . 24 Manufactured under license from Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Manufactured license from Viewing aunder JPEG disc . symbol . . .Dolby . . are . .Laboratories. . trademarks . . . . . “Dolby”, . . .“Dolby”, . “Pro . 24 “Pro Logic”, sob and the double-D of. .Dolby Produzido licença daUnpublished Dolby Laboratories. Laboratories. Confidential works. Copyright 1992“Pro Logic”, and the double-D are Laboratories. Confidential 1992� eSlide Show . . All .Unpublished . rights . symbol . .são . reserved. . .marcas . works. . . trademarks . . . Copyright . . . . .of. .Dolby .da . 24 1997 Dolby Logic”, o Laboratories. símbolo double-D Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished works.registradas Copyright 19921997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. � Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 1997 Dolby Laboratories. Allfrom rightsDigital reserved. Dolby Laboratories. Trabalhos Confidenciais Impublicáveis. Manufactured under license Theater Systems, Inc. Manufactured under from Moving to license another fileDigital . . . . Theater . . . 5,978,762 . . .Systems, . . . . and . . Inc. . 24 US Pat.� No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, Direitos Autorais 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. Todos os US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, and Manufactured under license from other worldwide patents issued � No. To rotate picture. . .and . .Digital .pending. . . . Theater . . . “DTS” .5,978,762 . .Systems, . and .and . . “DTS .“DTS . Inc. . 24 other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” US Pat. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater direitos reservados. Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digitalworldwide Surround” are registered trademarks of“DTS” Digital Theater other patents issued2000 and pending. and “DTS25 Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, Digital Theater Systems, Systems, Inc.Programmed Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Repeat Tracks. . . . .Theater . . Digital . . . .Systems, .Theater . . . . 25 Inc. All rights reserved. Inc. All rights Systems, Inc.reserved. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Produzido licençafrom da Digital TheaterList Systems, Erasing a Track Programme . . . . .Inc. . . . 25 Inc. All rightssob reserved. the Complete Programme List 5,978,762 . . . . . . . 25 US Erasing Pat. No.ON 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, e OTES COPYRIGHTS: OTES ON COPYRIGHTS: Disc Operation . ., .broadcast, . . . .and . . .show . . . ,. broadcast . . . . . Surround” . . . . 26 ItDivX is forbidden by COPYRIGHTS: law to copy patentes mundiais. “DTS OTES ON Itoutras is forbidden by law to copy,“DTS” broadcast, show, Digital broadcast Speaker Setup . . to . .copy . .rent ., .broadcast, .copyrighted . . . . . . show . .material . ,. broadcast . . . .without . . . . . 27 via play in public, or Itsão iscable, forbidden by marcas Digital Theater Systems, Inc. via cable, playregistradas in law public, orda rent copyrighted material without permission. Additional . . copyrighted . . . . . . . . material . . . . . .without . . . . . 28 via cable, playInformation in public, or rent permission. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Todos This product features the copy protection Last Condition . . . . . . function .function . . . . .developed . . . . . . . 28 permission. This product features Memory the copy protection developed by Copy protection osMacrovision. direitos This productreservados. features Screen Saver . .the . . copy . . . .protection .signals . . . . .are .function . recorded . . . . developed . . on .on. some .some . . 28 by Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs by Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on discs. When recording and. playing the pictures of these Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . discs .some . . 28 on a VCR, picture noise will appear. discs. Whenpicture recording and on a VCR, noise willplaying Operation with Radio .appear. . . . . the . . .pictures . . . . technology . of . . these . . . . discs . that . . 29 Notas sobre direitos autorais. This product incorporates copyright on VCR, picture noise will appear.protection Thisa product incorporates copyright protection technology that Presetting thecopiar, radio stations . .exibir, .U.S. . . .patents .technology . . . . and . . . other . . 29 is by method claims of certain É protected proibido lei transmitir, transmitir This productpor incorporates copyright protection that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents andvia other intellectual property rights owned by Listening radio . of . .certain . . Macrovision . . .U.S. . . . patents . por . Corporation .Corporation . direito . and . . . other . . 29 is protected by to method claims cabo, publicar outhe alugar material protegido intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection techOther Functions. . . .Use .owned . .of. this . by . . copyright . . . . . . .protection . .Corporation . . . . tech. . . 30 intellectual property rights Macrovision and other rights owners. autoral sem permissão. Esse produto possui um sistema nology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and and other rights owners. Use techSleep Timer Setting . .ofMacrovision . this . . . copyright . . . . Corporation, . . .protection . . . . . .and . . .isis30 nology must be authorized by intended for home andcópia, otherbydesenvolvido limited viewingCorporation, usesMacrovision. only unless de proteção contra pela nology must be authorized Macrovision and intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .is30 otherwise authorized byother Macrovision Corporation. Reverse intended home and limitedsão Sinais defor proteção em alguns otherwise authorized by Reverse Mute . or . .disassembly . . . . contra . . Macrovision . . is .cópia .prohibited. . . . . viewing .Corporation. . gravados . . . uses . . . .only . . . unless . . . . 30 engineering otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. discos originais. Quando copiadas Using the Headphone . e. .reproduzidas, . . . . . . . . . .as . . . 30 engineering or disassembly is Jack prohibited. Selecting the Input Source . . . . .interferência. . . . . on . . the . . .back .Esse . . 30 imagens desse disco aparecerão com SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number located XTS (Excellent True Sound) . .is. unit . . .and . . .on . .the . . back . . . 30 of this unit. This number is unique this not available produto incorpora tecnologia deto proteção contra cópias, of this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located on the back to others. You record XTS pro .should . number . . .por .record . .is . unique .requested . . . .to . .this .information . unit . . .americanas . . . not .here . .available . and . . . 30 to others. You should requested information here and of this This and que é unit. reivindicada algumas patentes retain this guide as a permanent record of your purchase. retain this You guide as a permanent record information of your purchase. to others. should record requested here and e por this direito de as propriedade intelectual pertencentes retain guide a permanent record of your purchase.à Reference Model No. ___________________________________ Macrovision Corporation e a outros detentores do direito. O Model No. ___________________________________ Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Serial No. Model No.___________________________________ ___________________________________ uso dessa tecnologia de proteção deve ser autorizado pela Serial No. ___________________________________ Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Serial No. ___________________________________ Macrovision Corporation, ou Troubleshooting . . . . . e. é . .destinado . . . . . . . a. .fim . . residencial . . . . . 32-33 de exibição limitada, Specifications . . . salvo, . . . . .em . . .caso . . . .contrário, . . . . . . .com . . . prévia . . . 34 autorização da Macrovision Corporation. Manobras de reversão e desmontagem desse sistema são proibidas. Número de série: Você pode encontrar o número de série na parte traseira dessa unidade. Esse número é único e não está disponível para outros equipamentos. Você deverá registrar essa informação aqui, e guardar esse manual como registro permanente de sua compra. Número do modelo: _____________________________ Número de série: _______________________________ Introduction about the presence uninsulated dangerous equilateral triangle isof to alert the user about the presence ofintended uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product’s enclosure that may be about the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk electric voltage within the product’s enclosure thatof may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. shock to persons. The exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle The exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle is intended to alertmark the user about the presence of The exclamation an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the within user about the presence of important operating anduser maintenance is intended to alert the about the (servicing) presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) Introduction instructions in the instructions accompanying the important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the instructions accompanying the PRECAUÇÃO product. Safety Precautions . . instructions . . . . . . . .accompanying . . . . . . . . . .the ..2 instructions product. .in. .the RISCO DE CHOQUE ELÉTRIproduct. Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..3 . . WARNING: 23 TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK WARNING: Before UseDO .TO . . PREVENT . . .EXPOSE . CO. . . .NÃO .FIRE . THIS . ABRA. . .OR . PRODUCT . ELECTRIC . . . . . . .TO . SHOCK . RAIN . . . . OR 4-5 . . HAZARD, 23 WARNING: TONOT PREVENT HAZARD, NOT PlayableDO Discs . .EXPOSE . . . . FIRE . . THIS . . OR . .PRODUCT .ELECTRIC . . . . . . .TO .SHOCK .RAIN . . . .OR .4 . . MOISTURE. 23 HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THISo PRODUCT TO RAIN OR Advertência: Para reduzir risco de choque MOISTURE. Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . 23 MOISTURE. elétrico, não remova a tampa. Não existem not install a confined Notes onDo Discs . . . .this . . equipment .equipment . . . . . . .in . . . . . .space ...5 . .WARNING: 23 WARNING: Do not install this in. .a .confined space as apeças book case similar unit. para ajuste About .or .this . . .equipment . . . . .pelo . .in. usuário. .a .confined . . . . . .space ...5 WARNING: Do internas not . .such 23 such as aSymbols book caseinstall or. .similar unit. as a book case or Front and Rear Panelunit. .técnico . . . . . autorizado. ............6 Encaminhe-o aosimilar serviço . .such 24 Panel (8 cm / 12 cm disc) ote on DTS-encoded CDs InWhen addition, this DTS-encoded unit can play aCDs, DVD-RW, DVD+RW playing excessive audio SVCD and CD-R or CD-RW that contains audioTotitle DVD Playable Discs may be heard from the analog stereo output. a Before Use ote DTS-encoded Before AntesUse do(8Uso MP3, WMA, JPEG oron DivX files.system, CDs cm / 12 cm disc) possible damage to the audio turn down t When playing DTS-encoded CDs, exc volume before playing back such discs, adjust the Playable Discs DVD Playable Discs DVD audio discs Introduction Discos reproduzíveis. may CDs be heard from the analog stereo ote on DTS-encoded CDs ote on DTS-encoded otes otas CDs decodificados volume gradually, and keep level low. Audio CDsobre and MP3/WMA Disc . . DTS . . the . . audio . .volume . . .level . . . . 23 Safety Precautions . . ./. 12 . . . cm . (8 . . .cm . . . ./ .12 . . .cm . . . .disc) . . 2 When Introduction (8 cm disc) When playing DTS-encoded CDs, excessive audio level playing DTS-encoded CDs, excessive possible damage to the audio system, TM DVD Ao reproduzir CDs codificados DTS, um nível de DVD � DVD Depending on the conditions of the eq Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc .. .. 23 Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 an enjoy Digital Surround CDDTS and MP3/WMA Disc .output. . . . . playback, . To . .excessivo .avoid . .. .. ..recording 23 externa Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 may mayAudio be heard heard from the the analog analog stereo output. To be from stereo avoid volume before playing back such discs (8 cm / 12 cm disc) TM (8 cm / 12 cm disc) de � Pause .Audio .the . .CD-R/RW .audio .CD .and . .Surround .MP3/WMA . . (or . turn .turn . .DVD-RW, .down .estéreo. .Disc . decoder . the . .. .. Para .. ..DVD+RW) .. 23 Before . . . Video . . . .. ..(discos . .. .. .. .(VCD) . ..DVD . .. .. .. .4-5 aúdio pode ser ouvido da. .saída analógica Playing an 23system Table ofUse Contents .. .CD ..8.. cm .. .. ../ audio ..12 .. ..cm) .. .. .. .discs . 3 possible possible damage to the audio system, down the damage to system, m channel DTS Digital ment or the d � to.volume .. ..áudio, .adjust ..diminua .the .. .. ..o.. nível .. 23 Playable . .. .DVD . .. .. .. .de . .. ..áudio . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4-5 . 4 volume the volum evitar possíveis sistema � Moving Pause .danos .another .back . ao . . such .such . Track .gradually, . discs, .discs, . .de . .. .. ..and . .. .. keep 23 Before Use Discs . . .(8 . .. .cm .(8 volume before playing before playing back adjust the cm / 12 cm disc) DVD audio discs / 12 cm disc) DVD audio discs be connected to the digital output of the unit. itself, some CD-R/RW (or DVD-RW, DVD+RW) d � Track/All/Off. . . Digital . .. ..level .level .. ..Surround .tais .discos, .. .. .. .. ..TM 23 Precautions . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54 volume � Repeat Moving to another . .. de . .. .. To .To 23playback Playable Discs volume gradually, and keep the volume low. gradually, keep volume low. do volume antesand de iniciarthe a Track reprodução enjoy DTS (8 cm cm //de 128cm cm disc) (8 12 (discos cmdisc) / 12 cm) cannot be � . played . . . . . . .playback, .on . .. ..the .. ..an .unit. .. .. .. .. .. ..5.1 .. .. .. .. 23 Notes on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 enjoy enjoy DTS Digital Surround playback, an �o Search. Repeat Track/All/Off. . .. .external .external Precautions . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Video DTS Digital ajuste volumeSurround gradativamente, e.. mantenha-o no5.1 nível 23TM decod CD (VCD) Audio CD channel DTS Digital Surround JPEG Operation .decoder .. .. .. ..or .. ..system .label .. .. either .. .. .. .. 24 About .. .. Vídeo .Video .. .. .. ..CD .CD .(VCD) system must channel DTS Digital Surround CD (VCD) DTS Digital �Disc Search. .Surround . . . terms .any . .. .. ..seal .decoder . .. .. .. .. ..must 23side (the Notes Symbols on Discs .Video . .. ..(VCD) . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 channel � Do not attach to Before Use Disc-related baixo. Para usufruir dadisc reprodução cm 12 cm disc) be connected of th Viewing JPEG .. ..the .DTS .unit. ..Digital .the ..Surround, .. .. .. .. .. ..output 24 Front Panel and(8Rear Panel .12 ..8.cm .cm .. disc) .disc) ./. ..12 .. .. ..cm .. .. .. .disc) be connected connected toaOperation the digital output of the (8 12 cm) to the digital output JPEG Disc . .. .. .. ..of . ..to .unit. . .. .. .. digital 24 About Symbols . . (discos .(8 ./cm .cm . . //.de . (8 .cm .cm ./..12 . .. .. 65 be labeled side or the recorded side) of a disc. um decodificador externo Surround com 5.124 � Slide . disc . . .DTS .. .. .. .Digital Title (DVD only) Remote Control . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76 Viewing aShow JPEG . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 Front Panel and Overview RearÁudio Panel CD Audio CD Audio CD ddition, this unitControl can play a DVD-RW, canais ser conectado � Do notterms use irregularly heart-sh CD � Still Picture .content .. .. or .. shaped .. .da .. ..unidade. .. .. .. ..CDs .. .. .. .. ..(e.g., .. .. .. 24 �deve Slide Show . .. .. .. ..à.. saída .accompanying 24 Disc-related terms Remote Overview . Audio .8cm .cm . . disc) ./DVD+RW, .12 . . cm) . . . . . . . . . 7 Disc-related Playable Discs The main film feature co (8 12 (8 cm cm. //.de 12 disc) (discos cm � Moving toDisc-related another .. .. .. ..terms .. ..in .. .. .malfunctions. .. 24 DTS-encoded �octagonal). Still Picture . .ote . .may . file .on . . ..result . .. .. .. .. .. .. CDs 24 D and CD-R or CD-RW that contains titles, (8 cmaudio / 12 cm disc) Title Preparation oradditional It Titleor (DVD only) (DVD only) feature content, or music album. � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 In addition, can play aa DVD-RW, DVD+RW, InConnections addition, this this .unit unit can play DVD-RW, DVD+RW, Moving toTitle another file . only) . . .DTS-encoded . . . . . .content . . . . . . . 24 When playing CDs, exc The main main�film film content or accompanying accompanying feature content (DVD . . . .files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 The , WMA,SVCD JPEG or DivX content or feature Preparation Each title is content, assigned ena Programmed Playback .or .music .. .album. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..number .. 25 and or CD-RW that audio titles, SVCD and CD-R CD-R orunidade CD-RW that contains contains audio DVD+RW, titles, DVD+RW, � To rotate picture. . .. music . ..a.. ..title . .. ..reference 24 In addition, this unit Além desses, essa reproduz DVD or additional additional feature content, feature or album. TV Connections . .. .. ..can . .. .. .. play . .. .. .DVD-RW, . ..a.. ..DVD-RW, . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 8-13 . . 8 or Connections . . . . . . . . . Termos relacionados aos discos may be heard from the analog stereo The main film content or accompanyin MP3, WMA, JPEG or DivX DivXque files. Repeat Programmed Tracks. .. number .. .. .. .. .. .. enabling .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 MP3, WMA, JPEG or files. Programmed Playback . . . . . . 25 you to locate it easily. Each title is assigned a title reference SVCD e CD-R ou CD-RW contenha títulos de áudio, Each title is assigned a title reference number enabling SVCD andEquipment CD-R . or titles, Optional .contains .. .. .. .disc) 98 TV Connections . Connections . .CD-RW . . . . (8 . . .cm .that . .. ./. ..12 . .. ..cm . .. .. audio otes on DVDs and Video CDs possible damage system, Erasing aeasily. Track from Programme .. .. .. ..audio .. .. .. 25 or additional content, music (somente DVD) Repeat Programmed Tracks. .feature . . .List . to . . ..the 25or youTítulos to locate locate to itit easily. otes MP3, Connections . .Connections . . .DivX . .ou . . DivX. .files. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10 e/ouAerial arquivos MP3, WMA, JPEG Optional Equipment . 9 you WMA, JPEG or Erasing the Complete Programme List .. ..a.back .title 25 Erasing a Track from Programme List .disco . .. .. ..de 25 otes Some operations ofplaying DVDs and Video CDs volume before such discs otes Each title is assigned reference Um títuloplayback é geralmente uma seção distinta de.um Speaker System Connection . .. .11-12 Aerial Connections . . .of . . the . . DVD .. ..recording .. .. ..audio .. .. .. .. .. .. discs .equip. . 10 epending on the conditions Chapter (DVD only) DivX Disc Operation . . . Programme . . . . . . . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26 Erasing the Complete 25 � Depending Depending on the the conditions conditions of the recording equip(DVD only) � on Chapter (DVD only) � DVD. Cada título está relacionado ao número específico, may be intentionally fixed by software manufacturer � Transmitter. . . . . . . .of . .the . .. ..recording . .. .. .. .. .. ..equip. .. .. 11-12 . . 11 Chapter volume gradually, and keep the volum you to locate it easily. Speaker System. Connection . . . (8 cm / 12 cm disc) Sections Speaker .or. picture .a.musical .. .. .. .. .. or . piece . ..a.. ..musical .that .. .. .smaller ..piece .. .. .. .. .. 27 Sections ofa. aor that are s ent or thement CD-R/RW (or DVD-RW, DVD+RW) disc DivX Disc Operation . .. .. .are .are .smaller 26 of picture a that Sections of a aSetup picture musical or (or DVD+RW) disc ment or the the CD-R/RW CD-R/RW (or DVD-RW, DVD-RW, DVD+RW) disc TM � a channel para lhe facilitar localização e..piece o.Digital � Changing Transmitter. . . . . . . .of. Transmitter . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11 11 otes As this unit otas: playbackt Additional Information ..of .of .acesso .or .several .. ..rápido. ..Surround .. ..chap.chap..CDs .. .. .. .. .according Speaker Setup .enjoy .title . . . DVDs . is .DTS . ..one . ..and . or . .. several . Video .one . 28 27 than titles. AAtitles. title is composed than titles. title isplays composed one itself, some (or DVD+RW) discs itself, some CD-R/RW CD-R/RW (or DVD-RW, DVD-RW, DVD+RW) discs than A composed of or several ch self, some CD-R/RW (or DVD-RW, DVD+RW) discs � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 � Changing acondições channel of . .the . . grava. recording . . . 11 TM • cannot Dependendo dason doTransmitter equipamento de Last Condition Memory .. .. .. the .. .Digital ..software .. .. .. .. Surround .. .. .. .. ..manufacture .. .. 28 Video CD (VCD) � Depending the conditions ofSpeakers equipdisc content by channel ters. Each chapter is assigned ters. Each chapter isdesigned assigned chapter number, be on the unit. Chapter (DVD only) Additional Information . a.a.DTS .chapter . ..number, 28 decod cannot be played played on theConnecting unit. � Assembling and to the 11 � Setting a ID unit. of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 enabling ters. Each chapter is assigned a chapter number, annot be played on the Capítulo (somente DVD) Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 you to locate the chapter you want. Depending � enabling you to locate the chapter you want. Depending ção ou do CD-R/RW (DVD -R, DVD +R, DVD –RW, DVD � Do Do not attach any seal or or label label to side (the Last Condition Memory . of . . of .a. picture .the . . the . unit . . . digital .or .may .a . . musical . not .output 28 be avai not attach any seal � cm cm some playback features be connected to of th Sections piec ment or the CD-R/RW (or DVD+RW) disc � Speaker Connections. . (8 .to . either .either . to .DVD-RW, . the ./side .12 .Speakers . .(the . . . .disc) . 12 � Assembling and Connecting 11 on Controlling thesegmento TV .not ..de .. .recorded. ..the .. ..título, .. .chapter .. .. .. .. .uma .. ..want. 28 enabling Depe o not attach any seal orrecorded label tonão either side (the Um capítulo é you um um disc, chapters may not on the the disc, chapters be Screen Saver .may .to . . locate . .. ..be .recorded. . .. ..como . .you . .. ..cena 28 labeled side ordiscos the recorded side) of .reproduzido disc. labeled side or the aa.disc. +RW), alguns nesta Speaker Positioning. . podem . . . . . .side) .. ..(or ..ser .of or other functions may be added. � Speaker Connections. . .. DVD-RW, . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .DVD+RW) . .. 13 12 than titles. A title is composed of one o itself, some CD-R/RW discs Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 � Do Do notOperation use irregularly irregularly shaped CDs heart-shaped theentrevista TV . . . .numa . .may . . série. . . not . . .Cada . be . . .capítulo . . . . . .está 28 num filme uma � not use CDs heart-shaped � onControlling theou disc, chapters recorded. beled side or the recorded a.. ..disc. unidade. Before . . ..shaped . .. .(e.g., .(e.g., Speaker Positioning. .. ..side) ..on .. .. ..the ..Audio .of .. CD .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .14-19 . . 13 Group Make sure todiscs also refer to supplied Presetting the radioonly) stations .. .. the .. que ..terms .. ..instructions .você ..is .. ..assigned .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 Group (DVD audio discs only) ters. Each chapter a chap be played unit. (DVD audio Operation with Radio . . . . . . . 29 orcannot octagonal). It may result in malfunctions. Disc-related or octagonal). It may result in malfunctions. relacionado a um número, permitindo localize Minicoloque Glossary for & Operation . .Audio . . . CDs . Stream . . .nos .(8 . .lados . . Surround . ./heart-shaped . 12 . um . . cm .disco . . 14-19 o not use irregularly shaped (e.g., cm disc) •Before Não selo ou etiqueta de (o The The main main audio content content or accompanying accompanying feature Listening to the radio . . CDs. . you . . .. .. to .. .. ..feature .. .. .. ..DVDs . .con.. .. .. ..chapter .made audio or Presetting the radio stations .con. 29 29 DVDs and Video foryou bu enabling locate the � Do not any (the o or capítulo desejado. Dependendo doSome disco, os .capítulos Mode . . .attach . . . . for . . .Audio . . . .seal . . . . .or .& . label . Surround . . . . .to . . either . . . . 14sidethe Mini Glossary Stream Group (DVD Title tentOther additional feature Each Functions. .audio . content, .content, . (DVD . .. .. discs .. .or .. only) .music .. .. ..only) .. .album. .. .. .. .. ..Each .. .. .. .. .. 30 tent or additional feature impresso ou o de gravação). octagonal). It may result in malfunctions. Listening to the radio .or .music .album. 29 on the Sound Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 ness purposes may not be able to be played on the disc, chapters may not be reco podem não estar gravados. Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 In otes addition, this unit can play a DVD-RW, DVD+RW, labeled side or the recorded side) of a disc. otes on on DVDs DVDs and and Video Video CDs CDs group is assigned aSetting group number enabling group is assigned group reference Sleep Timeraaudio .. .. .. .. ..film .. ..number .. ..content ..accompanying .. .. ..enabling .. .. .. ..or .. .. ..accompanyin .. .. 30 The main or Other Functions. . . . content .reference 30 feature The main On-Screen Display .of ..irregulares .DVDs .. ..and .. .. ..(por .Video .. ..CDs .. .. .. .. .. .. 15 • Não use CDs com exemplos, Sound Mode .irregularly . formas . . or . . of .CD-RW . .. ..shaped . .. ..CDs 14 Some playback operations and CDs youunit. totitles, locate itTimer it easily. easily. Some playback operations DVDs Video you to locate Dimmer . . . .Setting . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 SVCD and CD-R that contains audio � Do not use (e.g., heart-shaped Sleep 30oralbum. tent or additional feature content, or music or additional feature content, music Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19 em forma de coração ou octogonal) porque eles podem On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 may be be intentionally intentionally fixed fixed by by software software manufacturers. manufacturers. may Grupo (somente DVD Mute . . .. .. .. ..Group .. .. .. ..de .. .. áudio) .. (DVD .. .. .. .. .. .. .audio .. .. .. .. .. .. only) .. 30 Dimmer . .. .. .. .. .. ..discs 30 MP3, WMA, JPEG or or octagonal). may �unit General Operation .Video . ..files. . . 16 Scene Initial Settings . . . It .and .CDs . .Video ..DivX .. ..result .. CDs .CDs .. ..according ..in .. .. malfunctions. .. .. .. .. ..to .. 16-19 otes onAs and Video group is.do assigned a.Jack group enab Each title is. ..recursos assigned reference AsDVDs this plays DVDs according to causar mal funcionamento. Scene (VCD).the this unit plays DVDs and (VCD) Using Headphone .. .. ..reference .. .. .. adicionais, .. .. .. ..a.. .title ..number .. .. 30 O conteúdo áudio principal, de Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 code of the DVD/CD receiver and DVD The main audio content or .accompany � . .by . . the . . ..software .. .. .. .. .. .. ..manufacturer, .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16 � Language General Operation 16 On disc content content designed the software manufacturer, OnRegional Video CD with PBC (Playback disc designed aayou Video with PBC (Playback Selecting the Input Source . .control) .. it ..é..easily. .relacionado .. .. .. .. .. .. a.. .um e playback operations of.by DVDs and Video CDs toCD locate it easily. you to locate Using the Headphone Jack .control) . .. .functions, .functions, . . 30 30 ou de álbum de música, Cada grupo � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 � Language . . . of . . the . . .unit . . .may . . . .not . . be .be . .available . . . . . . 16 moving This DVD/CD Receiver is. .. divided designed and..manufacture some playback playback features of the unit may not available moving pictures and tent still pictures are into orSound) additional or m some features pictures and pictures are XTS (Excellent True .divided .. .. .. feature ..into .. .rápido. .sec.. 30 Selecting the still Input . ..acesso . ..sec. .. .. ..content, 30 otes be intentionally fixed software otas sobre e.. .Vídeo número de referência, lheSource permitindo � Audio. . DVDs .may .be .added. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-17 . . 17 tions �functions Display .DVDs ..by .. .. .be .. .. .. .. CDs. ..Video .. ..manufacturers. .. .. .. .. .CDs or other other functions may added. tions called “Scenes”. scene displayed in or called “Scenes”. playback of “4” encoded XTS pro . . .region . group . Each .Each . . . .scene . . .assigned . is .is..displayed .. .. .. .. .. ..DVD .. .in .. the .the ..software. .. .. .. reference .. 30 otes on and is a group n XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . 30 Algumas operações de reprodução de DVDs podem ser � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 � Depending the of equiphis unit Make plays to (VCD) Chapter (DVD only) Make sure to also also refer to the with menuScene screen and and assigned scene number, enabling �DVDs Audio. .and .refer .on . . Video .to . .the . .conditions .instructions .CDs . . . . .according . . supplied .supplied . . .the . . .with .recording . . 17 menu sure to instructions screen assigned aa scene number, enabling XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 The region code on the labels of some DVDs Some playback operations of DVDs and Video CDs you to locate it easily. � . .programadas . .CDs. . . software .Control) . Some . . . .pelo .DVDs .. ..fabricante .. .. ..made .. .. .. .. for .de .. .. .. .. 19 intencionalmente the DVDs and Video CDs. Some DVDs made for busiyouCena to locate the scene scene you want. � Others Lock (Parental . .. ..software. 18 you DVDs and busito locate the want. (VCD) contentthe designed by the manufacturer, On a Video CDyou with PBC (Playback Sections of a picture or acontrol) musicalfuncti piec ment orVideo the CD-R/RW (or DVD-RW, DVD+RW) disc Reference indicates which type player candeplay those ness purposes may not be able to be played the may beOthers intentionally by scene is VCD composed offunções one or orof several tracks. ness may be is composed of one several tracks. � . . .not . . .DVDs . . able .fixed . de . .to .acordo .be . . played . software .com . . . on .oon .conteúdo .the . . manufacturers. . . . 19 AA scene Essapurposes unidade reproduz Em um com than as PBC (controle reprodução), e playback features of the unit may not be available moving pictures and still pictures are divided into Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 titles. A title is composed of one os itself, some CD-R/RW (or DVD-RW, DVD+RW) discs Reference unit. unit. Operation discs. unit can play “4” or “A As this pelo unitfabricante plays DVDs andportanto Videoalguns CDs according toasThis projetado de software, Scene mover imagens e congelá-las estão em Country Code List . . ..Each .. only .. (VCD) .. .. .. Each ..chapter .. .. .. .. .DVDs .. .. ..is .. ..assigned ..labeled .is .. .. 31 Language Code List .divididas . .. ..displayed 31 a chap her functions may be added. tions called “Scenes”. scene in ters. cannot be played on the unit. Types of Video CDs Types of Video CDs DVD or Video CD Operation . . .the . . . software . disponíveis . . . . . . . . manufacturer, 19-22 Operation recursos de reprodução podemby não estar ou If you chamadas try to play “Chec disc content designed Troubleshooting . . .“.any . .. Video . ..discs, . .. ..é..the On (Playback co seções de Cenas”. visualizada Country Code List .a ..assigned .. other .. .. ..Cada .. .CD ..cena .. .with ..PBC .. .. ..message ..number, .32-33 . . 31 Regional code of the DVD/CD receiver and DVDs code of the DVD/CD receiver and DVDs e sure Regional to also refer to instructions menu and a scene enab enabling you to locate you � Do not any seal (the Playing aattach DVD and Video CD. .with . 19side There are two twoscreen types. of of Video CDs: There are types Video CDs: DVD or Video CDthe Operation . . .or .. .. label .. ..supplied .. .. .. ..to .. .. either .. .. 19-22 outras funções podem ser adicionadas. Specifications .e..relacionadas . ..um . the . .the . ..cena, . chapter . 34 Some em menus de tela Troubleshooting ..will .. .. .. ..appear ..pictures .. .. .. .a .. on .. ..número .and .. .. .. ..still .de ..pictures 32-33 Regional Code” TV screen. This DVD/CD Receiver is designed and manufactured for some playback features of the unit may not be available moving are d This DVD/CD Receiver is designed and manufactured for General . the .Video . . . recorded . .CD. . . . .. made . .. .. .for . .. ..of DVDs and Video CDs. Some Playing aFeatures DVD and .. .. .. .side) ..busi.20-22 .acom . 19 you locate the scene you want. the chapters be reco labeled side disc. Certifique-se, também, demay verDVDs as instruções fornecidas Video CDsto equipped PBC (Version 2.0) Specifications .on . with .with .no . . PBC .region .disc, .a. (Version . . .“Scenes”. .code . . . 2.0) . . label . . . may .Each . may . . .not . 34 Video CDs equipped playback of region region “4”or encoded DVD software. playback of encoded DVD software. permitindo quehave você localize cena que desejar. Uma cena DVDs that still beissud or other functions be added. tions called scene � Moving to“4” another TITLE/GROUP . .. .. .. .. .. 20-22 . . 20 General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . purposes may not be able toofofDVDs be played onpropósitos the PBC (Playback control) functions allow you to to interact interact scenede isvárias composed of one or several tracks. PBC (Playback control) functions allow you The region code on the labels some DVDs The region on the labels some DVDs os DVDs ecode Video CDs. Alguns feitos para � Do not use irregularly shaped CDs heart-shaped 4 20supplied 4(e.g., éA composta faixas. Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK area and therefore playable. Moving toalso another TITLE/GROUP . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 Make�� sure to refer toplay the instructions withrestrictions menu screen and assigned a scene nu withtothe the system via menus, menus, search functions, ornot other with system via search functions, other indicates which type of player player can play those indicates which type of can comerciais podem não lidos Group (DVD audioor discs only) � Slow Motion. .ser . .may . .CHAPTER/TRACK . . nesta .result . . . unidade. .those . .in . . malfunctions. . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 or octagonal). It � Moving to another 20 typical computer-likeyou operations. Moreover, still pictures pictures typical computer-like operations. Moreover, still discs. This unit unitand can only only play DVDs DVDs labeled labeled “4”DVDs or “ALL”. “ALL”. the DVDs Video CDs. Some made for busito locate the scene you want. discs. This can play “4” or � Picture and The main or accompany Types ofVCDs Video CDs � Still Slow . . Frame-by-Frame .discs, . . . . the . . .message . . . . . .Playback .“Check . . . . . . .. 20 20 of of high high resolution can be played played they are arecontent included in in resolution can be ififaudio they included you try try to play playMotion. any other other the message “Check IfIfness you to any discs, Tipos de purposes may not be able to be played on the A scene is composed of one or severa � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Código Regional do DVD Home Theater System e DVDs. � Code” Still and Frame-by-Frame ional code of thePicture DVD/CD receiver andPlayback DVDs . 20 the the disc. disc. tenttypes or additional Regional Code” will appear appear on the TV TV screen. screen. Some Regional will on the Some Theredois are two of Video feature CDs: content, or m � .Theater .. .. .. .. .System .. .. .. ..label .. foi .. .. .projetado .. .. .. still .. .. ..be .e .. .. .. .. .. 20 unit. Existem tipos de VCD. � Repeat Search. . .region .region .code .may . ..produzido 20 Esse DVD Home DVDs that have no subject DVDs that have no code label may still be subject DVD/CD Receiver designed for Video CDs otes onisA-B DVDs group is PBC assigned a1.1) group reference n CDs not not equipped equipped with PBC (Version 1.1) with (Version � Repeat .. .therefore .. ..and .. .. .. ..and .Video ..manufactured ..região .. .. CDs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 � RepeatDVD .and . .na . codificação . .. ..de 20 Video to area restrictions and not playable. para reproduzir area restrictions therefore not playable. Types of(versão Video Vídeo CD equipado com 2.0)CDs Operated in the the same way asPBC audio CDs, these discs Video CDs equipped with PBC (Version 2.0) Operated in same way as audio CDs, these discs back oftoSome region “4” encoded playback operations CDs you to locate it easily. � Search .. .. ..DVD .. .. .. .. ..software. .. .. ..of .. ..DVDs .. .. .. .. .. .. .and .. .. .. ..Video 21 � Time Repeat A-B . . 21 “4”. O código regional nasthe etiquetas de alguns Regional code of receiver andallow DVDs A função PBC possibilita uma interação com obut sistema playback of lhe video pictures as well well as sound, sound, playback of video pictures as as but � Marker Search .. ..some .. .. .DVD/CD .. .. .software (Playback control) functions allow you to inte There are two types of Video CDs: � Time Search . ..of . .. .. .by .DVDs . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .manufacturers. . .. .. 21 21 allowPBC region code on the labels may be intentionally fixed DVDs �indica que. tipo they are not not equipped with PBC. PBC. they are equipped with através defor menus, como funções de busca, ou outras opeThis DVD/CD Zoom. . .Receiver . de . . .reprodutor .. .. .. .. ..is .. ..designed .pode .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. and .. .. .. .. ..manufactured .. 21 � Marker Search . . 21 with the system via menus, search functions, or ot ates which type of player can play those As this unit plays DVDs and Video CDs according to Scene (VCD) reproduzir esses discos. Este produto somente Special DVD .. .. .. .. 22 rações similares asVideo de computadores. Além disso,with imagens CDs equipped PBC (Vers � Zoom. . .Features . . . . . “4” . . .. .encoded . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .DVD . .. .. .. .. ..software. 21 playback of region typical computer-like operations. Moreover, still s. This unit can only play DVDs labeled “4” or “ALL”. disc content designed by the software manufacturer, On a Video CD with PBC (Playbackpic co reproduz discos indicados � Title Menu . . . . . no . .. código .. .. .. .. .. “4” .. .. ..ou .. ..“ALL”. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 congeladas em alta definição podem sercontrol) reproduzidas. DVD Features 22 PBC (Playback functions allow TheSpecial region code on the labels of some DVDs of high resolution can be played they are include � Disc Menu .. features .. .. .. .um ..disco .. .. ..of .. com .. .the .. unit .. .. .. .“Check .may .. 22 u try to play any other discs, message Se você tentar reproduzir some moving pictures and ifstill pictures are d � playback Title Menu . .. the . .. ..código .diferente . .. .. .. .. not 22 be available with the system via menus, search fun indicates which type player can play � the .. .. .. ..Some .. .Regional” .. .. 22 � Changing Disc Menu .on . Audio . .may . .of . Language .TV . . .screen. .added. . o. .Código . .. .. ..those 22 do reprodutor, a mensagem “Verifique the CDs disc.não equipado onal Code” will appear the or other functions be tions called “Scenes”. Each scene is d Vídeo com PBC (versão 1.1) � the Audio Channel .possuírem .. .. .. .. .. .labeled typical computer-like operations. More discs. This unit can only play DVDs � Changing Changing the Audio Language . .. .a. .. .. .. 22 22“4” or “ALL”. aparece na tela. Alguns discos que não Funciona da mesma maneira que os and CDs convencionais, s that have no region code label may still be subject Make�� sure to also refer to the instructions supplied with menu screen assigned a scene1.1 nu Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Changing the Audio Channel . . . .the .estar . . message . .sujeitos . . . 22 “Check Video CDs of nothigh equipped with PBC played (Version resolution can if they If you try to play any other discs, etiqueta informando o código regional podem esses discos possibilitam tanto a reprodução de be imagem ea restrictions and therefore 4busithe DVDs and for DVD Audio Discs ..CDs. .. .. ..playable. .. .. Some .. .. .. .. .. .. ..DVDs .. .. .. .. .. ..made .. 22 you to locate the scene you want. � Subtitles . Video . . .. .. .. .. not 22 Operated in the same way as audio CDs, these di the sem disc. Regional appear on the. . TV screen. Some à restrição doCode” local e, will portanto, não ser reproduzível. assim de áudio, estarem com o recurso PBC. Audio Discs . . . .not . . . be . . . .able . . . . to .be . . .played . . . 22 on ness purposes may thecomo A scene is composed oneas or sound, severa 44 DVD playback of video pictures asofwell DVDs that have no region code label may still beallow subject Video CDs not equipped with PBC ( unit. to area restrictions and therefore not playable. they are not equipped with PBC. Operated the same Types ofinVideo CDsway as audio C 5 allow playback of video pictures as we Regional code of the DVD/CD receiver and DVDs There are two types of Video CDs: they are not equipped with PBC. This DVD/CD Receiver is designed and manufactured for TM TM TM TM TM TM Introduction Introduction Introdução yable Discs Before Use 4 4 4 Before Use (Continued) Storing discs Precautions Storing discs Precautions Before Use (Continued) After playing, store the disc in its case. After playing, store the disc in its case. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or sources of Do not expose the disc toStoring direct sunlight discsor sources of heat, or leave it in a parked car exposed to direct sunWhen shipping the unit heat, or leave itdiscs in a parked car exposed to direct sunStoring When shipping the unit Precautions light, as there may be a considerable temperature Storing discs After playing, store the disc in its case. Storing discs The original shipping carton and packing materials may Precautions as there may be a considerable temperature Introduction Storinglight, discs The original shipping carton and packing may Handling the materials unit Storing discs increase inside the Precautions Precautions Docar. not expose the disc to direct sunlight or sou come in handy. For maximum protection, re-pack the After playing, store the disc in its case. increase inside the car. After playing, playing, store the disc discDisc in its its. case. case. come in handy. For maximum protection, re-pack the Audio CD and MP3/WMA . . . . . . . . . . .car . . .exposed 23 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 After store the in Limpeza dos discos heat, or leave it in a parked to dire Handling the unit unit as it was originally at the Do not expose the to direct sources of store the discstore in itsdisc case. Whenpacked shipping the factory. unit After playing,After Handling the unit playing, the disc in itssunlight case. or Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or sources of Movendo aoriginally unidade Handling the unit as was Playing an digitais Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . of 23 temperatu of Contents .packed . . . . . .at. .the . . factory. ...............3 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or Cleaning discs light, as there may of be a sources considerable As impressôes e a sujeira causam perda de . . . . . .unit . Table . Handling .the 23itunit Handling the unit Doand notpacking expose the disc to direct sunlight or sources The original shipping carton materials may heat, or leave it in a parked car exposed to direct sunDo notor expose the disc to direct sunlight or sources of Cleaning discs heat, or leave it in a parked car exposed to direct sunWhen shipping the unit heat, leave it in a parked car exposed to direct sun� Pause . . . . .increase . .distorção . . . . .inside . do . . .som. .the . . car. .Antes . . . . de . . utilizar . . . 23 Before Use . . . . the . . up . unit . .the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 When shipping the unit mover a unidade Disc . . . Ao . When . 23 qualidade de eparked When setting shipping heat, or leave itre-pack in as a parked exposed to suncomeunit in handy. For maximum protection, theimagem light, there may be a considerable considerable temperature heat, or leave itcar in a cardirect exposed to direct sunFingerprints and dust onTrack the disc When the unit light, there may be a setting up unit The original shipping carton shipping the unit �as Moving to another . . .can . temperature . the . distort . .picture . . . the . . .picture . 23 Playable Discs .acessórios . .sound . . . . . .and .awas . nearby .packing . .originally . . .TV, . materials . .VCR, .packed . . light, . or . .may .atas 4the The original shipping carton and packing materials may light, as there may be apano considerable temperature Fingerprints and dust on the disc can distort . . . . . shipping .When . A. When .caixa 23 original ethe osand embalagem devem The picture radio The original shipping carton packing materials may there may be a considerable temperature unit asofand itde factory. o disco, limpe-o com um macio. Esfregue-o no sentido increase inside the car. light, as there may be a considerable temperature or reduce sound quality. Before playing, clean the The original shipping carton and packing materials may The picture and sound of a nearby TV, VCR, or radio increase inside the car. come in handy. For maximum protection, re-pack the original shipping � Repeat Track/All/Off. . . discs . . .clean . . . . the . . . disc . . . . . . disc 23 Precautions . For . . . maximum . carton .during . . . . .and . protection, . .packing . . . . .In. materials .re-pack . . .case, . increase . .the .may . 5 orinside reduce sound quality. Before playing, Cleaning come in handy. For maximum protection, re-pack the increase inside the car. . . . . . . . estar . The . 23 may be disturbed playback. this position the car. come in handy. à mão. Para a máxima proteção, re-embale o increase inside the car. with a clean cloth. Wipe the disc from the centre outdo centro para as extremidades. come inmay handy. For maximum protection, re-pack the be disturbed during playback. In this case, position unit asinit ithandy. wasDiscs originally packed at. .the the factory. Forfrom � Search. . . . the . . .disc . . . from . . . . the . . . centre . . . . . out. . . . . . . 23 Notes on . maximum . When . .packed . . .TV, . . protection, .VCR, . up .or .factory. .the . .re-pack .unit . .or. .turn .the . .off 5 with clean cloth. Wipe unit as was originally packed at factory. . . . . . . . produto . come . 23 the away the radio, the aCleaning unit as itunit was originally at the setting wards. discs da mesma maneira como veio de fábrica. Fingerprints and dust on the disc can distort the unit as itthe was originally packed at the factory. Cleaning discs unit away from the TV, VCR, or radio, or turn off the as was originally factory. JPEG Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 About Symbols . . The . .packed . .picture .disc. . . .at. and .the . . .sound . . . . .of. a . Cleaning .nearby . . . 5 wards. Cleaning discs . . . . . . . . unit . 23 unitit after removing the TV,discs VCR, or radio or reduce sound quality. Before playing, clean t Cleaning discs unitWhen afterPanel removing the disc. setting up the unit Viewing a JPEG disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 and Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Fingerprints and dust on the disc can distort the picture . . . . . . . Front . When .When 24 setting up the unit be disturbed during playback. In this case, position Fingerprints and dust dust on athe the disccloth. can distort distort thedisc picture setting up themay unit with clean Wipe the from the centr Fingerprints and on disc can the picture When setting up thea unit The picture and sound of unit asurfaces nearby TV, VCR, or radio ajustar unidade. and dust on the upsound the the unit � Slide Show . can . on . . distort .the . . .disc . the . playing, . can . picture . . distort . . clean . . . .the .the . .picture .disc . 24 The picture and of a nearby radio or reduce sound quality. Before Remote Control Overview . away . . . . .TV, . . .VCR, .the . . TV, . or . . Fingerprints . . . . 7or radio, Fingerprints and dust Tosetting keep the exterior clean . . . . . . . Ao . When . 24 from VCR, turn off thedisc or or reduce sound quality. Before playing, clean the disc The picture and sound of a.VCR, nearby TV, VCR, or radio wards. or reduce sound quality. Before playing, clean the disc The picture andpicture sound of a nearby TV, orIn radio ToAThe keep thedisturbed exterior surfaces clean may be disturbed during playback. this case, position or reduce sound quality. Before playing, clean the disc and sound of a nearby TV, VCR, or radio � Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 imagem e o som de TV, Rádio ou VCR, próximos, may be during playback. In this case, position with a clean cloth. Wipe the disc from the centre outDo not use volatile liquids, such as insecticide spray, or reduce sound Before theoutdisc . . . .be . . disturbed . . may . 24 beduring unit after removing disc.position with a clean clean cloth.quality. Wipe the the discplaying, from the theclean centre disturbed during playback. In thisthe case, may playback. Inplayback. this position with a cloth. Wipe disc from centre outDo may not unit use volatile liquids, such ascase, insecticide spray, with clean cloth. the disc from the the centre the away from thenot TV, VCR, orIn radio, or turna off athe the be disturbed during this case, position Moving to another filedisc . . .from . .out. .the . . .centre . . . . .out. . 24 unit away from the TV, VCR, or radio, or turn off wards. near theinterferências. unit. Do leave rubber or plastic products in with a�Wipe clean cloth. Wipe sofrer Nesse caso, posicione . . .unit . . .near . podem . the . 24 wards. Preparation the unit away from the TV, VCR, or radio, or turn off the the away from the TV, VCR, or radio, or turn off the wards. theafter unit. Do not leave rubber plastic products in unit removing the disc. away from the TV, VCR, or radio, orsurfaces turnwards. off the � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 unit after removing contact with the for period of will wards. clean . . . after . . .contact . removing . the . 24unit unidade distante equipamentos, ou unit after removing the disc. Connections . .desses . for . . the .aunit .To . disc. . keep . .period .a. long .the . .of .exterior .time. . . .desligue .They . .time. . . will .a.They 8-13 unit the disc. with the unit long after disc. Programmed leaveremoving marks onthe the surface. Do not use volatile liquids, such as insecticide spray, Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . .leave . unidade, . unit . 24 após remover o disco. marks on the surface. TV Connections . .surfaces . . . . . . . clean ................8 keep the exterior Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 near the unit. Do not leave rubber or plastic products in To keep the exterior surfaces clean . . .keep . . . .the . To . 25 To keep the exterior surfaces clean To exterior surfaces clean Optional Connections . . . . . . . spray, .....9 Do not use volatile such as insecticide keep theEquipment exterior surfaces clean Erasing Track from Programme List . . . . . . . . 25 Do not use volatile liquids, such asthe insecticide spray, Cleaning theliquids, unit contact with unit for a spray, long period of time. Theyawill . . .not . . .use . . To .volatile 25 Do not use volatile liquids, as insecticide Do liquids, such as spray, Cleaning the unit Aerial Connections . . insecticide . . such .such . . . .as . or .insecticide . plastic . . . . . .products . spray, . . . . 10in near the unit. Do not leave rubber Do not use volatile liquids, Erasing the strong Complete Programme . . .benzene, . . . . 25 Para manter a superfície limpa leave marks on the surface. near the unit. Dorubber not leave leave rubber or plastic plastic products in in tnear . . .the . . .unit. . near . 25 Do not use solvents such as List alcohol, the unit. Do not rubber or Do not leave orexterior plastic Speaker System Connection .products . .or . .plastic . .time. .in. .products . They . . 11-12inDo not use To clean theunit cabinet strong solvents such contact with the for a period of the unit. Do not leave rubber DivX Disc Operation . . available . . as . . .alcohol, . . cleaners, . . . .benzene, . . . or . . anti-static . . . . . 26 contact with the unit for a long long period ofwill time.products They will will clean the cabinet thinner, commercially líquidos voláteis, como spray inseticidas, st . . . .To . Não . near . the 25use contact with the unit for a long period of time. They will contact with unit for a long period of.the time. They � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Use a soft, dry cloth. If surfaces are extremely dirty, thinner, commercially available cleaners, or anti-static Não use solventes fortes como álcool, benzina, thinner, leave marks on the the surface. the unit for a long period of time. They Speaker . . .for . .vinyl . . . .records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 leave marks on surface. dry cloth. If the surfaces are dirty, will Cleaning theextremely unit spray Setup intended . . . . .marks .Use . próximo . contact . a26 leave marks on the surface. àwith unidade. deixe produtos de plástico leave onsoft, the surface. use a soft lightly moistened with � Changing aNão channel of Transmitter .a. mild . . .ou .detergent . . 11 sprayouintended for vinyl records. limpadores comercialmente oncloth the surface. softmarks cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent Additional Information . . use . .disponíveis, . .strong . . . . .solvents . .ou . .spray . . such . . . . as 28 alcohol, be Do not . . . . . .use . borracha . leave .a27 em contato direto com a superfície da unidade solution. Do not use strong solvents such as alcohol, � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 To clean the cabinet Cleaning the unit Do notthe useunit strong solvents such as alcohol, antiestáticos, como osthinner, usados.commercially para Last Condition Memory . . . .limpezas . . . . . . available .dos . . .antigos . . . cleaners, . 28 or ant . . . . . .solution. . . Cleaning . 28 � About Symbols Cleaning the unit Cleaning the benzene, orunit thinner, as might damage the surface Use a these soft, dry cloth. If the surfaces are extremely dirty, Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11 por um longo período, para evitar marcas. About Symbols or thinner, as these might damage the surface the unit Screen Saver . .solvents .spray . . . . intended . .such . . . .as . for . alcohol, . .vinyl . . . .records. . . . . . . 28 Do not strong benzene, discos deuse vinil. . . . . . .benzene, . . Cleaning . 28clean Do not use strong solvents such as alcohol, benzene, of the unit. To the cabinet Do not use strong solvents such as alcohol, benzene, use a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Do not use strong solvents such as alcohol, benzene, To cabinet clean the the cabinet cabinet To unit. To clean Controlling the TV . . . . .such . . .cleaners, .as . . alcohol, . . . .or . . anti-static . . . . . . 28 thinner, commercially available Do notalcohol, use strong solvents benzene, . . .clean . . .of. the .the . 28 thinner, commercially available cleaners, or anti-static Use a cloth. available cleaners, or anti-static such as To clean the cabinet Speaker Positioning. . If . .the .are . .surfaces .extremely . Do . . .not . .are .use . .extremely .strong . . . . thinner, .solvents . dirty, . 13 commercially thinner, commercially available cleaners, or anti-static Use a soft, soft, dry cloth. Ifsolution. the surfaces are extremely dirty, About the for symbol Use Ifadry the surfaces dirty, Use a soft, dry cloth. If the surfaces are extremely dirty, Operation with Radio .records. . . .display .Symbols . .cleaners, . . . . . . .or . .anti-static . . . . . . 29 spray intended vinyl unidade thinner, commercially available About the symbol display . . . .a.soft, . . Limpando .Before .dry 28 cloth. About spray intended for vinyl records. To obtain a clear picture spray intended for vinyl records. use a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent benzene, or thinner, as these might damage the surface Use a soft, dry cloth. If the surfaces are extremely dirty, spray intended for vinyl records. Operation . . . with . . . .a .mild . . . detergent .with ...a . .mild . . . .detergent . . 14-19 use a alightly soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent use a soft cloth a clear picture use soft cloth lightly moistened Presetting intendedthe forradio vinylstations records.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 . . . . . .To . Para . obtain . 29 limpar omoistened gabinete DVD/CD Receiver issolvents a high-tech, precision device. spray of the unit. solution. Do not use strong as alcohol, aThe soft cloth with a mild detergent “ ” may appear on the TV screen during operation. Mini Glossary for Stream & such Surround solution. Do not lightly use strong solvents such as alcohol, solution.The Douse not use strong solvents such as alcohol, Receiver isAudio amoistened high-tech, precision device. solution. Do not use strong solvents such as alcohol, Listening to the radio . . . . during . . . . . operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 “ ” may appear on TV screen . . . . . . . Use . solution. . DVD/CD 29 If the optical pick-up lens and disc drive parts dirty um pano seco e macio. Se as superfícies estiverem benzene, or thinner, as these might damage the About Symbols strong alcohol, Thisaicon meansdo the function explained in this owner’s Symbols Mode .Do .or .not . . use .lens .might . .as . .these .damage .disc .solvents . .might . .the . . parts .such . . . are .as . . the . . About .surface .are . 14 benzene, or. these thinner, as these might damage the surface Sobre exibição símbolo About benzene, orbenzene, thinner, as surface About Symbols If the optical pick-up and drive dirty thinner, damage surface ThisOther icon means the function this Functions. . . . . .explained . . .the . . . . in . .symbol . . . owner’s . . . .display . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . extramente . benzene, . 29 worn, theuse quality About To a. .clear of the unit. or thinner, these damage sujas, pano manualSymbols is not available on that specific DVD-Video disc. Mode .picture . . um .as . .will .obtain . .be.ligeiramente .might .will .be . .poor. . picture . umidecido . . .the . . .surface . . 14 of Sound theor unit. of the unit. or worn, the picture quality poor. of the unit. manual is notdevice. available on that Sleep Timer Setting . . specific . . . . . . DVD-Video . . . . . . . . .disc. . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . of . 30 Regular inspection and maintenance are recommended DVD/CD Receiver is a high-tech, precision The unit. “ ” may appear on the TV screen during oper On-Screen Display . . . .solventes . . are . . .recommended . .fortes . . . . como . . . . . 15 comthe detergente neutro. Não. use Regular inspection and maintenance About the symbol display ”Dimmer pode aparecer About the symbol display About symbol . display . . .symbol . na . . tela . . . da . display . .TV . . durante . . . . . . a. operação. . . . . . . . . . 30 afterSettings every 1,000 hours on thethe . . . . . . . .aTo . clear 30 the the pick-up disc drive“About parts are dirty obtain a clear clear picture About the disc symbols for instructions This icon means the function explained in this o Initial . .picture .of.If .use. . . podem . optical .of. .use. . depends .danificar . (This . . . . depends . alens . .unidade. .the .and . 16-19 To obtain picture after every 1,000 hours (This on To obtain a álcool, benzina, pois About the About the disc To obtain a clear picture Mute . .significa . .symbols . .symbol . .que . . . a.for . display . .instructions . . .explicada . . . . . . .no . . manual . . . . . .de 30 Esse ícone função operating environment.) . . . DVD/CD . . . . thinner, . To . 30 oris the picture quality will be poor. DVD/CD Receiver isworn, a.precision high-tech, precision device. The obtain aisclear picture manual is not available on that specific DVD-Vi � environment.) General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Receiver a high-tech, device. The DVD/CD Receiver a high-tech, precision device. The “ ” may appear on the TV screen during operating “ ” may appear the TV screen during operation. may appear on the TV screen during operation. DVD/CD Receiver is a high-tech, precision device. The A”” on section whose title has one Using the Headphone Jack . of . . the .during .específico .following . . .operation. . . . disco .symbol . . . 30 is For details, please contact yourdrive nearest dealer. ““ recommended may appear on the TV screen operation. Regular inspection and maintenance are . . optical . .For . . The 30 instruções não está disponível naquele If.details, theDVD/CD optical pick-up lens and disc parts are dirty Receiver is aand high-tech, precision device. A section whose title has one of the following symbol is �optical Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 If. .the pick-up lens and disc drive parts are dirty If the pick-up lens disc drive parts are dirty please contact your nearest dealer. This icon means the function explained in this owner’s “ ” may appear on the TV screen during operation. This icon means the function explained in this owner’s This icon means the function explained in this owner’s If the optical pick-up lens and disc drive parts are dirty applicable only to the disc represented by the symbol. Selecting the Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 This icon means the function explained in this owner’s after every 1,000 hours of use. (This depends on the . . worn, . . . . .the . If . picture 30 DVD-Vídeo. or worn, the picture quality will be poor. the pick-up lens dirty applicable only to disc represented by the symbol. About the disc symbols fordisc. instructions or quality �optical Display . .will . . be .quality . .poor. . .and . will . . disc . be . . poor. .drive . . . .parts . . . . are . .manual 16-17 or worn, the picture manual is not available on that This icon the function explained in is not available onthe that specific manual ismeans not available onDVD-Video that specific DVD-Video or worn, the picture quality will be poor. XTS (Excellent True Sound) .specific . . . . disc. . .DVD-Video . .this . . .owner’s . . . .disc. 30 manual is not available on that specific DVD-Video disc. operating environment.) DVD-V . . . . . . inspection . . or . 30 Notes on DVD and finalized DVD±R/RW. Regular inspection and maintenance are recommended worn, the picture quality Regular and maintenance � Audio. . . . .Discs .and . . . maintenance . are . .will . recommended . .be . .poor. . . are . . . recommended . . . . . . . . 17 DVD-Vmanual Regular inspection is not available on that specific DVD-Video disc. Notes on Discs DVD and finalized DVD±R/RW. Regular inspection and maintenance are recommended A section whose title has one of the XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 following s For details, please contact your nearest dealer. . . . .every . . . . Regular .after 30 �every after 1,000 hours of use. (This depends on the inspection and maintenance are recommended after 1,000 hours of use. (This depends on the DVD-A Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 every 1,000 1,000 hours hours of of use. use. (This (This depends depends on on the the About the disc symbols for instructions DVD Audio About disc symbols for instructions Sobre os símbolos dediscs. discos para instruções after every the About the disc symbols for instructions applicable only to the disc represented by the s DVD-A DVD Audio discs. dos discos . . . . . . . Manuseio .environment.) .operating 30 � About the disc symbols for instructions operating environment.) operating Disc Handling after every 1,000 hours of use. (This depends on the Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 environment.) About thecujo disc symbols instructions VCD2.0 operating environment.) Video CDs with thefor PBC (playback control) is Disc Handling Uma seção, título tenha um dos seguintes Reference DVD-V Notes on Discs A section section whose title has one of the following symbol A sectionVCD2.0 whose title has one of the following symbol is símbolos, DVD and finalized DVD±R/RW. Não toque oenvironment.) lado de reprodução do disco. Segure-o Video CDs with the PBC (playback control) For details, please contact your nearest dealer. For details, please contact your nearest dealer. operating A whose title has one of symbol is For details, please contact your nearest dealer. Aaplicável section whose title has one of the the following following symbol is function. For details, contact your nearest Do not please touch the playback side of thedealer. disc. applicable only é somente aos discos representados pelo Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . símbolo. . . . 31 applicable only to the disc represented by the to the disc represented by the symbol. A section whose title has one of the following symbol is function. Dopelas not touch the playback side of the disc. For details, please contact your nearest dealer. applicable only only to to the the DVD-A disc represented represented by the symbol. symbol. extremidades, para evitar que a impressão digital DVD Audio discs. Operation applicable disc by the symbol. Hold the disc by the edges so that fingerprints will not Country VCD1.1Code Video CDs without the PBC (playback control) List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 applicable only to the disc represented by the symbol. the disc by the edges so that fingerprints will not DVD-V DVD DVD-V Disc Handling . . . . . .Hold .on . Notes . 31 DVD-V Video CDs and without the PBC (playbackwith control)PBC (playback con Notes Discs and finalized DVD±R/RW. fique em sua Nunca fixe DVD and finalized DVD±R/RW. on DVD-V VCD2.0 DVD DVD±R/RW. getVideo on theDiscs surface. DVD or CD Operation . . . papel . . . . ou . . .etiquetas . . . . . 19-22 VCD1.1 DVD-V function. Notes onsuperfície. Discs DVD and finalized DVD±R/RW. Troubleshooting . .finalized . . . . . .finalizados .Video . . . . CDs . . . . . . . .the . . . 32-33 the surface. . . . . . .get . nos . Notes .on 31 DVD e and DVD±R/RW function. DVD-V on Discs DVD finalized DVD±R/RW. discos. function. DVD-ACDdiscs. Do not paper ornot tape on .the Playing a stick DVD andDo Video CD. . . disc. . playback . . . . . . . side . DVD-A . . 19 touch the of the disc. DVD Audio DVD Audio discs. DVD-A Audio CDs. DVD-A Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 DVD Audio discs. not stick paper or tape on the disc. DVD-A .Disc . . . . Handling . Do . 32-33 DVD Audio discs. CD Audio CDs. Disc Handling General Features .Hold . . . .the . . .disc . . . by . . the . . . edges . . . . . so 20-22 that fingerprints will not DVD-A VCD1.1 Video CDs without the PBC (playback Discos DVD de Áudio DVD discs. VCD2.0 VideoVCD2.0 CDs with theAudio PBC (playback control) Video CDs with the (playback MP3 MP3 disc. Disc Handling . . . . . . . . Disc . 34 Handling VCD2.0 Video CDs with the PBC PBC (playback control) control) with the PBC (playback control) MP3 VCD2.0 MP3 Video disc. CDs the surface. . . . . . . . . 20 function. Disc �Handling Moving toside another TITLE/GROUP Do not touch ofget theon disc. function. VCD2.0 Video CDs withfunção the function. PBC (playback control) Dothe notplayback touch the the playback playback side of of the the disc. disc. Vídeo CDs com PBC WMA disc. WMA Do not touch side function. Do not stick paper or tape on the disc. function. Do not touch the playback side of the disc. � Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . 20 WMA disc. WMA CD Audio CDs. Hold the disc by the edges that fingerprints will not VCD1.1 CDs without the PBC (playback control) function. Hold the disc byso the edges so that that fingerprints will not VideoVCD1.1 Do not touch the playback side of the disc. Video CDs without the PBC (playback Hold disc by VCD1.1 Video CDs without thePBC PBC (playback control) control) JPEG disc. JPEG VCD1.1 Hold�the the discMotion. by the the .edges edges so fingerprints will not Slow . . . . .so . . that . . . .fingerprints . . . . . . . . will . . . not . 20 JPEGVCD1.1 Video CDs without the PBC (playback control) Vídeo sem função get on the surface. JPEG disc.CDs MP3 MP3 disc. get on onthe thedisc surface. Hold by the edges so that fingerprints will not function. function. VCD1.1 Video CDs without the PBC (playback control) get the surface. function. get on the surface. DivX � Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20 DivX disc. function. Do not stickget paper or tape on the disc. on the disc. Do not stick paper or tape tape DivX CDs. DivX disc. on the surface. CD Audio WMA disc. WMA function. Do not stick paper or on the disc. CD Discos Audio CDs CDs. Do not stick paper CD � Search. . . . or . . tape . . . . on . . .the . . .disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 CD Audio CD Audio CDs. CDs. Do not stick paper or tape on the disc. CD Audio CDs. JPEG JPEG disc. MP3 MP3 � Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MP3 . . 20 MP3 disc. MP3 MP3 disc. disc. Discos MP3 MP3 MP3 MP3 disc. disc. MP3 � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WMA . . 21 WMAWMA MP3 WMAdisc. disc. DivX DivX disc. WMA WMA WMA Discos WMA disc. disc. WMA WMA � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .JPEG . . 21 JPEGWMA disc. WMA disc. JPEG disc. JPEG JPEG JPEG disc. JPEG Discos JPEG disc. � Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DivX . . 21 DivX JPEG disc. Armazenamento dos discos JPEG disc. JPEG DivX DivX disc. DivX DivX disc. DivX Discos � Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 DivX DivX disc. DivX ApósSpecial o uso, guarde o disco na DivX DivX disc. DVD Features . . sua . . . embalagem. . . . . . . . . . .Não . . . . . 22 o exponha à incidência � Title Menu . . .direta . . . . de . . .luz . . solar . . . . ou . . próximo . . . . . . . . 22 de fontes de calor, � Disc Menue. não . . . o. .deixe . . . .dentro . . . . .de . . veículos . . . . . . . . . 22 5 5 � Changing estacionados sob othe sol.Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Sobre os Símbolos Notas sobre discos 5 6 5 5 5 5 Introduction Introduction Introduction Introduction Introduction Introduction Introduction Introduction Introduction Precauções Introduction Before Use (Continued) Handling the unit Before Use (Continued) Antes dounit Uso (continuação) Handling Precautions Before Use (Continued) Before Usethe (Continued) Painéis Frontal e Traseiro Front Panel and Rear Panel STANDBY/ON Conector de FONES Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Audio CDStandby and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . Disc . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 Indicador � Pause . quando . . . .CD .o.equipamento .and . . .MP3/WMA . . . . . . . . .Disc . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 Acende em vermelho Playing an .Audio 23 � Moving estiver modo Standby �no Pause .to. .another . (desligado) . . . . . Track . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 � . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 � Repeat Moving Track/All/Off. to another Track 23 � . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 FUNCTION/PLAY � Search. Repeat Track/All/Off. 23 Pressione JPEG�Disc Operation .. .. .. tecla .. .. ..durante .. .. .. .. .3. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 Search. .e .segure . . . .esssa 23 segundos, em seguida Viewing aOperation JPEG disc. .pressione-a .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 JPEG Disc . .. .. .. .. .. ..repetida24 mente para selecionar outra função. � SlideaShow . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 Viewing JPEG. disc 24 � .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .de .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 � Still SlidePicture Show .. .. Controlador . .. VOLUME 24 � to another � Moving Still Picture . . . . . file . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 24 Preparation Janela do DISPLAY � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Preparation Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 TV Connections ..8 Connections . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 8-13 Repeat Programmed Programmed Playback Tracks. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 Optional Equipment TV Connections . . Connections . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 98 Erasing a Track from Programme Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10 Optional Equipment. .Connections .9 Erasing Complete Programme List List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 Erasing the a Track from Programme 25 Speaker System Connection Aerial Connections . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12 . . 10 DivX Disc Operation . . . Programme . . . . . . . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26 Erasing the Complete 25 � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12 . . 11 Speaker System. Connection Speaker Setup . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27 DivX Disc Operation 26 � a channel � Changing Transmitter. . . . . . . .of. Transmitter . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11 11 Additional Information Speaker Setup . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 27 � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11 Last Condition Memory Additional Information . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 ABRE/FECHA (OPEN/CLOSE) � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11 � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Screen Saver . .Memory . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 Last Condition 28 � Connections. . . . . . to . . the . . .Speakers . . . . . . . 12 � Speaker Assembling and Connecting Sensor do11 Controle Remoto Controlling the. TV Screen Saver . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 Speaker Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Before . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .14-19 SpeakerOperation Positioning. . . 13Teclas MONO/STEREO/ Presetting theRadio radio stations Operation with . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 29 PAUSE/STEP Mini Operation Glossary for. .Audio Before . . . . Stream ......& . . Surround . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Listening theradio radiostations . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 Presettingtothe 29 Mode . . . . . . . for . . .Audio . . . . Stream ......& . . Surround . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Mini Glossary Teclas SINTONIA (-/+)/SKIP Tecla STOP Other Functions. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Listening to the. radio 29 Sound Mode . Mode . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14 14 Sleep Timer Setting Other Functions. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 On-Screen Sound Mode Display . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15 14 Dimmer . . . .Setting . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Sleep Timer 30 Initial SettingsDisplay . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-19 On-Screen . . 15 Mute . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Dimmer 30 � General Operation . . 16 Initial Settings . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-19 Using Cabo de força Mute .the . . Headphone . . . . . . . . . .Jack . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 � General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Selecting Input Source Using thethe Headphone Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 Conectores das Caixas Acústicas � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 XTS (Excellent TrueSource Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Selecting the Input 30 � . . 17 � Audio. Display. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-17 Antena FM XTS . . . . . .True . . . .Sound) . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 XTS pro (Excellent 30 � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 � . . . . . . .Control) . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19 � Others Lock (Parental 18 Conector do Conectores de Entrada de AV2 Reference � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 TRANSMISSOR ÁUDIO (L/R) VÍDEO Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . .(Saída . . . .DC. .7V) . . . . 31 Reference Operation Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . LH-W752TA . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31 31 DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 Operation Troubleshooting . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33 Country Code List . . 31 Playing a DVD Video CD. . . 19 DVD or Video CD and Operation . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19-22 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 General . . . . .CD. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22 Playing aFeatures DVD and. .Video . . 19 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 � Moving to another . . 20 General Features . . . .TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. 20-22 � � Moving Moving to to another another CHAPTER/TRACK TITLE/GROUP . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 20 � Motion. . . . . .CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 � Slow Moving to another 20 � and Playback � Still SlowPicture Motion. . . Frame-by-Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Antena . . . . AM . . Loop . .. 20 20 � . . . and . . . .Frame-by-Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playback . . . . . . . .. 20 � Search. Still Picture 20 Conector de Saída S-VÍDEO OUT � � Repeat Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20 20 Conector OPTICAL IN � .. ..Saída .. .. .. .MONITOR � Repeat Repeat A-B . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Conector . .. .. .. .. ..de . .. .. .. 21 20VÍDEO OUT � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Terminais .. .. .. .. .. .. de .. ..Saída .. .. .. ..VÍDEO 21 � Marker Time Search 21 Componente com entradas Y Pb Pr � . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Conecte .. .. .. .. ..a..uma .. .. .TV � Zoom. Marker. Search . .. .. 21 21 Special DVD � Zoom. . .Features . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 21 AV1 ÁUDÍO Input (L/R)/VÍDEO IN � TitleDVD MenuFeatures . . . . . . .. .. .. .. ..Conector .. .. .. .. .. ..de.. .Entrada Special . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 � � Disc Title Menu Menu .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 Changing the .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 Disc nos Menu . . Audio . .metálicos . . . Language . . . . .dos . . .conectores Não��toque pinos do 22 � the Channel . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 � Changing Changing the Audio Audioeletrostática Language 22 painel traseiro. Descarga � . . .Audio . . . . .Channel . . . . . . .. .. ..pode .. .. .. .. causar .. .. .. .. .. 22 � Subtitles Changing. the 22 danos permanente à unidade. DVD Audio Discs � Subtitles . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Table ofPrecautions Contents ou em ambos.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32 SafetyMIC2 Before . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5 Table ofUse Contents .3 Playable .4 Before Use Discs . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Compartimento .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..de .. ..Disco .. .. .. .. 4-5 Precautions . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54 Playable Discs Notes on Discs Precautions . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 About Notes Symbols on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 Front Panel and Rear About Symbols . . .Panel . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65 Remote Control . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76 Front Panel and Overview Rear Panel Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 L AUDIO R AV2 IN AV1 IN 6 7 Introduction Introduction Introdução Introduction MIC 1 / MIC 2 Safety Precautions . . .conectores . . . . . . MIC1 . . . ou ............2 Introduction Conecte um microfone. nos Remote Control Overview Remote Control Overview Controle Remoto Remote Control Overview Remote Control Overview Remote Control Overview Remote Control Overview Introduction K N OR Introduction Introduction Introduction Introduction Introduction Introduction Introduction Introduction Introduction POWER OPEN/CLOSE (Z ( ) (Z POWER OPEN/CLOSE POWER OPEN/CLOSE (Z)) POWER OPEN/CLOSE POWER POWER OPEN/CLOSE (Z )))detray. OPEN/CLOSE (Z POWER OPEN/CLOSE Abre ou and fecha a bandeja disco. Opens and closes the disc Opens and closes the (Z ) . (Z Opens closes the disc tray. Audio CD andOPEN/CLOSE MP3/WMA Disc .the . . disc .disc . . tray. .tray. . . . . . . . 23 Safety Precautions . . . POWER ......................2 Opens and closes Opens and closes the disc tray. Opens and closes the disc tray. DVDDVD AUX DVD AUX DVD Opens and closes the disc tray. AUX AUX Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . 23 Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 DVD AUX DVD AUX . . . . . . . . .Seleciona 23 DVD AUX a fonte de saída (CD/DVD) ou acessos. Selects input source. Seleciona uma fonte de entrada. DVD AUXSelects Selects input input source. source. Select the output Select the source (CD/DVD) or Select the output source (CD/DVD) or DVD � Pause . . . .Selects . . . . .input . . . source. .source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Use . output .output . source . . .source . . (CD/DVD) . . .(CD/DVD) . . . . or . . .or . . . . . . . . . . DVD . . 4-5 Selects input DVD DVD Selects input source. the Disc . . . Before . . 23Select Select the output source (CD/DVD) or TV TV DVD Select the output source (CD/DVD) or Selects DVD TV accesses accesses Select the output source TVinput source. accesses TV TV � Moving To to control another Track . .TV . . .TV . . only) . . . . . . . . 23 Playable Discs . . .(CD/DVD) . . . . . .accesses .or. . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD . . . .DVD 4 accesses TV . . . . . . . . . 23 the TV. (LG accesses TV To control the TV.(somente (LGonly) accesses To control the TV. (LG TV only) Para controle da TV LG). BAND BAND BAND To control the TV. To control the TV. (LG only) BAND SLEEP SLEEP � RepeatToTrack/All/Off. . (LG . TV. . .TV .(LG . only) . TV .TV . .only) . . . . . . . . 23 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . .BAND .................5 To control the (LG TV only) . . . . . . . .Select . 23 SLEEP control the TV. SLEEP BAND SLEEP BAND SLEEP SLEEP the System’s tunertuner (FMBAND and SLEEP Seleciona o sistema de sintonia (faixas FMAM ou AM) SLEEP Select the System’s tuner (FM and AM SLEEP SLEEP Select the System’s (FM and AM � Search. . . .SLEEP . .System . . . . . to . .turn . . .off . . automatically. . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Notes . . . tuner . . . (FM .(FM . . and . . .AM ..............5 SLEEP SLEEP Select the System’s Selecton theDiscs System’s tuner (FM and AM . . . . . . .Select . . 23 SLEEP Select the System’s tuner and AM Set the bands) SLEEP Set the System System topara turn offdesligue automatically. bands) Configura o sistema que automaticathe System’s tuner (FM and AM Set the to turn off automatically. bands) Set the Set the System to turn off automatically. JPEG Disc Operation . .System .time. .to. turn . time. . to . off .turn . automatically. . .off . .automatically. . . . . . . . . 24 About Symbols . . . . . . . . . .bands) ................5 bands) MUTE MUTE Set the System to turn off automatically. . . . . . . . . . 23 bands) at athe specified MUTE MUTE Set System at a specified specified mente num tempo específico. bands) at a time. 0-9 0-9 numerical buttons MUTE MUTE 0-9Rear numerical buttons at a specified time. MUTE numerical buttons at a specified time. Teclas numéricas 0-9 disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 at a specified time. and Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 MUTE Viewing a JPEG 0-9 numerical buttons . . . . . . . Front . .Select 24 Panel 0-9 numerical buttons atMUTE a specified 0-9 numerical buttons MUTE a service, programme number MUTE time. MUTE 0-9 numerical buttons Select service, programme number Select aa service, programme number Seleciona um serviço, um número MUTE � Slide Show .the . . speakers. .the . os . speakers. . alto-falantes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Select a programme number Select a service, service, programme number MUTE Remote Control Overview .de. programa .in . a. .in. a. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 MuteMUTE . . . . . . . directly . Select . 24 Mute Select a service, programme number MUTE or select numbered options Emudece Mute the speakers. directly or select numbered options a service, programme number directly or select numbered options in a diretamente ou uma opção numerada em um menu. Mute Mute speakers. Mute the speakers. directly in directly or or select select numbered numbered options options in aa a � Still Picture . . speakers. . the .the . .speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 directly or select numbered options in Mute the . . . . . . .directly . . 24 SUBTITLE menu. SUBTITLE menu. or select numbered options in amenu. SUBTITLE SUBTITLE SUBTITLE menu. SUBTITLE menu. SUBTITLE menu. � MovingSUBTITLE to another . . . language .de . legenda. . .(DVD). . . .(DVD). . . . . . . . 24 Selects a subtitle language Selects afile subtitle language (DVD). . . . . . . . Preparation . . 24 menu. Seleciona um idioma � Selects a subtitle XTSXTS pro � XTS pro � � pro SUBTITLE Selects a subtitle language (DVD). XTS pro PRO Selects SUBTITLE Selects subtitle language (DVD). SUBTITLE SUBTITLE XTS XTS pro �•�� � To rotate picture. . aa. subtitle . .language . . . .language . . (DVD). . . . . (DVD). . . . . . . . 24 Selects a subtitle XTS RETURN enjoy more natural and realistic SUBTITLE SUBTITLE . . . . . . . Connections .To .Para 24 RETURN Tousufruir enjoy more natural and realistic �.pro XTS pro SUBTITLE RETURN To enjoy more natural and realistic RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 de um som mais natural e realístico. SUBTITLE RETURN To realistic RETURN To enjoy enjoy more more natural natural and and realistic RETURN To enjoy natural and realistic Removes the menu. sound. Playback .ao.setup .the . .setup .de . Ajuste. . .menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Removes setup menu. sound. RETURN more more natural and realistic Removes the sound. . . . . . . . To . . enjoy 24 MRAKER - Programmed SEARCH AUDIO AUDIO SOUNDSOUND Retorna menu MRAKER SEARCH XTS • Removes the setup menu. MRAKER SEARCH AUDIO SOUND MRAKER SEARCH AUDIO SOUND sound. Removes the setup menu. sound. TV Connections . . . . sound. . . . . sound. . . . . . . . . . . . AUDIO .AUDIO . . . .SOUND . 8 MRAKER--SEARCH Removes the setup SEARCH SOUND MRAKER Removes theTracks. setup menu. � MARKER �som.�� MRAKER - SEARCH AUDIO SOUND XTSde . . . menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 MARKER XTS . . . . . . . . . 25 Para usufruir de um grande efeito MRAKER - SEARCHRepeat Programmed AUDIO SOUND �� � MARKER XTS •�MARKER �� MARKER �� XTS Optional Equipment Connections � MARKER �. . . . . . . . . . . . 9 XTS MARKER XTS Marks a point during playback. To enjoy great sound effect. Marks a point point during playback. PRESET/ PRESET/ CH To enjoy enjoy great sound effect. � MARKER � XTS Erasing a Track from Programme . . . . . . . . 25 CH Marks aponto during playback. To great sound effect. PRESET/ CH CH PRESET/ . . . . . . . . . 25 Marca um durante aList reprodução. Marks a point playback. To enjoy great sound effect. Marks a point during playback. To enjoy great sound effect. PRESET/ PRESET/ CH CH Marks a during point during during playback. Aerial Connections . . AUDIO .sound .effect. . . . .effect. . . . �. . . . . . . . . .PRESET/ . . 10 To enjoy � Marks SEARCH PRESET/ CH � SEARCH a point playback. To enjoy great great sound � � � SEARCH CH AUDIO Erasing the Complete Programme List . . . . . . . 25 ÁUDIO •�� • SEARCH AUDIO � SEARCH � SEARCH t . . . . . . . . 25 � SEARCH Displays MARKER SEARCH menu. � AUDIO � . . . . . . . . . 11-12 AUDIO Displays MARKER SEARCH menu. Speaker System Connection . . . . � SEARCH � AUDIO + Displays MARKER SEARCH menu. Selects an audio language (DVD) or + Selects an audio language (DVD) or �(DVD) AUDIO Seleciona um idioma de áudio + Selects an audio language (DVD) or Displays Exibe menu Displays MARKER SEARCH menu. . o.MARKER . . . MARKER .de. Busca . SEARCH . . . por .SEARCH . marca. . . menu. . . . menu. .menu. . . . . 26 Displays MARKER SEARCH st . . . . . . . 25 �Selects an language Selects an audio audio language (DVD) or. . . . .. . . . . . . . 11 ++++ DivX. Disc Operation � Displays DISPLAY Selects an audio (DVD) channel DISPLAY Transmitter. .audio .language . .ou(DVD) .channel . . (CD). .(DVD) .or. (CD). .(CD) . or .or an audio channel (CD). � + �� DISPLAY Selects an audio language an um canal . .. . .. • .DISPLAY �� DISPLAY � DISPLAY an Speaker. .. Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 an audio audio channel channel (CD). (CD). .. DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . 26 � Changing an audio channel (CD). . Accesses On-Screen display. � DISPLAY an audio channel (CD). Accesses On-Screen display. � SOUND MODE . . . . . . . . . 11 . a channel of Transmitter SOUND MODE • � Accesses On-Screen display. SOUND MODE Acessa os menus de tela (OSDs). �� SOUND MODE Accesses Accesses On-Screen display. Additional Information . . . .On-Screen . . . . display. . . . display. .display. . . . . . . . . . 28 �� SOUND MODE � SOUND MODE Accesses On-Screen . . . . . . . . . 27 � Setting SOUND MODE Selects the sound mode. � Accesses INPUT On-Screen Selects the sound mode. INPUT Seleciona osound modo de som � SOUND MODE • aSelects ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 �INPUT Selects the mode. �� INPUT �� Selects the the sound sound mode. mode. � INPUT INPUT Last Condition Memory .fonte . . TV’s .da. TV. . .source. . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Selects the sound mode. INPUT . . . . . . . . . 28 � Assembling Selects theaTV’s source. Selects the sound mode. � INPUT SETUP Seleciona Selects the TV’s SETUP and Connecting Selects the source. SETUP SETUPto the Speakers 11 Selects TV’s Selects the TV’s source. SETUP SETUP Screen Saver . ./�•B .(/// .v./the . /.v . /the .V .)(left/right/up/down) .(esq/dir/acima/abaixo) . . . source. .source. . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Selects the TV’s SETUP Accesses or removes setup menu . . . . . . . . . . 28 � Selects b /b /B V (left/right/up/down) Accesses or removes setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 TV’s source. - -SETUP Accesses or removes setup menu . � � �Accesses Speaker Connections. . . . . . . b / B / v / V (left/right/up/down) Acessa ou remove o menu de ajuste -menu Accesses or or removes removes setup setup menu ... �� b /.//B ///.v ///V � b B vuma V (left/right/up/down) or removes setup menu MENU Selects the Controlling �the TV .an .option .V .(left/right/up/down) .option . in. .no .inin . menu. .the . . menu. . . . . . . . . 28 b B v (left/right/up/down) seleciona opção menu. MENU Selects an option the menu. . . . . . . . Speaker . . Accesses 28 Accesses or removes setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .- 13 MENU Selects an b / B / v / V (left/right/up/down) MENU Positioning. . . . . . . . . . MENU Selects an option in the MENU Selects an option in the menu. menu. MENU Selects Accesses the menu on aon DVD disc. Accesses the menu menu on DVD disc. • ENTER MENU Operation with� Selects Radio . . option . .an . .option .in. the . . in .menu. .the . . menu. . . . . . . . . 29 an Accesses the aa DVD disc. ENTER . . . . . . . Before . . 28 � ENTER Accesses the menu on a DVD disc. � � ENTER Accesses the menu on a DVD disc. Acessa o MENU em um disco de DVD. SCAN Operation .on . .a. DVD .on. .a.disc. . . .�disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . SCAN 14-19 Accesses the menu DVD SCAN �� ENTER � ENTER SCAN the menu Aceita as seleções SCAN-/+(bb/BB) ENTER Acknowledges the SCAN-/+(bb/BB) Presetting the radio stations . dos .menu . .menus. .menu .selection. . . .selection. . . . . . . . 29 SCAN Acknowledges the menu selection. SCAN � �� � ENTER SCAN-/+(bb/BB) . . . . . . . . . Accesses 29 Acknowledges the SCAN SCAN -/+ forward. (Stream )&•� SCAN-/+(bb/BB) �Surround SCAN-/+(bb/BB) SCAN Acknowledges the menu Mini Glossary for Audio Acknowledges(/) the menu selection. selection. � SCAN-/+(bb/BB) Search backward or •radio PRESET/CH(+/-) Acknowledges menu Search backward or forward. forward. PRESET/CH(+/-) (v � SCAN-/+(bb/BB) PRESET/CH(+/-) Search backward or Acknowledges selection. Listening to �the . . . .the . . menu . the . . /.V): .(v .////V): .V): . selection. . . . . . . . 29 � PRESET/CH(+/-) �� (v V): Busca em avanço e retrocesso . . . . . . . . . 29 Search backward or forward. Search backward or forward. � PRESET/CH(+/-) (v � PRESET/CH(+/-) (v V): Search backward or forward. t/T ). �. .)).���. . . . . . . . . . . . 14 ModeSearch . . . . backward . .SLOW-/+( . . .SLOW-/+( . . or . .forward. . . . t/T .t/T Seleciona aprogramme programação de TV ou Rádio. � PRESET/CH(+/-) (v /Radio. V): SLOW-/+( Select programme of TV or � PRESET/CH(+/-) (v / V): Select of TV or Select programme of TV or Radio. Other Functions. .•.TURN . . . (-/+) . .programme . (/) . . . . . . .of .TV . .or . Radio. .Radio. . . . . . 30 SLOW-/+( t/T SLOW( � SLOW-/+( t/T)))) •�� . . . . . . . . . 29 SLOW-/+( Select Reverse/ Forward slow playback. Select programme of. TV or Radio. Reverse/ Forward slow playback. � Select programme of TV or Radio. SLOW-/+( t/T ).t/T Reverse/ Forward slow playback. Sound Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 � Select TUN(-/+) (b/B): � TUN(-/+) (b/B): programme of TV or Radio. � � Reverse/ Forward slow playback. TUN(-/+) (b/B): Reverse/ Forward slow playback. Reprodução lenta emSKIP(. avanço ou retrocesso Sleep Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Reverse/ Forward slow playback. REVERSE ) � )) ��� �� TUN(-/+) (b/B): � TUN(-/+) (b/B): . . . . . . . . . 30Reverse/ REVERSE SKIP(. Para a sintonia da estação de rádio desejada. Forward slow playback. TUN(-/+) (b/B): REVERSE SKIP(. To tune in(b/B): the desired radioradio station. SKIP On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 To tune in the desired radio station. SKIP � TUN(-/+) � REVERSE SKIP(. ) � REVERSE SKIP(. ) To tune in the desired station. SKIP SKIP REVERSE SKIP( ) • � REVERSE SKIP(. backward*/go to beginning SKIP Search backward*/go to beginning of Dimmer . . . . . . . To . . tune . . . in .in. the . . .desired . . . . .radio . . . .station. . . . . . 30 To tune the desired radio station. SKIP REVERSE SKIP(. ) �of )of Search backward*/go to beginning . . . . . . . . .Search 30 To the desired radio station. SKIP Search backward*/go to beginning To TITLE tune intune the in desired radio station. Search backward*/go to.track beginning of TITLE Initial Settings . .or . .beginning . or .to . . go . ao .ofto .início . .of . . . . . . .SKIP . . . 16-19 TITLE Buscachapter em retrocesso/vai Search backward*/go beginning of current chapter track or TITLE current chapter or go to backward*/go to current or track or go to Mute . . . . .Displays . . .TITLE . . the . . disc’s . the . . disc’s .Title . . menu, .Title . . .menu, . . .if .available. . . . . . . 30 TITLE . . . . . . . . Search . 30 � General current chapter or track or go to TITLE current chapter oratual track or go to. . . . . . . . . . . . 16 if. available. Displays current chapter or track or go to do capítulo ou faixa ou anterior previous chapter or track. TITLE Operation . . . . . . . . Displays the disc’s Title menu, if available. Para exibir o título do disco, se disponível. previous chapter or track. current chapter or track or go to previous chapter or track. Displays Displaysthe thedisc’s disc’s Title menu, available. Using the Headphone Jack . .Title . . menu, .menu, . . . if.ififavailable. .available. . . . . . . 30 previous chapter or Displays the disc’s Title previous chapter or track. . . . . . . . . . 30 � Language previous �track. FORWARD ). track. Displays the disc’s FORWARD VOLUME (+/-) FORWARD VOLUME (+/-)Title VOLUME (+/-)menu, if available. previous or .chapter . .SKIP(> . chapter . SKIP(> .SKIP(> .SKIP( .track. . .or . .))))).•�����. . . . . . . . . . . . 16 FORWARD SKIP(> VOLUME (+/-) FORWARD FORWARD SKIP(> VOLUME (+/-) VOLUME (+/-) Selecting the Source . volume . .and . .das .TV .caixas .volume. .TV . volume. .acústicas . . . . .e30 FORWARD SKIP(> )� Search forward*/go to next VOLUME (+/-) To Input adjust speaker volume . . . . . . . . . 30 � Display Busca em avanço/vai para Search forward*/go to next To adjust speaker volume and volume. Ajusta o(+/-) nível do. volume � FORWARD SKIP(> ) VOLUME Search forward*/go to next To adjust speaker and TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 Search forward*/go to next Search forward*/go totrack. next To speaker Toadjust adjust speaker. volume volume and TV volume. Search forward*/go to next chapter or To adjust speaker and XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . .TV .and .volume. . TV .TV . volume. .volume. . . . . . 30 chapter or o próximo capítulo ou faixa Search to track. next da TV.(B) To speaker volume.volume and chapter or track. . . . . . . . . . 30 � Audio. � adjust PLAY � PLAY (B) or track. � � PLAY (B) chapter or track. . .forward*/go . .chapter . . .chapter .chapter .PROG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 or �track. PLAY (B) PLAY (B) or track. PLAY (B) XTS pro . . �. .PLAY . .���• .PLAY() . (B) .playback. . . playback. .playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Starts � PROG. D.INPUT Starts PROG. . . . . . . . . . 30 � Lock (Parental Control) D.INPUT Starts D.INPUT D.INPUT PROG. PROG. .�menu. . . .•�����. . . . . . . . . . . . 18 D.INPUT Starts playback. Starts playback. D.INPUT PROG. PROG. Starts playback. or removes Program menu. � Starts PAUSE/STEP (X) (X D.INPUT Inicia a reprodução. PROG. Accesses or removes removes Program PAUSE/STEP (X)) playback. Accesses or Program menu. � PAUSE/STEP �� D.INPUT . . . . . . . . Accesses . 30Accesses or removes Program menu. � PAUSE/STEP Accesses or removes Program menu. � PAUSE/STEP (X))) � Others . .ou . remove . Program . . . .oProgram .menu . menu. . MEMO. . Programa . .menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Accesses or removes � PAUSE/STEP (X Pause playback • PAUSE/STEP ( )) (X �. . .�� MEMO. Pause playback Accesses orAcessa removes � PAUSE/STEP (X Pause playback � MEMO. Reference Pause playback Pause playback � MEMO. � MEMO. Pause playback � MEMO • STOP (x ) � MEMO. STOP (x)) Pausa a reprodução. Enter a radio station’s frequency into Pause playback � STOP �� (x � into MEMO. Enter a radio radio station’s frequency into Enter a station’s frequency �� (x � STOP STOP (x Stops radio frequency into STOP (x Language Code List .playback. . .) playback. .playback. . . ))). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Enter a radio station’s station’s frequency into Stops EntraEnter com aaa frequência de uma estação de tuner. rádio radio station’s frequency into Stops • STOP() � STOP (x the tuner. the Enter Enter a radio station’s frequency intotuner. Stops playback. Operation Stops playback. the Stops the the tuner. tuner. no sintonizador Stops Country Code �List . ZOOM .playback. .a.reprodução. . .playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 the tuner. ZOOM Pára . . . . . . . . . 31 � CLEAR the tuner. � CLEAR � ZOOM �� � � CLEAR DVD or Video CD Operation .CLEAR . . . . •�.��. . . . . . . . . 19-22 ZOOM CLEAR CLEAR ZOOM CLEAR Troubleshooting . ���.• ZOOM .ZOOM . . . the . . .DVD . . DVD .DVD . . .video . image. . . .image. . . . . . 32-33 Enlarges video a track number on the � ZOOM Enlarges the video image. . . . . . . . . . 31 Removes � CLEAR Removes a track track number on the the Enlarges the Removes a number on DVD Playing a DVD and Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Removes aa track number on Remove um número de faixa no menu Programa ou Enlarges the DVD video image. Removes a track number on.the the a. imagem Enlarges DVD Removes track on the program or a or mark onCD. the Specifications�.Enlarges . .��Amplia . Enlarges . . .the . DVD . the .the . .de . vídeo . . video .video .do. DVD. . image. .image. . . . . . . . 34 DIMMER video image. program menu ornumber a mark mark on the the amenu track number on the DIMMER . . . . . . . 32-33Removes program menu a on � DIMMER program menu or a mark on the uma marca no menu de Busca por marca program menu or. a a mark on the �� DIMMER � DIMMER Generalprogram Features .or . .on . .the . on . . .the . . . . . . . . . . 20-22 • DIMMER menu mark DIMMER MARKER menu. MARKER SEARCH menu. menu orSEARCH a.mark Press to change brightness of the � DIMMER MARKER SEARCH menu. Press to change change brightness of the the . . . . . . . . . 34 program Press to brightness of MARKER SEARCH menu. REPEAT MARKER SEARCH menu. Pressione para mudar obrightness brilho da janela Press to change of MARKER SEARCH Press to change brightness of the the � Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20 � REPEAT Press to change brightness of the MARKER SEARCH menu.menu. REPEAT display on the front panel � �� REPEAT Press to window change brightness thepanel display window on the of front panel display window on the front Repete capítulo, faixa, título, tudo (All)� REPEAT � REPEAT dodisplay display no painel frontal, quando window on front display window on the the front panel panel � REPEAT � Moving to chapter, another CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . 20 Repeat chapter, track, title, all. display window on the front panel � all. dur-ing in power-on status. REPEAT Repeat chapter, track, title, all. dur-ing in power-on status. Repeat track, title, display window on the front panel dur-ing in power-on status. REPEAT A-B Repeat chapter, track, title, all. Repeat chapter, track, title, all. estiver ligado. dur-ing in power-on status. dur-ing in power-on status. chapter, dur-ing in power-on �. . all. REPEAT �Repeat SlowRepeat Motion. . REPEAT .REPEAT . . track, . .A-B .sequência . title, .A-B . �. . . . . . . . . . . . 20 chapter, track, title, all. � dur-ing D.INPUT A-B in power-on status.status. D.INPUT �� D.INPUT Repete uma •�D.INPUT REPEAT A-B REPEAT A-B ���� �� D.INPUT D.INPUT REPEAT D.INPUT Repeats sequence. �A-B � REPEAT A-B Repeats sequence. � Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20 To�Para select a digital input source. � D.INPUT Repeats sequence. Toselecionar select digital input source. To select aa digital input source. uma fonte de entrada digital: Repeats Repeats sequence. sequence. To select a digital input source. Repeats sequence. To select a digital input source. To select a digital input source. � Search. .Repeats . . . . . .sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 To select a edigital input source. AV1,AV2 OPTCAL.. MICMIC VOL.(V/v) MIC VOL.(V/v) VOL.(V/v) � Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 MIC VOL.(V/v) MIC VOL.(V/v) MIC VOL (/) MIC VOL.(V/v) Adjusts microphone volume. Adjusts microphone volume. MIC VOL.(V/v) ECHO VOL.(V/v) Adjusts microphone volume. ECHO VOL.(V/v) ECHO VOL.(V/v) Adjusts microphone volume. Adjusts microphone volume. Ajusta o volume do microfone. � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECHO .ECHO . . . VOL . .VOL.(V/v) .(/) 21 Adjusts microphone volume. ECHO VOL.(V/v) ECHO VOL.(V/v) Adjusts microphone volume. Adjusts echo volume. Ajusta o volume do eco Adjusts echo volume. ECHO VOL.(V/v) Adjusts echo volume. echo volume. � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Adjusts . . . . . . 21 Adjusts echo echo volume. volume. Adjusts hin an Adjusts echo volume. � Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 r Faixa �deZoom. operação Instalação das pilhas do controle remoto . . . do . . .Controle . . . . . . .Remoto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Aponte oControl controle remoto ao .sensor e. pressione as teclas. Retire a tampa do compartimento de Special DVD Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 y be Remote Operation Range Remote control battery installation Remote Control Operation Range Remote control battery installation Remote Control Operation Range Remote control battery installation Remote Control Operation Range Remote control battery installation Remote Control Operation Range Remote control battery installation lectric Remote Remote Control Operation Range Remote control battery installation •Point Distância. Aproximadamente 7 m a partir do sensor do pilhas na parte de trás do controle �Control Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Operation Range Remote control battery installation the remote control at the sensor and and press the the Point the remote remote control atremote the remote remote sensor and press press the Remove the battery cover on the of the Point the control at the sensor Remove the battery battery cover onrear the rear rear of the the Remove the cover on the of Point the remote control Point the remote control at remote sensor and press the � Disc Menu . at. .the . .at . the .the . .remote . sensor . . . .sensor . and . . . press .and . . .press . . . .the 22 buttons. Remove the battery cover on the rear of painel remoto eand insira duas pilhas tipo Point thefrontal remote at the remote sensor and press Remove the battery cover on the rearRO3 of the buttons. Remove the battery cover on the of the the buttons. Point the remote controlcontrol remote the the remote control, insert twothe R03 (size remote control, and insert insert two R03 (size Remove the battery cover on rear ofrear the buttons. remote control, and two R03 (size buttons. � Distance: About 23the ft23 (7Audio m) from the front of the remote senbuttons. � Distance: Distance: About 23 ft (7 m) from the front of the remote senremote control, and insert two R03 (size remote control, and insert two R03 (size � Changing Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � About ft (7 m) from the front of the remote senbuttons. remote control, and insert two R03 (size (tamanho AAA) com oR03 posicionamento • Ângulo: Aproximadamente 30° emthe cada na frente � About from front of sen� Distance: Distance: About 23 23 ftft ft (7 (7 m) m) from the frontdireção of the the remote remote senAAA) batteries with and aligned remote control, and insert two (size angle sor AAA) batteries with and aligned � Distance: About 23 (7 m) from the front of the remote sensor AAA) batteries with and aligned sor � Distance: About 23 ft (7 Audio m) fromChannel the front of the remote senAAA) batteries with and aligned � Changing the . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 AAA) batteries with and aligned sor sor AAA) batteries with and aligned �sor Angle: About 30° each direction in front of theof sensor sorsensor correctly. ce of �do Angle: About 30° ineach each direction infront front ofremote theremote remote sensor correctly. doin30° controle remoto. corretowith dos pólos -. AAA) batteries and + e aligned � Angle: About 30° in direction in the sensor correctly. � About � Angle: Angle: About 30° in.each each direction in. front front of.the the remote sensor correctly. correctly. � Angle: About each direction the remote sensor �About Subtitles . . in .in . . . direction . . in. .front . .inin . the . . of.of . .remote . sensor . . . .sensor . 22 correctly. the symbols for instructions ng) �About Angle: 30° in 30° each direction offront remote correctly. DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 he Caution Caution Caution Indicates hazards likely to cause harm to the unit Caution Caution Caution Do not mix old and new batteries. Never mix different types of batteries (standard, alkaline, etc.).etc.). Caution Do not mixother old and and new batteries. Never mix different different types of batteries batteries (standard, alkaline, etc.). Precaução 7 77 Do not mix old new batteries. Never mix types of (standard, alkaline, itself or material damage. Do not new Never Do not mix old and new batteries. Never mix different types of batteries (standard, alkaline, etc.). Do not mix mix old old and and new batteries. batteries. Never mix mix different different types types of of batteries batteries (standard, (standard, alkaline, alkaline, etc.). etc.). 7 Do not misture mix old and newvelhas batteries. mixNunca different types of batteries (standard, alkaline, etc.). Não pilhas comNever novas. misture pilhas de tipos diferentes (normal/alcalina, Indicates special operating features of this unit. 8 Indicates tips and hints for making the task easier. pace Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, etc.) 7 7 K N OR pace hin an r y be lectric angle ce of wner’s ng) d the he oca- ures K s radiN OR pen T pace er such cted to ner’s the oca- ures s radi- pen T er uch ted to TV Connections Conexões � Make one of the following connections, depending on Progressive Scan (ColorStream pro) About the symbols for instructions the capabilities Introduction Conexões da TV of your existing equipment. connection Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Safety Precautions . . . .to. . cause . . . . . harm . . . . .to. .the . . .unit ..2 Indicates hazards. .likely Introduction � If your television is a high-definition or “digital ready” Faça uma das seguintes conexões, dependendo da ® Conexão Progressive Scan (ColorStream® Pro) itself or other material Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA .. .. .. .. 23 Table ofPrecautions Contents . .. .. .. ..damage. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32 Audio CDtelevision, and MP3/WMA Disc .advantage . . . . . Disc . . . of . .. the 23 Safety DVD/CD you de may take • Se�oPause seuan televisor .Audio . . . . for .CD . . .and .alta . .MP3/WMA .definição . . . . . . .ou .Disc . “digital . . .. .. .. ready”, . .. 23 23 � Depending on your TV and other equipment you wishPlaying progressive scan output for the. highest Receiver’s Indicates special operating features of this unit. você pode tirar vantagem da saída Progressive Scan to. .another Track Playable . .. .. .various . .. .. .. .. .. ways . .. .. ..could . 4 connect �� Moving Pause . . . . . .possible. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 Before UsetoDiscs . .connect, . . .. .. .. .. there .. .. .. .. .are .. .. .. .. .you .. 4-5 video. resolution Repeat . . . ..para .. ..the .. obter .. .Progressive .. .. .. .. ..Scan 23 Precautions . . .. .. .. .. ..Receiver. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Use .. .. .. .one ..of .. ..the .. .. .connection do��DVD Theater System toTV another Track . .. .. .a. ..melhor 23 Playable Discs . .. ..task . .. .. .. 54 the DVD/CD �Moving If Home yourTrack/All/Off. does not accept Indicates tips and hints for making the easier. Dicas: � .vídeo .the . . picture . possível. . . . . .will .. .. .appear .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. if.. .you Notes onmethods Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..below. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 � Search. Repeat . .. .. .. .. ..scrambled . 23 23 try Precautions . . . ..described resolução deTrack/All/Off. format, JPEG�Disc Operation .. .. .the .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 About .. ..televisor .. ..from ..Dolby .. .emanuals .. Laboratories. ..outros .. .. .. of .. ..equipamentos .. .. .. .“Dolby”, .. .. ..VCR, .. .. 55 Stereo • Dependendo do license seu refer to.. ..the your Search. . . . . .Scan . .. .. .. on . .. .. .DVD/CD . .. .. .. .. .. ..Receiver. 23 Notes�Symbols onPlease Discs . ..de .TV, Manufactured under Progressive Viewing aOperation JPEG disc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 “Pro Logic”, the double-D trademarks Front Panel and Rear .. .. várias ..as .. ..necessary .. ..formas .. .. .. .of ..to .. ..make .. 65 theJPEG System or devices Disc 24 About Symbols . . other .Panel . .symbol . existem . . .. ..are . .. Dolby que vocêand deseja conectar, de • Se o seu televisor não for compatível com Progressive Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished � Connect SlideaShow . disc . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .VIDEO .. .. .. .. .from Remote Control Overview . . .. .System. .. .. .. .. ..Copyright .. .. ..apenas .. .. .. .1992.. 76 Viewing JPEG . .. .. .. .. .OUT . .. .. .. jacks . .. 24 24the Front Panel andconnections. RearAll Panel . ..works. . .. ..uma the COMPONENT conectar obest DVD Home Theater Use 1997 Dolby Laboratories. rights reserved. Scan, a imagem vai desfocada � Still .. .. .aparecer .. .. the .. .. ..corresponding .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ao .. .. .tentar .. ..jacks .. .. .. 24 �DVD/CD SlidePicture Show . .. to .in 24 Receiver on the Remote Control Overview ....................7 das ligações descritas a seguir. Caution utilizar recurso. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. � Moving toananother .. .. .Pr .. .. .. ..(C). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 �TV Stillesse Picture . . . . . file . Y. .Pb . .. ..cable 24 using optional Preparation US Pat. No.�5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and Make sure the DVD/CD Receiver is connected directly �� To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 •other Por favor, consulte os manuais do seu televisor, VCR, Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 worldwide patents “DTS” Connections . . TV. . . .issued . . . . and . the . . pending. . correct . . . . . AV . . .input . .and . .on .“DTS . your 8-13TV. Preparation to .the Select Parte deTV trás TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Programmed Digital Surround” are ou registered trademarks of Digital Theater Rear Playback of sistema estéreo de outros dispositivos, para fazer TV Connections . your . 8-13 . aTV . 8 via your � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Connections . . . connect . 1996, .. .. .. .. .2000 .. .. .. Digital ..DVD/CD .. .. .. ..Theater .. .. ..Receiver .. .. Systems, .. .. .. .. .to Systems, Inc. � Copyright Do. not Repeat Programmed Tracks. Programmed Playback . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 melhor conexão. Inc. All reserved. Optional Equipment .. .. .. .. .. .. ..by .. 98the copy TVrights Connections . Connections . . .image . . . . .could . . . .. .be . .. ..distorted VCR. The .DVD Erasing a Track from Programme Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 About the symbols Aerial Connections . .Connections . for . . . .instructions . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10 Optional Equipment .9 protection system. Erasing Complete Programme List List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 Erasing the a Track from Programme 25 Speaker System Connection . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12 Aerial Connections . . . . to . . .cause .. .. .. .. .harm . . 10 OTES ON COPYRIGHTS: Indicates hazards likely to the unit DivX Disc Operation . . . Programme . . . . . . . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26 Erasing the Complete 25 � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 It is forbidden by law to copy , broadcast, show , broadcast Speaker System Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Precauções S-Video connection itself or other material damage. Speaker Setup . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27 DivX Disc Operation 26 via cable, play in public, rent � a channel .. without .. .. .. .. .. .. 11 � Changing Transmitter. .or.oCAUTION .DVD . . copyrighted . .of . Transmitter . . . .Theater . .material . . . ..System 11 • Certifique-se de que Home esteja Additional Information Connect the S-VIDEO OUT jack on the DVD/CD Speaker Setup . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 27 permission. RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Indicates special operating features of this unit. � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11 Last Condition Memory DO NOT OPEN Receiver to the S-VIDEO INfunction jack on the TV using ligado ao televisor. Sintonize oSpeakers televisor ao11 theAdditional Information . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 Thisdiretamente product features the copy protection developed � Assembling and Connecting to the � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Screen Saver . .Memory . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 by Macrovision. Copycable protection signals are recorded on some (S).for Last Condition 28 canal deS-Video entrada deand vídeo corretamente. Indicates tips and hints making � Connections. . . . . .THE . the . the .RISK .task .Speakers . . easier. . .discs . . . 12 � Speaker Assembling Connecting to 11 CAUTION: TO REDUCE discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these Controlling the. TV Screen Saver . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 Speaker Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 OF ELECTRIC Video connection �ligue Speaker Connections. . .SHOCK . . . System . . . . . .através . . . . . .do 12 on aNão VCR, picture noise willHome appear. •Manufactured o seu DVD Theater Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 V S TV . . . . . . . . . . . C Controlling the . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 under license DO NOT (OR BACK) Before Operation . .REMOVE .copyright .from .DVD . .. .Dolby . COVER .pode . ..OUT .Laboratories. .ficar . .jack . ..technology . ..from . .. ..“Dolby”, .the . .that 14-19 This product incorporates protection Speaker Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Connect the MONITOR DVD/CD seu VCR. A imagem do distorcida pelo Presetting theRadio radio stations “Pro Logic”, andNO theUSER-SERVICEABLE double-D symbol arePARTS trademarks of Dolby Operation with . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 29 INSIDE isBefore protected by method other Mini Operation Glossary for & .Audio . . VIDEO . of . Stream .certain . .QUALIFIED .IN .works. .U.S. . . Surround . patents .Copyright . .the . . and . . .199214-19the Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Receiver to.claims the jack on TV using Listening theradio radiostations . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 REFER SERVICING TO SERVICE sistema de proteção contra cópia. Presettingtothe 29 intellectual property owned Mode .Laboratories. . . . .cable . rights . for . . supplied .Audio . PERSONNEL. .rights . . Stream .by .(V). .Macrovision ...& . . Surround . . . Corporation . . . . . . . . 14 1997 DolbyGlossary All reserved. Mini video Other Functions. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Listening to the. radio 29 and other rights owners. of this Sound .. .. ..Use .. .. .from .. ..copyright .. .. .Theater .. ..protection .. ..Systems, .. .. .. .. ..tech.. .. .. 14 Mode . Mode .under . authorized . . . license . .. .. ..Digital . ..Corporation, 14 Manufactured Sleep Timer Setting nology must be by Macrovision andInc. is Other Functions. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 ®. . . . 15 On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and Component Video (Color Stream ) connection Conexão S-Vídeo Sound Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless Dimmer . . . .Setting . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 This lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an Sleep Timer 30 other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19 On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 otherwise by Macrovision Reverse Conecte aauthorized saída S-VÍDEO OUT doCorporation. DVD Home Theater Connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks from the Mute equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Dimmer 30 � General Operation . .. .. ..dangerous .jacks engineering orabout disassembly prohibited. Initial Settings . .presence . . .is.do .. to ..seu .. the ..Digital ..televisor, ..corresponding .. .. .Theater .. ..Systems, .. .. ..in .. 16-19 Systems, Copyright 1996, 2000 the of uninsulated DVD/CD Receiver System àInc. entrada S-Vídeo utilizando o. 16 on the Using Mute .the . . Headphone . . . . . . . . . .Jack . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 Inc. All � rights reserved. Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 voltage within the product’s enclosure that may be � General Operation . . . . (C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 TV using an Y Pb .Pr. .cable Selecting Input Source cabo S-Vídeo (S). Using thethe Headphone Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. L.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 LanguageThe . .serial . . . .number . . . . . is. .located . . . . .on . . the . . .back . . . 16 SERIAL�NUMBER: XTS (Excellent TrueSource Sound). .. .. .. .. ..AUDIO .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Selecting the Input 30 shock of this unit. This number � . .. .to . ..persons. . . 17 OTES ON COPYRIGHTS: � Audio. Display .. is .. ..unique .. .. .. .. ..to.. this .. .. ..unit .. .. ..and .. .. ..not .. .. available .. .. .. 16-17 XTS pro . . . . . .True . . . .Sound) . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. R.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 XTS (Excellent 30 to others. You should record requested information here and Conexão de Vídeo � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 It is forbidden by law to copy ,.broadcast, show , .broadcast � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 retain this guide as a permanent record of your purchase. The exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 via cable, play in(Parental public, � . MONITOR . . . .or. .rent . . OUT .copyrighted . . . do .. .. DVD .. .. .material .. .. .. .. without ..Theater .. .. .. .. .. 19 Conecte a saída � Others Lock Control) . ..Home 18 Reference permission. is intended to alert the user about the presence of � àOthers . .VÍDEO . . operating . . . IN . . da . .and .TV . .maintenance . . . . . .o. cabo . .(servicing) . . de . . vídeo . . 19 About the symbols for instructions System entrada usando Model No. ___________________________________ important This product features the copy protection function developed Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Reference in the instructions accompanying the Operation Serial No. ___________________________________ fornecido (V)instructions by Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on some Parte deof trás do Rear Receiver Country Code List .DVD/CD . ..likely .. .. .DVD .. .. cause .. .. .. .. .. harm .. .. .. .. ..to .. ..the .. .. ..unit .. 31 Indicates hazards Language Code List . ..to 31 product. DVD or Video CD Operation . . .pictures . . . . . of . . these . . . . discs . 19-22 discs. When recording and playing the Operation Troubleshooting .material . .. .. .. .. ..damage. itself Code or other Country List .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33 . . 31 on a VCR, picture noise will appear. Playing a TO DVD and Video CD. . . 19 DVD or Video CD Operation . OR . . ..ELECTRIC ..Stream®) .. .. .. .. .. .. ..SHOCK .. .. .. 19-22 Conexão Vídeo Componente (Color Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 WARNING: PREVENT FIRE Troubleshooting otes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 This product incorporates copyright protection General Features . .Video . . . THIS . .CD. . . PRODUCT . .. .. .. ..technology . .. that Playing a DVD and .. ..do ..TO .. DVD .. .RAIN .20-22 . .OR 19 Indicates special otas HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE a by saída COMPONENT VíDEO Home Specifications . . . operating . . . . . . .to.features .“On” . . . on . . of .the . this . .Setup . unit. . . . menu . . 34 for isConecte protected method claims of certain U.S.OUT patents � Set the. Progressive � Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . .. ..and . .. ..other . . 20 General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22 MOISTURE. intellectual propertyà rights owned by Macrovision Corporation Theater System entrada correspondente Y Pb Pr da TV, progressive signal, see page 17. • Ajuste a opção de Leitura Progressiva (Progressive Indicates tips and hints for making the task easier. � Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . 20 � Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20 and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection techusando oMoving cabo (C). WARNING: not install Set“ON” the progressive to “Off” by removing any disc Scan)� em no menu de Configurações, veja na � Motion. . by . .this . .CHAPTER/TRACK .equipment . . . . . .Corporation, .in. a. .confined . . . .. and .. ..space .. is.. 20 nology must be Do authorized Macrovision � Slow to another 20 such�as ahome book caseother or similar unit. Manufactured under from Dolby “Dolby”, from the license unit and close theLaboratories. disc tray. see that “no Still Picture and intended and only página 18. �for Slow Motion. . . Frame-by-Frame .limited . . . . viewing . . . . . .uses . . .Playback . . . unless . . . . .. 20 20 “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby disc” is displayed on the display window. Then, press otherwise authorized � . .by. and .Macrovision . . .Frame-by-Frame . . . . . Corporation. . . . . . . . . Playback .Reverse . . . . . . .. 20 � Search. Still Picture 20 Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished works.desligado, Copyright 1992• Ajuste o modo Progressive Scan para engineering or disassembly is prohibited. and hold it for five seconds before releasing it. � 1997 Dolby STOP Laboratories. All rights reserved. � Repeat Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20 20 removendo qualquer disco da unidade e feche a bandeja � � Progressive scan does not work with the analog � Repeat Repeat A-B . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 20 Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Vejaconnections se a5,956,674, frase “ Sem disco” é5,978,762 exibida janela SERIAL� The .serial Time Search .. .. .. ..number .. .. .. .. .. is.. ..located .. .. .. .. ..on .. ..the .. .. .back US de Pat.disco. No.video 5,451,942 5,974,380, and (yellow VIDEO OUT na jack) or �NUMBER: Repeat A-B . .. .. .. 21 21 of this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available other patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS doworldwide display. Em seguida pressione STOP e segure por � Search .. .. .. .and S-VIDEO connection. CAUTION: � Marker Time Search . .. .requested . .. .. .. .. .. .. .information . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. here . .. .. .. 21 21 to others. You should record Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater � Zoom. . Search .a .permanent . . .employs .. .. .. .. record .. .a. ..laser .. ..of.. .system. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 retain guide as your cinco segundos , antes de2000 liberá-la. � Marker . .. .. ..purchase. 21 Thisthis DVD/CD receiver Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. DVD .. .. .. .. ..read .. .. .. .this .. .. .. 22 � Zoom. . .Features . . .of. .this . . .product, . .. .. .. .. .. please . .. .. owner’s 21 ToSpecial ensure proper use • A Leitura progressiva não funciona com a conexão RF, Model No. ___________________________________ � Title Menu . .retain . . . .it..for .. .. future .. .. .. .. .reference. Special DVD Features . .. .. .. .. .. .. .Should . .. .. .. .. .the . 22 22 manual carefully and 8maintenance, Áudio/Vídeo ou S-Vídeo analógica. Serial ___________________________________ � Menu .. .. .. .. ..an .. ..authorized .. .. .. .. .. .. .. service .. .. .. .. .. .locaunitNo. require � Disc Title Menu .. .. .. .. ..contact . .. 22 22 OTES ON COPYRIGHTS: tion � (see service procedure). the It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast � Changing Disc Menu . . Audio . . . . . Language . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without � the Audio . .. .. .out .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 Performing controls, adjustments, or carrying � Changing Changing the Audio Channel Language . .. ..procedures 22 permission. other� those specified Subtitles . the . . .Audio . . herein . . .Channel . .may . . .result . .. .. ..in.. .hazardous 22 �than Changing . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..radi22 This product features the copy protection function developed ation exposure. DVD Audio Discs � Subtitles . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 by Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on some ToDVD prevent directDiscs exposure Audio . . . to . . laser . . . .beam, . . . . do . . not . . .try . .to. .open . . 22 discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs capacidade do.ips seu Before . . . .equipamento. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5 Table ofUse Contents .3 Introduction Introduction angle ce of ng) the Connections S-VIDEO INPUT VIDEO INPUT L COMPONENT VIDEO / PROGRESSIVE SCAN INPUT Y Pr Pb Preperação ay be electric AV2 IN the enclosure. Visible laser radiation when open. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM. CAUTION: The apparatus should not be exposed to water (dripping or splashing) and no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, should be placed on the apparatus. AV1 IN on a VCR, picture noise will appear. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation 9 and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is Optional Equipment Connections 1Conexões (continuação) 2 Introduction Conexão do equipamento opcional 1. Conecte o VCR ou outro DVD player á entrada AV IN 3 Connect a VCR to the AV IN connectors. Connect a additional VCR to the AV2 connectors. an optical Device the OPTICAL Audio CDetc) andtoMP3/WMA DiscIN. .connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 SafetyConnect Precautions . . . . .output . . . . . of . . DVD . . . . .Player . . . . . (or . . . Digital 2 Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . 23 . . . . . . . Table . . 23 of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 � Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Useo. VCR . . . .adicional . . . . . . nos . . . conectores . . . . . . . . AV2 . . . . . . . . 4-5 Disc . . . Before .2.. 23 Conecte � Moving to another Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playable Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . 23 � Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . .3.. 23 VCR Conecte uma saída ótica do DVD Home Theater System ( ou � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Notes on Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . 23 dispositivo digital, etc) à entrada OPTICAL IN JPEG Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 About Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . 23 Viewing a JPEG disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . Front . . 24 Panel and Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 � Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Control Overview . . . . . . . . VCR .Additional . . Adicional . . . VCR ......7 . . . . . . . Remote . . 24 � Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . . . 24 Connect the speakers using the supplied speaker cords. To AUDIO OUT (L/R)/ � Moving tosaída another file . . . .de. .DVD . . (ou . . . . . . . . . 24 Para . . . . . . . Preparation . . 24 Aparelho VIDEO OUT DVD Player (or Digital Áudio(L/R) e � To rotate picture. . .parameters .Device, . . . .etc) . .digital,etc) . . . . .(volume, . . . . . . . 24distance, dispositivo . . . . . . . Connections . . 24To obtain sound, adjust the speaker . . . the . . . .best . . . . .possible . . . . . . . . .surround . . . . . . . 8-13 Vídeo Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . 24 Para saída To AUDIO OUT (L/R)/ TV Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 VIDEO OUT Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . 25 Optional Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Áudio(L/R) e Erasing a Track from Programme List . . . . . . . . 25 VÍdeo . . . . . . . . . 25 Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Para a entrada Erasing thedeComplete t . . . . . . . . 25 Áudio( L/R) e Programme List . . . . . . . 25 Speaker System Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 To AUDIO IN (L/R)/ VÍdeo (AV1) DivX Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 a entrada st . . . . . . . 25 � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Para VIDEO IN (AV1) 11 Áudio(INL/R) e To AUDIO (L/R)/ Speaker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . . . . . . . . . 26 � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . de IN (AV2) VÍdeo (AV2) 11VIDEO Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . . . 27 � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Last Condition Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . . . 28 � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11 Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . . . 28 � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . Speaker . . 28 Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 . . . . . . . Before . . 28 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Presetting the radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 . . . . . . . . . 29 Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Surround Listening to the radio . . . . . . . LH-W752TA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 . . . . . . . . . 29 otes Modeotas: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Other Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 29 Sound Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 � Be sure to match the speaker cable to the appropriate terminal on the components: formato ÁUDIO da saída digital não combinar as potencialidades deTimer seu aparelho Sleep Setting de . . DVD/CD, . . . . . . . o. .aparelho . . . . .+. não .to. .+. and . 30 – to –. otes . . . . . . . . Se . 30oOn-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 If the cables are reversed, the sound will be distorted and Dimmer . . will . . . .lack . . your . .base. . . .DVD/CD . . . . . . . Receiver, . . . . . . . . the . . . receiver 30 um som forte, ficará distorcido ou sem nenhum som . . . . . . . . . produzirá .�30 If the audio format of the digital output does not match the capabilities of will Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19 . . . adjust . . . . . . the . . . volume . . . . . . . carefully . . . . . . . . to . . avoid . . . . 30excessive �produce If youause frontdistorted speakers low inputMute rating, . . . . . . . . . 30 strong, sound � General Operation . . . . . . sound . . with . . . .or . .no . .maximum . . . . 16at all. Using the Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 �� Language Do not remove . . . . . .the . . .front . . . . cover . . . . . .of . .supplied . . . . . 16 speaker. Selecting the Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 • Conecte a antena fornecida defor AM/FM para escutar rádio. supplied FM/AM aerial listening to the oradio. . . . .Connect . . . . . 30 the � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 L AUDIO Connections (Continued) Introduction 8 8 8 8 AV2 IN AV1 IN 8 OUT IN VIDEO Speaker System Connection IN Introduction R AUDIO (L) AUDIO (R) OUT VIDEO AUDIO (L) AUDIO (R) OPTICAL OUT L AUDIO R AV2 IN Connections (Continued) Conexões das Antenas Aerial Connections � � AV1 IN L AUDIO R 8 8 8 8 AV2 IN AV1 IN 8 • Conecte o cabo ao conector da antena Connect the AM LoopAM aerial to the AM aerialAM. connector.Reference • Conecte o fio da antena ao conector da antena FM. Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Connect the FM Wire aerial FM to the FM aerial connector. Operation Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 . . . . . . . . . 31 DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 . . . . . . . . . 31 Antena AM Playing a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . AM . . . . Loop 19 aerial (supplied) Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 . . . . . . . 32-33 General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22 . . . . . . . . . 34 � Moving to another TITLE/GROUP .Antena . . . . . . .FM 20 FM Wire aerial � Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK . . .(supplied) . . 20 � Slow Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 � Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20 � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 � Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Special DVD Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 LH-W752TA � Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 otas: otes the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22 otes � Changing Benoise surepickup, to match the speaker cable appropriate terminal the components: + to + and – to –. � To prevent keepChannel themantenha AM Loop the DVD/CD Receiver and other components. • ��Para prevenir interferência, longe de aparelhos comoon DVD/CD players e outros Changing the Audio . . . . a.aerial .antena . . . away . to . AM/FM . the 22from � Be sure to �componentes. Subtitles . . . .the .are . .FM .reversed, . .wire . . . aerial. . . . .the . . .sound . . . . . .will . 22be distorted and will lack base. If fully the extend cables 9 � AfterDVD connecting the FM Discs . .Wire . . speakers . .aerial, . . . . . keep . .with . . it. .as . .horizontal . maximum . . . . 22 as possible. � IfAudio you use front low input rating, adjust the volume carefully to avoid excessive L AUDIO R AV2 IN • Certifique-se de esticar por completo o fio da antena. � Do not remove the front cover of supplied speaker. • Após conectar a antena, coloque-a na melhor posição possível (horizontal). 10 10 AV1 IN Conexões (continuação) - Exclusivo LH-T752TB traseira). Preparation Connections . . . . . . . os . . cabos, . . . . . .prenda . . . . .cada . . . .caixa . . . . 8-13 Preparation • Após conectados TVacústica Connections ..8 Connections .nas . . .suas . .. .. colunas .. .. .. .. .. .. (bases). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 8-13 Optional Equipment TV Connections . . Connections . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 98 Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10 Optional Equipment. .Connections .9 Speaker System Connection Aerial Connections . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12 . . 10 � Transmitter. . . CAUTION . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12 . . 11 Speaker System. Connection � aRISK channel � Changing Transmitter. . . .OF . .ELECTRIC . .of. Transmitter . . . .SHOCK . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11 11 DO NOT OPEN � a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11 � Setting Changing a channel of Transmitter 11 � Connecting � Assembling Setting aCAUTION: IDand of Transmitter . .to . .the . RISK . Speakers . . . . . . . . 11 11 TO REDUCE THE � Connections. . . .SHOCK . . to . . the . . .Speakers . . . . . . . 12 OF ELECTRIC � Speaker Assembling and Connecting 11 DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK) Speaker Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 NO USER-SERVICEABLE Before . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .PARTS . .. .. .. .. .INSIDE . .. .. .. .. .. .14-19 SpeakerOperation Positioning. . . 13 REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE Mini Operation Glossary for. .Audio Before . . PERSONNEL. . . Stream ......& . . Surround . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Mode . . . . . . . for . . .Audio . . . . Stream ......& . . Surround . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Mini Glossary Sound .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14 Mode . Mode . This . . . .lightning 14 flash with arrowhead symbol within an On-Screen Display .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15 Sound Mode . . . .triangle . . .. .. ..is.. .intended . .. .. .. .. .. .to . .. alert equilateral the user 14 Initial Settings . . .presence . . . .. .. .. of On-Screen .. ..uninsulated .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..dangerous .. .. .. .. .. .16-19 . . 15 about Display the � General Operation . .. .. .. .. .. ..enclosure . . 16 voltage be Initial Settings .within . . . . the . .. .product’s .. .. .. .. .. .. ..that .. .. ..may 16-19 � . . . magnitude . . . .. .. .. .. ..to.. constitute .. .. .. .. .. .. ..a.. .risk .. ..electric .. 16 of sufficient � Language General Operation . .. ..of 16 shock � . . to . .. persons. � Display Language .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-17 . . 16 � . . 17 � Audio. Display. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-17 The exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . � Audio. . . . . . .to. .alert . . .the . . user . . . .about . . . .the . . presence . . . . . .. 18 17 is intended of � . . . . . operating . .Control) . . . . .and . .. .maintenance � Others Lockimportant (Parental . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .(servicing) . .. .. .. .. .. 19 18 Você pode fixar a caixa central na parede da � Others . . . . . . in . .the . . instructions . . . . . . . . accompanying . . . . . . . . . . the . 19 instructions Fixando a Caixa Central na Parede seguinteproduct. forma: Operation DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 Operation WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK Destaque oand suporte 1.or Video Playing aDO DVD Videoda CD. . ..inferior . TO . . OR 19 DVD CD Operation . parte . . .PRODUCT .. .. .. .. .. .da .. ..cai..RAIN .. 19-22 HAZARD, NOT EXPOSE THIS General Features . .Video . . retirando . . .CD. . . . .. os . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22 Playing DVD and .. .. .parafusos. . . 19 MOISTURE. xa aacústica central � Moving to another . . 20 General Features . . . .TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. 20-22 WARNING: Doto notanother install this equipment in a confined � CHAPTER/TRACK .. .. 20 � Moving Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . .. .. .. space 20 such as a book case or � Motion. . . similar . . .CHAPTER/TRACK . .unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 � Slow Moving to another 20 � and � Still SlowPicture Motion. . . Frame-by-Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Playback . . . . . . . .. 20 20 . . . and . . encaixe . .Frame-by-Frame . . . .o. suporte . . . . . . e. .fixe-o . . . . . . . .. 20 Still Picture Playback 20 2.�� Search. Vire a caixa, � � Repeat Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20 20 com osA-B � .. .. .. .. .. .. .. conforme .. .. .. .. .. .. .. a.. ..figura. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 � Repeat Repeat . dois . . .. ..parafusos 20 � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 CAUTION: � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Marker Search. employs .. .. .. .. .. ..a.. laser .. .. .. ..system. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 �DVD/CD Time Search 21 This� receiver � . Search . .use . . .of.. this .. .. ..product, .. .. .. .. .. ..please .. .. .. .. ..read .. .. ..this .. .. ..owner’s .. .. 21 � Zoom. Marker 21 To ensure proper Special DVD .. .. .. ..reference. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Should .. .. .. .. ..the 22 � Zoom. . .Features . . . retain . . . . .it. .for . .. ..future 21 manual carefully and �require Title Menu . parede . . . . contact . .através .authorized .. .. .. .. do ..service .. .suporte .. 22 unit maintenance, 3. Fixe-o na Special DVD Features . .. .. .. .an . .. dos . .. .. furos . .. .. ..loca22 tion� service Disc Menu .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 �(see Title Menuprocedure). 22 � Audio .. .. .procedures Performing � Changing Disc controls, Menuthe . .adjustments, . . . . . Language . . . .or. carrying . . . .. .. ..out . .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 other than those specified herein may result � the Channel . .. .. .in .. .. .. .. .. .. .. radi22 � Changing Changing the Audio Audio Language . ..hazardous 22 ation exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � � Subtitles Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 To prevent direct exposure DVD Audio Discs .. ..laser .. .. .. .beam, .. ..not .. .. .try .. .. 22 � Subtitles . . . .. .. .. ..to . .. .. .. ..do . .. .to . .. open 22 the10enclosure. Visible laser radiation when open. DO NOT DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 STARE INTO BEAM. CAUTION: The apparatus should not be exposed to water (dripping or splashing) and no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, should be placed on the apparatus. CAUTION: This product may not be used outdoor, restricted to � .. .. cabos .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 � Moving Pause .to. .another . . . . . . Track . usando . . . . .. .. os 23 Conecte as caixas acústicas � Track/All/Off. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 � Repeat Moving to another 23 fornecidos da caixa acústica.Track � Search. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 Repeat Track/All/Off. 23 Para �obter oOperation melhor Surround Sound, ajuste os JPEG �Disc Search. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 23 parâmetros da caixa acústica (volume, distância, etc.). Viewing JPEG disc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 JPEG Disc aOperation 24 � SlideaShow . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 Viewing JPEG. disc 24 � � Still SlidePicture Show .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 24 � to another � Moving Still Picture . . . . . file . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 24 � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Repeat Programmed Programmed Playback Tracks. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 Erasing a Track from Programme Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 Erasing Complete Programme List List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 Erasing the a Track from Programme 25 DivX Disc Operation . . . Programme . . . . . . . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26 Erasing the Complete 25 Speaker Setup . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27 DivX Disc Operation 26 Additional Information Speaker Setup . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 27 Last Condition Memory Additional Information . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 Screen Saver . .Memory . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 Last Condition 28 Controlling the. TV Screen Saver . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Presetting theRadio radio stations Operation with . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 29 Listening theradio radiostations . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 Presettingtothe 29 Other Functions. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Listening to the. radio 29 Sleep Timer Setting Other Functions. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 Dimmer . . . .Setting . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Sleep Timer 30 Mute . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Dimmer 30 Using Mute .the . . Headphone . . . . . . . . . .Jack . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 Selecting Input Source Using thethe Headphone Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 XTS (Excellent TrueSource Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Selecting the Input 30 XTS . . . . . .True . . . .Sound) . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 XTS pro (Excellent 30 XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 About the symbols for instructions Reference Language Code List . likely . . . . .to. .cause . . . . . harm . . . . .to. .the . . .unit 31 Reference Indicates hazards Country List . . .. .. .. ..damage. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31 itselfCode orCode other material Language List 31 Troubleshooting . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33 Country Code List . . 31 otas: Indicates special operating features of this unit. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 • Esteja certo tips ao combinar cabo da caixa Indicates and hintsofor making the acústica task easier. ao terminal apropriado nos componentes:(Cabo Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, para Terminal Preto) e (Cabo Vermelhoof Dolby “ProPreto Logic”, ando the double-D symbol are trademarks Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished works. estiverem Copyright 1992para o Terminal Vermelho) se os cabos 1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. invertidos, o som ficará distorcido e faltará graves Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. na estrutura sonora. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS • NãoSurround” remova aare tampa dianteira das caixas Digital registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. fornecidas. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, acústicas Inc. All rights reserved. OTES ON COPYRIGHTS: It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without permission. This product features the copy protection function developed by Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on some discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs on a VCR, picture noise will appear. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation 11 and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless Introduction Introduction Caixas Acústicas Before . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5 Table ofUse Contents .3 Playable . .. .. .. .. .e. ..traseira . .. .. .. ..separadas .4 Before Use Discs . . . . .. .. .. .frontal .. .. .. .. .. .estão .. .. .. .. .. .. 4-5 As caixas acústicas Precautions . . .. .Conecte .. .. cabos .. .. .. .. ..das .. .. ..caixas .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54 Playable Discs . .. .. .. .. .. ..os da coluna (base). Notes on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 Precautions . . . .. .. .. como acústicas e monte-os ilustrado. About Notes Symbols on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 Front Panel and Rear About Symbols . . .Panel . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65 • Conecte os cabos das caixas Remote Control . . .. .. .. acústicas .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ao .. .. .terminal Front Panel and Overview Rear Panel . .. .. .. .. .. 76 apropriado base de cada Remote Controlna Overview . . . . caixa . . . . acústica . . . . . . .(frontal/ .....7 Sistema deMP3/WMA Conexões Audio CD and Disc .das . . . . .Caixas . . . . . . . . . 23 Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . Disc . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 Acústicas � Pause . . . . .CD . . .and . . .MP3/WMA . . . . . . . . .Disc . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 Playing an .Audio 23 Preperação Introduction Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . as ..........2 Introduction Montando e .Conectando Connections Table ofPrecautions Contents . .. .. .(Continued) Safety . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32 ay be electric angle ce of ng) the Conexões (continuação) - Exclusivo LH-W752TA About the symbols for instructions Connections (Continued) Introduction Connections (Continued) Conexão do Sistema de Caixas Montando e Conectando as Caixas Acústicas Indicates hazards. .likely Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Safety Precautions . . . .to. . cause . . . . . harm . . . . .to. .the . . .unit ..2 andand Connecting toDisc System or other material Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA of Contents . . . . . damage. . Connection . . . Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Assembling . . . . . . . Table .Speaker . 23itself Assembling Connecting to . . . . . 23 Speaker System KDisc . . . Before � Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 . . 23 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 the Speakers otas: Speakers IndicatesDiscs special N OR Asthe caixas acústicas frontais Track e traseiras � Moving to another . . . .estão . . . .separadas . . . . . . . 23 Playable . . operating . . . . . . . .features . . . . . . of . . this . . . unit. ......4 . . . . . . . . . 23 ote front and rearTrack/All/Off. speakersosare the ote poderá da coluna(base). Conecte cabos e � Repeat . detached . . . das . . . caixas . from . . . from . acústicas . . . the . . . 23 Precautions . . .electromagnetic . . . . . caso . . . . haja . . .wave .um . . produto . product . . . . . de . . .onda . . 5 The ocorrer . . . . . . . Interferência .If. there 23 is a strong The front and rear speakers are detached Indicates tips and hints for making the task easier. speaker stands. Connect the speaker cords and assemIf there is a strong electromagnetic wave product � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . assem. . 23 Notes Discs . . may . .nas . .be . proximidades. . occurred. .................5 monte-os como ilustrado. . . . . . . . eletromagnética .nearby, . 23 anon interference muito. forte pace speaker stands. Connect the speaker cords .and ble the front and rear speakers from speaker stands as nearby, an interference may be occurred. JPEG Disc Operation . . . . . . . from . . . . speaker . . . . . . .stands . . . . 24 About . . . .from . . . Dolby . . . . Laboratories. . . . . . . . . . .“Dolby”, .....5 . . . . . . . Manufactured .(Ex . 23 under oven) license : MicroSymbols wave ble the front and rear speakers as (Ex : Micro wave oven) Logic”, andand the double-D symbol Viewingos a JPEG disccaixas . . . . .acústicas . . . . . . .ao . . terminal . . . . . . apro. 24 Front Panel Rear Panel . . are . . .trademarks . . . . . . . .of. Dolby . . . . 6 illustrated. . . . . . . . “Pro . . 24 illustrated. • Conecte cabos das Transmissor Confidential Unpublished � Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Remote Control Overview . . . . . works. . . . . .Copyright . . . . . . .1992. . . 7 � Connect . . . . . . . Laboratories. .Transmitter . 24 thebase speaker cords to the appropriate termipriado na cada caixa acústica (frontal/traseira). 1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. � Connect the de speaker . . each . . . cords . front . . . .toand . .the . rear . appropriate . . .speaker. . . . . . . termi. . 24 . . . . . . . . . 24Transmitter nals �onStill thePicture bottom of nals on the bottom of each front and rear speaker. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. LED indicador � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . acústica . . . . 24 • Após conectados os cabos, prenda cada caixa . . . . . . . US . . 24 Preparation � After connecting the speaker cords to the appropriate Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and Exibeindicator o status de operação LED � After the .speaker the To connecting rotate .each . . . . front .cords . . .and . .to. rear . . . appropriate .speak. . . . 24 nas�suas colunas(bases). . . . . . . . other . . 24worldwide patents indicator terminals on the picture. bottom of Connections . . . . . .issued . . . . and . . . pending. .Displays . . .LED . . “DTS” . .the . . operated .and . . .“DTS . 8-13 terminals Playback on the bottom Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Programmed . . rear . of . . each .speakers . . . front . . . .and . .the . rear . . . .speak. 25 . . . . . . . Digital . . 24 Displays the operated er and attach the front and to TV Connections . . . . 2000 . . . . Digital . . . . .Theater . . . . . Systems, .......8 Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, status. er andProgrammed attach the front and rear Repeat Tracks. . . .speakers . . . . . . . to . .the . . . 25 . . . . . . . Inc. . . 25 status. speaker stands. All rights reserved. Optional Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 wner’s speaker Erasing a stands. Track from Programme List . . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . 25 Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 d the Erasing the Complete Programme List . . . . . . . 25 CAUTION toca. . . . . . . . 25 Speaker Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 OTES ONSystem COPYRIGHTS: DivX Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK st . . . . . It. is . 25 � Transmitter. . . . DO . NOT . . . .OPEN . . .show . . ., .broadcast . . . . . . . . . 11 forbidden by law to copy ,. broadcast, Speaker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . . . . . . . via . . cable, 26 � Changing play in public, or rent copyrighted material without ures a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11 Conector de entrada DC IN Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . permission. . . 27 � Setting aCAUTION: DC s. radiTO REDUCE THE ID of Transmitter . IN .DC . connector . IN .RISK . connector . . . . . . . . 11 Last Condition Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 product features the protection function developed . . . . . . . This . . 28 OFcopy ELECTRIC SHOCK Tecla ID/CHANNEL (ID./CH.)11 � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers ID/CHANNEL Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Copy protection signals are(OR recorded on some DO NOT REMOVE COVER BACK)(ID./CH.) . . . . . . . by . . Macrovision. 28 � Speaker pen ID/CHANNEL (ID./CH.) Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 recording and playing thebutton pictures these discs NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS of INSIDE Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 T. . . . . . . discs. . . 28WhenPositioning. button Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE Conector do Sinal de Som on a VCR, picture noise will appear. Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 . . . . . . . This .Before . 28 SOUND SIGNAL PERSONNEL. Operation . . .copyright . . . . . .protection . . . .SOUND . . .technology . . . SIGNAL . . . . that 14-19 product incorporates Presetting the radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 connector 29 er. . . . . . . is. .protected by method certain U.S. patents and other Mini Glossary forclaims AudioofStream & Surround connector Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 . . . . . . . intellectual . . 29 such property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation Mode . .This . . . lightning . . . . . . flash . . . .with . . .arrowhead . . . . . . . symbol . . . . . within . . . 14an Other Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection tech. . .an . . . . and . . 29 thin Sound Mode . . . triangle . . . . . .is. intended . . . . . . to . .alert . . . the . . .user . . . 14 equilateral Sleep Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is r. . . . . . . nology .Changing . 30 On-Screen a channel about the presence of uninsulated Display . . .of . .viewing .Transmitter . . .Transmitter . uses . . .dangerous .only . . .unless . . . . 15 for home and limited Changing aother channel of Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . .to. . . . intended . . 30 voltage within the product’s enclosure that may be cted Mudando o Canal do Transmissor Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19 otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse ay be Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 is a of similar wireless product nearby, ainterference sufficient magnitude to . . . . . . . Interferência .If. there 30If�there General Operation . . .um . product . produto .constitute . . . . nearby, . sem . . .risk .fio, . interference .ofsimilar, . electric . . 16 poderá ocorrer se a similar wireless engineering oris disassembly is prohibited. electric occur. shock In thistocase, change to other channel using Using the Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 persons. . . . . . . . .may . 30may occur. Nesse In this case, �próximo. Language . . .caso, . . . . mude .change . . . .o.canal .to. other . . do . . transmissor, .channel . . . . . . using 16 estiver (ID./CH.) button of transmitter. Selecting the Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . .ID/CHANNEL . 30ID/CHANNEL (ID./CH.) button of transmitter. ote � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 SERIAL NUMBER: The serial do number is located on the back exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle com uso daThe tecla ID./CH. transmissor XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 ote . . . . . . . of .Press .this 30ounit. angle ID/CHANNEL (ID./CH.) button for less � You cannot detach the speaker from the stand after assemThis number is unique to this unit and not available � the Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 is intended to alert the user about the presence ID/CHANNEL (ID./CH.) button forand lessof �XTS You pro cannot the from .detach . .rear . . .speakers. . . speaker . .for . . . .instructions . . . the . . .stand . . . .after . . . assem. . 30 ce . .of. . . . . to .than .others. 30Press Youthe should record requested information here bling the front About the. .and symbols about 3(Parental seconds. important operating and. maintenance (servicing) � Lock Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 About the symbols instructions bling the front and rear speakers. this guide as permanentfor record of your purchase. about 3a seconds. ng) . . . . . . . retain . . 30than instructions in the instructions accompanying the Pressione a tecla ID./CH. por aproximadamente 5 � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 the Indicates hazards likely to cause harm to the unit Reference product. Indicates hazards likely to cause harm to the unit segundos. Model No. ___________________________________ itself orCode other List material ote Language . . . damage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 itself or other material damage. ote Operation Serial No. ___________________________________ TO PREVENT OR ELECTRIC TheWARNING: wireless speakers may notFIRE received the changedSHOCK channel of Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 K. . . . . . . . . 31The wireless speakers may not received the changed channel of Country otas: Indicates special operating features of this unit. HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR transmitter. In thisCD case set the ID as DVD or Video Operation . . below. . . . . . .of. .this . . .unit. . . 19-22 otas: Indicates operating Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 N. OR transmitter.special In this case set the features ID as below. . . . . . . . . 31 MOISTURE. Playing a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .the . . task . . . .easier. . . . . 34 . . . . . . . 32-33 Indicates tips and hints for making ASetting caixa acústica sem fio pode não sinal aFeatures ID of Transmitter General .hints . . . .for . .making . receber . . . . .the . o. .task . . . easier. .do . 20-22 Indicates tips and DoanotID install this equipment in a confined space Setting of Transmitter . . . . . . . . .WARNING: 34 Você não pode separar as caixas acústicas das colunas transmissor. caso, TITLE/GROUP ajuste a ID como. abaixo. pace MovingNesse to another . . . . . . . 20 such�as case or similar unit. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, When youa book connect the wireless speaker for the first apósLogic”, ter feita a the montagem caixas frontal e Manufactured under from Dolby Laboratories. � Moving to license another CHAPTER/TRACK . . .first . 20 When you connect the wireless speaker for.“Dolby”, the “Pro and double-Ddas symbol areacústicas trademarks of Dolby time, the blue anddouble-D red LEDsymbol indicator of wirelessofspeaker “Pro Logic”, and the are trademarks traseira. � Slow . . . LED . . . . indicator . . . . . . .of. .wireless . . . . Dolby . . speaker . 20 Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright 1992time, the Motion. blue and. red Laboratories. Confidential works. Copyright 1992blinks in turn and then Unpublished the ID will be set automatically. 1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. � Still and Playback . 20 blinks inaPicture turn and then the reserved. ID will be set automatically. Definindo ID do transmissor 1997 Dolby Laboratories. AllFrame-by-Frame rights � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. If an interference occurred or youTheater use a new wireless Manufactured under is license from Digital Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and If�an interference use Repeat .ID. . . 5,956,674, . .is. occurred . . . . .5,974,380, . . or . . you . . . 5,978,762 . . . .a. new . . and . .wireless . 20 US Pat. No. 5,451,942 speaker, set the other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS Quando você ligar a caixa CAUTION: speaker, set the other worldwide patents issued � Repeat A-B .ID. . . . acústica . .and . . .pending. . sem . . . .fio .“DTS” . pela . . . and .primeira . . “DTS . . . 21 Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater 1.This Press the ID/CHANNEL (ID./CH.) button for more Digital are registered trademarks of. .Digital Theater vez, o1.Surround” LED indicador azul e vermelho piscará ao ligar e, em DVD/CD receiver employs a laser system. � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Press the ID/CHANNEL (ID./CH.) button for more Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, than about 3 seconds. Inc. All rights reserved. seguida a IDproper (identidade) será definida. ToAllensure use of .this � Marker Search . . .product, .automaticamente . . . . please . . . . . read . . . .this . . owner’s . . . 21 Inc. rights reserved. than about 3 seconds. wner’s The blue LED and indicator blinks. manual carefully future � The Zoom. . . .retain . . . .it. for . . blinks. . . . . .reference. . . . . . . .Should . . . . .the 21 blue. .LED indicator d the require maintenance, contact 2.unit Turn theDVD transmitter and wireless and OTES ON COPYRIGHTS: Special Features . .and . . an . houver . authorized . . . speaker . .sinal . speaker . service . de . . off .áudio, . .loca. 22and ocaSetion ocorrer interferência, ou se não 2.(see Turn the transmitter wireless off OTES ON COPYRIGHTS: service procedure). then turn it on. It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast � then Title Menu .on. .copy . . ., broadcast, . . . . . . . .show . . . ,.broadcast . . . . . . . . . 22 Itdefina is forbidden by law to turn it a ID conforme abaixo: via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without Performing controls, � Disc Menu . adjustments, . . .rent . . .copyrighted . . . or . .carrying . . .material . . .out . . procedures .without . . . . . 22 via cable, play in public, ures permission. than those herein may result in hazardous 1. other Pressione a specified teclaorID/CHANNEL (ID./CH.) por radipermission. � Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22 s radiThis product features the copy protection function developed ation exposure. aproximadamente 5 segundos. This product features the the Audio copy protection � Changing Channelfunction . . . . .developed . . . . . . . 22 by Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on some prevent direct exposure to laser beam, do not tryon tosome open by To Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded O indicador azul piscará rapidamente. pen �LED Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs the When enclosure. Visible laser radiation when open. DO NOT discs. recording and playing the pictures of these discs T on a VCR, picture noise will appear. DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 on STARE a VCR, INTO pictureBEAM. noise will appear. er such cted to Introduction Preparation Introduction Preparation Acústicas SIGNAL ID./CH. SIGNAL DC IN ID./CH. DC IN 2. CAUTION: Desligue e ligue novamente a caixatechnology acústica sem This product incorporates copyright that The apparatus shouldprotection not be exposed to water is protected by splashing) method claims of certain and other fio . or (dripping and no objects U.S. filledpatents with liquids, such intellectual owned as vases,property should rights be placed on by theMacrovision apparatus. Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology 12 must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is CAUTION: This and product not be used uses outdoor, intended for home othermay limited viewing onlyrestricted unless to indoor use only. by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse otherwise authorized This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection 11 technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is11 intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. thin an r ay be electric angle ce of ng) the K N OR pace wner’s d the oca- ures s radi- Conexões (continuação) - Exclusivo LH-W752TA Introduction Conexões do sistema de Caixas Acústicas L AUDIO R AV2 IN AV1 IN SIGNAL ID./CH. DC IN • Se as caixas acústicas sem fio estiverem desligadas, elas não funcionarão. OTES ON COPYRIGHTS: It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without permission. This product features the copy protection function developed by Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on some 13 Preperação Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . Disc . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 •Before Conecte as. caixas ou central. � Pause . . . . .CD . . .and . . .MP3/WMA . . . . . . . . .Disc . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 . . . . . acústicas . .. .. .conectores . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..frontal Playing an .Audio 23 Table ofUse Contents .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .aos .. .. .. .. ..(direito/esquerdo) .4-5 .3 Speaker System Connection � Playable Discs .4 � Moving Pause .to. .another . . . . . . Track . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 Use . . . . .. .. .. ..no .. ..conector .. .. .. .. .. .. ..do .. ..subwoofer. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4-5 •Before Conecte o subwoofer � . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 Precautions . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54 � Repeat Moving Track/All/Off. to another Track 23 Playable Discs Speaker Connections • Conecte o cabo de força da caixa acústica sem fio na tomada. � . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 Notes on Discs � Search. Repeat Track/All/Off. 23 Precautions . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 � Connect the .speakers speaker JPEGconnectors. Operation .. .. ..o.. .cabo .. .. .. ..DC. .. .. .. .. .. 24 About Symbols .. .. do ..to .. .transmissor .. .. .front .. .. e.. .o ..conector .. .. or .. ..center .. .. 5do �Disc Search. . .traseiro . . . . .. ..com . .. .. .. .de . .. ..força 23 Notes on Discs . .DC . .. .. IN .the . .. .. ..(right, . left) 5 transmissor • Conecte o conector do painel � Connect subwoofer Viewing JPEG disc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 Front Panel andthe Rear .. .. woofer .. .. .. .. .. connector. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65 JPEG Disc aOperation 24 About Symbols . . .Panel . . . . .to.. ..the � Connect the power cord wireless speaker to the •Remote Conecte o conector do SINAL DEtheSOM do transmissor e osoutlet. conectores dasaShow caixas � Slide . . . .. .. .. ..traseiras .. .. .. .. .. .. .(esquerda/direita) Control . . .of Viewing JPEG.acústicas disc . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 24 Front �Panel and Overview Rear Panel . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76 Connect thecom DC IN connector of DE transmitter and the transmitter connector of rear panel with the DC power cable. no painel traseiro o cabo � Picture � Still Slide Show .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 24 Remote Control Overview . . SINAL . . . . connector . . . . SOM. . . . of . . transmitter . . . . . 7 and the rear � Connect the SOUND SIGNAL (right, left) speaker connector of rear panel � to another .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 � Moving Still Picture . . . . . file . dentro . . .. .. .. .de . .. ..10 24 •Preparation Estabeleça a distância entre o transmissor e as caixas acústicas sem fio (direito/esquerdo) metros. with the SOUND SIGNAL cable. � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 � Moving to another � Set the left) within 10m. file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Connections . .distance . . . . . .between . . . . . .the . . .transmitter . . . . . . . and . . . wireless . 8-13 speaker (right, Preparation Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 TV Connections ..8 Connections . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 8-13 Repeat Programmed Programmed Playback Tracks. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 Front speaker Optional Equipment Front speaker TV Connections . . Connections . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 98 Caixa Caixa Acústica Erasing aAcústica Track from Programme Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 (Left) (Right). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Aerial Connections frontal frontal Optional Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Erasing the Complete Programme List List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 Erasing a Track from Programme 25 (esquerda) (direita) Speaker System Connection Aerial Connections . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12 . . 10 DivX Disc Operation . . . Programme . . . . . . . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26 Erasing the Complete 25 � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12 . . 11 Speaker System. Connection Speaker Setup . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27 Caixa Acústica DivX Disc Operation 26 � a channel .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11 � Changing Transmitter. . . . . . . .of. Transmitter . . . . . . .Center . . .. central 11 Additional Information speaker Speaker Setup . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 27 � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11 Last Condition Memory Additional Information . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11 � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Screen Saver . .Memory . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 Last Condition 28 � Connections. . . . . . to . . the . . .Speakers . . . . . . . 12 � Speaker Assembling and Connecting 11 Controlling the. TV Screen Saver . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 Speaker Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Before . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .14-19 SpeakerOperation Positioning. . . 13 Presetting theRadio radio stations Operation with . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 29 Mini Operation Glossary for. .Audio Before . . . . Stream ......& . . Surround . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Listening theradio radiostations . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 Presettingtothe 29 Mode . . . . . . . for . . .Audio . . . . Stream ......& . . Surround . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Mini Glossary Other Functions. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Listening to the. radio 29 Sound Mode . Mode . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14 14 Sleep Timer Setting Other Functions. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 On-Screen Sound Mode Display . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15 14 Dimmer . . . .Setting . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Sleep Timer 30 Initial SettingsDisplay . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-19 On-Screen . . 15 Mute . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Dimmer 30 � General Operation . . 16 Initial Settings . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-19 Using Mute .the . . Headphone . . . . . . . . . .Jack . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 � General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Transmitter Transmissor Selecting Input Source . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Using thethe Headphone Jack 30 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 XTS (Excellent TrueSource Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Selecting the Input 30 Sound Cabo designal sinal � . . 17 � Audio. Display. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-17 XTS . cable . . . . .True . . . .Sound) . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 de som XTS pro (Excellent 30 � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 � . . . . . . .Control) . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Subwoofer ..Subwoofer .. .. .. .. 19 � Others Lock (Parental 18 Reference � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Reference Operation Country Code List . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31 Language Code List 31 DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 Operation Troubleshooting . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33 Country Code List . . 31 Playing a DVD Video CD. . . 19 DVD or Video CD Operation . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19-22 Caixaand Acústica Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Caixa acústica Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 General .Video . . . . .CD. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22 sem Playing aFeatures DVD and.fio . . 19 Wireless Speaker sem fio Wireless Speaker Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 (direita) � Moving to another . . 20 (Right) (esquerda) General Features . . . .TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. 20-22 (Left) DC power cable Cabo de força DC � Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . 20 � Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20 About the symbols for instructions � Motion. . . . . .CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 � Slow Moving to another 20 � and .. 20 Indicates hazards � Still SlowPicture Motion. . likely . Frame-by-Frame . . . .to. .cause . . . . .harm . . .Playback . to . . .the . . .unit 20 itself or other � . .material . and . . . .Frame-by-Frame . damage. . . . . . . . . . . . . Playback . . . . . . . .. 20 � Search. Still Picture 20 � � Repeat Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20 20 Notes: Indicates special. operating otas: � ..features ..implemented .. .. .. .. ..of .. ..this ..only .. ..unit. ..when .. .. .. ..the 21 Repeat . . . . .. .. .. .. .can . .. ..be 20transmitter and the wireless speaker within distance of 2m through � Repeat OptimumA-B performance � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 10m is used since approaching distance between them. � melhoria Repeat A-B . .hints .communication . . .for . . making . .pode . . failure . .ser . . may .task . . occur . easier. . . . if. closely . 21 diminuindo-se • Uma noand desempenho implementada a distância entre o transmissor e as caixas Indicates tips the � Be sure to match the speaker cable to the appropriate terminal the components: + to + and – to –. If the cables are � Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 � Marker Timecaso Search 21 daonfaixa acústicas, ocorra uma falha na comunicação, dentro de distância de 2 a 10 metros. reversed, the sound will be distorted and will lack base. � . Search . .license . . . .. ..from .. .. ..Dolby .. .. .. .. Laboratories. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .“Dolby”, � Zoom. Marker . .. .. .. .. 21 21 Manufactured under � Do not remove the front cover of supplied speaker. Special DVD Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 + / +, - / -. Se os cabos • Certifique-se de combinar os cabos das caixas acústicas com os conectores apropriados: “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby � Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � It takes a few seconds (and may take longer) for the transmitter and wireless speaker (left, right) to communicate with each Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished � Title MenuFeatures . . .o . .som . .. ..poderá .. .. .. ..works. .. .ficar .. .. .. .. .. .. .199222 estiverem invertidos, distorcido Special DVD . .. .. ..Copyright . e.. ..haver 22 queda na qualidade da base sonora. other. 1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. � .. ..set .. .. is .. ..turned .. .. .. ..off, . . the .. .. .transmitter .. ..also .. .. ..turned 22 � WhenMenu the main � Disc Title Menu . .. .. .. .. .. .. is 22 off automatically and the wireless speaker is in standby mode • Pode levar alguns segundos (em. .alguns que o transmissor e as caixas acústicas (esquerda/direita) Manufactured license � the ..casos .. Systems, .. .. .. ..mais) .. .. ..Inc. .. para 22 (red under LED indicator). � Changing Disc Menu . 5,956,674, . Audio . . .from . . Language .Digital .5,974,380, . . . .Theater . . .. 5,978,762 22 US comuniquem-se Pat.�No. 5,451,942 and entre si. isChannel If the wireless speaker turned off, .the wireless speaker will not function. � Changing the Audio . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22 other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS � . . .Audio . . principal . . trademarks .Channel . . . .estiver . . ..of.. .Digital .. .. .. .. Theater .. .. .. ..o..transmissor 22 Digital Surround” are. registered � Subtitles Changing the .desligado, 22 • Quando o Copyright equipamento se desliga automaticamente e as caixas acústicas sem Systems, Inc. 1996, 2000 DVD Audio Discs .. .. ..Digital .. .. .. .. .Theater .. ..Systems, .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 � Subtitles . .standby . .. .. .. .. .. (LED . .. .. .. vermelho) 22 no modo indicador Inc.fio Allficam rights reserved. 12 DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Introduction Introduction Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Introduction Connections Conexões das Caixas Table Contents . .. .. ..Acústicas .. ..(Continued) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32 SafetyofPrecautions Conexões (continuação) Introduction Introduction Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . 23 . . . . . . . Table . . 23 of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 No caso Use de uma (2 caixas acústicas � Pause . . .frontais, . . . . . .1. caixa . . . . acústica . . . . . . .central, .....2 . .caixas . 23 . . .distribuição . . . . . . . . normal . . . . . .use . . .as . .6. caixas . . . . . acústicas . . 4-5 Disc . . . Before . . 23 traseiras � Moving to another Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playable DiscsePositioning . subwoofer). ..........................4 . . . . . . . acústicas . . 23 Speaker usufruir de um ou Dolby Digital Surround, � Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . .você . . . .deverá . . . . .conectar . . . 23 Precautions . . .excelente . . . . . . .som . . . grave, . . . . . do . . .sistema . . . . . .DTS . . 5Digital Surround . . . . . . . Para . . 23 � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Notes on Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . 1. .subwoofer. 23 In the case of normal position use the 6 speakers (2 front speakers, 1 center speaker, 2 rear speakers and JPEG Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 About Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . 23 subwoofer). Viewing a JPEG disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Panel and Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . •Front . Caixas . 24If you Acústicas frontais. want to play the excellent bass sound, DTS digital surround or Dolby Digital surround, you should connect � Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . De . . 24 a subwoofer. acordo com sua posição de montagem, distribua as caixas acústicas igualmente. use intervalo de ângulo de 45 graus. � Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . . . 24 � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . Preparation . . 24• Front speakers Acústica central. � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . •Connections . Caixa . 24 According speakers for equal distance. And by hearing position set up the . . .to. your . . . . listening . . . . . . .position . . . . . .set . . .up . .the . . 8-13 caixas acústicas central e frontal possuem a mesma altura. Mas normalmente, posicione-as Programmed Playback . . . . acima . . . . .ou . . abaixo . . . . . da . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . As . . 24 between TV interval Connections . .speakers . . . . . . . to . .45 . . degree. ............8 Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . TV. . . 25 Optional • CenterEquipment speaker Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Erasing a Track from Programme List . . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . 25 Aerial . . . .and . . . front . . . .speakers . . . . . . . are . . . ideally . . 10 the same height. But normally place it above or below the TheConnections center speakers Erasing the Complete Programme List . . . . . . . 25 t . . . . . . •. Caixas . 25 Acústicas Speaker Systemtraseiras. Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 television. DivX Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 st . . . . . Coloque . . 25 � Transmitter. . . . . . .à.direita . . . . .e. esquerda . . . . . . . do . . .local . . 11 as caixas acústicas de audiência. Estas caixas acústicas reproduzem a atmosfera • Rear speakers Speaker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . . . . . . . . . 26 � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11 Place left behindpara the listening area.Surround. These speakers recreate sound motion and required de movimento de and somright necessária a reprodução Para melhores resultados, não Additional Information . . . instale . . . .atmosphere . as . . .caixas . . . . .acústicas . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . . . 27 � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 formuito surround sound playback. For best results, do not install the Condition rear speakers too far.dos behind the listening traseiras distantes da posição de audiência e as posicione no mesmo nível dos ouvidos espectadores. Também Last Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28é . . . . . . . . . 28 � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11 position and install them at or above the level of the listener’s ears. It is also effective to direct the rear Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 direcionar estas caixas acústicas para a parede ou teto a fim de dispersar o som. . . . . . . . eficaz . . 28 � Speakertowards Connections. . . ceiling . . . . . .to. .further . . . . .disperse . . 12 the sound. speakers a wall or Controlling the traseiras, TV . . . . posicione-as . . . . . . . . . .uma . . . de . . .frente . . . 28 casoInde um ambiente menor, se o ouvinte estiver próximo das caixas acústicas . . . . . . . No . . 28 Speaker Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 the case of a smaller room size, if the audience is near to the rear wall set the rear speakers opposite each Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 . . . . . . . para .Before . 28a outra, acima de 60 90 cm, do ouvido dos espectadores. Operation . . . rear . . . .speakers . . . . . . .above . . . . .60 . . -. 90 14-19 other, and set. the cm than the listener’s ears. Presetting the radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 . . . . . . . . . 29 Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Surround • Subwoofer Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 . . . . . . . . . 29 Mode . . .be . . placed . . . . . .in. any . . . .front . . . position. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 • Subwoofer This. .can Other Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 29 Sound Mode . . . . em . . .qualquer . . . . . . .posição . . . . . .frontal. . . . . . . . 14 Este pode ser colocado Sleep Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19 Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 � General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Using the Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Selecting the Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Subwoofer . . . . . . . . . 30 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . 17 XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .Caixa Speaker Acústica Central . . Center . . 18 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Reference Caixa Acústica frontal Caixa Front Acústica frontal Speaker Front Speaker Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 (Left) (Right) direita Esquerda Operation Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 . . . . . . . . . 31 DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 . . . . . . . . . 31 Playing a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 . . . . . . . 32-33 General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22 . . . . . . . . . 34 CaixaRear Acústica traseira Caixa Acústica traseira � Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20 Speaker Rear Speaker � Moving to another (Left) CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . 20 esquerda direita (Right) � Slow Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 � Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20 � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 � Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Special DVD Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speaker . . . . . . . Positioning 22 Example Exemplo de distribuição das Caixas Acústicas � Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 1614 Introduction Safety Precautions . . . das . . . . . Caixas . . . . . . . . .Acústicas ........2 Posicionamento When shipping the unit The original shipping carton and packing materials may come in handy. For maximum protection, re-pack the Operation Before Operation Operation unitBefore as Before itBefore was originally packed at the factory. Before Operation Operation Antes da Operação Before Operation Before Operation Before Operation Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or sources of heat, or leave it in a parked car exposed to direct sunlight, as there may be a considerable temperature increase inside the car. Introduction Handling the unit Cleaning discs of the pre-programmed fields according to the of the pre-programmed sound according to the program you want to listen to. of the pre-programmed sound fields according to program you want tosound listen to. fields program you want to the listen to. ofprogram thevocê pre-programmed sound you want unit after removing que quer escutar Moving another Track ..according .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..to .. ..the .. .. .. 23 Playable Discs . .. .. .disc. . .. .. ..Stream . .. program . 4-5 . 4Mode you to �program Pause .to .want .to . want .listen .to . .listen .to. . listen . fields .to. . . ..to. 23 Before Useyou . . .to. for ..enjoy .. .. .the .. ..discrete .. .. .. .. .. ..& .. .. .. .Sound .. .. .of program you want to listen to. program Mini Glossary Audio you want to � listen to.you Allows 5.1(or 6) channels Allows you to enjoy 6) discrete channels of. high high Allows 6) discrete ofprogram highWhen you want toanother listen to. Allows to enjoy 5.1(or 6) discrete � Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 Precautions .you .you .6) ..to ..to .enjoy .enjoy .5.1(or ..channels ..6) ..5.1(or ..discrete .. ..of ..com .high ..discrete .channels .. .. .channels .. ..channels .. channels .of .. .high .of 5 DVD is inserted Allows you toyou enjoy 5.1(or discrete quality When DVD is inserted Allows 5.1(or 6) of high � Moving to Track . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playable Discs . . . . . . . . . . . 4 When DVD is inserted Permite desfrutar 5.1(or 6) canais distintos alta qualidade de áuQuando o DVD é inserido. Allows you to enjoy 5.1(or channels of high Allows you to enjoy 5.1(or 6) discrete high When DVD is inserted YouA) can enjoy surround sound simply by selecting one Surround Mode quality digital audio from DTS program sources such as When DVD is inserted quality digital audio from DTS program sources such as quality digital audio from DTS program sources such as When DVD is inserted By pressing SOUND button digital audio from DTS program sources such as discs, DVD When DVD is inserted To keep the exterior surfaces clean Allows you to enjoy 5.1(or 6) discrete channels of high quality quality digital audio from DTS program sources such as � Search. . change .o. the .the . .toDigital .de . .som . Digital ..Audio ..do .. ..DVD ..Audio .Output .. pressionando .. .. ..Output ..mode .mode ..by .. tecla .. 23 Notes on Discs .. ..from .. .. .. .DTS ..from .. .. program .. como ..DTS .. .. ..discos, .program .. .. ..DVD, .. of .. sources ..the ..e..discos .. .. as 55such asVocê You change digital audio You can change Digital Audio � can Repeat Track/All/Off. .Output . .. .. .. mode 23by Precautions .de. .programa .DTS, . ..sources You can the dio quality digital dequality fontes pre-programmed sound fields according the digital audio such pode mudar modo aby Introduction Introduction Introduction When setting up the unitfor VCD1.1 VCD2.0 CD DVD VCD1.1VCD1.1 VCD2.0 Sound Mode CD CD DVD Mini Glossary Audio Stream &&Sound Fingerprints and dust on the disc can distort the VCD2.0 DVD Sound Mode Mini Glossary for Audio Stream Sound Mode Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & VCD1.1 VCD2.0 CD picture DVD Modo de Som Mode Mini Glossary DVD Sound Mode Mini Glossário Mini Glossary Audio & VCD2.0 DVDDVDDisc VCD2.0 Sound Mode Mini Glossary Audio Stream The picture and sound of nearby VCR, Sound Mode Audio CD and MP3/WMA . .VCD2.0 .VCD1.1 . . VCD1.1 . clean . .VCD1.1 . . CD .the . .CD .disc . CD 23 Safety Precautions . para . . for .for .Audio . afor . Canal .Audio . for . Audio . . . TV, . de . .Stream . .Áudio .Stream . or . Stream . radio .& . .& 2& & Mini Glossary Introduction orYou reduce sound quality. Before playing, Mini Glossary for Stream Sound Mode Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Sound Mode can enjoy surround sound simply by selecting one You can enjoy surround sound simply by selecting one one You can enjoy surround sound simply by selecting Surround mode Surround mode Você pode desfrutar do som surround simplesmente selecionando Surround mode You can enjoy surround sound simply by selecting one may be disturbed during playback. In this case, position Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . .. .. 23 Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 You can enjoy surround sound simply by selecting Surround mode Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 one Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 with a clean cloth. Wipe the disc from the centre outYou can enjoy surround sound simply by selecting one Surround mode You can enjoy surround sound simply by selecting one Surround mode of pre-programmed sound fields according toto the & Modo Surround Surround mode ofthe the pre-programmed fields You can enjoy surround sound simply selecting one Surround of thesurround to the You can enjoy simply by Surround Mode of the pre-programmed sound um dos campos de pré-ajustados com the unit away the � Pause .pre-programmed . som . . by . .CD .sound . .and .sound . .fields . sound . .de .according .acordo . fields . according .selecting .Disc .according .according .to..o.the .. one .. ..the 23 Before Use .Mode . . .from . . .. ..the of thean pre-programmed sound fields to wards. Playing Audio MP3/WMA . programa 23the Table of Contents .. .. ..TV, .. .. ..VCR, .. .. .. ..or .. ..radio, .. .. .. .. ..or.. ..turn .. .. ..off .4-5 .3 3 ENG D 33ENG ENG2 CH DD 22CH CH Bypass Bypass Bypass Bypass Bypass Bypass Bypass Bypass 4 ENG DTS 4 ENG 5.1 CH DTS 4 ENG 4 ENG DTS DTS 5.15.1 CHCH 4 ENG DTS 5.1 CH 4 ENG DTS 44ENG ENG 5.1 CH DTS DTS 5.1 5.1CH CH Movie Movie Movie Movie Movie Movie Movie Movie Music Music Music Music Music 2 ENG D 2 ENG 2 CH D 2 CH Music Music Music 1 ENG D 1 ENG 5.1 CH D 5.1 CH 2 ENG 2 ENG D D 2 CH 2 CH 2 ENG D 2 CH 2 ENG D 22ENG ENG2 CH DD 22CH CH Matrix Matrix 1 ENG 1 ENG D D 5.15.1 CHCH 1 ENG D 5.1 CH Matrix Matrix Matrix 1 ENG D 11ENG ENG 5.1 CH DD 5.1 5.1CH CH Preperação and Setup Installation 2 CH 3 ENG 3 ENG D D 2 CH 2 CH 3 ENG D 2 CH Installation and Setup 3 ENG D 3 ENG 2 CH D Installation andInstallation Setup and Setup quality digital audio DTS program sources such as can change the Digital Audio Output mode by and audio compact discs, etc.bearing the from trademark. DTS Digital discs, DVD and compact discs, etc.bearing the tradediscs, DVD and compact discs, etc.bearing the tradeYou can change the Digital Audio Output mode by discs, DVD and compact discs, etc.bearing the tradeA)You Bypressing pressing SOUND button digital from DTS program sources such You can change the Digital Audio mode by Do not use volatile You can change the Digital Audio mode discs, DVD and compact the on the remote want to listen to. Operation .button .. .on ..button ..the ..on .Output .. on ..Output ..remote .the .. remote ..Embora ..control .control ..by .os ..during 24 About Symbols ..and .compact .. .. compact .of ..discs, ..DTS ..such .. ..etc.bearing .etc.bearing ..as .audio(which .. insecticide .as ..etc.bearing .discs, .. ..the .. program ..DVD .trade.spray, 55tradeEach youJPEG press SOUND button, the mode discs, DVD pressing theAUDIO the Surround delivers up to 6and channels transparent pressing the control during �Disc Search. .AUDIO .remoto . AUDIO . AUDIO .sound .button .durante .button .remote . .. remote . .. ..during . during 23during Notes on Discs . liquids, . discs, .discs, .etc.bearing .DTS .up .the . .. .the . .time .you acompact laser, etc. com marca registrada. Digital discs, DVD and compact the tradeÁudio no controle a..is reprodução. condiscs, DVD discs, tradethe button control mark. DTS Digital Surround delivers up to 6 channels ofofpressing andmeans discs, etc.bearing the trademark. Digital mark. DTS Digital Surround delivers to 6 channels pressing the on the control mark. DTS Digital Surround delivers up to 6 channels of pressing theaAUDIO AUDIO button on the remote control during Allows you to enjoy 5.1(or 6) discrete channels of high quality near the unit. Do not leave rubber or plastic products in pressing the AUDIO button on the remote control during identical to Digital theDTS original masters) and results in changed in the following order; mark. DTS Surround delivers up to 66 channels of playback. Although the DVD contents differ from disc toto Viewing JPEG disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 mark. Digital Surround delivers up to 6 channels of playback. Although the DVD contents differ from disc Front Panel and Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 playback. Although the DVD contents differ from disc to JPEG Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 About Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 mark. DTS Digital Surround delivers up to channels of Surround proporciona até 6 canais de áudio transparentes (o que Each time you press SOUND button, the sound mode isdisc mark. DTS Digital Surround delivers up to 6 channels of teúdos de DVD diferem de disco para disco, o que segue explica playback. Although the DVD contents differ from disc to Surround delivers up to 6 channels of transparent audio(which A)the Byto pressing SOUND button digital audio from DTS program sources such as discs, DVD transparent audio(which means identical to original exceptional clarity throughout a true 360 degree sound field. transparent audio(which means identical to the original playback. Although the DVD contents differ from transparent audio(which means identical the original playback. Although the DVD contents differ from disc to contact with the unit for a. long period of time. They playback. Although the contents differ from to to PRO LOGIC � PLIIdisc, MOVIE � PLII MUSIC transparent audio(which means identical the following explains operation transparent audio(which the � in Slide Show .� .explains . order; . estas .. DVD .. .. ..the .the ..the .operation ..basic .operation ..operation ..when .. .usadas. ..when ..disc .. 24 disc, the following basic and compact discs, the trademark. disc, the following explains when Remote Control Overview .means .. .DTS .means .e. Digital .LLC. .. .. clarity ..identical ..to .em ..the ..to ..throughout .original .to .original ..will 76original transparent audio(which means identical to the original The term DTS issão a etc.bearing trademark of DTS Technology, a JPEG disc . .. .basic .the . ..basic . .. .forem .operation . when 24 transparent audio(which identical significa que idênticos aos originais) uma means identical to the original masters) results Front Panel and Rear Panel .exceptional .resulta . in .the . .clareza .time .MATRIX changed the following aViewing operação básica quando características the following explains the masters) and results in exceptional throughout masters) and results in exceptional clarity a�disc, the following explains when PLII ROCK �disc, POP � LIVE � DANCE � masters) and results in. and clarity throughout a Each youapress SOUND button, the sound mode is basic disc, the following explains the basic operation when leave marks on the surface. Surround delivers up to 6 channels of transparent audio(which disc, the following explains the basic operation when masters) and results in exceptional clarity throughout a CAUTION Manufactured under license from DTS Technology, LLC. this feature is used. masters) and results in exceptional clarity throughout a this feature is used. � Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 this feature is used. exceptional clarity throughout a true 360 degree sound field. masters) and results in exceptional clarity throughout a masters) and results in throughout aCLASSIC �this Slide Show ..� ..� . . . .MUSIC . . . . .� . . . . . . . . . . . 24 excepcional num campo exato de 360 O termo DTS uma TECHNO �trade� SOFT � 3D SURROUND thisLOGIC feature isis used. Remote Control Overview .exceptional . results .Stream .graus. .The .in. .term . .clarity . DTS .term . . Sound . is .DTS .trade.in7a means identical to the original masters) and true 360 degree sound field. The the following order; true 360 degree sound field. term DTS is.a.aétradeis.used. PRO �feature PLII MOVIE PLII true 360 degree sound field. The is feature used. Glossary for Audio & Mode this feature is used. true 360 degree sound The term DTS isischanged aDTS tradeRISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK true 360 degree sound field. The term istradea ... trade-this TheMini term DTS is athroughout trademark offield. DTS Technology, LLC. BYPASS exceptional clarity a true 360 degree sound field. � Moving to .. (For ..(For ..canais ..� ..example .example .. (por .. ..example .. exemplo .. ..� .. .. .. .. or . or 24 truemark 360 degree sound field. The term DTS ais tradea) After you select 2 true 360 degree sound field. The term DTS alicença � Still Picture .select . POP .channel . file .2� .(For .dois .DANCE 24 or a)Após After you select 2.channel marca registrada de Tecnologia de DTS, LLC. Fabricado sob A) ter selecionado os a)você After you channel (For PRO LOGIC � PLII MOVIE � PLII MUSIC �another of DTS Technology, LLC. Manufactured under Preparation � ROCK � LIVE PLII MATRIX mark ofMode DTS Technology, LLC. Manufactured under of DTS Technology, LLC. Manufactured under a) After you select 22select channel example or .or DOTechnology, NOT OPEN Themark term DTS ismark a trademark of DTS LLC. a) After you 2 channel (For example or Cleaning the unit of DTS Technology, LLC. Manufactured under (This function available 2-channel mode only) Manufactured under license from DTS Technology, LLC. You can enjoy surround sound simply by selecting one Surround a) After you select channel (For example a) After you select 2 channel (For example mark of DTS Technology, LLC. Manufactured under � ROCK � POP � LIVE � DANCE � PLII MATRIX � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . ..press .. .. ..a..SOUND .SOUND .. or .. .. .. 24 mark of DTS Technology, LLC. Manufactured under mark ofsurround DTS Technology, LLC. Manufactured under The Dolby Digital format lets you enjoy up to 5.1 �� Moving to another file . . . . . . . . 24 DTS Technology, LLC. ou ) ao pressionar a tecla Áudio, pressione tecla license from DTS Technology, LLC. Manufactured under license from DTS Technology, LLC. CLASSIC � SOFT � 3D SURROUND � TECHNO ) by pressing AUDIO button, press license from DTS Technology, LLC. ) by pressing AUDIO button, Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 license from DTS Technology, LLC. ) by pressing AUDIO button, press SOUND Preparation of the pre-programmed sound fields according to license from DTS Technology, LLC. � CLASSICDo � SOFT �by 3Dpressing SURROUND � the such TECHNO ) AUDIO button, press SOUND not use strong solvents as alcohol, benzene, license from DTS Technology, LLC. channels of digital surround sound from a Dolby Digital ) by pressing AUDIO button, press SOUND Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 license from DTS Technology, LLC. ) repetidamente. by pressing AUDIO button, press SOUND license from DTS Technology, LLC. Tips: ...you want )repeatedly. by pressing AUDIO button, press SOUND �... To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 To clean the cabinet BYPASS CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK SOUND button program to listen to. BYPASS button repeatedly. button repeatedly. TVsource. Connections . . 8 Reproduces Connections . .play . . .DVDs .. .. ..with .. .. ..“ .. .. ..”..mark, .. .. .. you .. .. ..can .. .. .. .. .. �.. ..ROCK: 8-13 program If you button thinner, commercially available button repeatedly. therepeatedly. acoustics of2-channel rock music. Repeat Programmed Tracks. .. .. .. .. ..or .. ..anti-static .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 button repeatedly. OF greater ELECTRIC SHOCK (This function available 2-channel mode only) button repeatedly. AllowsUse you to enjoy 5.1(or 6)cloth. discrete of high quality (This function available aDolby soft, dryquality, Ifchannels thespatial surfaces extremely Programmed Playback . . . mode . . cleaners, . .. ..only) 25 even better sound accuracy, and The Dolby Digital format enjoy to Optional Equipment Connections ..are ..BACK) .up .. A) .5.1 ..�By .. ..POP: .. .dirty, ODolby formato Digital Surround desfrutar até canais TV Connections .sources .lets . . you . such . permite . .as . up .discs, . enjoy .(OR .5.1 . .. ..to . 5.1 . 98Reproduces Theenjoy Digital surround format lets you pressing SOUND button theintended acoustics of pop music. digital audio from surround DTS program DVD spray for vinyl records. DO NOT REMOVE COVER Erasing a Track from Programme List . improved dynamic range. use a soft cloth lightly moistened with a mild detergent Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 channels of digital surround sound from a Dolby Digital Tips: and compact discs, etc.bearing the trademark. DTS Digital Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 �.. ..Digital. LIVE: Reproduces the acoustics of a 300-seat live. som digital Surround a partir de uma fonte de programa Dolby The Dolby Digital surround format lets you enjoy up to channels of digital surround sound from a Dolby Digital NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE Optional Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . 9 The Dolby Digital surround format lets you enjoy up to The Dolby Digital surround format lets you enjoy up to Tips: program source. Ifup you DVDs with “ format ” mark, you can time youup press button, the sound mode is The Dolby Digital surround lets you enjoy up toup Erasing the Complete Programme List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 Surround delivers toplay 6 channels of transparent audio(which solution. Do not use strong solvents such asEach alcohol, Erasing a Track from Programme List 25 The Dolby Digital surround enjoy to SOUND �you ROCK: Reproduces the acoustics of rock music. The Dolby Digital lets you up � the acoustics of dance music. The Dolby Digital surround lets you enjoy toReproduces REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED Speaker System Connection .“.. .in .format .sound .and . lets .from . ..changed .can 11-12 5.1 channels ofofsurround digital a Se5.1 você reproduzir DVDs com marca ”.”.,.mark, você pode program source. Ifthe you play DVDs with “accuracy, enjoy even better quality, greater spatial 5.1 channels digital surround adesfrutar Dolby means identical tosound original masters) and Aerial Connections .of . a.digital .surround . format . results . .format .sound ..SERVICE .sound .from .enjoy ..the .POP: .Dolby .DANCE: . to 10 in Dolby the following After you select 5.1 channel b) 5.1 surround from a After you select 5.1 channel example or b)order; About Symbols After you select 5.1 or b) � ROCK: Reproduces the of rock channels of digital surround sound from ayou Dolby � the acoustics of pop music. DivX Disc Operation .techno .5.1 .acoustics .o.channel .channel . (For .(For .5.1 . (For .example .(For .List .example .example . .music. .. .. .or . 26 benzene, orchannels thinner, as these might damage surface After you select 5.1 channel (For example b) 5.1 channels of digital surround sound from aReproduces Dolby Erasing the Complete Programme . .. ..or � TECHNO: Reproduces the acoustics of PERSONNEL. b) Após você ter selecionado canal (por exemplo ou improved dynamic range. After you select or b) 5.1 channels of digital surround sound from a Dolby exceptional clarity throughout asource. true 360 degree sound field. 5.1 channels of digital surround sound from a.and Dolby After you select 5.1 channel (For(For example or .or. 25 enjoy even better sound quality, greater spatial accuracy, After select 5.1 channel example b) � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Digital program If you play DVDs with “ ” da melhor qualidade, exatidão espacial e uma faixa dinâmica mePRO LOGIC � PLII b) MOVIE � PLII you MUSIC � Digital program source. If you play DVDs with “ ” Speaker System Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Digital program source. If you play DVDs with “ ” � LIVE: Reproduces the acoustics of a 300-seat live. Use this mode when playing movie or Dolby Digital 2 channel source. IfTechnology, you play DVDs with “ with ”” “ ” �”Speaker POP:Disc Reproduces acoustics TheDigital term DTS is a trademark of DTSsource. Setup .pressing . .the .tecla ..AUDIO .. ..Áudio, .. AUDIO .. .button, .. .. of .. .button, .press .. .. ..music. .SOUND ..SOUND .. ..button. .button. music. ofdynamic theprogram unit. )Operation by SOUND Digital program If LLC. you play DVDs DivX .AUDIO .button, . pop . press . .. .. SOUND. . 27 26 button. )pressionar by ). by pressing Digital program source. Ifeven you play DVDs )�by aoLIVE a. � a..press tecla Digital source. If. you � ROCK �pressing DANCE PLII improved range. pressing AUDIO button, press SOUND button. mark, you can enjoy even better sound �..“..DANCE: � channel Transmitter .with ..quality, ..with .quality, .“.greater .greater the )acoustics music. lhorada. mark, you can enjoy better which carries the “program ”amark. mode the Manufactured under license from ) of bydance pressing AUDIOpressione button, press SOUND button. mark, you even greater� POP � Changing Transmitter. .can . DTS .This .enjoy .Technology, . .of .provides . . play .LLC. .better .sound .DVDs .effect . sound . quality, .MATRIX . 11 11Reproduces Matrix Matrix Matrix � CLASSIC: by pressing AUDIO button, SOUND the acoustics ofbe )indicator by pressing AUDIO button, SOUND mark, you can enjoy even better sound quality, greater � Reproduces LIVE: Reproduces the acoustics of a live. Additional .displayed .. na ..be .. tela ..displayed .. ..da .press ..TV. ..press ..300-seat .on .TV ..screen. ..TV .. ..button. .. .. button. .. 28 � greater CLASSIC � SOFT TECHNO mark, you can enjoy even better sound - -the “ “)� ”3D indicator will on the TV Speaker Setup . indicator . .techno .will .� .orchestral . will . displayed .on .screen. . .the . screen. 27 mark, you can enjoy even better sound greater ”-Information be the “ ””will será exibido mark, you can enjoy even better sound �. quality, acoustics of “ SURROUND screen. About the symbol display of being in a movie theatre concert house-an effect with spatial accuracy, and improved This flash with arrowhead symbol within an Reproduces � Setting alightning ID oflive Transmitter . dynamic . .channel . . quality, .dynamic .. .quality, .range. ..range. .music. .....11 ---“o“ indicador ””indicator be on the TV spatial accuracy, and improved spatial accuracy, and improved � Changing aorbe channel of Transmitter .range. .BYPASS . ..TECHNO: . greater 11 -Reproduces ” indicator willdisplayed be displayed TV screen. Usespatial this mode when movie orand Dolby Digital 2dynamic accuracy, improved dynamic range. indicator bedisplayed displayed on the TV screen. Pro logic (II) “BYPASS ”“-Information indicator will be the TV Tospatial obtain aplaying clear picture Last Memory ..be .be .only ..on ..displayed ..of .on .the .. .screen. .. ..the .the .do ..the 28 � Additional DANCE: the music. spatial accuracy, improved dynamic range. an intensity which can onlyand obtained through DOLBY PRO music. --indicador ” ”will indicator will displayed display .will .acoustics . .will .only . ..be . ..dance .na .on . ..on .display 28display -“acoustic “Condition BYPASS indicator on spatial accuracy, and improved dynamic range. accuracy, and improved dynamic range. “”BYPASS ”will indicator only displayed O “BYPASS” será exibido somente janela equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user (This function available 2-channel mode only) � SOFT: Ideal for soft sounds. “ BYPASS indicator be only displayed on the display � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11 which carries the “surround ”Receiver mark. This mode provides - “Saver BYPASS displayed the display �Digital Setting aThe ID of Transmitter .to.the . .effect .precision . larga, . . .�. a.CLASSIC: .device. . . 11 LOGIC SURROUND. effect front/back/left/right -Screen “BYPASS ” indicator will be displayed display The Dolby format letsof you enjoy up 5.1 the acoustics orchestral “window. BYPASS ” .of indicator will be on Dolby Pro Logic II cria 5 presence canais dethe saída de banda partir de Reproduces DVD/CD is aof high-tech, The .on .” .indicator . . the .TV . ..only .will ..be .. ..only .displayed .. ..of .. ..on ..operation. ..the .. .. the ..on .. ..display .. 28 window. � TECHNO: Reproduces acoustics techno “ Display. ” -may appear the screen window. Last Condition Memory . .. only .during 28 about the uninsulated dangerous of being in movie theatre or live concert house-an window. of the sound image, as as the of � Connections. .Dolby . sense .oeffect .uso .drive . the .with .fixed .parts . 2. Tips: . .are . . .dirty 12 channels ofaSpeaker digital surround sound from a Dolby Digital window. music. � Assembling and Connecting to Speakers 11 window. Usemovement this mode when playing movie or.com Digital channel (II) Iffonte the optical pick-up lens and disc uma de dois canais. Isso éwell feito do decodificador de (II) Controlling the.the TV .. .. .. .. .. .. explained .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..in.. .this .. .. .. .. 28 B) Bybe pressing button (II) an intensity which can only be through DOLBY PRO PLicon IIwindow. music. the enclosure that may This means Screen Saver . .music. .function . .. .. ..owner’s 28 position in the sound isobtained much clearer more dynamic (II) program source. Ifvoltage youimage, playwithin DVDs with “product’s ” and mark, you can � SOFT: Ideal for soft acoustic sounds. (II) Speaker Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 � ROCK: Reproduces the acoustics of rock (II) (II) � Speaker Connections. .five .accuracy, .constitute .full-bandwidth .provides . .and . . a. .risk . . of .espaciais . electric . . 12 � Operation LOGIC SURROUND. The ofque the front/back/left/right When CD is which thePro “ sufficient ”effect mark. This mode the effect When Video CD is inserted or worn, the picture quality will be poor. When Video CD somcarries deDolby matriz de alta pureza extrai as propriedades of to than before. enjoy even better sound quality, greater spatial with Radio ..on .inserted .is .is .inserted .specific .DVD-Video .. .. .. .. .. .. .. disc. .. 29 Logic IImagnitude output CLASSIC: Reproduces the acoustics manual isVideo not available Video CD is inserted time youWhen press button, the sound Controlling the TV .is .inserted . that .mode . ..inserted . .. .. .. .. ..of . ..orchestral 28 Dolby Pro Logic IIcreates creates five full-bandwidth output PL IIVideo Dolby Pro creates five full-bandwidth output �. Each POP: the acoustics of popCD music. When Video movement the sound image, as Dolby Pro Logic creates full-bandwidth When Video CD isCD inserted Before .Logic .Logic .II.. II .five .five .sense .full-bandwidth .fixed .recommended . ..output .By 14-19 When Dolby Pro full-bandwidth output improved dynamic range. Speaker Positioning. .II.as ..creates .well .creates .. ..the .qualquer .full-bandwidth .. .five .. .of. .som ..This .. .novo .effect . ou .is .output .pressing . Reproduces 13 of being inchannels aofOperation movie theatre or live concert house-an with Each time you press SOUND shock toIIIIispersons. Dolby Pro Logic creates five output Regular inspection and maintenance are Dolby Pro Logic Each time you press SOUND button, the button da gravação original sem acrescentar tons de inusing PLfollowing II Quando um VCD ou um CD de áudio changed the order; Each time you press SOUND mode Presetting the radio stations ..button, .é. .inserido ..the ..button, .. the .sound .. ..sound ..sound .the .mode .. sound ..mode ..mode .. 29 from two-channel sources. isB) done using � music. LIVE: Reproduces the acoustics of aRadio 300-seat live. position in the sound image, much clearer and more dynamic channels from two-channel sources. This is done using Operation with . . . . . . . . . . 29 Each time you press SOUND button, channels from two-channel sources. This is done Each time you press SOUND button, the sound mode channels from two-channel sources. This is done using Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Surround Each time you press SOUND button, the sound mode Each time you press SOUND button, the sound mode of Video CD is changed on the display window in the channels from two-channel sources. This is done using an intensity which can only be obtained through DOLBY PRO Before Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 of Video CD is changed on the display window in the channels from two-channel sources. This is done using of Video CD is changed on the display window in the after every 1,000 hours of use. (This depends on the than before. channels from two-channel sources. This is done using (II) � DANCE: Reproduces the acoustics of dance music. coloração. PRO LOGIC � that PLII MOVIE � PLII MUSIC � Aof cada da tecla Sound, o.. ..modo do Vídeo CD Listening to the radio . .the . . for .sounds. .. .. ..display ..de .. ..som .. .. .window .. ..the ..in.. .the 29 of Video CD is changed on display window in Each time you press button, the sound mode an high-purity matrix surround decoder that PLacionamento IIIdeal anadvanced, advanced, high-purity matrix surround decoder that� About the disc symbols instructions SOFT: for soft acoustic Presetting the radio stations . . 29 an advanced, high-purity matrix surround decoder of Video CD is changed on the in the Video CD is changed on the display window in the an advanced, high-purity matrix surround decoder that of Video CD is changed on the display window following order. Mode . .IIThe .advanced, . .exclamation .high-purity .The .five . .Audio .effect . . mark .matrix . of . matrix . within .the .surround .& . front/back/left/right .channels . equilateral .surround . .decoder . . decoder . .changed .triangle . that .MATRIX 14that following order. an LOGIC SURROUND. an high-purity matrix decoder that following order. � TECHNO: the acoustics of PLII �following BYPASS ... Mini Glossary for Stream Surround Dolby Pro Logic creates full-bandwidth output an advanced, operating environment.) is in Reproduces the following order; an advanced, high-purity surround order. Modo de FILME: muda naFunctions. seguinte ordem; extracts the spatial properties ofof the original recording Other . techno . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 following order. extracts the spatial properties the original recording extracts spatial properties the original recording following order. Listening toSTUDIO the radio 29 Useextracts this mode when playing movie or Dolby Digital channel following order. the spatial recording issources. intended user about of from two-channel This using advanced, function available 2-channel mode only) music. movement ofdetails, the sound image, as sense BYPASS → → CLUB → HALL → Sound Mode .the .the ..properties .to .is. alert ..done .. as .. .the .well ..of ..an ..the ..nearest .2.the .original .of .of .the ..dealer. ..presence ..recording .of ..(This .fixed .. ..recording 14 extracts spatial properties the original BYPASS → STUDIO → CLUB → HALL → (II) A section whose title has one of the following symbol is BYPASS → STUDIO → CLUB → HALL → Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 PRO LOGIC � PLII MOVIE � PLII MUSIC � extracts the spatial properties of the original For please contact your extracts the spatial properties of the original recording → STUDIO → HALL Ocarries modo dewithout usado com em televisão estéreo e Reproduces without adding any new sounds or tonal colorations. STUDIO HALL THEATER I BYPASS Sleep Timer Setting .button .. .CLUB .→ .→ .PL ..HALL ..ll..llHALL ..MOVIE ..→ ..HALL .. ..→..→ ..→ .→ .. .. .. 30 which the “Filme ”émark. This mode provides the effect without adding any new sounds or tonal colorations. BYPASS → STUDIO → CLUB → high-purity matrix surround decoder thatexibição extracts the spatial B)BYPASS ByTHEATER pressing adding sounds or tonal colorations. PL II. CLUB Other Functions. .1orchestral .→ .CLUB . .CLUB .→ .→ . PL . .. .. → 30 � CLASSIC: acoustics of BYPASS → STUDIO → important operating and BYPASS → STUDIO → → 11CHURCH → CHURCH without adding any new sounds or colorations. position inin the sound image, clearer and more THEATER → CHURCH � BYPASS ... the PLII Dolby Pro Logic II creates full-bandwidth channels THEATER → CHURCH →MOVIE PL llby MOVIE On-Screen Display .any .. .new .new ..output ..maintenance ..or .. tonal .any .. ..new .with ..colorations. ..tonal ..(servicing) ..dynamic .. ..When ..MATRIX .. .. 15 without adding any sounds colorations. applicable only to the disc represented the symbol. THEATER 11PLII → → llPL MOVIE DVD is inserted. without adding any new Sound Mode .five . codificados .any .inis.concert .much .sounds .house-an .em .tonal .or 14 of being aos movie theatre or live effect without adding new sounds or tonal colorations. properties of the original recording without adding → → ll.. MOVIE todos programas, Surround. O music. resultado CHURCH MUSIC Dimmer .MUSIC .→ .1PL .PL .→ .ll .MTRX ..PLII .→ .ll.PL .PL ..→ .→ .. .ll ..MOVIE .PLII .→ .MTRX .. .. .. .. 30 THEATER → CHURCH MOVIE THEATER 1.MOVIE CHURCH → PL llllTHEATER MUSIC → from two-channel sources. This is done using anDolby advanced, instructions the instructions accompanying the available (This function 2-channel mode only) MOVIE mode: Sleep Timer Setting .II→ .MTRX .ll..BYPASS... .PL .BYPASS... .→ . .. .→ . .. .. → 30 PL MUSIC → llCHURCH MTRX BYPASS... MOVIE mode: PL ll.→ PL → thansounds MOVIE mode: anbefore. intensity which can only be obtained through DOLBY PRO orOn-Screen tonal colorations. PL ll MUSIC PL ll MTRX BYPASS... Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19 Each time you press button, the sound mode MOVIE mode: PL PL ll MUSIC → PL ll MTRX → BYPASS... You can change the sound mode of DVD (Dolby Digital, DTS, Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 MOVIE mode: high-purity matrix surround decoder that extracts the spatial � SOFT: Ideal for softDVD-V Indicates to PL llacoustic MUSIC ll.. finalized PL ll MUSIC MTRX → MOVIE mode: é um som de campo melhorado direcionado parastereo chegar a DVD MOVIE mode: and product. BYPASS .....→ Mute . DVD .sounds. ..hazards ..PL .→ .MTRX .. .. ..→..DVD±R/RW. ..BYPASS... .. cause ..BYPASS... .. .. .. .. harm .. .. .. .. ..to .. ..the .. .. ..unit .. 30 LOGIC SURROUND. The effect ofisfor the front/back/left/right The Movie mode is with stereo . .. PL . ..ll..likely 30 The Movie mode for use with stereo television MOVIE The Movie mode is use with inserted. properties of the original recording without by Dimmer pressingin thethe AUDIO button onorder; the remote �mode: General Operation .is.adding .use .with .shows . ..new . ..television .stereo . .television . ..PRO .television . LOGIC, 16 isisetc) The Movie mode is for use stereo changed following Initial Settings .de .with .programs .stereo .for .5.1 ..use .television .with ..for ..use .any .stereo ..stereo .fixed .When ..television 16-19 The Movie mode for with movement of the sound image, as well as the sense of itself damage. The Movie mode isprograms The Movie mode iscanal for use and all. . television ote The Movie mode is for use with qualidade do som ote Using the Headphone sounds or tonal colorations. ote shows and all encoded inin.television Dolby Surround. during playback. Mute .or .DVD .other . (Dolby .Audio . .material . Digital, . .discs. . . DTS, .Jack . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 shows and all encoded Dolby Surround. shows and all programs encoded inYou Dolby Surround. ote B) By pressing button can change the sound mode of PLDVD-A IIote DVD ote position in the sound image, is much clearer and more dynamic programs encoded in Dolby Surround. The result is enhanced shows and all programs encoded in Dolby Surround. � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 (II) ote shows all programs encoded Dolby � General Operation . .encoded .soundfield .OR . . .ELECTRIC .ofin . discrete . Dolby .in . .Dolby .inSHOCK .Surround. . .Although . LOGIC, . . Surround. 16 WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE After you select the “Bypass” LOGIC � PLII MOVIE � PLII MOVIE mode: shows and all programs the DVD contents differ from disc to disc, the After you select the “Bypass” by shows and all programs encoded Surround. Modo de MÚSICA: After you select the “Bypass” by PRO etc)PRO by pressing the AUDIO button on the remote Selecting the Input Source . MUSIC ..of .of ..sound .sound ..of .� ..sound ..mode .mode ..mode ..mode .by .. .. .by Disc Handling The result isand enhanced directionality that soundfield directionality that approaches the qualitysoundfield The result is enhanced soundfield directionality that than before. After you select the “Bypass” of sound mode Using theyou Headphone Jack . (playback .of .mode . ..by .by . 30 30 The result is enhanced directionality that After select the “Bypass” sound Each time you press button, the sound mode PL II The Movie mode is for use with stereo television shows and all The result is enhanced soundfield directionality that VCD2.0 Video CDs with the PBC control) � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 After you select the “Bypass” of sound by Indicates special operating features of this unit. After you select the “Bypass” of sound mode following explains the basic operation when this feature is otas: HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK The result is directionality that playback. pressing button, press AUDIO 5.1-channel sound. � Language .five . quality . enhanced .full-bandwidth . The .soundfield . result .ofsoundfield . .discrete .soundfield . gravação . .output . .5.1-channel . . .com . during . .música . .that . sound. 16 �SOUND BYPASS ... Sound) PLII MATRIX Dolbyprograms Pro Logic IIresult creates channels pressing SOUND button, press button. The result directionality pressing SOUND button, The is.the enhanced directionality that O modo Música é enhanced para uso em qualquer encoded inis Dolby Surround. is enhanced XTS (Excellent True .press .AUDIO ..AUDIO .. .button. .. .. ..button. ..button. .. .. .. .. 30 approaches pressing SOUND button, press AUDIO button. approaches the quality discrete 5.1-channel sound. is in the following order; Selecting theSOUND Source .AUDIO . .press . AUDIO . .. ..AUDIO .button. 30 approaches the discrete sound. DO OPEN pressing button, used. Although DVD contents differ from disc toInput disc, the pressing SOUND button, press button. approaches function. pressing SOUND button, press MUSIC MOISTURE. � Audio. . .the .the . ..the .NOT .quality .discrete .of . of .ofof .5.1-channel . .. disc. . .5.1-channel . ..changed . . the 17 Do not touch the playback side directionality that approaches the quality discrete The Left, Right and Stereo ofof audio channel will be approaches quality sound. from soundfield two-channel sources. advanced, (This function available 2-channel mode only) The Left, Right Stereo audio channel will be �mode: Display .. .. quality ..quality .This .. ..is.of .done .discrete .of .. discrete .using .of ..discrete .the .an ..5.1-channel .. .. .5.1-channel ..sound. 16-17 The Left, Right and of. .audio channel will be approaches of 5.1-channel sound. approaches the quality sound. Após selecionar do de som, ao (II) estéreo. The Left, Right Stereo of audio XTS pro .when .“BYPASS” .and .Right .sound .and . . and .Stereo .Sound) . modo .of .Stereo .audio .making ..audio ..of .channel .channel .. ..pressionar ..will .. .. ..be .. .. .will 30 following explains the basic operation this feature is PRO LOGIC �you PLII MOVIE �The PLII MUSIC � The Music mode is for use with any stereo music recordings. 5.1-channel sound. Left, Stereo audio channel be XTS (Excellent True . . . . .a.. tecla 30 Each time press AUDIO button, the mode of DVD is MUSIC mode: Indicates tips and hints for the task easier. The Left, Right and Stereo channel will be MUSIC mode: The Left, Right and of will be MUSIC mode: displayed on the TV screen. high-purity matrix surround decoder that extracts the spatial � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Hold the disc by the edges so that fingerprints will not displayed onCDs the TV screen. VCD1.1 Video without the PBC (playback control) displayed on the TV screen. MUSIC mode: � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 used. � BYPASS ... PLII MATRIX Dolby Pro Logic II creates five full-bandwidth output channels MUSIC mode: displayed on the TV screen. MUSIC mode: MATRIX mode: SOUND, pressione a tecla Áudio. Esquerdo (Left) , Direito (Right) e CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK Modo MATRIZ: following order; changed in the MUSIC mode: MUSIC mode: displayed on the TV screen. WARNING: Do not install this equipment inany a confined space XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 When DVD is inserted. displayed on the TV screen. The Music mode is for use with stereo music displayed on the TV screen. The Music mode is for use with any stereo music properties of the original recording without adding any new The Music mode is for use with any stereo music from two-channel sources. This is done using an advanced, (This function available 2-channel mode only) get on the surface. The Music mode is for use with any stereo music recordings. � Others . Music . same . . OF .is.as .for . . use . .is. with .mode ..SHOCK ..use ..any .. ..with ..stereo .that ..the .. ..music .stereo .. .. time .. .. 19 TheThe Matrix mode is the the Music except function. Music mode Each you press AUDIO button, the sound mode of DVD is �as Lock (Parental Control) . .. any .do 18 ELECTRIC The for music Estéreo do canal de áudio seráfrom exibido na Laboratories. tela da TV. “Dolby”, The Music isismode for with any stereo music Oormodo émode igual ao modo Música, com exceção modo such aMatriz book case or similar unit. The Music mode is for use with any music Manufactured under license Dolby high-purity matrix surround decoder thatuse extracts the spatial directional enhancement logic turned off. It may be used to stereo sounds tonal colorations. recordings. � � � When CD is inserted MATRIX mode: recordings. following order; in the changed When CD is inserted recordings. When CD is inserted Do not stick tape the disc. can change the sound mode of DVD (Dolby Digital, DTS, DO NOT REMOVE COVER recordings. When CD is inserted inserted. �of Others . paper .same . .making .as .or . without .them .ser . .seem .on . .“larger.” . any . .(OR .that . .BACK) . . . . When . . . . .DVD 19 isYou enhance mono signals by The properties the desativado. original recording adding new recordings. CD Audio When CD is inserted “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks Dolby The Matrix mode is the the Music mode except the recordings. direcional Pode usado para melhorar sinais recordings. When CD isyou inserted When CD isCDs. inserted MOVIE mode: Language Code List .press .SOUND .the . . AUDIO . . .button, . . .button .button, . the .the . .on .sound .the .of. sound .remote .mode . 31mode Matrixor mode may alsoUSER-SERVICEABLE find use in autooff. systems, where NO PARTS PRO LOGIC, etc) by pressing the Each time press SOUND sound mode MATRIX mode: sounds tonal colorations. directional enhancement logic ismode: turned It may be usedthe toINSIDEYou can change � the � � Each time you press button, MATRIX mode: Each time you SOUND MATRIX sound mode of DVD (Dolby Digital, DTS, Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright 1992Each time you press SOUND button, the sound mode MATRIX mode: fluctuations from poor FM stereo reception can otherwise cause MP3 TheMOVIE Movie mode is for use with stereo television shows and all MP3 disc. mono, os fazendo parecer “maior.” O Modo também pode Each time you press SOUND button, the sound mode MATRIX mode: enhance mono signals by making them seem “larger.” Thematriz Each time you press SOUND button, the sound mode MATRIX mode: REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE mode: Each time you press SOUND button, the sound MATRIX mode: Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .mode ..the 31 during playback. of Audio CD is changed on the display window in PRO LOGIC, etc) by pressing the AUDIO button on the remote The Matrix mode islogic the same as the Music mode Language Code List .changed . rights . the .on . .display . .on . display .the . .window .display . .window . . .inwindow . .the .in . the 31 ofDolby Audio CD isCD changed the 1997 Laboratories. All reserved. of Audio is in the The Matrix mode is the same as the Music mode disturbing surround signals from amode decoder. The ultimate The Matrix is the same as the Music mode Matrix mode may also find use in auto systems, where the Quando um CD é inserido of Audio CD is changed on programs encoded in Dolby Surround. The result is enhanced The Matrix mode is the same as the Music mode The Movie mode is for use with stereo television shows and all DVD or Video CD Operation .the . otherwise . as .same .tothe .as . cause .the . the . .the . .de . For .recepção 19-22 ofCD Audio CD on .the display window in the The Matrix mode isbe as Music mode serThe usado em sistemas automáticos onde flutuações PERSONNEL. during playback. of Audio is changed display in the of Audio CD is order. display the Matrix mode is the same Music mode your reference WMA disc. “cure” forexcept poor FM stereo reception simply force fluctuations from poor FM stereo reception can The Matrix mode ismay the same Music mode WMA following order. Although the DVD contents Troubleshooting .changed .is.. .changed . .differ . on .on . ..the .window .disc, . .. ..the 32-33 following order. programs encoded in Dolby Surround. The result is enhanced that the directional enhancement logic is following Country Code List ..from .. .the .from ..o..disc .modo ..Theater .. .to .de .. .window ..do .. ..Vídeo .in .Inc. . 31 except that the directional enhancement logic is soundfield directionality that approaches the quality of discrete except that the directional enhancement logic is following order. A cada acionamento da tecla Sound, som CD Manufactured under license Digital Systems, Although the DVD contents differ from disc to disc, the except that the directional enhancement logic is disturbing surround signals from a logic decoder. The ultimate audio to mono. following order. Playing apodem DVD and Video .of..odiscrete . decodificador . .. .. .. ..logic . .. logic .•..isde .logic . is19 soundfield directionality that approaches the CD. quality except that the directional enhancement is following order. FM estéreo ocorrer, prejudicando following order. DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . 19-22 except that the directional enhancement following explains the basic operation when this feature is except that the directional enhancement The DVD/CD receiver memorizes the last mode Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 5.1-channel sound. → STUDIO → CLUB → HALL → BYPASS For your reference off. Itreception may be toto mono signals “cure” for turned poor FMturned stereo may be simply toenhance force JPEG disc. → STUDIO BYPASS JPEG Troubleshooting . feature .5,956,674, . .CLUB .→ . .CLUB . .→ . .CLUB .→ . .HALL .→ . .5,978,762 .→ . . . .→ . .and 32-33 US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,974,380, following explains the basic operation when this is turned off. Itoff. may beused used enhance mono signals → STUDIO HALL BYPASS It. used may be to.the enhance mono signals sound. muda na ordem seguinte; → → → HALL BYPASS turned off. Itoff. may be enhance 3D5.1-channel SURROUND →CHURCH STUDIO → CLUB →→ HALL → “DTS BYPASS General .be . .used . to .to .used .used .recepção .symbol turned off. It. “cura” may be signals audio to mono. settings for each source individually. sinais pro logic. A última para aenhance FM estéreo →STUDIO STUDIO CLUB HALL BYPASS used. Playing aFeatures DVD and Video CD. ..enhance ..to ..The .enhance ..mono .mono .. ..mono ..•used. ..signals ..mono .20-22 .signals .fraca 19 → STUDIO → → BYPASS turned off. Itmaking may be used signals THEATER 1patents → → ll.llHALL MOVIE turned Itthem may to other worldwide issued and THEATER 1CHURCH CHURCH PL MOVIE This lightning flash with arrowhead within an THEATER → CHURCH ll→ MOVIE MUSIC mode: The DVD/CD receiver memorizes the mode MUSIC mode: by making them seem “larger.” The Matrix mode may by making seem “larger.” Matrix mode may Specifications .→ .1last .1→ .→ .CHURCH .of .→ . CLUB .PL .→ .→llPL .llpending. .→ .→ .PL .ll→ . “DTS” . .→.→ .→and . .→ .→ . . . 34 CAUTION: bythem them seem “larger.” The Matrix mode may THEATER 11→ MOVIE DivX DivX disc. STUDIO HALL THEATER I BYPASS THEATER PL MOVIE by making seem “larger.” The Matrix mode may This unit produce ato 3Danother Surround effect, using 3D Surround •..mode You can identify the encoding format program THEATER → CHURCH →CLUB PL MOVIE → → Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater �can Moving TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . 20 THEATER 1 → CHURCH → PL ll MOVIE Music mode is for use with any stereo music recordings. by making them seem “larger.” The Matrix mode may PL ll MUSIC → PL ll MTRX → BYPASS... 3DThe SURROUND PL ll MUSIC → PL ll MTRX → BYPASS... pode forçar o áudio para mono. Each time you press AUDIO button, the sound mode of DVD is by making them seem “larger.” The Matrix mode may The Music mode is for use with any stereo music recordings. General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22 PL ll MUSIC → PL ll MTRX → BYPASS... settings for each source individually. by making them seem “larger.” The Matrix may equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user Each you press AUDIO button, the→ sound mode of DVD is also find use inin auto where the fluctuations lltime → PL llllMTRX BYPASS... also find use auto systems, where thechanged fluctuations Sound technology, which simulates multi-channel audio also find use in systems, auto systems, where the fluctuations llPLII MUSIC →1996, ll → MTRX This DVD/CD receiver employs ausing laser Systems, Inc. Copyright 2000 Theater Systems, software byPL looking at its packaging. PL llMUSIC MUSIC → PL →MUSIC BYPASS... also find use in auto systems, where the fluctuations MATRIX mode: CHURCH MOVIE PLII BYPASS... PLII MTRX PL llPL MUSIC → PL llPL MTRX →Digital BYPASS... following order; in the This unit can produce ato 3D Surround effect, 3Dsystem. Surround also find use in auto systems, where fluctuations •.. the You can identify the encoding format ofMTRX program � Moving another CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . 20 about the presence of uninsulated dangerous also find use in auto systems, where the fluctuations � Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . 20 also find use in auto systems, where the fluctuations playback from two conventional stereo speakers instead of the MATRIX mode: following order; changed in the The Matrix mode poor is the same the Music mode reception except that the from FM stereo reception can otherwise Inc.discs Allatrights reserved. from poor FMas stereo reception can otherwise cause from poor FM stereo can otherwise cause Sound technology, which simulates multi-channel audio - cause Dolby Digital arepackaging. labeled with the logo. from poor FM stereo reception can otherwise cause by looking its To ensure proper use of product, please read owner’s For BYPASS ... five or more speakers normally required to.ItMusic listen multidirectional enhancement logic is turned off. to poor FM stereo reception otherwise cause voltage within the product’s enclosure be The Matrix mode is the same the mode except � Slow Motion. .stereo .this .as . speakers .CHAPTER/TRACK .reception .may . instead . be .to .used . can .otherwise .the .can . . that .this ..that .software .. -..the .Dolby 20 � � �reference your from poor FM stereo reception can cause from poor FM stereo otherwise For your reference � Moving to another .may .cause 20The playback from twofrom conventional of For your reference disturbing surround from awith decoder. Surround encoded programs are labeled with disturbing surround signals from alogic logic decoder. The For your reference BYPASS disturbing surround signals from a logic decoder. TheFor enhance mono signals by making them seem “larger.” The -ofto Dolby discs are labeled withreference the channel audio from a home theatre. feature works manual carefully and retain itsignals forlisten future Should theDigital your surround signals from areference. logic decoder. The directional enhancement logic isThis turned off. Ita may be used Para suaFor referência For your reference of sufficient magnitude to a risk electric � � logo. � fiveMatrix or disturbing more speakers normally required to toconstitute multiyour reference disturbing surround signals from a logic decoder. The � Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20 disturbing surround signals from logic decoder. The mode may also find use in auto systems, where the disturbing surround signals from a logic decoder. The � Slow Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 • • You can identify the format of thede DVD discs encoded Dolby Pro Logic and Dolby Digital ultimate “cure” for poor FM stereo reception may be - Dolby Surround encoded arethe labeled with You can identify theencoding encoding format ofprogram program • programs You can identify the encoding format of program ultimate “cure” for poor FM stereo reception may be •logo. ultimate “cure” for poor FM stereo reception may beYou Software com sinais áudio de multicanal surround é service reproduzido enhance mono signals by making them seem “larger.” The channel audio from a with home theatre. This feature works with unit require maintenance, contact an authorized locacan identify encoding format of program ON COPYRIGHTS: fluctuations from poor FM stereo reception can shock to persons. ultimate “cure” for • pode You can identify the encoding format of program • •OTES Você identificar o the formato de codificação software, ultimate “cure” for poor stereo may be• Surround audio tracks. You can identify the encoding format of program � Search. .force .find .from . Pro .poor .Frame-by-Frame .in .FM .and . stereo .stereo .otherwise . FM .mono. .ultimate .reception .cause .where . Playback . . reception . the .may . .the .be 20 You can identify encoding of program ultimate “cure” for poor FM reception may -.may DTS Digital discs are with ultimate “cure” for poor FM stereo reception be software by looking at its packaging. logo. DVD discs with Dolby Logic Dolby Digital �encoded Still Picture and .be 20 software bymarked looking atDTS. itsat packaging. Matrix mode may also use auto systems, disturbing surround signals a.the logic decoder. The simply to the audio to mono. software by looking its format packaging. tion (see service procedure). simply to force audio to simply to force the audio to mono. acordo com o modo em que foi gravado. software by looking at its packaging. It is forbidden by law to copy , broadcast, , broadcast simply to the software by looking at packaging. itsshow packaging. audio tracks. your reference verificando sua embalagem. “cure” for FM stereo reception be the simply to audio to software by looking at its by looking at packaging. its Digital Surround discs are marked with DTS. BYPASS fluctuations from poor stereo can � poor Repeat .FM .the .force . audio .audio .may . the .reception .to .simply .mono. .to. to.mono. .force . mono. . otherwise . . . . . For . .-cause .DTS . . 20 simply toforce force to mono. -software Dolby Digital discs are labeled with the logo. simply to. force the audio 5.1 CH About the symbols for instructions Notes on Discs CAUTION Operation Operation Reference Reference - Dolby discs are labeled with the - Dolby Digital discs arewith labeled with the logo.logo. Search. . . . adjustments, . . . . . mark . . . .within . .carrying . .an . . equilateral . out . . .procedures . . . triangle . . . 20 discs labeled the logo. The exclamation audio to�mono. via--cable, play inDigital public, orare rent copyrighted material without Performing controls, or - Digital Dolby Digital discs are labeled the logo. Dolby are labeled withcom thewith logo. disturbing surround signals from logic The ultimate receiver thediscs last mode BYPASS Dolby Digital discs are labeled with the logo. - Dolby Dolby discos Digitais estão identificados oare logotipo .with Note: --memorizes Surround encoded programs with Software with multichannel played � Repeat A-B .to ..audio .. .a. .the .. .may ..decoder. ..is..result .. .. .. ..in .the .hazardous .. •.. .The .. .. DVD/CD ..radi21 - Dolby Dolby Surround encoded programs arelabeled labeled -Digital Dolby Surround encoded programs are labeled with �than Repeat .specified .surround . ..reception . .. alert .signals .user . to . ..force .settings 20for For is intended about presence of permission. Dolby Surround encoded programs are labeled with other those herein 3D SURROUND Dolby Surround encoded programs are labeled with your reference “cure” for poor FM stereo may be simply the each source individually. according to the way it wassurround recorded. � Sound Mode is not applicable when headphones are used. Dolby Surround encoded programs are labeled with Note: Dolby Surround encoded programs are labeled with Software with multichannel audio signals is played the logo. Dolby Surround programas codificados estão identificados com the logo. the logo. � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 About the symbols for instructions important operating BYPASS This product features the copy protection function developed � Repeat . . . . effect, . . .and .using . .maintenance .3D . .Surround . . . . . .(servicing) . •�. You .Sound . . can . 21 the logo. ation BYPASS This unit can produce a A-B 3Drecorded. Surround audio toBYPASS mono. identify the encoding format of logo. program according toexposure. the way it was Mode is not applicable when headphones are used. the BYPASS the logo. the logo. BYPASS DTS Digital Surround discs are marked with DTS. BYPASS • The DVD/CD receiver memorizes the last mode DTS Digital Surround discs are marked with DTS. BYPASS o logotipo . DTS Digital Surround discs are marked with DTS. Sound technology, which simulates multi-channel audio instructions in the instructions accompanying the by-Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on some � Search .to .. laser .. .. .. surround ..beam, .. .. .. .. .do .not .. ..try .. ..signals .software .. .. 21 Surround discs are marked with DTS. by looking at itsDigital � Marker Time Search . .. ..multichannel .speakers . .. audio .audio . ..open 21 -packaging. DTS Digital Surround discs are marked with DTS. Software with multichannel isis To prevent direct exposure to Software with multichannel surround signals - DTS DTS Digital Surround discs are marked with DTS. Software with audio signals is - DTS Digital Surround discs are marked DTS. from two conventional stereo insteadsurround of the 3D playback SURROUND Software with multichannel surround audio is Indicates hazards likely to cause harm to with the unit settings for each individually. product. - DTS Digital cercam discos são marcados com discs. When recording and playing the pictures ofDTS. these discs Software Digital are labeled with thesource logo. � .normally .multichannel . with .multichannel . laser . to ..multichannel .the ..to..way .way .. ..surround .multi.surround ..open. ..recorded. ..audio .. signals ..signals .audio .-NOT ..signals .is 17 Software with surround Software with is isdiscs 5 enclosure. Visible DO � Zoom. Marker Search .radiation . the . was . .. audio . .. signals . ..Dolby . 21 21 five the or more speakers required to played according it..when was played according to..the itway played according tolisten itrecorded. was recorded. played according to the way it was recorded. itself or other material damage. 17 - Dolby Surround encoded programs are labeled with Thischannel unit can produce a 3D Surround effect, using 3D Surround on a VCR, picture noise will appear. ote • You can identify the encoding format of program played according to the way it was recorded. ote audio from a home theatre. This feature works with ote played according to. .the Special DVD Features .. .. way .. it.. .was ..recorded. .. .. .recorded. .. .. 22 STARE INTO BEAM. played according to ote � Zoom. . .PREVENT . .simulates . . the .way . ..it..was . .. .. .. .SHOCK . .. .. ..the 21 logo. ote ote DVD technology, discs encoded TO with Dolby Pro Logic and Dolby Digital audio ote Sound which multi-channel This product incorporates copyright protection technology that frequenWARNING: FIRE OR ELECTRIC �� When you play tracks with sampling frequenWhen you play sound tracks with96kHz 96kHz sampling frequen� by When yousound play sound tracks with 96kHz sampling software looking at its packaging. � Title MenuFeatures . . . . . should . .. .. .. ..not .. .. .be .. .. .. .to .-. ..DTS .. .. 22 � When play sound tracks with 96kHz sampling frequenaudio tracks. Special . .. .exposed . .. ..instead . ..RAIN 22 �you When you play sound tracks with 96kHz sampling frequenDigital Surround discs are marked with DTS. When you play sound tracks with 96kHz sampling frequenIndicates special operating features of this unit. CAUTION: The apparatus water � playback from twoDVD conventional stereo speakers of the When you play sound tracks with 96kHz frequenis� protected by method claims ofbe certain U.S. patents other otas: HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO OR cy, the output signals will converted to 48kHz (sampling cy, the output signals will bewill converted tosampling 48kHz (sampling cy, the output signals be converted toand 48kHz (sampling -intellectual Dolby Digital discs are labeled with the logo. cy, the output signals will be converted to 48kHz (sampling � Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 cy, the output signals will be converted to 48kHz (sampling � Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 or splashing) and no objects filled with liquids, such fiveBYPASS or(dripping more speakers normally required to listen to multiproperty rights owned by Macrovision Corporation cy, frequency). the output signals will bedeconverted toa 48kHz (sampling cy, the output signals will be converted to 48kHz (sampling MOISTURE. • Quando você reproduz faixas som com frequência de amosfrequency). frequency). frequency). - Dolby Surround encoded programs are labeled with frequency). � the Language .. .. .. .. Note: .with Software with multichannel surround played as audio vases, should be channel from a home This Indicates tips and hints for making the task easier. and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection techfrequency). � Changing Disc Menu . placed . Audio .theatre. .audio . .on .signals .the . . apparatus. .is.feature . . . .. ..works . .. .. .. .. 22 22 frequency). �� When you use asinais you 5.1 channel When you amicrophone, microphone, youcan’t can’t enjoy 5.1 channel �when When you use aused. microphone, youenjoy can’t enjoy 5.1 channel tragem com 96kHz, os de saída serão convertidos para 46Khz � When use ause you can’t enjoy 5.1 channel according to the way it was recorded. � Sound Mode is not headphones are �you When you use abymicrophone, you can’t enjoy 5.1isof channel the logo. DVD discs Dolby Proequipment Logic and.in Dolby WARNING: Dowith notthe install this � Changing Audio Channel .. a.. ..confined .. .Digital .. .. 22 � applicable nology must be authorized Macrovision Corporation, and When you use a2microphone, microphone, yousound can’t enjoy 5.1 channel � output. When you use a microphone, you can’t enjoy 5.1 �encoded Changing the Audio Language . .. .. .. ..space 22 Only channel sound will out by the influence output. Only 2 channel sound will out byout the influence ofthe theof the output. Only 2 channel will by thechannel influence (frequência de amostragem) output. Only 22channel will out by of the output. Only 2 sound channel sound willthe outinfluence by the influence of the audio tracks. such� as a book case or similar unit. intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, output. Only channel sound will out by the influence of the output. Only 2 channel sound will out by the influence of the DTS Digital Surround discs are marked with DTS. Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 microphone system. microphone system. � Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . .restricted . . . . . 22 microphone system. não poderá usufruir da saída de CAUTION: This product may not be used. outdoor, to microphone • Quando você usa microphone system. “Pro Logic”, andsystem. theum double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby otherwise authorized bymicrofone, Macrovision Corporation. Reverse microphone system. microphone system. DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 17 BYPASS � use Subtitles indoor only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 canal 5.1. Somente 2 canais terão saída, em função do sistema do Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright 1992engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Audio Discs . . . . . audio . . . . signals . . . . . is . .played . . . . . . . . 22 Note: 1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. SoftwareDVD with multichannel surround microfone. 14 14 way 14it was recorded. according14 to the � Sound Mode under is not license applicable when headphones are used. 14 14 14 Manufactured from Digital Systems, Inc. SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is Theater located on the back USthis Pat.unit. No.This 5,451,942 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and of number5,956,674, is unique to this unit and not available other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS”here and and “DTS to others. You should record requested information CAUTION: Digitalthis Surround” are of Digital Theater 15 retain guide as a registered permanenttrademarks record of your purchase. This DVD/CD receiver employs a laser system. Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, 17 To ensure proper use of this product, please read this owner’s Inc. All rights reserved. Model No. ___________________________________ Antes da Operação (continuação Before Operation (Continued) Introduction Menu de tela (OSD) SafetyOn-Screen Precautions . . .Display ......................2 Example: On-Screen Display during Introduction 1 2 1 3 2 3 ABC Preparation Preparation Introduction Preparation Audio CD and MP3/WMA . . . . .de . . um . . .Vídeo . . . . .DVD 23 Exemplos: OSD durante aDisc execução playing DVD Video Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . 23 Table of Contents . . .general . . . . . .playback . . . . . . .status . . . . .on . . the . 3 TV . . . . . . . Você . . 23pode You can display the visualizar o. .status de reprodução atual na tela Method Items � Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Método .Selection . . . . . de . . .Seleção . . . . . 23 Before Use . Some . . . . .items . . . . can . . . .be . .changed . . . . . . .using . . . . the . . . 4-5 Itens Disc . . . da . . sua 23 screen. TV. Alguns itens podem. .ser trocados com o usomenu. do (Continued) � Moving to another Track . . . . b ../ ./B, . .Numbers . . . . . . 23 Playable Discs . . . . . . .display: ..................4 . . . . . . . . Before . 23 , números To use Operation the on-screen Title Number 1/3 Número do Título menu. � Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . .ENTER . . . . . . . . 23 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 ENTER . . . . . . . . . 23 Press Para usar OSD – DISPLAY On Screen Search. . . . .Display . . . . . . .during . . . . . .b ../ ./B, . .Numbers . . . . . . 23 Notes on Discs . . . . .during .Display: . . . . playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Example:� On-Screen . . . . . . . On-Screen . . 23 , números Display Chapter Number 1 / 12 Número do Capítulo JPEGDVD DiscVideo Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ENTER . . . . . . . . 24 About Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 playing ENTER . . . . . . . . . 23 Press v / V to select an item. canPanel display theRear general playback Viewing a JPEG disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Front and Panel . . . . .status .a. reprodução. . . .on . . the . . . TV ...6 1. Pressione a tecla DISPLAY durante . . . . . . . You . . 24 Numbers, ENTER Time por search 0:20:09 números ENTER tempo Selection ItemsBusca The items selected is highlighted. the menu. Method canitem be changed . . . . . . . . .Method . . . . . . . . . 24 Remote Control Overview . . . . . . .using . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Items � Slide Show . . . . . . .Selection . . . . . . . screen. . . 24 Some Idioma do áudio Audio language b / B, Numbers To use the on-screen display: b / B, Numbers � Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .or. . . . 24 Title Number 1 / 3 . . . . . . . 2. . . 24 1 Title Number 11 /// 3 33 /b,/ B números Pressione as teclas (/ ) parathe selecionar Press b / B to change setting. um Youitem. can alsoTitle Number Audio eand modo de saída deto another file . . . . ENTER ENTER ENTER �Digital Moving . . . . . AUDIO .ÁUDIO . . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . Preparation . . 24 Press DISPLAY during playback. Output mode Press DISPLAY during playback. Áudio Digital the number buttons if appropriate (e.g. O item use selecionado é destacado. � To rotate picture. . . . . . .b . .Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . 24 b. //.B, B, Numbers . . . . . . . Connections . . 24 11 //// 12 12 Chapter Number Number 1 12 1 12 . . . . the . . .title . . .number). . . . . . . . For . . . some . . . . .functions, . . . 8-13 Chapter inputting ENTER ENTER Programmed Playback .1 ENG . . . . . . . ENTER . . .. ./b, . /.B . .or. . . . 25 números . . . . . . . . . 24 Subtitle language Press v / V to select an item. Idioma da Legenda TV Connections . . .to. execute . . . . . . .the . . .setting. ...........8 press ENTER SUBTITLES ) para mudar os ajustes. Você Time Pressione as teclas (/ Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . . . ENTER .SUBTITLE . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . 3. . . 25 0:20:09 Numbers, search 0:20:09 Numbers, ENTER Time search 0:20:09 The selected item is highlighted. 0:20:09 Optional Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Erasing a Track from Programme List b . ./ .B. . . . . 25 pode também usar as. .teclas numéricas se apropriado . . . . . . . . . 25 Angle 1/3 Ângulo Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Audio Audio language language PLAYBACK STATUS/RESTRICTIONS Erasing the Complete Programme List b or b // B B or . . . . . . . 25 t . . . . . . . . 25 (por exemplo, inserindo othe número algu- and Press b B change setting. and Digital Digital Audio Audio Press b //Title B to to change the setting. You can also and Digital Audio Speaker System Connection . . .do . You .título). . . .can . .Para .also . . 11-12 AUDIO Repeat title AUDIO DivX Disc Operation . .Bypass . . . . . . . . AUDIO .....b . ./ .B. . . . . 26 st . . . . . . . 25 mode use the number buttons (e.g. Output mode Som Sound mas funções, pressione use the number buttons appropriate (e.g. � Transmitter. . . . . . a.ififtecla . appropriate . . . ENTER . . . . . . para . . . .confirmar . . . . . 11o Output Speaker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . . . . . . . . . 26 inputting title number). some A - the B inputting the title number). For some functions, functions, Repeat sequence � Changing a channel ofFor Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11 ajuste. b / B or b. .// B B or. . . . . . . . . 28 11 ENG ENG Additional . . . . . . . .b . .or Subtitle language thin Subtitle language Information 1 ENG 1 ENG press ENTER to execute the . . .an . . . . . . 27 press ENTER to of execute the setting. setting. � Setting a ID Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 SUBTITLE r. . . . . . . . . 28 Last Condition Memory . . . . SUBTITLE . . . .de . . um . . . Video . . . . .CD. 28 Resume play from this point Exemplos: OSD durante Display a. execução Example: On-Screen during � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11 b / B b. //. B B Status/Restrições de reprodução Angle . . . . . . . . . . 28 Angle Screen Saver . . .1111.//// 3333. . . . . . . . . . .b . . . . . . . PLAYBACK . . 28 � Speaker STATUS/RESTRICTIONS Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 playing VCD ay be Action prohibited or not available Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . Speaker . . 28 Title Title electric Repeat título title. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Title Positioning. Title Repetir Bypass B b. //. B Bypass Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . 29 Bypass . . . . . . . . . .b Bypass Sound . . . . . . . Before . . 28 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Sound Itens Items Method A Presetting the radio stations . . Método .Selection . . . . . .de . .Seleção . . . . . 29 A B Repeat sequence A ---- B B A B . . . . . . . . . 29 Repetir seqüência Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Surround otes Número da faixato the radio . .1 ./ 3 . . . . . . . b Listening ../ ./B, . .Numbers . . . . . . 29 , números angle Track Number . . . . . . . . . 29 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 � Some discs may not provide all of the features Resume play from this point ENTER (ou modo PBC) ce (or PBC mode) Other Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENTER . . . . . . . . 30 Retoma a reprodução a partir desse ponto . .of. . . . . . . 29 Sound Mode . . . . . . . .for . . . instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Example: On-Screen Display during shown below. About the symbols ng) Sleep Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . Numbers . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen VCD Time search Busca por tempo Action prohibited or Display . . not .disponível . for .available . .10 . . seconds, . . . . . . . the . . .on. . 15 playing 0:20:09 � Ação If no button is ou pressed números the proibida não Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ENTER . . .ENTER . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 Indicates hazards likely unit Initial Settings . . . .disappears. . . . . to . . cause . . . . . .harm . . . . to . . the . . 16-19 screen display Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30itself or otherOperation material damage. or � General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Items SelectionMethod /b,/ B números Using the Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . AUDIO .ÁUDIO . . . . . . . 30 Audio Canal deChannel Áudio K. . . . . . . . . 30 otes � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Track Number b Numbers b. ///.B, B, Numbers B, Numbers Track Number 11 //// 3 33Source . .b Track Number Selecting the Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 1 otas: Indicates special operating features of this unit. 1 3 N. OR . . . . . . ��. .Some 30 � Display discs may . . .not . . .provide . . . . . all . . .of. .the . . features . . . . . . . . 16-17 (or ENTER mode) (or PBC PBCXTS mode) (or PBC mode) (Excellent True Sound) . . . ENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Sound Alguns discos. podem não fornecer todos os. .recursos . . . . . . . •. .shown 30 � Audio. Bypass below. Som b / B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Indicates tips and hints for making the task easier. Numbers XTS pro . . . . . 0:20:09 .0:20:09 . . . . . . . . . . . .Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Time Time search search . . . . . . . ��. .Ifmostrados 30 search 0:20:09 no�button is pressedControl) for 10 seconds, 0:20:09 Lock abaixo. (Parental . . . . . . the . . . on. . . . . . . 18 Time ENTER pace ENTER . . . . . . . Manufactured . .screen 30 � Others display disappears. .tecla . .license . .é .pressionada . .from . . . Dolby . . . . em . . .10 . .segundos, . . . . .“Dolby”, . . .o. 19 under Laboratories. • Se nenhuma ABC ABC ABC ABC “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright 1992OSD desaparecerá. Operation 1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Reference b // B bduring B or Example: OSD On-Screen Exemplos: durante Display a execução deor um Audio Audio Channel Channel AUDIO AUDIO DVD de Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 playing DVD Audio Áudio. Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 . . . . . . . . . 31 Sound DVD or Video CDlicense Operation . . . . Theater . . . . . .Systems, . . . . . 19-22 Sound Bypass Bypass Bypass Manufactured under from Digital Inc. Troubleshooting .Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . .Método .b . .// .B b B. . . . . . . 32-33 . . . . . . . . . 31 Itens de Seleção Items Selection Method Playing a DVD and Video 5,974,380, CD. . . . . 5,978,762 . . . . . . . and . . . 19 US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 . . . . . . . 32-33 otherGeneral worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS ,Numbers números b/ /B, Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22 Group Number Número do grupo . . . . . . . Digital . . 34 Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater ENTER ENTER � Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . Systems, . . . . . . 20 Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Example: On-Screen Display during Inc. All rights reserved. � Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . 20 b / B, Numbers / , números wner’s Track Number playing DVD Audio Número da faixa ENTER � Slow Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 ENTER d the � Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20 ocaTime por search OTES ON COPYRIGHTS: Display only 0:20:09 tempo exibição ItemsBusca SelectionSomente Method � Search. . .to. .copy . . ., broadcast, . . . . . . . .show . . . ,.broadcast . . . . . . . . . 20 It is forbidden by law b / B, Numbers b // B, B, Numbers Numbers b Audiodo language áudio Number via cable, play in public, Group Idioma Number � Repeat . . . . or . .rent . . .copyrighted . . . . . . . .material . . . . . .without . . . . . 20 Group ures or /b,/ B números ENTER ENTER Digital Audio eand modo de saída de permission. s radiAUDIO � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 ÁUDIO Output mode Áudio Digital This product features the .copy b // B, Numbers b B, Numbers � Time Search . . . protection . . . . . . . function . . . . . .developed . . . . . . . 21 Track Track Number Number by Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on some ENTER ENTER / , números pen � Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 OFF Idioma da Legenda Subtitle language discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs Display only SUBTITLES T Time search Display Time search 0:20:09 Display only only � Zoom. . . . . will . . .appear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 0:20:09 0:20:09 0:20:09 on a VCR, picture. noise DVD Features . . . protection . . . . . . . technology . . . . . . . .that . . 22 This Special product incorporates copyright Page (or Angle) b/B Audio Audio language language Página (ou ângulo) b er B or or b /// B is protected by Menu method. claims B or b � Title . . . . .of. .certain . . . . .U.S. . . .patents . . . . . and . . . other . . 22 and or and Digital Digital Audio Audio and Digital Audio AUDIO AUDIO such intellectual property rights � Disc Menu . . . owned . . . . .by . .Macrovision . . . . . . . . Corporation . . . . . . . . 22 Output 1/3 Output mode mode and other rights owners. of this copyright. protection � Changing theUse Audio Language . . . . . . . tech. . . 22 nology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is OFF OFF OFF OFF � Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Subtitle Subtitle language language Display Display only only intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless cted to � Subtitles . .Macrovision . . . . . . . . Corporation. . . . . . . . . .Reverse . . . . . . . 22 otherwise authorized.by Page (or Angle) b / B Page (or Angle) DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 b / B engineering or disassembly is prohibited. ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC or or SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located on the back of this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available to others. You should record requested information here and retain 16 this guide as a permanent record of your purchase. Model No. ___________________________________ 1 33 1 11 //// 3 3 15 3. Use v / V to select the second desired option then press B to move to the third level. upper Pansc entire s 4. Use v / V to select the desired setting then press ENTER to confirm your selection. Some items Before Operation (Continued) Antes da Operação (continuação) DISPLAY Progre require additional steps. Initial Settings Progre DISP 5. Press SETUP or PLAY to exit the Setup menu. By using the Setup menu, you can make various IDIOMA picture LANGUAGE Introduction Initial Settings TV A adjustments to items such as picture and sound. You If you Dispa Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Safety Precautions .menu, . . . . . you . . . can . . . make . . . . .various . . . . . .adjust..2 Introduction By using the de Setup can also set aLANGUAGE language for the subtitles and the Usando o Contents menu Ajustes (Setup), você pode fazer vários LANGUAGE IDIOMA connec Prog Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . 23 Table of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ments to items such as picture and sound. You can also Setup menu, among other things. For details on each Before ajustes alanguage itens de imagem e..(Continued) som. a prog OSD � Pause .Audio . . .Idioma .LANGUAGE .CD . . .and . . .MP3/WMA . . Português .English . . . . . .Disc . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 Before . como . . .Operation . .os . .. ..Você . .. .. ..também set aofUse for Playing an 23 Table Contents ..the .. .. ..subtitles .. .. .. .. .. .. and .. .. .the .Setup .. menu, .. ..Setup .. .4-5 . 3 menu item, see pages 19 to 22. Disc Audio Áudio Original On. pode selecionar idioma � .Original .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 Playable Discs . .. ..details . .. .. e .para .4 among other � Moving Pause .to. .another . .Menu . .Language . . Track . . . . . Desligar . ..English 23 Before Use . . o.things. . .. .. .. ..For .para .. as .. .. legendas .. ..on .. .. .each .. .Setup .. .. .. o .. menu ..menu .. .. 4-5 Disc Subtitle Off Legendas LANGUAGE Disc Audio Initial Settings and exit the Menu: item, see pages � Track/All/Off. . . . .Original .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 Precautions . . outras .16 .. ..19. .. .. .. .. .. .. Para .. .. .. .. detalhes .. .. .. .. .. .. ..sobre .. .. To .. .. ..display 54 de ajustes, além de opções. To Tur � Repeat Moving to another . ..Original 23 Playable Discs . .. ..to Disc Menu Menu do disco Track original DISPLAY Initial Settings Search. . .menu. . .Disc . .Subtitle .A. second . . .. .. .. ..press ..Off.. .. .. .of Notes onajuste, Discs .. .. .menu, .. .. ..Menu: ..21. ..you .. .. ..can .. .. ..make .. .. .. .. .various .. .adjustcada item de pág. Repeatthe Track/All/Off. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 Precautions .Setup . exit .veja .the . .. .. .. .. Press . .. 55 SETUP to��display To display and By using the Disc Menu Original LANGUAGE Conne DISPLAY SETUP take �you back to .initial JPEG Disc Operation .. .. .various About Symbols .. .. .. .as .. .. ..menu. .. ..and .. .. ..A.sound. .. .. .. .. ..You .By .. ..using .. .. ..ofalso 55thewill Search. . .make . . screen. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 23 Notes on Discs . .. ..picture . second . press Press SET UP do tosuch display the ments to can Setup menu, you .can Para exibir e items sair menu: your m English OSD TV Aspect Viewing a JPEG disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Front Panel and Rear .. .. and .. .. .screen. .. To .. .. ..go 65 to to set aUP language for SET will take you back JPEG Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 About Symbols . .the .Panel . .subtitles . . to . .. initial . .the . .. .. .Setup . .. .. .adjustments . .. menu, items as picture and sound. You the nextsuch level: Original Disc Audio to Com DVD-V Display Mod Pressione a other tecla SETUP paradetails exibir oon menu. Um segundo TV Aspect � Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 among things. For each Setup menu Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Mudar Seleciona Move Select To go to the next level: Viewing a JPEG disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 a language for the subtitles Front Panel and Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . can . . . Press .also . . 6set Disc Subtitleand the Off B on the Remote Control. Progressive acionamento da tecla, retorna a tela inicial. item, B see pages 16 to 19. Still .. ..Menu ..details .. .. .. .. .. on .. .. ..each .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4:3: .. .. .. ..Select .. 24 1. Sele on the remote control. Press SlidePicture Show For 24 when Disc Original among��other things. Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup . . . . . menu, .7 a st Move Select OSD To go back to the previous level: � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 then To go back to the previous level: Setup menu item, see pages 19 to .22. � Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 To and nível: exit the Menu: Para ir display ao próximo Preparation OSD 16:9 Wide: Select w b on the Remote Control. Press Select a language for the Setup menu and on-screen display. � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Menu Language Press on PressbaSET UP to. .no display menu. � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Pressione tecla Connections .the . () . .remote . .controle . control. . . the . . .remoto. . . . . . A. .second . . . . To . .press .display 8-13of and Preparation Selecione idioma para o menu Setup. .e .para os .OSDs. exit theoMenu: Programmed Playback .. .. ..Setup .. .. .. .. ..menu .. and .. .. .. .on-screen .. .. .. .. 25 SET UP will take you back to initial screen. � Toarotate picture. . . . . . 24 Select language for the TV Connections . 8-13 . SETUP .8 to display the A second pressDVD-V of Connections . . . . anterior: . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Press .. .. .GENERAL OPERATION Para voltar aothe nível Disc Audio /menu. Subtitle /. Menu Repeat Programmed Tracks. .DVD-A .. .. .. .. .. 25 To go to next level: Programmed Playback . . . . . .. .. .Move . .. .. .. ..Select . .. .. Display 25Mode DVDdisplay. General Operation Optional Equipment Connections .. .. .. 9will you back to initial screen. TV Connections . . controle . . control. . . . . remoto. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .SETUP . .. .. 1. 8 take Pressione ()remote no Erasing aSetup Trackmenu from Programme List .. ..track .. .. .. ..(disc .. .. 25 Press SETUP. Thelanguage appears. on the Press aBtecla Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . . . . . 25 Select the you prefer for the audio Aerial Connections . .Connections . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10 Display Mode setting OSD Optional Equipment . 9 Press SET UP. Erasing the Complete ListDVD-A .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 To go back to the previous level: To go to thevnext Disco desubtitles, Áudio Subtitle /Programme Menu Erasing athe Track Programme List .TV 25DVD-V DVD2. Use /audio), V Disc tolevel: select thenDVD-V press andfrom theoption menu. Audio / /desired Subtitle /disc Menu Speaker System Connection Aspect set to “4:3”. Aerial Connections .appears. . . control. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Press .. .. .11-12 . .B 10 Theb setup menu Select a language for the DivX Disc Operation . The .Setup .preferência . .screen . menu . . . . shows .and . .List .on-screen .a. faixa .. .. mode .. ..de ..display. ..áudio ..is26 Press on the remote on the Remote Control. B to move to the second level. Erasing the Complete Programme 25 Seleciona o idioma de sua para � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12 . . 11 Operação geral Speaker System. Connection Select the language you prefer for the audio track the current setting for the selected item, as well as Original: Refers to the original language in which the Speaker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 4:3: Select when a stand Letterbox: Displays DivX Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 v / V to Use select deAudio áudio),level: legendas e o menu deDVD-V disco. DVD-A to(disco the previous � a channel Transmitter .then .. .. back 11 � Changing Transmitter. .O. menu . . . the . .of . desired . . . aparecerá. . . . .option . . .. .. .. To . .. ..go 11 1. Pressione SETUP. Setup alternate setting(s). Disc / subtitles, (disc audio), Additional Information ../..Menu .. .the .. .. .. .. .. .. upper .. .. .. .. ..and 28 lower por disc was recorded. General Operation Speaker Setup .Subtitle . . . . . . and . .. .. .disc . .. .. ..menu. 27 B press to move to the second level. 16:9 Wide: Select when � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 b on the Remote Control. Press � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11 Recorre aoMemory idioma Last Condition .. .. .. .option ..language .no .. ..qual .then .. .. o.. in .disco .. .. ..foi ..(disc ..the 28 3. /V to select the second desired Additional Information .prefer .original .for . the .audio . .track .which 28 Automatic ) para selecionar a opção desejada 2. Use�as (/ Theteclas screen will be shown the current setting for Use the v Original: Select the language Original: Refers toyou the original and Connecting Panscan: Other: TotoSaver select another language, press number � Assembling SettingSET a IDUP. of Transmitter . .to. .the . . Speakers . . . . . . . . 11 11 Press B to move the third level. press Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 gravado. Lastwas Condition Memory . . .menu. . . . . . . . . . . . entire . . . . .screen 28 selected item, as wella as disc recorded. e, em seguida, pressione tecla segundo audio), subtitles, and the disc OPERATION and cut � . alternate . .() . . to .para . the . setting(s). . .irSpeakers .ao . .GENERAL . . . . 12 buttons to enter the corresponding 4-digit DVD-V � Speaker Assembling and appears. Connecting 11 The setupConnections. menu the .. .. .. .. .. .then .. .. .. .. ..number ..Display .. .. .. .. .. ..Mode .. 28 Screen Saver . TV .selecionar . . ..setting . .. .. ..press 28 4. Use v Other / V Controlling to select thePara desired (outro): outros idiomas, pressione nível. APositioning. tela os atuais Speaker . . ajustes . . .the . . ..second .. .. .. .. ..para ..desired .. .. o.. ..item .. .1. .. ..Press .. .. 13 according to the language code list on page 31. If .you 2. Sele �Use Speaker . option 12 SETUP. The Setup menu appears. Other: To select another language, press number v /mostra V Connections. to select Original: Refers to the original language in which the Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 ENTER to confirm your selection. Some items Controlling the TV .seguida .code, . . . . .press . . . . CLEAR . .para . .Display . entrar . Progressive . . .the . com . 28 setting V to select Use v /assim the desired option then Mode Scanwo Before Operation .to as teclas e em.tostations ENTER enter thenuméricas wrong language selecionado, como alternativos. Speaker Positioning. .. ..move .. .. os .. .. .ajustes .. ..the .. .. ..third .. .. .. ..level. .. .. .. 2. .. .. .14-19 . . 13 buttons then ENTER enter the then press B. .to require additional steps. Presetting the radio .press .. corresponding .. .. .. .. .. .. ..mode .. .. on .. ..4-digit .. ..set .. 29 disc wasthe recorded. Use v / V Operation to select desired option then with Radio . . . . . . . 29 B press to move to the second level. is to “4:3”. 3. Pres Mini Operation Glossary for. .Audio remote control. . . . . Stream ......& . . Surround .........B 14-19 number to the language code list .in.de the número de 4according dígitos correspondente idioma, toPress moveSETUP to the second The screen Vi Listening tolevel. the radio . Setup . . . . .shows .. .ao .. ..acordo .. .. .. 29 segunda 3.Before Use asThe Presetting the stations .menu. . .. .press . .. .. .. ..number . . Progressive 29 ScanThe be the 5. or To PLAY to radio exit the select the press Mode .teclas .v.screen ./ .V(/) . to . for . will . .Audio .para . . shown . selecionar . . desired . . .the .& . current .a .setting . . . .setting . then . . opção . the . for . 14 Other: select another language, reference chapter. If you enter the wrong language code, currentOther setting for the selected item, as well as MiniUse Glossary Stream Surround Letterbox: Displays aflic w com a lista de códigos no capítulo referente a este tópico. pictures with less Functions. . radio . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Listening to the 29 selected item, as well as alternate setting(s). desejada e, em seguida, pressione a tecla () para ENTER to confirm your selection. Sound .. .. 14 buttons to enterSetting the corresponding press CLEAR. DISPLAY Mode . Mode . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..alternate 14 setting(s). upper lower portions you using the C Sleep Timer .. .. .. .. errado, .. .. .. .. .. .4-digit .. .. .. .. .number .. .. aIf .. .tecla .and .. ..are 30 Se você entrou com o número pressione Other Functions. . . . . . . . . 30 LANGUAGE Some items require additional steps. mudar para On-Screen .. .. .. .. .3. ..Use .. .. 15 tosecond the language code listthen on page 31. If you Sound Mode . to . . select . .nível. . .. .. .the . .. .. .second . .. .. .. .. .. ..desired . ..option 14 vo/ terceiro VDisplay Use v / V CLEAR toaccording select the Dimmer .apagá-lo. . . .Setting . . .desired . . .. .. .. ..option .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Panscan: .. .. connection .. .. .. .. .. 30 para Sleep Timer 30 to a TV o DISPLAY Initial Settings .UP .B. to .) . para .move . .. .the . .. .. .third .the . ..ajuste enter the wrong language code, press CLEAR on theAutomatically press to the On-Screen Display .. .. ..selecionar .. .to .o ..setup ..level. .. .. ..desejado ..menu. .16-19 . . 15 B to move then press Press SET or PLAY exit scan s 4. Use as teclas (/ Mute . . ..third .. .. .. ..level. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..entire .. .. a .. ..progressive .. .. .. 30 LANGUAGE Dimmer 30and cuts screen of control. TV Aspect � General Operation .4... .. Use . . 16v / V toremote 16 : 9 Settings . . . . . . ..a..tecla .. .. .. ..ENTER .. .. .. .. .. ..para .. .. .. .confirmar 16-19 On. select the Using the .. .Widescreen e,Initial em seguida, Menu . Language Mute . desired . Headphone . . . . Display . setting . English . Mode . . .Jack .then . . . press . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 v / Vpressione Use to select the desired setting then press � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 DISPLAY (TELA) � General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ENTER . . 16 to confirm your selection.Original Some items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Disc Audio the Input Selecting Source Scan Using the Headphone Jack. .. .Off . . . . . . . .Progressive . . To . . .Turn . . 30ON a seleção. Alguns itens necessitam de etapas adicionais. progres ENTER your selection. Progressive Scan � .to. .confirm require steps. DISPLAY � Display Language .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-17 . . 16 additional Disc Subtitle Off XTS (Excellent True Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Selecting the Input Source 30 Some items require additional steps. � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Disc Menu Original Progressive Scan Video 5. Pressione SETUP Setup. Connect component � Display . . . .ou . .PLAY . . . . .para . . . sair . . . do . . menu . . . . .5. . . Press 16-17 SETUP XTS or PLAY to exit the Setup menu. pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 XTS (Excellent TELA True Sound) . . . . . . . . .pictures . . . . . .with . 30less flickeri DISPLAY � .. .. ..setup .. .. .. .. ..menu. .. .. 18 your monitor/televisio � Lock Audio. . . . .UP . . Control) .or. .PLAY . . . . .to . .. .exit . .. .. ..the 17 Press(Parental SET XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 � . . . . . . .Control) . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19 TV Aspect If you using theInput. Com Formato da tela 1616: 9: 9 to are Component � Others Lock (Parental 18 LANGUAGE Reference Display Mode Widescreen Modo de tela Widescreen connection to a TV or m � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Progressive Language Code List .Move . .Scan . . Select . . . . Desligar .Move . . . . Select . .a. progressive . 1. . . .Select . . 31 “Progressiv Reference Off Progressive Scan scan signa LANGUAGE Operation press B. Country Code List . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..On. .. .. .. .. .then Language Code List . .. .. 31 31 English Menu Language DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 Operation Menu Language Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 DVD-A DVD-V Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 TVDiscAspect Original Audio Playing a DVD Video CD. . . 19 DIS To Turn. ON DVD or Video CD and Operation . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19-22 Specifications . .Off.. .. ..menu . 34progressiv Select a language for the Setup Troubleshooting .. .. .. .. and .. .. .. ..on-screen .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32-33 Disc Subtitle General . . . . .CD. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22 TV A 4:3: Select when a standard Playing aFeatures DVD and. .Video . . 19 display. Specifications Disc Menu . .Original . . . . . . . 4:3 . . .TV . . is . .connected. . . . . .Connect . . . . . . component . 34 out Disp Seleciona � Moving to another . . 20 Move Select 16:9: Select when a 16:9 wide TV isMudar connected. General Features . . . .TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. 20-22 your monitor/television, Prog � � Moving Moving to to another another CHAPTER/TRACK TITLE/GROUP . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 20 Tamanho de tela DVD-V DVD-A to Component Input. Disc Audio / Subtitle / Menu � Motion. . . . . .CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 � Slow Moving to another 20 DVD-A DVD-V DVD-A DVD-V Display Mode TVSelecione Aspect quando estiver conectado TV padrão 1. Select “Progressive S � and language you prefer for the audio track a uma � Still SlowPicture Motion. . . Frame-by-Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Playback . . . . . . Select . .. 20 20 the 4:3: Move Select 4:3. press B. � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 (disc audio), subtitles, and the disc menu. Display Mode setting works only when the TV then Aspect 4:3: Select when a standard 4:3 TV is connected. � Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20 � .. .. Language 20 16:9: 16:9 wide TV is connected. mode isSelect set towhen “4:3”.aquando � Repeat Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Menu . .. .. Original: 20 16:9 Wide: estiver conectado a uma TV Refers to theSelecione original language in which the DISPLAY � .. .. 21 a language for the Setup menu and picture on-screen � Repeat Repeat A-B . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Select . .. .. disc 20 Letterbox: Displays a wide with bands on the 16:9. was recorded. TV Aspect � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . display. . . . . . 21 DVD-V ofDVD-A upper and Mode lower portions the screen. Display Mo 2. Select “On” Display using another language, press number � Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Other: .. .. 21 � Marker Time Search 21 To select Progressiv Panscan: Automatically displays the wide picture on ENTER toTela enter the 4-digit � . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Disc .. .Audio Display Mode setting works the TV Aspect Modo de DVD-Vcorresponding DVD-Aonly when � Zoom. Marker. Search . .. .. buttons . 21 21 then / Subtitle / Menu the entire screen and cuts off portions that do not fit.ENTER to c 3. Press to listthe in the Special DVD .. .. 22 is the set to “4:3”. � Zoom. . .Features . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. number 21 according Osmode ajustes de language modo de code tela funciona quando o tamanho The de confirm menu the prefer the audiolanguage track code, chapter.you If you enterforthe wrong � TitleDVD MenuFeatures . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Select .. .. 22 Special . .. .. reference 22 language Letterbox: Displays a wide picture with bands on the tela estiver em 4:3. (disc. .audio), subtitles, and the disc menu. � � Disc Title Menu Menu .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. press . . 22 22CLEAR. upper and lower portions of the screen. Letterbox: Exibe uma imagem larga, na tela por inteiro, � � Changing Disc Menuthe . . Audio . . . . . Language . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .Original: . .. .. .. .. 22 22 RefersPanscan: the original languagedisplays whichthe thewide picture on mastocorta asAutomatically partes inferior einsuperior da imagem. � . .. .. .. .. .. .. .disc .. 22 � Changing Changing the the Audio Audio Channel Language . .. .. ..was 22recorded. the entire screen and cuts off the portions that do not fit. Panscan: Exibe uma larga imagem automaticamente, � Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 2. Select “On” using the Other: To select anotheras language, press number cortando partes que não se encaixam na tela. DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 buttons then ENTER to enter the corresponding 4-digit DVD . . . . . 22 3. Press ENTER to conf 16 Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . number according to the language code list in the The confirm menu wi reference chapter. If you enter the wrong language code, Introduction Introduction Ajustes iniciais Preperação 1 2 1 32 4 3 5 4 5 press CLEAR. 17 16 cted to ner’s the oca- Introduction 1 Preparation Preparation Introduction To go back to the previous level: upper 16:9desired Wide: option Select then when a 16:9 w Press b on the Remote Control. 3. Use v / V to select the second Pansc press B to move to the third level. entire s GENERAL OPERATION DVD-V DVD-A 4. Use v / V to select the desired setting then press Display Mode ENTER to confirm your selection. Some items 1. Press SETUP. The Setup menu appears. Antes da Operação (continuação) Display Mode setting worksProgre only require additional steps. Before Operation (Continued) 2. Use v / V to select the desired option then press mode is set to “4:3”. Progre 5. level. Press SETUP orshows PLAY to exit the Setup menu. B to move to the second The screen Leitura Progressiva (Progressive Scan) Introduction Progressive Scan the current setting for the selected item, as well as ÁUDIO AUDIO Letterbox: Displays a widepicture pictur yous ASafety leituraPrecautions progressiva de. vídeo Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . upper . . . . .and . . opções . lower . . . . .portions . 23 ofIf the . . . . .fornece . . . . . .a.mais . . .alternate .alta . . .qualidade . . setting(s). ...2 LANGUAGE Cada disco de DVD possui uma variedade de de Progressive Scan. .Video provides the highest quality connec Each DVD disc has a variety of audio output options. Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . 23 Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 com menor vibração. . . . . . . . de . . imagem 23 3. Use v / V to select the second desired option then saída dePause áudio. Ajuste as opções de .áudio do aparelho de pictures with Before a progt Setthird the DVD/CD according � . . . Receiver’s . .LANGUAGE . . . . . . AUDIO . . . . Panscan: . options . . . . . .Automatically . . . . . . 23to displays Before . .Operation . less . . . .flickering. .o. conector . . . . . .(Continued) .de . .Vídeo . . . .press .Componente . . . .B. to . . move 4-5 to the level. Disc . . . Se . . 23 você Use estiver usando acordo sistema de som que você portio On. the type ofoaudio system you use. If you areDiscs using. the � com Moving to another Track . entire .English . . utiliza. . .screen . . . . .and . . .cuts . 23off the Playable . TV . .COMPONENT .ou . .monitor . . . . . .compatível . . VIDEO . . . . . .OUT . . . o.jacks, .sinal .4 . . . . . . . para . . 23 Menu Language conexão de uma com 4. Use v /(analog) V to select the desired setting then press Scan but are connecting AUDIO � Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . .Original . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Precautions . . . . . the . . . receiver . . . . . . .to. a . .standard . .ENTER . . . . . .to. confirm ..5 Disc Audio . . . . . . . do . Progressive . progressive 23 your selection. Some items Tur To scan, ajuste o. modo Progressive Scan para television, set Progressive Off. AUDIO . .Disc . .Subtitle . . . . . . . . Progressive .Off. . . . . . . . .Scan . . . . 23 Notes on Discs . . . . .provides . .Scan . . . the . to . . highest . . .require . . .quality . . additional . . . . 5 steps. � Search. . . ÁUDIO . . . . . . . . Progressive . 23 Scan Video Each DVD disc has a Disc variety of audioOriginal output options. Menu “ON” ligado. Conne JPEG Disc Operation . Setup .Acúst . . . . . .Seleção . . . . . . . . . Scan . . . . .Video 24 provides About Symbols . . .Component . . . . . . . . .Video . . . . .jacks .........5 5.1Ajustes Speaker 5.1 cxs Progressive . . . . . . . . pictures . 23 If you with are using the less flickering. 5. Press for SETUP or PLAY to exit the Setup menu. Set the DVD/CD Receiver’s AUDIOSelect options according to your m DRC On Viewing a JPEGDRC disc . . . . . . .Ligar . . . . . . with . . . .less . . . flickering. . 24 Panel and Panel . . .that . . .is. .compatible . . . . . . . . with . . 6a pictures . . . . . . . Front . If . 24 connection to the aRear TV or monitor the type of audio system you use. you are using COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks, to Com Vocal Ligar Vocal On � Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 If you are using the Component V Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . Para . but . 24 progressive scanthe signal, set Progressive Scan to On. ativar o Progressive Scan are connecting receiver to a standard (analog) LANGUAGE � Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . connection . . . . . . . . .to. a . .TV . . or 24monitor tha . . . . . . . Conecte . television, . 24 a saída 1. Sele componente do DVD à entrada da set Progressive Scan to Off. Move Select AUDIO Select “Progressive Scan” on the DISPLAY � Moving to another file . . . a. progressive . . . . . . . . . .scan . . . 24 signal, setthen Pro . . . . . . . TV/monitor, . . 24 Preparation ajuste a televisão monitorjacks parafor entrada LANGUAGE � To rotate5.1picture. B.ou o Video menu then press Speaker Setup you are using the Component . . . . .Select . . On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 MenuEnglish Language . . . . . . . Connections . If . 24 Menu Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 DRC On componente. to a TV orDISPLAY monitor that is compatible with a Disc AudioProgrammed Playback . . . Setup . .On . . .Mudar . . . .Seleciona .and . . .on-screen . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . . connection . 24 SelectOriginal a language for the menu Vocal Move Select Turn ON progressive scan: To TV Connections . . .Scan” .set . . Progressive . .no . .menu . . . . Display . .Scan . . . .to .On. ...8 “progressive e. em scan signal, Repeat Disc Subtitle Off Programmed Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . 1. . progressive . Selecione 25 Off TV Aspect display. Optional Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Disc Menu Original Connect out of the DV pressione a Display teclaMode (). onOnthe DISPLAY Erasing a Track from Programme List .component . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . seguida 25 Select “Progressive Aerial Connections . . . .Scan” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 DVD-A 5.1 Speaker Setup DVD-V Progressive Scan your List monitor/television, Erasing the Complete Programme . . . . . . . 25 set your t t . . . . . . . . 25 DVD-V DVD-A B. menu then press Speaker System Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Disc Audio / Subtitle / Menu 5.1 Ajuste da Caixa Acústica Select speaker settings, DivX Disc Operation . . .including . . . . . . to .volume .Component . . . . .balance . . . .Input. . .and . 26 st . . . . . . . 25 � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Selecione os DISPLAY distance, orajustes test Speaker . .the . .das .speaker . you .caixas . . prefer . . settings. .acústicas, .Move . 1. . . Select .the . . incluindo . . “Progressive . . .track . . . . 27 Scan” on t SelectSetup the language for audio Select . . . . . . . . . 26 � Changing aTELA channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11 Move Select Speaker settings are only active on the Desligar Off da tela TV Aspect volume, esubtitles, distância teste caixa (discbalanço audio), menu. Additional Information .and .ou . .the . . .disc .os . then .ajustes . .Analog .press . . .da. B. .Multi. . . 28 . . . . . . . . . 27 � Setting a IDFormato ofdeTransmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Ligar Modo tela On Display Mode Channel Output. (See “Speaker Last Condition Memory . . .DVD-A . Setting” . . . . . . .page . . . .27) . . . . 28 acústica. . . . . . . . . . 28 � AssemblingProgressive Menu Language DVD-V Original: Refers to the original language in which the 5.1 Speaker Setup Scan and Connecting to the Speakers 11 Progressive Scan Move Select ithin an Screen das Saver . . . acústicas . . . . . . . .somente . . . . . . são . . . ativos . . . . .na . . 28 OsDynamic ajustes caixas disc was recorded. Select speaker settings, including volume balance andDISPLAY er. . . . . . . . . 28 � Speaker Connections. . . . . . .Select Range Control (DRC) . . . . .a. language . . . . . 12 for the Setup menu and on-screen Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 “On” using . . 28 Select TV Aspect saída de or canal de áudio analógico . s. . . . . . . Speaker distance, test the speaker settings. display. Positioning. . . . . .the . . . v. ./ .V. .buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . 13 DivX DVD-A DVD-V 2. Sele Other: To select another Operation with Radio . . .language, . . . . . . . press . . . . .number . . . . . . . 29 . .be . . . . . Before . . 28 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 ay Speaker settings are only active on the Analog Multi- Display Mode buttons thenthe ENTER to enter With the DVD format, you canthe hear soundPresetting radio stations . . corresponding . . a. .program’s . . . .27) . . .4-digit . . .Progressive 29 Scan electric Press ENTER to confirm your selection. . . . . . . . . . 29 Channel Output. (See “Speaker Setting” page 3. Pre Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Disc Surround DVD-A to the language code list in the Audio / Subtitle /Vocal Menu number according track inDVD-V the most Listening to theaccurate radio . . and . . . .realistic . . . . . .presentation . . . . . . . . . 29 The confirm menu will appear. . . . . . . . . . 29 Move Select The Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mudar . . . .Seleciona . . . . . . . . . 14 reference chapter. If you enter the wrong language code, possible, thanks to digital audio technology. However, Ajuste é ligado Other Functions. . .somente . . . . . (DRC) . quando . . . . . . um . . .multi-canal . . . . . . . . de . 30 Dynamic Control . . . . . . . . . 29 preferVocal forRange the audio track Sound Mode . . . . . the . .menu .v . ./ .V.appears .buttons. . .Select . . . .on .the . your . .language . . screen . 14 you When the. using confirm iangle press CLEAR. “On” you may wish to compress Sleep Timer Setting . . reproduzido. . .the . . .dynamic . . . . .Os . range . canais . . . . of . Karaokê .the . . 30 DVD karaokê estiver sendo and the disc menu. . . . . . . . . . 30 Select DivX DVD-A DVD-V On-Screen . . . . .as. .default. . . .(disc . . . Use .audio), . . .the . . subtitles, .b. 15 ce of Cancel isDisplay highlighted /B audio output (the difference between the loudest sounds Dimmer . . . . . . . no . . .som . . . estéreo . . . . . .normal. . . . . . . . . . . . 30 “Ligado” usando (/). . . . . . . . 2. .About . Selecione 30 num disco se. misturam the symbols instructions ing) to. highlight Initialbuttons Settings .to . . confirm . . . for . as .Enter. . teclas .your . . . .selection. . . . . . . . .Refers . 16-19 the DVD format, you can hear amay program’s to soundPrev. Original: to theWith original language ENTER and the ones). Mute .quietest . . . . . .in . which . . . . Then, . the . . . .you . . . . . . .listen . . . . . .a. movie . . 30 .the . . . . . . . . 30 Press � General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 track in the most accurate and realistic presentation disc was recorded. 3. Pressione ENTER para confirmar a sua seleção. O menu The confirm menu willwill appear. atUsing a lower withoutJack losing. .dialog hazards likely toset cause harm to Receiver the unit Pressing ENTER the DVD/CD thevolume Headphone . . . . .intelligibility. . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30Indicates possible, thanks digital audio technology. However, � Languageaparecerá. . . . . . . .damage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Set DRC to the Ontonumber for thisSource effect. confirmação other material to or Progressive scan mode. the v / V bu Selecting Input . . . 2. . . Select . . . . . “On” . . . . using . . . 30 Other:your To select another language, press . . . . . . . . . de 30itself When the you may wish to compress the dynamic range of the � Display .confirm . . . . . . menu . . . . . appears . . . . . . . on . . . . . . .screen 16-17 CK XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 buttons then ENTER to enter the corresponding 4-digit . . . . . . . . . 30 Cancel b. ./ .B17 is. highlighted as default. Use the audio output (the difference between the loudest sounds � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . confirm your Indicates special operating features of thisaccording unit. otes otas: N OR XTS pro . . .list . .in. .the . . . . . . . . . . 3. . . Press . . . . .ENTER . . . . . .to. 30 to the language code to highlight Enter.. . . . .number . . . . . . . . . 30 buttons ote (Parental and quietestfunction ones). Then, you mayThe listen to a movie � Lock Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 18 confirm menu will appear. � the The works playback of reference chapter. If you enter theDRC wrong language code,only during �Indicates Progressive Scan will not be displayed in the setup . . . . . . . •. . Se 30 sua TV não for compatível com o formato Progressive at a lower volume without losing dialog intelligibility. tips and hints for making the task easier. � Others .ENTER . . . . . .will . . . set . . . the . . . DVD/CD . . . . . . .Receiver . . . . . . 19 Pressing Dolby Digital recorded discs. press CLEAR. Reference menu when the VIDEO OUT SELECTOR switch is pace Set DRC to On for this effect. Scan, a imagem aparecerá trêmula se você tentar o to Progressive scan mode. � The level of Dynamic Range Compression may differ at SCART position. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 modosetProgressive Scan no reprodutor de DVD. “Dolby”, depending on the DVD disc. Operation “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Country otes Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 . . .an. . . . .Laboratories. . 31 hin Confidential Unpublished 1992DVD ote or Video CD Operation . . . .works. . . . . .Copyright . . . . . . 19-22 Troubleshooting . . works . . . . .only . . . during . . . . . .playback . . . . . . .of. 32-33 � The DRC function r. . . . . . . .1997 . 31 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. � Playing Progressive Scan not be displayed DVD-V a DVD andwill Video CD. . . . . . . in . . the . . .setup . . . 19 Caution Vocal Specifications . . . . . . .discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Dolby Digital recorded . . . . . . . 32-33 4Manufactured - Quando o menu de confirmação aparecer na tela, under Inc. Once setting for. .progressive scan entered, menu the when thelicense VIDEO is General Features .from . OUT . . Digital . . SELECTOR . . .Theater . . . .output . Systems, . .switch . .is. 20-22 y be � Set TheVocal level of Range Compression Karaoke may differ . . . . . . . .US . “Cancelar” 34 Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 to Dynamic On only when a multi-channel estará destacado como an willtoonly be visible on apadrão. progressive set at SCART position. �image Moving another TITLE/GROUP . Use . . . as . scan .and .teclas . 20 lectric other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS depending on the DVD disc. channels on the disc will DVD is playing. The karaoke compatible TV or monitor. IfENTER. you set ofProgressive / para destacar a opção �Surround” Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK . . . Scan . 20 Digital are registered trademarks Digital .Theater mix into a normal stereo sound. Systems, Inc. Copyright to�On in error, you1996, must reset the Slow Motion. . . .2000 . . .oDigital . reprodutor . . . unit. . Theater . . . .será . .Systems, . .ajustado . . . 20 5Inc. - Pressionando a tecla. .ENTER AllCaution rights reserved. angle Vocal DVD-V wner’s � Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20 ce of para oSearch. modo progressive scan. Once the setting scan entered, d the 1)�Remove any . .for . disc . progressive . . .from . for . . the . . . unit . . . and . output . . .close . . .is.the . . .disc . 20 About the symbols Set Vocal to On only when a multi-channel Karaoke ng) an OTES image will only be visible oninstructions progressive scan locatray. SeeCOPYRIGHTS: that “NO DISC” is.a.displayed on the ON � Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . display . . 20 he DVD is playing. The karaoke channels on the disc will compatible TV or monitor. If you set Progressive Scan It is forbidden byhazards law Indicates �window Repeat A-Bto. copy . likely . . ,.broadcast, . .to. .cause . . . show . .harm . ., broadcast . . to . . .the . . .unit . 21 mix into a normal stereo sound. to cable, On inplay error, you must reset the unit. via in public, or rent copyrighted material without dures Aviso ) .for five seconds then 2) and hold STOP (x itself or other material damage. �Press Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 permission. us release it. The video output will be restored to the K radiUma vez ajustado o modo progressive scan, uma imagem � Marker Search . . . .protection . . . . . . .function . . . . . developed . . . . . . . 21 This product features theoperating copy 1) Indicates Remove any disc from the unit and close the discbe special standard a. .picture again N OR � Zoom. . setting, . .numa .protection . . .and . . .ou .features . . .are . will .compatível .of .once .this . . .unit. .on . com .some . . 21 somente será TV o by Macrovision. Copy signals recorded tray. See vista that “NO DISC” ismonitor displayed on the display open visible on a conventional analog TV or monitor. discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs Special DVD Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 modo progressive scan. Se você ajustou o modo progresOT Indicates tips and hints for making the task easier. window on a VCR, picture noise � Title Menu . . .will .reajustar .appear. . . . . . o. .reprodutor. . . . . . . . . Primeiro . . . . . . 22 pace sive por engano, deverá five seconds then that 2) Press and hold STOP (x) for This product � Discincorporates . . . copyright . .from . . .Dolby . .protection . . Laboratories. .be . . restored . .technology . . . . “Dolby”, .to. .the . . 22 Manufactured under license release it.Menu The video output will remova o disco do aparelho de DVD. Em seguida, pressioter is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of � Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . Dolby .be . . 22 standard setting, and a picture will cinco once Corporation again such intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision ne STOP ()novamente e segure-o por segundos, Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished works. � Changing the Use Audio Channel . . or .Copyright . monitor. . . . . . 1992.tech. . 22 visible on aowners. conventional analog TV and other rights of this copyright protection 1997 Dolbyliberá-la. Laboratories. All rights reserved. antes A. .saída ao �must Subtitles . . . by . de . Macrovision . vídeo . . . . .será . . Corporation, . restaurada . . . . . . . . and . . .is22 nologyde be authorized Manufactured under license ajuste padrão, e Discs aand imagem uma vista DVD Audio . . .from .será . .Digital . mais . viewing . . .Theater . . .uses .vez . Systems, . only . . . unless . numa . .Inc. . 22 intended for home other limited 1 2 3 24 3 5 4 5 US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and otherwise authorized byissued Macrovision Corporation. TV analógica convencional ouand nopending. monitor. other worldwide patents “DTS”Reverse and “DTS engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located on the back of18 this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available to others. record requested information here and OTESYou ONshould COPYRIGHTS: retain this guide as a permanent record of your purchase. It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast 17 17 ENTER to confirm your selection. Some items equire additional steps. Progressive Scan Initial Settings DISPLAY Progressive Scan Video provides the highest quality DIS pictures By with less the flickering. using Setup menu, you can make various TV A If you are using the Component Video jacks for adjustments to items such as picture and sound. You NGUAGEBefore Disp Antes da Operação (continuação) Operation (Continued) connection a TV that compatible cantoalso setora monitor language foristhe subtitles with and the Prog a progressive signal, setother Progressive Scan to on each LANGUAGE Setup scan menu, among things. For details digitar a senha de 4 dígitos ou mudar o nível da classificaOn. Password (Security Code) Introduction LOCK (Parental Control) Setup menu item, see pages 19 to 22. English Menu Language ção enter para reproduzir opassword. disco. Original. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Disc Audio Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Safety Precautions Introduction ONdisplay progressive scan: To TurnTo You can exit or Menu: change and the LOCK BLOQUEIO Disc Subtitle Off Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc Table of Contents . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32 Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc .press .a .classificação . . .of . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 Safety Precautions 4. Pressione ENTER para confirmar Press SETUP to display the menu. A second Disc Menu Unlock Rating out �ofPassword the DVD to. .the 1 Select the LOCK press Pause .Audio . .on .CD . input .screen. .and . . of .MP3/WMA .menu . . . . then . . . .Disc . . . .. .B. .. 23 Before . . . . Original . Censura . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Desbloqueado . .. .. .. .. .. ..Connect . .. .. .. .. ..SETUP .component 4-5 Playing an . .. ..sair 23 Table ofUse Contents . . . . . 3 will take you back to initial **** Senha selecionada, e em seguida pressione“Change” ENTER para Password **** your monitor/television, set your television or monitor 2 Follow step 2 as shown left (Rating). or � Playable . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..BR.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4-5 .4 � Moving Pause .to. .another . . . . . . Track . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 Before Use Discs . . . . ..Código .. .. .do.Code .País Country do menu. Input. “New” islevel: highlighted. the next � . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .TV .. .. 23 Precautions . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. to .. .. Component .. .. .. .. To .. .. ..go 54 to � Repeat Moving Track/All/Off. to another Track . .. ..Aspect 23 Playable Discs DVD-V 3 Enter the new 4-digit code, then press ENTER. Remote � . .DISPLAY . . . . . . . menu . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 Notes on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1. .. .. .Select .. .“Progressive on Control. the � Search. Repeat Track/All/Off. 23 Precautions . . .Move . .. .. .. Press . .. 55 B on theScan” Select Input it again to verify. JPEG Operation .. 24 About .. .. ..go 55 B. �Disc Search. . . level: . .Segurança) . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4:3: . .. .. ..Select 23 when a st Notes Symbols on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .then . .. .. .. press To back to the previous (Código 4 Senha Press SET UPJPEG to de exitdisc the .menu. Viewing .. 24 Front Panel and Rear .. .. .. 65 b onJPEG u Language Disc aOperation . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16:9 . .. .. .. Wide: 24 Select w About Symbols . . .Panel . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Press the Remote Control. VocêViewing pode entrar ou alterar Password DISPLAY � Slide . . . .. a.. .senha. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Code) .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 Move Select Remote Control Overview .on-screen . .. .. .. ..Mudar .. .. .. ..Seleciona .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76 aShow JPEG. disc . ..(Security 24 Front and menu Rear and Panel ct a language forPanel the Setup If you forget y our Security 1.Aspect Selecione Senha � .. .. menu .. .. .. ..Code ..Bloqueio, .. .. .. .. .. .. ..e..em .. .. ..seguida .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 TV � Still SlidePicture Show no 24 OPERATION ay. Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GENERAL ...7 Mode DVDCAUTION You can enter password. Display Mode � to another .. .. ..change .. .. .. .. it.. ..using .. .Display pressione . DVD-V LOCK � Moving Still Picture . . . .appears. . file . .you . .. ..or . .. .. .. .. 24 24 Rating If you forget your security can clear Preparation 1. Press SETUP. The Setup menucode Progressive Scan On RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 �o Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . Display . . . . . 24 Mode setting steps: DVD-A Connections . . .DVD-V . . .scenes .Rating .DO . . NOT . .that . OPEN . .may . . . not . . . be . . .suitable . . . . 8-13 the2.following Off2, como mostrado à esquerda (classificaSome movies contain Preparation c Audio / Subtitle / Menu passo Classificação Unlock 1Playback Selectoption 2. Use v Programmed / VSiga to �select the desired .. Password .. .. .. ..then .. .. .. .press .. .. ..the .. .mode 25 to “4:3”. To rotate picture. . .. .. ..on . .. .LOCK . .. ..is 24set menu for children tocontêm view. Many TV filmes Connections . Password . .. .of . .. these . .que . .. .. .não .discs . .. ..são .contain . ..adequadas . .. .. ..parental . .. .. 8-13 . . B8 to 1move Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . ção). “Mudar” ou “Nova” estará selecionada. Input the 6-digit number “210499” on the setup menu to the second level. The screen shows Alguns imagens **** ct the language you preferCAUTION: for the audio track THE RISK Repeat Programmed Tracks. .. .. as .. .. .. shown .. .. .. .. .. .. .. left .. .. .. 25 2theFollow 2 (Rating). “ TO REDUCE Programmed . step .item, . . . .as 25 control information that. applies to. .the complete disc or to the current setting for Playback selected well as Optional Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Letterbox: Displays and the security code is cleared. TV Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 para crianças assistirem. Muitos desses discos contêm Country Code SHOCK c audio), subtitles, and the disc OF menu. ELECTRIC Erasing ao Track from .. .. .. .. .. 25 3. setting(s). Entre com código de Programme 4Tracks. seguida Repeat Programmed . em . . .List . . . .. .. ..pressione 25 “New” isdígitos, highlighted. certain scenes onNOT the REMOVE disc. Aerial Connections . .Connections . Movies . . .COVER . . .and . .(OR . scenes . ..BACK) .. .. .. ..are .. .. ..rated .. .. 10 and lower por a newthe code as described above. List . . .upper Optional Equipment .alternate 9 2 Enter DO Erasing Complete Programme informação de controle de censura que se. aplica ao disco ErasingPrev. a Track from List . . . . .. .. .. .. 25 25 Entre novamente para verificar from 1the to original 8,Connections depending on country. Move Enter Programme inal: Refers toSpeaker language the System Connection NO USER-SERVICEABLE 3. Use v DivX / VENTER. toDisc select the second desired option then 3 Enter the new 4-digit code, then press Aerial . . the .in. .which . . .. ..PARTS .. ..Some .. .. ..INSIDE .. ..discs .. .. .. ..offer .11-12 . . 10 Operation . . . Programme . . . . . . . . . .List . . . .. .. .Panscan: por completo ou a SERVICING algumas e cenas são. . 11 Erasing . .. .. .. .. 26 25 Automatic more suitable scenes was recorded. REFER TO toPressione move tothe theComplete thirdpara level. press B � Transmitter. . as . . an . .cenas. .alternative. . . QUALIFIED . .Filmes ote Speaker System Connection .. .. .. .. .. .. SERVICE .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12 4. SETUP sair do menu. Input it again to verify. Speaker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 entire screen and cut DivX Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 PERSONNEL. classificados de 1 aa8,channel � .. .. Select .. (País). .access .. .“On” INPUT PASSWD � Changing Transmitter. .dependendo . . .number . .allows .of. Transmitter . . da .you . .localidade . to . .block . 2. . .. .. 4. . 11 11 v /V buttons. Useusing v Additional / Vthe to“ select the desired setting press The parental control feature When er: To select another language, press Information .. .. .. .then .on .to .TV .. .. .. ..menu. .. 28 Speaker Setup . Press . . . .” . appears . ..SET . ..items . .. .. the . .. ..exit . .. .. ..screen, 27 4 UP the Alguns discos oferecem outras cenas adequadas como � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 ENTER to confirm your selection. Some � Changing a rating channel Transmitter . . . . . . . 11 press Last to scenes below youofinput, thereby. preventing ons then ENTER to enter thethe corresponding 4-digit and Memory then press STOP (x) Scan Condition .. .. de .. .UP .. .. move .. .. .. .. .Progressive .. .. 28 Additional Information . . .. ..SET . .Segurança. . .. to .to.. ..the 28 require additional steps. você esqueceu o seu Código 3. Press toSe confirm your selection. This flash arrowhead an setup � and Connecting to. .the Speakers uma � Assembling Setting alightning ID of Transmitter . .material . .symbol . .you . . .within . .ENTER . 11 11 yourtoalternativa. children from being able to view menu. ber according the language code list in with the Screen Saver . .Memory . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 Move Select Lastappear. Condition 28 Scan Vi equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user The confirm menu will Progressive � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Se você esqueceu o seu Código de Segurança você poderá believe unsuitable. � is Assembling and language Connecting to the Speakers ence chapter. If you enter the wrong code, 5. 11 Press SETUP or PLAY to exit .the Controlling .. .. Setup .. .. .. .. .. menu. ..y..our .. .. .. .. Security .. .. .. .. .pictures Ifthe you Code about the presence Screen Saver . TV . . . .forget . .. .. .. .. 28 28 with less flic Speaker Positioning. . . censura . . . . of . ..uninsulated .. .. ..permite .. .. .. .. ..dangerous ..bloquear .. .. .. .. .. .. o.. 13 cancelá-lo, da seguinte maneira: � Speaker Connections. 12 s CLEAR. O recurso de“Rating” controle de lhe Operation with Radio .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .If. ..you .. .. ..are 29 DVD-V voltage within the product’s enclosure thatpress may be Select on the LOCK menu then, Controlling the TV . 28 Country Code using the Before Operation . . .magnitude . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..to.. .constitute . .. .. .. .. .. .. a.. .risk . .. .. of . .14-19 Speaker Positioning. . . . 13 DVD-V LANGUAGE 1. Pressione SETUP para exibir o menu de ajuste of sufficient electric Presetting radio stations .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .connection .. .. .. .. 29 Rating acesso cenas abaixo da classificação que você definiu, o Iftheyou forget Operation with Radio . . . . .your . .. .. .. ..security . code 29you B. à Glossary to acan TV o Mini Before Operation . .Audio . . . . Stream ......& . . Surround . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Enter Listening the code of the country/area whose standards shock tofor persons. to thede radio . . . .[210499]. .steps: .. .. .. .. ..19 ..O .. ..aviso .. .. .. .a.aparece, ..progressive .. .. .. 29 Presetting the radio stations 29 que Mode impede seus a. materiais scan s 2. Digite o numero 6 dígitos the following To access the and . .que . . .contain . . for .Rating, .filhos .Audio . . scenes . assistam .Password . . . . . .that . . may . .Country . . que .not . . você . .be 14 suitable LANGUAGE were used to rate the DVD-Video disc, based on the list Some movies Mini Glossary Stream &. Surround Other Functions. . radio . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .On. Listening to the . .. .. .. .. 30 29 Code acredite não serem [OK]e pressione within an Sound Mode .. you .. .. .. ..must .. mark .. .. .a.input ..eles. .. .. .. ..the .. .. equilateral ..4-digit .. .. .. .. .. .. .triangle English ENTER. O código de segurança theescolha reference chapter. Menu Language Mode .features, .The . . view. .exclamation . ..adequados . .. .. 14 14 inparental for children to Many of these discs contain Sleep Timer Setting .. .. .. ..6-digit .. .. .. .. .. .. .number Other Functions. . . Original . . ..the . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .“210499” . .. .. 30 30 security code is intended alert of Input on Disccancelado. Audio 1 On-Screen Display .. .. .. about .. .. .. .. .the .. .. .. .. .. .. 15 estará Sound Mode . you . . to . .created. . .. .. .the . .. ..user . .. ..presence 14 Turn ON progres To Dimmer . . symbols . .Setting . .Code” . .Off. .. .. on ..for .. ..the .. .instructions .. .. .. .. ..menu, .. .. .. .. .. then .. .. .. .. 30 About the Select Sleep Timer . ..LOCK 30 important maintenance If you have not. yet are control information disc or to Disc“Country Subtitle Initial Settings . operating .that .entered . . .. applies . ..and . a.. ..security . ..Bloqueio .to . .. the .code . .. .(servicing) .complete .you . .. .16-19 and the security code is cleared. 1. Selecione “Classificação” no menu e em On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Mute .. .. ..novo .. .. .. .Original .. .. .. .. ..como .. .. .. .. o.. .explicado .Connect instructions instructions accompanying the 3. rated Introduza Disc B.Menu . . ..um Dimmer .código . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..acima. . .. .. .. .. 30 30component prompted to on do so.in the � General Operation . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..and . . 16 are press certain scenes Initial Settings . .the . . . disc. . .. .. .. .. .Movies .. .. .. .. scenes .. .. 16-19 Indicates Headphone hazards likely to cause harm to the unit seguida pressione . product. Using .. 30 Mute .the . . .2. . Enter . . . . . .a.Jack .new . . . .. .code . .. .. .. .. .as . .. .. .described . .. .your . .. .. .. monitor/televisi 30 above. Input a 4-digit code and press ENTER. Enter it � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 � General Operationon . . . the . . . .country. . . . . . . . . Some . . . . . 16discs offer itself or other material damage. from 1 to 8, depending Selecting Input Source . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .to .. .. .. 30 Input. Usingstep thethe Headphone Jack . .. Component 30 2. Para acessar os recursos de Classificação, Senha e again and press ENTER to verify. If you make a � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 Follow 2 as shown left (Rating). WARNING: TO PREVENT � Language . . . . . . FIRE . . . .OR . . .ELECTRIC . . . . . . . SHOCK . . . . . . 16 XTS (ExcellentInput TrueSource Sound) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 moreCódigo suitable scenes as alternative. Selecting 30 mistake before Regional, você Indicates the special operating .features of this unit. � .NOT .an .press . .. ..RAIN . 16-17 . .OR 17 otas: HAZARD, DO THIS ote 1.. .Select “Progressi � Audio. Display .. .. ..pressing ..EXPOSE .. .. ..deve .. .. .ENTER, ..entrar .. .. ..PRODUCT .. .com .. .. ..o.. código ..CLEAR. .TO .. .de XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Move Select XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 MOISTURE. � (Parental .. ..criou. .. .. ..the ..Se .. ..v .você .. .. .. .. 18 segurança then press B. Select a de rating 1. .to.você � Lock Audio. . 4. dígitos . .from . . Control) .feature .que .8. using . ../ ..V.. ainda 17 access Select the first using aparece Quando a .mensagem The parental control on XTS pro .When . . .character . . . hints .““. INPUT . . for . .PASSWD .making ..v . . /. V . .buttons. . task . . .””.easier. . appears . . . 30 Indicates tips and the � . . . .apto . . .Control) . .fazê-lo. . . . . .. .allows .. .. .. .. .. .. you .. .. .. .. .to .. Menu ..block .. 19 Language buttons. não fez, já está a �oOthers Lock (Parental . . 18 WARNING: Do notthe installrating this equipment in a confined space preventing Reference na tela da TV, pressione STOP e em seguida pressione DIS to scenes below you input, thereby and then press SET UP press STOP (x) Rating 1-8: Rating one �asOthers . . . .or. similar .de. .4.(1) .unit. . has . . . ethe . .pressione . most . . . . restrictions . . ENTER. . . . Select . . 19 a language for the Setup menu and on-screen Entre com um.case código dígitos such a book Manufactured under license “Dolby”, Shift the cursor using and Language Code List . . from .B. button . .Dolby .Configuração. . . .Laboratories. . . . select . . . . . .the . . . . 31 Reference SET UP and para trocar ao menu TV A and rating from eight (8) is the able least restrictive. your children being to view material you Operation setup menu. “Pro Logic”, the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby display. Confirme o seu código, digitando-o novamente e pressio- Country secondCode character List .using . .Unpublished .. works. .. .. .. .. ..Copyright .. .. .. .. .. .. ..1992.. .. 31 Dis Language Code List . .. .. ..v.. ./. .V . .. buttons. 31 Laboratories. Confidential DVD orisVideo Operation . . . . . antes . . . . .de. .pressionar . . . 19-22 Operation believe unsuitable. neUnlock ENTER. SeCD você digitou errado, Pro Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 1997 DolbyCode Laboratories. Country List . DVD-V . All . . rights . . .DVD-A . reserved. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Playing a DVD and Video CD. . .. not . . 19Audio Disc / Subtitle / Menu If or youVideo select unlock, parental DVD CD Operation . . control . .. .. .. .. .is .. .. ..active .. .. .. 19-22 Código Regional Specifications .to .license . .. .. code . Inc. . 34 ENTER, pressione CLEAR. thin an Troubleshooting ..confirm .. .. .. .. from .. .. ..your ..Digital .. .. ..country .. Theater .. .. .DVD-V ..Systems, .. .. .. .. .. 32-33 Press ENTER Manufactured under General Features . . . .the .CD. . . .LOCK . .. .. .. .. .20-22 Select on press Country Code and the “Rating” disc plays full. Playing a DVD and.in.Video .. .. .. .. .. .. .menu . then, . 19 r Entre código regional a. .área cujos padrões foram US Pat.com No.you 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 selection. Select the language prefer for the audio track 3. Selecione uma � Moving toclassificação another . 20-22 . . 20 General Features . . . .TITLE/GROUP . .de . . 1. .a.8,. .usando . . .. .. .. as .. .. .teclas other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” “DTS B.ote CAUTION: usados para and classificar osmenu. discos de vídeo DVD,and baseado (disc audio), subtitles, theregistered disc Digital Surround” are trademarks of Digital Theater � to another CHAPTER/TRACK .. .. .. .. .. 20 (/) ay be Enter the code of the country/area whose � Moving Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . 20 This set DVD/CD receiver Systems, Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, na listatonoInc. capítulo dalanguage referência. If you a rating for the electric � Slow Motion. .employs . .DVD/CD . .CHAPTER/TRACK . .a.laser . Password .Receiver, . .system. . . . . . all . . disc ..and .. .. Original: .. .. 20 To access the Rating, Country Refers the original inrate whichthe the DVD-Video disc, b � Moving to another 20 Inc. All rights reserved. were used to Classificação 1-8: A Classificação 1 possui a mais alta To ensure proper use of this product, please read this owner’s scenes with the same rating or � Picture and Frame-by-Frame � Still Slow Motion. . .you . .it.for . must . lower . . . . reference. .are . . played. . .Playback . . the . . Higher . . disc . .the . 20 20was recorded. Code features, input 4-digit manual carefully and retain futurean Should restrição; jáare classificação in theRegional” reference chapter. rated scenes 1. Selecione “Código no menu Bloqueio, e em � . not . . and .played . . .Frame-by-Frame . 8. unless .é. a. menos . . . . .alternate .restritiva. . . Playback . . . .scene . . . .. 20 � Search. Still Picture 20 To select 2. Select “On” using unit require maintenance, contact an authorized service locaOther: another press number angle OTES ONlanguage, COPYRIGHTS: security code you created. is available on the. disc. The alternative must have the � .. .. 20 seguida pressione. Desbloqueio � Repeat Search. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. buttons 20 then tion (see service..procedure). ce of ENTER to enter the corresponding 4-digit It is forbidden by law to copy , broadcast, show , broadcast Select “Country Code” onENTER the LOC same rating or aA-B lower one. If no .suitable alternative is. 21 you are If have entered � .. desbloqueio, ..yet .. .. .. .for .. ..a.. ..security .out .. .. .. .. ..code 3. Press to About the symbols � Repeat Repeat . not . . adjustments, . .. .. ..instructions . ..carrying . .. .de .procedures . 20 according ng) Seyou você selecionou o.. controle via cable,to public, orcode rent copyrighted material(classificawithout Performing controls, or number the in language list in the 2. Siga oplay passo 2, como mostrado à esquerda found, playback stops. enter pass� Time Search ..You .. ..herein .. must .. .. .. .may .. ..the .. ..in.4-digit .. ..radi21 The confirm menu B. press the �than Repeat A-B . ativo . .. .. ..result . .hazardous . .. .. .. .. .. reference 21 prompted to do so. permission. other those specified chapter. If you enter the wrong language code, censura não estará e o disco será reproduzido por wordIndicates or change the rating level in order to play the disc. ção) hazards likely to cause harm to the unit Marker Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. press .. .. 21 This product features the copy protection function developed ation� �exposure. Time Search 21 CLEAR. completo. itself other damage. Input aorENTER 4-digit and Enter by protection on some � . Search . exposure .material . .code . .. .. .to .. ..your .. ..beam, .press .. .. .do .. ..try .. ..to .. ..open .. .. 21 to confirm selection, � Zoom. Marker . .. laser . ..rating . .. .not .ENTER. 21 3.it Macrovision. Selecione o Copy primeiro icone signals usandoare as recorded teclas (/). ToPress prevent direct K discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs Special DVD Features ..exit .. .. ..the .. ..when ..menu. .. ..verify. ..open. .. .. .. ..DO .. If .. .NOT .. .. .. 22 the enclosure. Visible laser radiation again and press ENTER to you make a � Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . 21 Follow step 2 as shown left (Ratin then press SET UP to Indicates special operating features of this unit. otas: N OR on VCR, picture noiseewill appear. o segundo ícone 4. aPressione ENTER selecione STARE INTO BEAM. � Title Menu . . .pressing . . . .. .. .. .. .. ..ENTER, .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..press .. .. .. .. .. 22 Special DVD Features 22 mistake before CLEAR. Thisusando productas incorporates copyright protection technology that teclas (/). � Menu .. .. ..hints .. .. should .. ..for .. .. making ..not .. .. .be .. o.. .reprodutor, .. .. .to .. .. .. .. 22 SeIndicates você definiu uma classificação para � Disc Title Menu . .. .exposed . the .task . .easier. . water 22 tips and CAUTION: The apparatus is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other � the .. .. .. liquids, .. .. .. the .. .. .such 22 pace Select asplashing) rating from (dripping with � Changing Disc Menu . disco . Audio .and . . no .com . Language .objects .1 .to . .filled .8. ..using . .. v 22/ V intellectual todas asorcenas do a. mesma classificação property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation Select the first character 5. Pressione ENTER para confirmar a seleção do código using v � the Audio . com .. .. .. .classificação Manufactured underbe license from Dolby Laboratories. as vases, should placed onChannel theCenas apparatus. and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection tech� Changing Changing the Audio Language . .. .. .“Dolby”, . .. .. .. .. 22 22 ou menor serão reproduzidas. buttons. regional. “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby nology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is � Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Changing the Audio Channel . . . que . . . haja . . . .uma . . 22 superior não sãoRating reproduzidas, a(1) menos Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished works. 1992- restrictions Rating 1-8: intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless DVD Audio ..may .. .. ..one .. .. .be .. .. .has .. ..Copyright .. ..the .. ..restricted .. .most � Subtitles . . . ..All . .. ..used . outdoor, . .. .. .. 22 22 B button an Shift the cursor using CAUTION: ThisDiscs product not to 1997 Dolby Laboratories. rights reserved. cena alternativa disponível nothe disco, que deverá ter a otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse and eight indoor use only.Discs DVDrating Audio . .(8) . . .is . . . . . .least . . . . . restrictive. . . . . . . . . 22 engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Press SETUP or PLAY to exit the Setup menu. wner’s d the Introduction Introduction BLOQUEIO (Controle de Censura) Before Operation (Continued) Preperação LOCK (Parental Control) 1 2 1 3 1 2 2 3 4 5 1 4 3 18 Manufactured under license Digital Theater mesma classificação oufrom menor. Caso não Systems, haja cenaInc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and Unlock other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater If youInc.select unlock, parental control is not Systems, Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc.and All rights thereserved. disc plays in full. 2 3 4 second character using v / V butt SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located on the back active of this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available 19 Press ENTER to confirm to others. You should record requested information here and your cou retain this guide as a permanent record of your purchase. selection. 5 Setup menu item, see pages 19 to 22. GENERAL OPERATION Display Mode DVD-V DVD-A To display and exit the Menu: 1. Press SETUP.the The SetupA menu appears. Press SETUP to display menu. second press of Display Mode setting worksMove only Select when SETUP 2. will(Continued) takevyou to initial screen. Use / Vback to select the desired option or thenVideo press modeOperation is set to “4:3”. Before Operation DVD CD Before Operation (Continued) or Video CD Operation B to move to the secondDVD level. The screen shows Antes da Operação (continuação) Operação de DVD ou Video CD OTHERS To go to the level: thenext current setting for the selected item, as wellTV asAspect Letterbox: a wide picture wi DVD-V Displays DVD-A setting(s). Press B onalternate the Remote Control.B.L.E. Playing OTHERS upper and lower portions of the scree (Black a Level aExpansion) DVD and Video CD The PBC, Auto Play and B.L.E. settings can be OTHERS Playing DVD and Video CD OUTROS Before Operation (Continued) DVD or Video CD Operation Introduction Before Operation (Continued) DVD or Video CD Operation 4:3: Select when a standard 4:3 TV is connecte 3. Use v / previous V to selectlevel: the second desired option then changed. OTHERS Panscan: displays the w To Audio select the black level of playback pictures. OTHERS CDor and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . .Automatically . Set . . . your . . . . . 23 Safety Precautions . . . . To . . .go . (Continued) . back . . . .press .to. .the .B . .to. .move . . . . to 2 the OUTROS third level. Before Operation DVD Video CD Operation 16:9 Wide: Select when a 16:9 wide TV is cot Before Operation DVD or Video CD Operation entire screen and the portions VCD2.0 VCD1.1 DVD and monitor’s ability. Playback Setup Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc .cuts . . . off . 23 of Contents . . . . PBC . Press . . . . (Continued) .b .ligar .on . . the . On. .Remote . . . . . . Control. . . . 3 preference Ajuste de reprodução PBC On PBC . . . . . . . Table . OTHERS . 23 OTHERS Playing a DVD and Video CD VCD1.1 VCD2.0 DVD Playback Setup OTHERS Playing a DVD and Video CD 4. Use v / V to select the desired setting then press Registration Registro DivX ®. . . . . . Seleção DivX(R) Select Pause . items . scale. .TV . . and . . (0 . a.select .fonte . . .cut .the . off) .entrada . . . . .input .de . . vídeo, .source . . . .na 23 . . . Registration . OTHERS .DivX(R) . . . ENTER . .Select . . . . to . .confirm . . . 4-5your � �Turn on the video conDisc . . . Before . .OTHERS 23 Use . . . . .PBC • Ligue a TV e selecione de On: Expanded grey IRE selection. Some On GENERAL OPERATION �Playing Turn on the a and select theVideo video input source conOTHERS DVD and CD Progressive Mode �nected Moving to Track . . . . .DVD-V . . .Scan . . DVD-A . . . . . 23 Playable DiscsAuto . . Play . . . . . . . . . Off. . . .require . . . . . additional .......4 aTV DVD and Video CD to theanother DVD/CD Receiver. steps.Playing . . . . . . . . .OTHERS 23 qual oto reprodutor de Display DVD está conectado. the DVD/CD Receiver. On PBC VCD2.0 VCD1.1 DVD Playback Setup OTHERS VCD1.1 VCD2.0 Off:nected Standard grey scale. (7.5 IRE cut off) DVD Playback Setup appears. Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Precautions . . B.L.E. . PBC . . . .DivX(R) . 1. . .Registration .Press . . On. On. .SETUP. . .Select . . . .The . . . Setup . . . . 5menu � �Audio system: Turn on the audio system . . . . . . . . . 23 Progressive Scan Video OTHERS Display Mode setting works only provides when thethe TV �to system: Turn onsom, the caso audio system 5. exit the Setup menu. DivX(R) Registration Select Press SETUP or PLAY •Audio Ligue othe sistema de necessário, eto �� Turn on the and the conand select the input source Search. .and .TV . .source . mode . DVD . .select .the .is.pictures .set . connected . to . video . input . with . VCD1.1 . the .input .less . selecione . the .source . .con. . 23 Notes on Discs .PBC . . . . 2. . . .Use ...v .On . /. V . .to. .select . . . . .the . . desired .5 VCD2.0 Playback Setup � option Turn on TV select video source then press flickering. . . . . . . . . . 23 “4:3”. and select the input connected to On PBC VCD1.1 VCD2.0 DVD Playback Setup DivX(R) Registration Select nected toDVD/CD the DVD/CD Receiver. move The screen shows DVD/CD Receiver. a fonte de entrada na qual o aparelho de DVD está Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 About Symbols .DivX(R) . . .Registration . . . .B. .to. .Select . . . . to . . the . . .second . . . . . 5level. �JPEG nected to the Receiver. If you are using the Component Video . . . . . . . . . 23 Turn on Receiver. the TV and select the video input source conDVD/CD LANGUAGE Turn on thewell TV andTurn select the source conthe setting item, as as � Audio system Letterbox: Displays band �� Audio system: Turn on the Viewing asystem: JPEG disc .on. audio .the .connection . video .audio .system . . .input . . to . .a .TV . . or .picture . monitor . 24 with Move . . .current . Move . . . . Seleciona .Select . . . .Select .for . . the . . 6selected a.wide that is c conectado. . . . . . . . Front . . 24 Panel and Rear Panel alternate nected to the DVD/CD Receiver. Mudar setting(s). nected toselect the DVD/CD Receiver. and the .input source connected to the upper and lower portions of the screen. ) to open the disc Press OPEN/CLOSE (Z and select the input source connected to the � Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tray. . 24 a progressive scan signal, set Progres Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .LANGUAGE ..7 . . . . . . . Remote . . 24 � Audio system: TurnOPEN/CLOSE on the audio system Press OPEN/CLOSE (Z ) to open the disc tray. 1. Pressione a tecla para abrir a bandeja de PBC VCD � Audio system: Turn on the audio system DVD/CD Receiver. 3. Use Move v / V Select to select the second desired option DVD/CD Receiver. � Still Picture . . . . .connected .On. . . Automatically . . . . . to . . the . . .displays . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . .PBC . 24 VCD andEnglish select thethen input. .source Panscan: the wide pictu Menu Language press B to move to the third level.and select the to input source connected to disco Move Select � Moving another file . . in . .and . . . tray, . . the . off .with . .the . .the . . 24 Set Playback Control (PBC) toMove On or Off. Select Disc Audio . . . . . . . Preparation .Set . 24Playback DVD/CD Receiver. Original entire screen cuts portions that do n Load your chosen disc the label VCD PBC Turn ON progressive scan: To Control (PBC) to On or Off. DVD/CD Receiver. ) .to open the disc tray. PBC Press OPEN/CLOSE (Z Load your chosen disc in the tray, with the label Press OPEN/CLOSE (Z ) to open the disc tray. 4. Use v / V to select the desired setting then press � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Disc Subtitle Off . . . . . . . Connections . . 24 PBC o disco facing up.escolhido, com o lado de reprodução On: PBC to the 2. Coloque VCD . Control . . with . CDs . . .PBC .with . . .are .para . .played . are .“ON” . Move . played . according . confirm .Ligado .Select . according . . . your .ou 8-13 PBC VCD Video Select Move ENTER to selection. Some items facing up. Playback On:Playback Video CDs to. Disc the Menu Original Ajuste Playback (PBC) – Set Control (PBC) to On or Off. Connect component out of the DVD to Programmed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Progressive Press OPEN/CLOSE (Z) to open the discmake tray. sure . . . . . . . . . 24 When a double-sided DVD isScan inserted, PBC. para baixo. TVSet Connections . . . . .(PBC) . .require . . .to . .On . . .or. .Off. . . .steps. .....8 additional Press (Z) is to open disc tray. When a OPEN/CLOSE double-sided DVD inserted, VCD Playback Control your your televi Repeat Programmed Tracks. . tray, .monitor/television, . . the .tray, . make .down. . .with . .sure .label .the . . set 25 –PBC. Desligado Playback Control (PBC) to On or Off. Load your chosen disc in the label . . . . . . . “OFF” . Set .PBC 25 the side you want to play is facing PBC VCD Load your chosen disc in the with the On: Video CDs with PBC are played according Off: Equipment Video CDs with PBC are played the Optional Connections . . . . .or . .PLAY .same . . . . way 9 Scan Video the side you want from to Progressive play is to facing down. 3. Setup Pressione tecla para fechar Component Press SETUP the menu. Off: Video CDs with played the same way totoexit Erasing aaTrack Programme List . .Input. .aprovides . bandeja. . . . . 25the highest facing up. OPEN/CLOSE On: Video CDsPBC with5.are . . . . . . . . to .Set 25 facing up. On: Video CDs with PBC are the PBC. Playback Control (PBC) On asConnections Aerial . . . .PBC .to .played .are . or . played . Off. .according . . . .according . . . .to. .the 10 the pictures with less flickering. Load your chosen disc in(Z the tray, with ) to close the Press Playback Control .(PBC) to. On or Off. as A reprodução começa automaticamente. Caso isso Erasing theaOPEN/CLOSE Complete Programme List . the . make .tray. . label . . não .sure 25 on the D When double-sided DVD is inserted, PBC. Load your chosen disc in the tray, with the label t . . . . . . . .Set 25 Press OPEN/CLOSE (Z ) to close the tray. ON: Vídeo CDs com PBC são reproduzidos de acordo When a double-sided DVD is inserted, make sure PBC. 1. Select “Progressive Scan” Audio CDs. Speaker System Connection . . . .the . .according .same . . . . . . to 11-12 If youon are using the Component Video jacks f facing up. On: Video CDs with PBC are played the Move Select READING Video CDs with PBC are played Audio CDs. LANGUAGE Disc Operation . play . the .to.PLAY. .is . the . .then . TV .facing . .screen, . .and .down. . B. .playback .and . . .playback . . 26 the side youappears play is facing up. On: Video CDs with PBC are played according to the ocorra, pressione awant st . . . . . . Off: . com 25 READING appears on TV the side want totecla facing Off: CDs with are way DivX press oVideo PBC.Video connection to adown. TV or monitor that is compatib � Transmitter. . . .PBC . . . .PBC . . .played . . . played . .the . . .same .the . . .same . . . 11 Off: CDs with are way When a you double-sided DVD isscreen, inserted, make sure PBC. starts automatically. If playback does not start, way as Audio CDs. Speaker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 When a double-sided DVD is inserted, make sure PBC. starts automatically. If playback does not start, . . . . . . . . . 26 Em alguns casos, o menu do disco pode aparecer: as Menu Language progressive signal, set Progressive Sc as the side you want toa play is facing down. �DivX(R) Changing acom channel of . da . . .mesma .way . . 11 Registration ) to scan close the tray. DivX Press OPEN/CLOSE (Z press PLAY. Off: Video CDs with PBC são areTransmitter played the.LANGUAGE same Press OPEN/CLOSE (Z to close the Vídeo CDs PBC the side you want to play Additional Information . . ). is . .facing . . . . .down. . . .tray. . . . . DISPLAY . . . . 28 Registration press PLAY. . . . . . . . .DivX(R) . OFF: 27 Off: Video CDs with PBCDivX are reproduzidos played same Audio CDs. On. Audio CDs. Select Setup menu andappears on-screen READING appears on the TV screen, and playback Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . the .a. language . Menu . . Language . . .way . .for 11theEnglish In some cases, the disc menu might appear as�You READING on the TV screen, and playback DVD-V Last Condition Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Aspect . . 28 Press OPEN/CLOSE (Z can show the DivX DRM (Digital Right ) to close the tray. maneira que os CDs de Áudio. In some cases, the disc menu might appear Auto Play as . . . . . . . .You . 28can display. starts automatically. If) to playback does not TVstart, Press OPEN/CLOSE (Z close the tray. � Assembling and DRM Connecting to the Speakers 11 showCDs. the DivX (Digital Right instead. Disc Audio Audio starts automatically. If. playback Screen Saver . . . . To .on .Turn . . .TV .ON . screen, . does .progressive . . . not . and . . start, . .playback . Display .scan: . . Mode . 28 Management) Registration code for your unit only. Original READING appears the instead. Audio CDs. um OSD forPLAY. exibido . . . . . . . Registro .Management) . 28 �DivX(R) Registration DivX press READING appears on the TV screen, and playback Registration code Speaker Connections. . .for . . your . .so . .unit . Disc . only. . Subtitle . disc . . . . 12 Off Se press DivX (R) You can set up the DVD/CD receiver a. DVD DivX(R) Registration DivX Scan On starts PLAY. automatically. If. .playback Controlling the TV Connect . the .disc . . .component . . .does . .might . .not . .out .start, . of . Progressive . the . . . DVD 28 . . . . . . . Speaker . automatically . 28 Disc Menu Original to the inp In some cases, menu appear starts automatically. If playback does not start, DVD-V DVD-A Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 starts playing whenever the DVD is Off Disc Audio / (GerenSubtitle / Menu In some cases, the disc Your registration code is :DivX XXXXXXXX Você pode exibir o código de Registro DRM If PLAY. awith menu screen Youshow can show the DivX DRM (Digital Right Registration DivX press Operation Radio . displayed . .menu .is. .displayed . might . . . . .appear . . . . .set . . your . . . 29 the DivX DRM . . . . . . . Before . You .DivX(R) 28 can Your registration code is(Digital : XXXXXXXX Right DivX(R) Registration If a menu screen is DivX your monitor/television, television or instead. press PLAY. inserted. Operation . Registration . . Please . . .use.para . .code. atocode . register .sua . .thisfor .unidade. . .your . . . .unit . . 14-19 this player with instead. Management) only. The menu screen may be displayed first after loading a ciador de direitos Digitais) In some cases, the disc menu might appear Presetting the radio stations . .might .first . Input. . .after . . o. título/capítulo .loading . . . . . .a29 Please use this tocode register thisfor player with Registration your unitlanguage only. Select forsome the audio track thecode DivX(R) Video On Demand service. the . . . . . . . . Management) 29 Use a teclas /// para selecionar to Component The menu screen may displayed can show the DivX DRM (Digital Right In cases, thebe disc menu appear If.You Auto Play mode is set to On, this DVD/CD receiver you prefer Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Surround the DivX(R) VideoDRM On Demand service. DVD or Video CD which can show the DivX (Digital Right instead. This will allow you to rent(disc and purchase videos Listening to the radio . em . .contains .seguida . a. .menu. . . a. pressione .menu. . . . . . . a. .tecla . . 29 audio), subtitles, andDVD the que disc menu. . . . . . . . . will .You 29 or Video CD which contains Management) Registration code for your unit only. instead. você queira assistir, search for title that has the longest playback time Your registration code is :.XXXXXXXX This will allow you tothe rent and purchase videos Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 using DivX(R) Video On Demand format. If a menu screen is displayed 1. Select “Progressive Scan” the DISPLAY Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX Management) Registration code for your unit only. If a menu screen is displayed thin OtherSelect Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .on . 30 using the DivX(R) Video Ongo Demand format. To learn more to www.divx.com/vod Move . . .an . . . . . and . 29 use automatically. this code to register this player with then play back title DVD-V ENTER para iniciar. Prev. Move Sound Mode .Please . .the . .Please . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Original: Refers to the original language in which the The menu screen may be displayed first after loading use this code to.register this player with To learn more go to. www.divx.com/vod B. then press r The menu screen may beis the DivX(R)code Videois On Demand service. DVD-VSleep Timerscreen Setting . displayed . displayed . . . . . . . first . . . after . . . . loading . . . . . . a30 a Your registration : XXXXXXXX If a menu . . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen Display the DivX(R) Video On Demand service. CAUTION Your registration code .code .allow . you . is.to: XXXXXXXX .rent .disc . .purchase .withwas . .videos . .recorded. . . . . . . . 15 or Video CD buttons which contains a the menu. IfDVD menu screen is displayed Menu Language will and Please useThis this to register this player DVD oraVideo CD which contains a.menu. On: Auto Play function is active. Use the b/B/v/V to select title/chapter you Pressione a tecla TITLE ou DVD MENU para retornar ao Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 This will allow youcode to rent and purchase videos The menu screen may be displayed first after loading a . . . . . . . . . 30 Please use this to register this player with using DivX(R) Video format. b/B/v/V buttons to displayed select the first title/chapter you Use Video On service. ay be DISPLAY Initial .the .DivX(R) . .DivX(R) .OF . theVideo .ELECTRIC . Demand .go.Demand .www.divx.com/vod .aOn.format. .Demand . . .VOD . . . .(Video-On. .the . 16-19 RISK SHOCK Thethe menu may be av / V buttons using the On TheSettings Registration code is used for want to view, TITLE “On” using learnSelect more to language for Setup language, menu and on-screen the DivX(R)ToVideo On Demand service. Other: To select another press Mute . screen . then .number .CD . . then .which . . . press .ENTER . . . .ENTER .2..to.Select . .to. .start. .after . . .Press .loading . . . the . . 30 DVDmenu Video contains a.start. menu. de tela. DO OPEN . . . . . . . .The . 30Registration ToThis learn goyou tonot www.divx.com/vod DVD-V code isis used for willmore allow to rent purchase electric toor view, Press TITLE Off: Auto Play function active. �Demand) General Operation .NOT . .and .Demand . .VOD .format. .videos . .(Video-On. .then . . . ENTER . .or . .rental . 16 DVD-V DVD or Video CDpress which contains a menu menu. TV Aspect service agent. You can anwant or DVD MENU to return to the screen. This you display. to rentOn and purchase videospurchase usingwill theallow DivX(R) Video buttons to enter the corresponding 4-digit Using the Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . .Demand) . 30 � Language service agent. You can purchase or rental an or DVD MENU to returnbuttons to the menu screen. using the On Display Modeto confirm your selec To . learn .file. . more .DivX(R) . go. totoVideo .www.divx.com/vod .REDUCE . .Demand . .number .format. . THE . . . RISK .according . . . . . . .to. 16 Press ENTER encrypt movie Use thelist b/B/v/V to3.. select you DVD-V CAUTION: To learn more goTO www.divx.com/vod the language code in the Selecting the Input Source . the . . . title/chapter .the . .Progressive .title/chapter . . . Scan . . you . . . 30 b/B/v/V buttons to select Use the movie file. . . . . . . . .encrypt . 30 �The DVD-A On DVD-V Registration (Video-OnThetoconfirm menuTITLE will appear. Note: Display . . code . . OF . . code .ELECTRIC .used . . is . .used . .SHOCK .VOD .for . . VOD .(Video-On. . .chapter. . . . . 16-17 want to view, then press ENTER start. DVD-A The Registration is for reference If you enter the wrong language code, DVD-V DVD-A angle want to view, then press ENTER to start. Press XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . .Press .TITLE . . .you . . 30Off Disc Audio / Subtitle / Menu . . . . . . .O . •.código 30 b/B/v/V buttons to select the title/chapter Use or theDVD de registro é. usado para o. agente do serviço VOD Demand) service agent. You can purchase or rental an DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK) The Auto Play function may not work for some � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 MENU to return to the menu screen. Use the .b/B/v/V buttons to. .select an option you Use theMENU b/B/v/V buttons to select the title/chapter you Demand) service agent. You can purchase or rental an ce of press CLEAR. or DVD to return to the menu screen. XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 The Registration code is used for VOD (Video-Onotes want to b/B/v/V view, then press ENTER toan start. Press TITLE . . . . . . . About . .The 30 buttons to select option NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS (Video em demanda). Você pode encrypt movie file.Control) DVDs. Registration code is used for � Lock (Parental . the . comprar .VOD . language . . .(Video-On.INSIDE .ou. .alugar . . . .prefer .um 18 forUse Select you the the audio track the symbols for instructions want, then press ENTER to view the Press option. Use a teclas /// para selecionar ayou opção desewant to view, then press ENTER to start. TITLE ng) otes encrypt movie DVD-A service agent. purchase or rental an of want, REFER SERVICING TOcan QUALIFIED SERVICE you rentfile. the DivX You VOD file, it has several options then presstoENTER the option. DVD MENU return to view the menu screen. . . . . . . . . .Demand) 30 �IfOthers DVD-A service You or (disc audio), the menu. the . . .criptografado. .agent. . . . .PERSONNEL. .file, . . .itcan .has . . purchase . several . . .subtitles, . . .options . . rental . .and . .of. an 19 discor arquivo de filme or DVD MENU to return to the menu screen. IfDemand) you rent the DivX VOD jada, em seguida pressione a tecla ENTER para iniciar. VCD2.0 encrypt movie file. as likely viewing limits show to below. Reference Indicates hazards cause harm to the unit Use the b/B/v/V buttons to select an option you encrypt movie file. VCD2.0 DVD-A viewing limits as show below. to select an option you Use theinb/B/v/V otes Original: Refers to the original language which thebuttons DVD-A itself other material damage. Language Code ListENTER . . . . .to . to .view . select . . .the . .the . . .track . . . .you . .Prev. .want 31 Move Enter otesor � Use the number buttons want, then option. want, then presspress ENTER toto thethe option. Operation Usethe the number buttons select track you want Ifrent youthe rentDivX the DivX VOD file, itrecorded. has several options disc was b/B/v/V buttons toview select an option you This lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within anof �Use K. . . . . . . . If. 31 youotes VOD file, it has several options of Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 to view. • Display the number which you can watch the file. b/B/v/V buttons to select an option you Use the VCD2.0 to view. viewing limits asoperating show below. DVD or Video CDshow Operation . can . . . .watch .to.of.alert .this . .the .unit. . user . 19-22 Indicates special features equilateral triangle is.intended otes want, then press ENTER the otas: N OR the number which you the file. VCD2.0 limits as below. Press RETURN return menu screen. Troubleshooting . . . .to .Select . view . . . to .“On” . the . .option. .using . . . . the . . .v. ./ 32-33 2.. to V buttons. Other: To select another language, press number . . . . . . . .•viewing .IfDisplay 31 want, then press ENTER to view the option. you rent the DivX VOD file, it has several options of Press RETURN to return to the menu screen. about the presence Playing DVD and Video CD. . .several . . . . dangerous . .options . . . . . .of19 If you rent athe DivX VOD file,of ituninsulated has � the number � Use Menu setting operating procedures for . buttons . .and . . buttons . the . to . .exact . . to . .select . the . . .track .the . . .track . . . want .you . . .want 34 buttons then ENTER to enter the corresponding 4-digit VCD2.0 �Specifications . . . . . . . 32-33 Use select you limits as and show below. Seviewing você alugar um arquivo, possui várias opções de be Indicates tips the Usethe asnumber teclas numéricas para selecionar faixa de sua voltage within the product’s may � •VCD2.0 Menu setting and the may exact operating procedures General Features .?hints .This . rental .ele .for .video .making .has.7 .you . enclosure .left..can . .task . .that . easier. . .the 20-22 viewing limits as show below. views A .view 3. Press ENTER to aconfirm your selection. to using the menu differ depending on the for disc. • Display the number which watch file. code number according to the language list in view. the to view. . . . . . . . . •. limitação 34 ends when you stop playback, playmostrado awatch different of sufficient magnitude constitute a risk of electric video has 7 views left.to Acan view pace ? This rental Display the number which you the file. de visualização, conforme abaixo: � Use the number buttons to select the track you want using the menu may differ depending on the disc. preferência � Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20 The confirm menu will appear. Press RETURN to return tothe the menu screen. video, turn off your Follow the instructions on each menu ends when you stopor playback, play player. a different � Press Use the number to select the track youscreen. want reference chapter. If you enter the wrong language code, RETURN tobuttons return to the menu screen. shock to persons. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, to view. video, or turn off your player. Follow the instructions on the each menu screen. �oMoving todo another CHAPTER/TRACK . . . 20 • Display thethe number which you canpode watch the.of.file. � Menu setting and the exact You also may setexact PBC to Offoperating under setup. toOs view. • Exibe número arquivo que você assistir “Pro Logic”, and double-D symbol are trademarks Dolby press CLEAR. ajustes do menu eto osOff procedimentos deprocedures operação � •Menu setting and the operating procedures for for Do you want to useyou one of your 7 views now • Display the number which can watch the file. Press RETURN to return to the menu screen. You also may PBC under setup. A.view � Slow Motion. . This .one.rental .video .7 playback, .has . 7now .Aviews .play.left. .different .equilateral . . . . . . .1992. . 20 using theset menu may differ depending ondisc. the disc. Do you want . to?Unpublished use of.mark your views Laboratories. Confidential works. Copyright Press RETURN to return to thediferir, menudependendo screen. The exclamation within triangle views left. view ? This rental No Yes7stop endsvideo whenhas you aan using the menu may differ depending on the para utilização do menu pode do � Menu setting and the exact operating procedures for ends whenYes you stop playback, play a different video, or turn offNo your player. 1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. Follow theand instructions on the each menu screen. � Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20 is intended to alert the user about the presence of � Follow Menu setting the exact operating procedures for video, turn off your player. the instructions on the each menu screen. otes This rental video has 7 views left. A view ? or using the menu may differ depending onsetup. the disc. disco. Siga as instruções em cada OSD. Você também About the symbols for instructions important operating and maintenance (servicing) rental video has 7 views left. A .view You also may set PBC to Off under ?. .This � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 otes ends when you stop playback, play a different using the menu may differ depending on the disc. Manufactured underends license Digital Systems, Inc. Do youfrom want to use one of your Theater 7 views now You may setControl PBC to setup. �also If Parental is Off set and the disc screen. is not within the when you stop playback, a different or turn player. Follow the instructions on theunder each menu want use one your 7play The rental been instructions the pode desligar o PBC no menu ajuste. US Pat.�•No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, Parental is set and discmenu is not withincode the must Repeat .Dovideo, .you.has . turn.toin .offoffexpired. .your . Yes .of instructions .expired. .5,974,380, .views . .now . . . accompanying . 5,978,762 . . . . . . . and . . the . 20 � IfFollow video, or your player. No theControl instructions on thethe each screen. • The rental has been Rating settings (not the 4-digit Yes No pending. “DTS” and “DTS hazards likely cause harm to the unit YouIndicates also may set PBC toauthorized), Offtounder setup. product. other worldwide patents issued and Do you . want to use one. of.your 7 views now Rating settings (not authorized), the 4-digit code must � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 You also may set PBC to Off under setup. otes be entered and/or the disc must be authorized (see you want to use one of your 7 views now Digital Surround” areDo registered trademarks of Digital Theater itself or other material damage. This rental is expired. beotes entered and/or the disc must bethe authorized (see � Time Search .Yes .rental . . is2000 .FIRE . .No . . . . .Theater . . . . . Systems, .SHOCK . . . . . 21 Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, � If Parental Control is set and disc is not within the This expired. Yes No. Digital “Parental Control”, on page WARNING: TO PREVENT OR ELECTRIC • Thereserved. rental has been expired. � If Parental Control is set and the 18). disc is not within the Inc. All rights otes • The rental has been expired. “Parental Control”, on page 18). � Marker . . . . . THIS . . . . PRODUCT . . . . . . . .TO . . RAIN . . . . OR 21 Rating settings (not authorized), theof4-digit code must wner’s special operating features this unit. �Indicates DVDs may have a region code. otas: HAZARD, DOSearch NOT EXPOSE otes Rating settings (not the 4-digit code must If Parental Control isauthorized), set and the disc is authorized not within the DVDs may have a region code. � Zoom. . . . been . . . . expired. . . .This. rental . . is.expired. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 �� d the entered and/or the disc must be (see • MOISTURE. The rental has � be Your receiver will not play discs that have a region � be If Parental Control is set and the disc is not within the entered and/or the disc must be authorized (see Display thebeen authorization error. The• rental has expired. • O• aluguel expirou. • Se o controle de censura estiver definido e o disco não for This rental is expired. Rating settings (not authorized), the 4-digit code must � Your receiver will not play discs that have a region ocaIndicates tips and hints forreceiver. making the task easier. SpecialON DVD Features .error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 OTES COPYRIGHTS: “Parental Control”, on page 18). code different from your The region code • Display the authorization Rating settings (not authorized), the 4-digit code must “Parental Control”, on page 18). The be entered and/or the disc must be authorized (see WARNING: Do not install this equipment in a confined space code different from your receiver. region code for dentro da escolhida, você deverá It is forbidden law to. .copy broadcast, �entered � Titleby Menu . This . .,rental . .is .expired. . . . . .show . . . ,.broadcast . . . . . . . . . 22 DVDs may have adisc region code. this player is 4classificação (four). beestiver and/or the must be authorized (see �Manufactured DVDs may alicense region code. rental is expired. This player asplay a book case or orThis similar under from Dolby Laboratories. “Parental Control”, on not page 18). this ishave 4a (four). via such cable, in public, rent ures �player Your receiver will play discs that have a“Dolby”, region �• Disc Menu . authorization .video . .player . .isvideo .notcopyrighted .authorized .unit. . is.noterror. .to authorized . . .material .to. . . . .without . . . . . 22 entrar com senha. “Parental Control”, onplay page 18). play this video. Display theThis ��“Pro Your receiver will not discs that a region Logic”, and the double-D symbol are have trademarks of Dolby permission. DVDs may have a region code. s radi• Display the authorization error. play this video.Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22 code from your receiver. The region 1992code for � Changing the Audio �Laboratories. DVDs maydifferent have ater region code. Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright different from your receiver. The region code for Os this DVDs devem um código regional. This product features the copy protection function developed �•code Your receiver will not play discs that have a region player is 4 (four). • Display theCopy authorization error. are. recorded � Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . on . . some . . . 22 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. �1997 Yourplayer receiver will not play discs that have a region this is 4 (four). by Macrovision. protection This videosignals player is not authorized to • Display the authorization error. code different from your receiver. The region code for pen erro de autorização 22 • Exibe�oSubtitles player to. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 • code Estedifferent reprodutor não reproduz discos de DVD que não . This .and .video . .playing . . is.not . authorized .thisthe . video. . .pictures play from your receiver. The region code for discs. When recording of these discs Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. play this video. T this player is 4 (four). DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and this player is 4 (four). Thiswill video player is not authorized to on a VCR, picture noise appear. tenha o mesmo código regional. O código regional para er such cted to 1 1 21 12 1 21 2 322 3 33 3 3 This video player is not authorized to play this video. ThisCAUTION: product incorporates copyright protection technology that play this video. is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other This DVD/CD receiver employs a laser system. intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation To ensure proper use of this product, please read thistechowner’s and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection manual and retain it for future reference. Should nology mustcarefully be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and isthe 20 unit require maintenance, contactviewing an authorized service locaintended for home and other limited uses only unless tion (see service procedure). otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse Performing controls, adjustments, or carrying out procedures engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Operation Operation Operation Operation Introduction Operation Operation Introduction Reproduzindo um DVD ou VCD other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS 19 esteSurround” aparelhoare é “4” (quatro).trademarks of Digital Theater 19 Digital registered Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. 19 19 OTES ON COPYRIGHTS: 19 It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without 19 ay be ric electric NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE S Progressive Scan Video provides the highest quality PLAY to exit the Setup menu. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE Playing a DVD General Features pictures with less flickering. When a disc has more than one title/group, you can PERSONNEL. If you are using the Component Video jacks for to another title/group as follows: move e Note: DVD or Video CD Operation angle connection to a TV or monitor that is compatible with � Press DISP., then press the appropriate numbered Playing aflash DVD General Features f PLAYBACK SETUP Unless stated otherwise, all operations described This lightning with arrowhead symbol within an ce of aou progressive scan signal, set Progressive Scan to• (0-9) GUAGE About button to select a title number. the symbols for instructions Operação de DVD VCD (continuação) equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user Playing Playing a DVD a DVD General General Features Features About the symbols for instructions use the remote control. Some features may also be ng) 1. Turn On. on the TV and select the video input source English General Features Language Note: about the presence of uninsulated dangerous the available on the Setup menu. Playing Playing a DVD Playing a DVD a DVD General General Features General Features Features Indicates hazards likely to cause harm to the unit connected to the DVD/CD receiver. Original Audio Indicates hazards likely to cause harm to the unit voltage within the product’s enclosure that mayscan: be PLAYBACK SETUP • Moving Unless stated otherwise, all operations described To Turn ON progressive toNote: another CHAPTER/TRACK Imagem Congelada e Reprodução Quadro-a-QuaIntroduction Note: itself or other material damage. Subtitle Off sufficient magnitude to audio constitute a riskSETUP electric itself or of other material damage. 2. Turn on the system (ifofapplicable) and select TO ANOTHER use the MOVING remote control. Some features also be operation VCD1.1 VCD2.0 DivX DVD-A• Unless DVD-V PLAYBACK • stated Unless stated all descri CD and Disc . . .otherwise, . . Features . . . otherwise, .TITLE/GROUP .may .all . .operations . . 23 Safety Precautions .Playing .DVD .TV . Connect . and . .Playing . PLAYBACK . . .a . . DVD . SETUP . . video .a. .DVD .out .Note: . of . . the .source 2Note: 1. shock Turn onpersons. the select the input Introduction Menu Original ote dro component DVDAudio toGeneral theNote: input of MP3/WMA General toFeatures Playing Playing a a DVD General Features General Features General Features DVD or Video CD Operation (Continued) K the input source connected to the DVD/CD on the Setup menu. use the use remote the control. remote control. Some Some feature may a DVD-A DVD-V Indicates special operating of unit. connected receiver. Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc .described .operations .. .. .features 23 Table of Contents . operating .. .to .. .the ..features .. DVD/CD .. .features ..on .. ..Turn .. ..this ..of .on ..this .and .. ..unit. .TV .•. ..set .. .. your .the 3select PLAYBACK SETUP PLAYBACK SETUP SETUP R PLAYBACK Unless • video stated Unless otherwise, stated • available Unless otherwise, all stated operations all otherwise, operations described all described operations Unless stated otherwise, all describe otas: 1. Turn 1. the TV the select and the input video source input source your monitor/television, television or monitor Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . 2 Indicates special 1. Pressione a tecla SLOW/SCAN no controle remoto N OR When a title on a disc has more than one chapter or a receiver. available the Setup the menu. Setup use remote the control. remote use the control. Some may Some may also be may be also be � Pause .more .remote . Note: .features .Some .CD . control. .remote .and .features . .available . on .also .TITLE/GROUP . be .features .on .can .Disc . .move .features .. .. .. to ..also ..menu. 23 Before Use .Turn .TV .exclamation .on .on . the . .. audio .TV .and .source .input .the . .to . .. .the .input the control. Some may to Component Input. The equilateral triangle to..the DVD/CD receiver. receiver. Playing an Audio MP3/WMA 23 Table of ..the .select .video ..mark ..connected .the ..system ..within ..select .. diferente, .connected ..an .(if .applicable) .. ..video .DVD/CD ..use ..and .4-5 . the 3select 2.Contents Turn MOVING TO Note: 1. Turn1.•on Turn TV on and 1. the select and the input video source source Note: Note: disc has than one you another durante aNote: reprodução. Avance a .imagem quadro-a-quaWhen aANOTHER disc hastrack, more than one title/group, you can Athe menos que indicado de as Indicates tips and hints for making the task Still Picture and Frame-by-frame 3. OPEN/CLOSE to.todas open discavailable tray and General Features on the Setup on available the menu. Setup menu. the Setup menu. intended to user about presence � Moving to. on another Track .. otherwise, ..stated .ANOTHER .all .playback ..operations ..otherwise, ..menu. .. all .. .. .operations .. TITLE/GROU ..described ..all 23 Playable Discs .Press .to.. .maneira .the .the .PLAYBACK .all .on .operations .Turn . ..SETUP .audio .on .the .easier. .system .audio . .. available .the . 4-5 .of4 Indicates tips hints for making the task easier. available on the Setup the connected to the DVD/CD � Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Before Useis .connected .PLAYBACK .input .and ..DVD/CD ..otherwise, .source .. .alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • toUnless stated described connected connected the DVD/CD to the receiver. receiver. DVD/CD receiver. PLAYBACK PLAYBACK SETUP SETUP SETUP • Unless • stated Unless • otherwise, stated Unless • otherwise, stated Unless all operations described operations describe chapter/track as follows: 2. Turn 2. the the (if system applicable) (if applicable) and select and select MOVING MOVING TO TO ANOTHER move another title/group. Press DISPLAY TITLE/G while DVD-A DVD-V 1.o and Select “Progressive Scan” on the DISPLAY menu dro�pressionando atotecla SLOW/SCAN repetidamente. VCD2.0 load your chosen disc in the tray, with the VCD1.1 DVD-V DVD-A DivX operações descritas usam controle remoto. Alguns About the symbols for instructions operating maintenance (servicing) pace Move Selectimportant Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 General Features receiver. � Moving to another Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playable Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 use the remote control. Some features may also be use the use remote the use control. remote the use control. remote Some the features control. remote Some features may control. Some also features may Some be also features may be(0-9 als the input the source input connected source connected to the DVD/CD to the DVD/CD � Press . or > briefly during playback to select Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, playback is stopped then the appropriate number Turn 2. on Turn the audio on 2. the system Turn audio on (if system the applicable) audio (if applicable) system and select (if applicable) and select and select ut2.source MOVING MOVING TO ANOTHER MOVING TO ANOTHER TITLE/GROUP TO ANOTHER TITLE/GROUP TITLE/GROUP then press B. 1. Turn 1. on Turn the 1. TV on Turn and the 1. TV select on Turn and the the TV select on video and the the TV select input video and source the select input video source the input video source input source DVD-A DVD-A DVD-V DVD-V playback side down. instructions in the instructions accompanying the Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, recursos podem também � .chapter/track .the . .available .more .likely . the . . menu. . Setup ..on ..to ..one .. ..another ..Setup .on .. .pressione ..to..menu. .the .. .TITLE/GROUP .. ..a.menu. .can Notes Discs ..symbol .. .. ..estar ..receiver. ..menu. .. ..disponíveis .trademarks .to .. .. .. .. .the .no ..Dolby .menu .. .. ..tray .. .. ..and 55 2. Press Para sair modo imagem congelada, tecla PAUSE/STEP during playback. available ondouble-D the Setup When ado disc has than title/group, you � Search. Repeat Track/All/Off. . another .the .to .the .unit . 23 23 of Precautions .connected . ..to .are . .DVD/CD .receiver. .the .of “Pro Logic”, and the double-D are of ote available available on Setup on available the menu. Setup the next or to return beginning Moving 3.on Press OPEN/CLOSE open disc Indicates hazards to cause harm the input the source input connected source the connected to source the DVD/CD to connected the DVD/CD to. DVD/CD DVD/CD or use b / B to move to title/group. “Pro Logic”, and the. input symbol trademarks Dolby product. connected the connected DVD/CD to the connected to receiver. the to receiver. the DVD/CD receiver. receiver. DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A title/group. DVD-V DVD-V 4. OPEN/CLOSE tray. Playback Setup. Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished works. 1992JPEG Disc Operation .. adamage. .. When .now .. .. ..Press ..a.. into .disc .. .DISPLAY .PAUSE .. .than .. .. one ..while . .. .title/group, About Symbols .. .Press .. ..all .. .. operations .. ..disc .. .. ..works. .. .Copyright .. described .. Copyright ..tray, .. .to .close .DVD-V ..the .. .. 55 Note: The Receiver go move another Unless stated otherwise, use �DVD/CD Search. . .material .chapter/track. . . play . ..will .disc . more .inputting .has . ..more . 24 23onewhile Notes on Discs .chosen .the . .DISPLAY . with . .. ..to .the the PLAY. When has title/gro you load your in Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished 1992itself ortocurrent other You can any title by its. than number receiver. receiver. 3.Turn Press 3.Turn OPEN/CLOSE Press OPEN/CLOSE open to the open the tray disc and tray and DVD-A select orand thereceiver. Setup menu on-screen MOVING TO ANOTHER TITLE/GROUP 19971997 Dolby All reserved. 2.and Turn 2.on Turn the 2. audio on the system audio on the (if system applicable) system audio applicable) system select and (ifdisc applicable) select and select and select MOVING MOVING TO MOVING ANOTHER TO TO ANOTHER TITLE/G starts automatically. playback does not start, • Laboratories. Unless stated otherwise, Viewing a JPEG disc ..MOVING .ANOTHER ..another ..the .. to .. TITLE/GROUP .appropriate .. .another ..TO ..back ..TITLE/GROUP ..ANOTHER .. ..title/group. ..TITLE/GROUP .. .previous mode. Front Panel and Rear .all .your ..load .. chosen .audio ..also .. .the ..TVdescribed .SHOCK .. .When ..(if ..disc ..applicable) 65tray, playback is stopped (0-9) the remote control. Some may be Dolby Laboratories. reserved. JPEG Disc Operation .then .title/group, .to .title/group. . ..the . .. 24 24 About Symbols .rights .All .Panel .rights .features .load . .2. .OR . ..operations .on .If..(if .Aspect . .in .and � Press . twice briefly step to.number move to move Press DISPLAY Press DISP wh playback side down. WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE ELECTRIC playback is stopped. R a When disc has a disc more When has than more a disc one than has title/group, one more than you one can you title/group, can you can your chosen disc the in the with tray, the with the 3. Press 3. OPEN/CLOSE Press OPEN/CLOSE 3. Press to open OPEN/CLOSE to the open disc the tray to disc and open tray the and disc tray and CD the input the source input the connected source input the connected source input toSystems, the connected source DVD/CD to the connected DVD/CD to the DVD/CD to theDVD-V DVD/CD press PLAY. use the remote control. Some features may also be DVD-V DVD-A Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Inc. � Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 available on the Setup menu. DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Indicates special operating features of this unit. or use b / B to move to another title/group. chapter/track. Viewing a JPEG disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 otas: HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS Mode Front Panel and Rear Panel . the . to .PRODUCT .playback .side .the . the . down. .tray, . TO .Display . with .RAIN . down. .Playback .the .OR .to6move playback iswhile stopped is stopped then then appropriate the appropriat numbe ut source Manufactured under from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. move another toYou another title/group. move title/group. to another Press DISPLAY Press title/group. DISPLAY Press while DISPLAY while When aplayback disc has more than one title/group, you playback side 4.receiver. Press OPEN/CLOSE close the tray. can advance the picture frame-by-frame bythe pressDV load your load chosen your chosen disc load inlicense your the disc tray, chosen inreceiver. the with tray, disc with in US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and Mudando de Título (TITLE) receiver. receiver. available on the Setup menu. � Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Progressive Scan On In some cases, the disc menu might appear You can play any title by inputting its number while US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and MOISTURE. � To go directly to any chapter during DVD playback, � Slidethe Show . . use .appropriate . .then . or .on .the .to .b .remote ./title/group .B. .toto . control. .move . . number .as . to . follows: . another . 24 or b /.use B move another title/group. title/gro Remote Control Overview . . .4. .playback .Press . . . .and . .does .“DTS . you . playback .to . .can .start, . 7playback isclose stopped is playback stopped then then is appropriate stopped the number appropriate number (0-9) (0-9) (0-9) move to another otherother worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” ing PAUSE/STEP repeatedly the starts automatically. If. OPEN/CLOSE not playback playback side down. playback down. side down. When aside disc has more than one title/group, 4. Press OPEN/CLOSE close to the tray. the Playback tray. Playback DVD-V DVD-A • Quando usar um disco de DVD de Áudio que inclua When a When disc has a When disc more has a than When disc more one has a than disc title/group, more one has than title/group, more you one than can title/group, you one can title/grou you c worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS Offand ay/ and Indicates tips and hints for making the task easier. le Menu 3. Press 3. OPEN/CLOSE Press 3. OPEN/CLOSE Press 3. to OPEN/CLOSE Press open to OPEN/CLOSE the open disc to the tray open disc and to the tray open disc the tray disc and tray and DVD or Video CD Operation (Con MOVING TO ANOTHER CHAPTER/TRACK � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 instead: playback is stopped. Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater press Then, to � Still Picture .�move . .Press .can . press .title/group. .play .another . can .3any ./4 . then .play .title/group. . select . any .by. .inputting .the .the . by . appropriate . .inputting 24 DVD-V You You title title its number itsnum nu wh Preparation DISP., press Moving another TITLE/GROUP or use orplayback orstart, use b / use B tobimagem, move /B to to move another bDISP. / to Bmove another to title/group. to and select press PLAY. Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater MOVING TO ANOTHER TITLE/GROUP move toto another title/group. Press DISPLAY starts automatically. starts automatically. Ifwhile playback Ifin does not does not start, WARNING: Do not install this equipment in aPlayback confined space move tothe move another to another title/group. to.move another title/group. Press to Press title/group. DISPLAY Press while DISPLA while he 4. Press 4. OPEN/CLOSE Press OPEN/CLOSE 4. Press to close OPEN/CLOSE to the close tray. the Playback to tray. close the tray. Playback essa operação pode ser permitida Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, load your load chosen your load chosen disc your in load the chosen disc your tray, in the chosen disc with tray, in the the disc with tray, the the with tray, the with � To rotate picture. .Then, .its .is(0-9) .inputting .. enter .. another .title/group. ..DISPLAY ..select .the .. .. chapter/track .. .a.em ..Press .while .alguns ..number. .while .DISPLAY 24 chapter/track icon. playback playback stopped. is stopped. � Moving to another file . . . . . . . 24 Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, DVD-A DVD-V you prefer for the audio track button to title You can You play can any play title You any by can inputting title play by any inputting its title number by number while while its number CD Quando um disco possui mais de um título, você pode DVD-V Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Preparation Inc. All rights reserved. playback is stopped then thenot appropriate number such asautomatically. aplayback book case or unit. press PLAY. press PLAY. Manufactured under license from “Dolby”, DVD-A Instarts some cases, the disc menu might appear playback playback is stopped playback is the stopped then the stopped then appropriate is the then appropriate the number number (0-9) appropriate number (0-9) DVD-V DVD-A starts automatically. starts If playback automatically. Ifsimilar playback does If does start, playback not start, does not(0-9) start, Programmed playback side down. playback side down. playback side down. side down. rights reserved. s segmentos de imagem. Playback ..playback ..is .. .Dolby .. ..Laboratories. ..buttons .stopped ..then ..appropriate . .. ..the .. 25 number using numbered VCD2.0 DVD-V DVD-A � To rotate picture. . .. .. VCD1.1 . .. .. .. .. ..(0-9). 24 wner’s s, and theInc. discAll menu. General Features isSearch stopped. isMOVING playback stopped. is stopped. “ProorLogic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of. Dolby TV Connections .title/group. .some .menu . . disc 8playback para outro. or use binstead: / .B. .to. PLAY. move TO ANOTHER CHAPTER/TRACK Connections . ..Use .. .. ..to ..In ..another ..some .. ..B.. ..v .cases, .V .. buttons .. .. ..the .. .. ..disc ..playback ..select .the 8-13 use or or use or bappear / use BWhen to b move /a Btitle toto b move another / use Ba to to b another / .has B to another another title/group. title/grou pressmudar PLAY. press PLAY. press on disc chapter or a In cases, might menu appear might the b to the title/chapter Playback Repeat Programmed Tracks. ..move ..title/group. .. .to ..more .move .title/group. .. ..than ..to .. ..1992..one .. 25 4. Press 4. OPEN/CLOSE Press 4. OPEN/CLOSE Press 4. to OPEN/CLOSE Press close to OPEN/CLOSE the close tray. to the Playback close tray. to the Playback close tray. the Playback tray. Playback d the Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . 25 Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright When a disc has more than one title/group, you can When a disc has more than one title/group, you can You can play any its Optional Connections .reprodução ..number .. .. .press ..while ..ENTER .. .. .. 98 aystart, and •OTES Moving to another CHAPTER/TRA -he You can You play can any You play title can any by You play inputting title can any byone play inputting title itsList any number by .inputting title its by while inputting number while whil M m during playback. Press Pressione a Equipment tecla DISPLAY, enquanto Prev. to Move Enter TV Connections .title . automatically. .might .by .instead: .inputting .Ifappear .to .disc .view, .instead: . amenu .Ifappear .then . .If . .not .playback disc has more than track, toits num language in which thedisc MOVING MOVING TO ANOTHER TO ANOTHER CHAPT ON COPYRIGHTS: you want start. DVD-A DVD-V ot oca-original In some Incases, some the cases, In disc some the menu cases, menu the might might appear Erasing aor Track from Programme .you .. ..number ..can .. CHAPTER/TR .. its ..move 25 1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. DVD-V starts automatically. starts starts automatically. playback starts automatically. playback does does start, If not playback does start, not does start, not start, OTES ON COPYRIGHTS: Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . . . . . . . 25 ote move to another title/group. Press DISPLAY while move to another title/group as follows: playback is he Aerial . .Connections .pressione . TITLE . . .show . . or .o, .broadcast . .. .. .. MENU .. ..correspon.. .. MOVING .. ..to.. .return The DVD/CD will now go into is SEARCH mode. another chapter/track as follows: VCD1.1 DivX VCD2.0 playback playback isReceiver stopped. playback is DVD-V stopped. playback is DVD-V stopped. stopped. DVD-A DVD-V , broadcast, It is forbidden byConnections lawEquipment to stopped. copy Optional . 10 . 9MOVING ote Press DVD toTO the menu parada, em seguida número ANOTHER MOVING TO ANOTHER TO ANOTHER CHAPTER/TRACK CHAPTER/TRACK instead: Search (Busca )CHAPTER/TRACK ,PLAY. broadcast ,then broadcast, show Itestiver isinstead: forbidden byinstead: to copy DVD-A the DVD-A Erasing the Complete Programme List .. .. buttons .. ..Inc. .. 25 press PLAY. press PLAY. press PLAY. press Erasing Track from Programme List . .. ..chapter 25 DVD-V For two-digit numbers, press numbered Manufactured license from Digital Systems, playback islaw stopped the appropriate number (0-9) � Press then press the appropriate When aaunder title on a disc has moreTheater than one or a use via cable, play inDISP., public, or rent Speaker System Connection . .. .DVD-V .material . .. .select .without . ..the Use the b B title/chapter Aerial Connections .copyrighted .v . 2. .V. Select .buttons . .. .material .to ..numbered .. .without .. .. .11-12 . ./ 10 Unless stated otherwise, all operations described screen. via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted ures dente ao título (0 a 9). US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 DivX Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ..during .and 26 • Press SKIP . or > briefly playback to M m “On” using the v V buttons. repeatedly to select the or Press pear 1. Pressione e segure a tecla ou durante a.. ..than her language, press number When a title on a disc has more one chap DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V Erasing the Complete Programme List . . .has 25 (0-9) in rapid succession. In some In cases, some In the cases, some disc In the cases, menu some disc might the cases, menu disc appear might the menu disc appear might menu appear might appear or use b / B to move to another title/group. button (0-9) to select a title number. permission. disc has more than one track, you can move to DVD-Vpermission. DVD-V DVD-V diyou want. Connection ENTER � Transmitter. .to. view, . . .Use . .then . the . .. .press .Use . ..B . the .v . ..V . .buttons .B.. .v .to . 11-12 .start. . buttons 11selectother When a When title on a a title disc on has a disc more than more than chapt on Playback b b V to to the select title/chapter the title/chapter the remote control. Some features may also beone worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS Speaker System . . . . . . storadinext to tomove the MOVING TO ANOTHER CHAPTER/TRACK CAUTION: Speaker Setup . .select .mX2, .disc . TO .. .the ..MOVING .ANOTHER .. more .follows: .. ..chapter/track .. ANOTHER .mX8, .. ..TO .. one ..CHAPTER/TRACK ..ANOTHER .. .track, ..or .. ..CHAPTER/TRA ..you ..return .. 27 required speed: mX4, mX16, enter theproduct corresponding 4-digit has than can tom DivX Disc Operation . . . . . 26 This features the copy protection function developed MOVING MOVING TO MOVING ANOTHER TO CHAPTER/TRACK CHAPTE DVD-A You can play any title by inputting its number while instead: instead: instead: instead: reprodução. another chapter/track as Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Press TITLE or DVD MENU to return to the menu disc has disc more has than more one than track, one you track, can you move can to � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11 This product features the copy protection function developed you want you to want view, to then view, press then ENTER press ENTER to start. to start. ot start, available on the Setup menu. 3. Press ENTER to confirm your selection. � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 When a When title on a a title disc When on has a disc a more title has on than more a disc one than has chapter one more chapter or than a one or a chapter or a current Use theThis Use bplayback BDVD-V the v Copy V b buttons B Use v V thebuttons tob select B vtoV the buttons title/chapter thetotitle/chapter select the title/chapter Additional Information ..DVD-V .2000 .of .. Digital ..MX4, ..as .. chapter/track ..follows: ..Theater .. ..MX8, .as .. ..follows: .Systems, ..VCD1.1 .. .follows: mX100 (backward) by Macrovision. protection signals are recorded on some the language code list inscreen. the chapter/track DVD/CD receiver employs aselect laser system. Systems, Inc. Copyright is stopped. Speaker Setup . menu .beginning . DVD-V . 1996, . or . . MX2, .DVD-V . .. the .chapter/track. . .. .. as . 28 27 DVD-A Mudando para outro Capítulo/Faixa VCD2.0 DVD-A Motion another another chapter/track by Macrovision. Copy signals are DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A DVD-V DVD-V Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK Setting aand ID ofUse Transmitter .Press .of.recorded .ENTER .DVD .MENU ..to ..appear. ..has 11 Press TITLE or DVD MENU return to to return the menu to 1ENTER 2TITLE 3press 4.these the buttons to select an option you disc disc more has than more disc one than has track, one more you track, than canSKIP you move one can track, move you to • Slow Press SKIP . or > during to to the The confirm menu DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V pen enter Changing aprotection channel of Transmitter . .discs . ..on..will .some 11to ou repetidamente 2. Pressione athe you want you to��want view, to then you view, press want then to ENTER press view, then to start. to.or start. start. Inc. All rights reserved. discs. When recording playing the pictures •tecla Press to back MX16, MX100 (forward). Last Condition Memory ... ... ..to ..briefly ..or .twice .. ..to .can .briefly .. ..move ..playback ..para .. ..step .. .. 28 you the wrong language code, � Press during playback to Additional Information . .as . ..> .briefly .return 28 To ensure proper use of this product, please read this owner’s discs. When recording and playing the press pictures of these discs � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11 another another chapter/track chapter/track another as follows: chapter/track as follows: follows: VCD2.0 VCD1.1 select the next chapter/track or to to the screen. screen. DVD-V DVD-A DivX T want, then ENTER to view the option. � or Setting aon ID of Transmitter .buttons . the .select . .one . .buttons .the .select . .V.tobuttons .tothe .the 11 Press TITLE Press TITLE DVD Press or MENU DVD to MENU return orfor DVD to toreturn the MENU to to the return menu the menu on a VCR, picture will When anoise title aappear. more than chapter or atitle/chapter • Press • SKIP Press . SKIP or . > briefly or > during durin pear DVD-V DVD-A previous chapter/track. selecionar a velocidade desejada. x2, x4, itle/chapter With a Video CD, the Search speed changes: Press SLOW -/+ during pause. Moving to another TITLE/GROUP Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 the next chapter/track or to return tothan the begi When a When title on a When a title disc on a has When a title disc more on a has a title than disc more on one has a than disc chapter more one has than chapter more or a one chapter orplayb aone carefully and retain ithas future reference. Should on manual a VCR, picture noise will appear. Use the Use bTITLE Bdisc the v Use V b buttons B the v Use V b to Bmenu v V b to B v title/chapter select tothe select title/chapter the title/chapter Last beginning Condition of Memory . . . chapter/track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28briefly the current � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 This product incorporates copyright protection technology that disc has more than one track, you can move toor select the select chapter/track chapter/track to return or to re screen. screen. MOVING ANOTHER CHAPTER/TRACK � um and Connecting to the Speakers Quando disco possui mais que um capítulo ouview, faixa, start.screen. The receiver enter SLOW mX2, mX4, mX8, (backward) disc has disc more has than disc one than disc has you track, can one you move can toyou move can totomo Press SKIP Press . SKIP •x8, orto Press . > briefly or SKIP > . during briefly or > briefly to during to playback to This product incorporates protection technology that unit require maintenance, contact an authorized service locaDVD-A DVD-A the current chapter/track. •COPYRIGHTS: directly to any chapter DVD playback Notes: Controlling the TV .has ..mX16 ..x100 .track, ..playback .during ..(retornando) ..than ..next .more .the .. ..than .next ..ou ..or .one ..to .you ..track, .. or ..can 28 Vit x16 ou x2, you want you to want view, you to then want view, press you to then want view, ENTER press to then ENTER to•press start. then ENTER to•press start. ENTER to start. start. When aAssembling title on aTO disc has than one chapter a 11 OTES ON Screen Saver .To .more .go .will .beginning .more .one . .playback .mode. .to .track, . during .move 28 1.copyright 3more 4 Use the option you DVD-A is protected bySpeaker method claims of.2.certain and Speaker Positioning. .as .segue: .follows: . U.S. ..buttons .. ..U.S. ..patents .. .. patents ..to .. ..select .. .. .and .. ..an .other ..select .. 13 another chapter/track beginning of the current of the chapter/track. current chapter/trac • chapter/track Press SKIP . twice briefly step back to the � Connections. .other .the 12 the menu er is protected by method claims of certain tion (see service procedure). another another chapter/track another chapter/track as another chapter/track follows: chapter/track as follows: the select next the next select the or next to chapter/track to return the or to the return MX2, MX4, MX8, (forward). você pode trocá-los como se press DISPLAY and /..as V to select thethe pr DVD-V DVD-A DVD or Video CD Operation (Continued) •owned Ifand parental control is set and disc isthe not within Itmenu is forbidden bychapter/track law to copy ,MX16 show ,..to broadcast disc has more than one track, you can move to another Operation with Radio .return ..broadcast, .or ... .to ..select .as .x100 ..follows: .. ..press .(avançando) ..required .follows: .v ..to ..step .to .. .the 29 � Press TITLE Press or TITLE Press DVD or MENU TITLE Press DVD to or MENU TITLE return DVD to or MENU tothe return DVD menu to MENU toreturn to to return the menu to the menu Press twice briefly back to DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A x4, x8, x16 ou Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . 28 want, then press ENTER to view the option. intellectual property rights by Macrovision Corporation Still Picture Frame-by-Frame DVD-V DVD-A Use the SLOW -/+ to the speed: t 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 Use the Use the buttons buttons to select to an select option an you option you previous chapter/track. Before Operation .. . .owned . .. .or . .. .> . by . .. .. ..during . .. ..procedures REPEAT 19 such intellectual property rights Macrovision Speaker Positioning. .. ..settings ..or ..screen. .carrying .. .. out .Corporation .. ..input .. .14-19 .beginning 13 beginning of cable, the current of beginning the chapter/track. current of the chapter/track. current • or Press •more SKIP Press SKIP twice . briefly twice to briefly step back to step to icon. Then, via play inthe public, rent material Performing controls, adjustments, •rights Press SKIP briefly playback to password. chapter/track. chapter/track as follows: the rating you must screen. screen. screen. Presetting radio stations ..PLAY. .chapter/track. ... ..1/2 .during .or .playback ..without .. .the .. .. playback .chapter/track 29 ou rapidamente durante a.tothe Pressione a owners. tecla When achapter/track disc has than one you and •other owners. Use of this copyright protection techOperation with Radio . .•. .copyrighted . Press .x4, .or .. .x8, . .(backward), . .. . .input .title/group, . during .> .during 29 •option. Press •option. Press •. SKIP Press or > SKIP briefly > SKIP briefly > briefly or to briefly playbac during to To SEARCH mode, press com Vídeo CD: x2, want, press then ENTER press ENTER the to view the T can 1/16, t 1/8, t 1/4 or t or Playback and other rights Use this protection techWhen a4 title disc has more than one orview Mini Glossary for Stream & 1 1 1 2the 2 2of 3 3on 4a 4 Use the Use Use the buttons buttons to an buttons option an to select option you itle/chapter previous chapter/track. •exit To goSKIP directly to any chapter during DVD playback, Notes: number or use b /the B. Before Operation .(See .Audio .chapter/track .select .“Lock .3 . .to .copyright .select .then .want, .or . Surround .to . you .option .hazardous .and .chapter . 21). .is .an 14-19 permission. than those specified herein may result in radiselect the next return to the thin an •you Press •a SKIP Press . SKIP •select twice Press . briefly twice SKIP to briefly . step back to step to back to tofollows: to the � To directly to chapter DVD play Menu” on page � other Press . or > briefly during playback to select nology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, Listening to the radio .go .twice .the .select .previous ..briefly ..Frame-by-frame .or .1/2 .to .any .chapter/track. .step .the ..chapter/track ..back .disc. ..the ..or ..during ..to 29 move to another title/group as You can play a title/chapter/all/track/group on a the select next the chapter/track select next chapter/track next the chapter/track next return or to to return to return the or to to retu the Still Picture and playback reprodução para selecionar o capítulo/faixa seguinte, ou Presetting the radio stations . . . . . . . . 29 General Features nology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is 1/16, T 1/8, T 1/4 or T (forward). disc has more than one track, you can move to DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A ou x2, x4, then want, then ENTER press want, then to view press the to ENTER option. to option. press DISPLAY and press v /directly Vany tox8, select thechapter Mode .chapter/track .parental . DVD-A . other . .of .ENTER .the .Audio . Notes: .or . .to .isreturn .view .set . .uses .the . .the .the . view .beginning .unless . .the .is. not .option. . previous . within 14 previous Thisx16(retornando) product features the copy protection function developed • . If control and disc ation exposure. DVD-V beginning current chapter/track. Mini Glossary for Stream & Surround erstart.want, chapter/track. chapter/track. previous To directly To any during Notes: intended forpress home and limited viewing only the next to of press DISP. Then, selectDVD the pla � to Press then press numbered Other Functions. .the .•DISP., .icon. .current .of.. go .the .beginning ..VCD2.0 .. input ..go .. .. to ..the .the ..apress ..appropriate .. .chapter ..chapter/track. .DivX ../4 .. ..to .during beginning beginning of chapter/track. beginning current of the chapter/track. current of the current chapter/track. Press REPEAT during playback to select desired •do may a.uses region Your receiver does Listening the radio . •..signals . chapter/track. .VCD1.1 .to .3 . 30 29 intended for home and viewing only unless DVD-V DVD-A retornar ao início atual. another chapter/track as to chapter/track Then, chapter/track bythe Macrovision. Copy protection are recorded on some the to menu Sound Mode ..Use ..other .DVDs .capítulo/faixa .. •3 ..limited .Use ..Corporation. ..follows: .buttons ..have ..beam, .If.14 ..parental ..control .do .. .not .. is .back .code. .3 .option ..is ..buttons 14 option you the rating settings you must input the password. x16(avançando). DVD-A DVD-V cted press DISPLAY press DISPLAY and press and press v / the V tochapter/tra vselect / V toths otherwise authorized by Reverse Mode .Notes: .direct .Picture .SKIP . .Macrovision .Macrovision .the .If14 .the .the .3 .4Reverse .try .set .to .4 14 To exposure to laser open parental •3 control and set the and disc isselect not disc within is not within SEARCH To exit slow motion mode, press PLAY. the current chapter/track. 1 1 2 2 2 2 •prevent Press . twice briefly to step the chapter/track icon. Then, enter Use the Use buttons to select buttons to an select to an select option an you option an you option you •.. to To go •you directly Toto go to directly •from any To chapter to go any directly chapter during to any DVD during chapter playback, DVD during playback, DVD playback, Notes: Notes: button (0-9) to select a title number. repeat mode. Sleep Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 otherwise authorized by Corporation. not play discs that have a region code different Still and Frame-by-Frame • Press • SKIP Press • . SKIP Press twice • . SKIP briefly Press twice . SKIP to briefly step twice . back to briefly step twice to back the to briefly step to back the to step Other Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 DVD-V DVD-A discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs number or use b / B. 1. Press PAUSE/STEP on the remote control during REPEAT ay be engineering tion. orPress disassembly is On-Screen Display .want, ..ENTER .step .is ..then .set .the .ENTER .rapidamente .21). ..then ..the .. ENTER .the .press .view .. .NOT ..ENTER ..press .. view 15 (See “Lock Menu” on page chapter/track chapter/track icon. Then, icon. input Then, theinput chapter/tr thetocbt Visible laser radiation open. DO playback. •enclosure. SKIP . or > briefly during playback tomust ote Sound Mode .want, .set .prohibited. .is .and .to .press .is .disc .when .to .press .view .within .previous . option. .must 14 previous chapter/track. the rating settings rating settings you you input the input password. the password. • �Ifthe Pressione tecla duas vezes para want, then press then want, to the to option. the to view option. the number using buttons (0-9). DISPLAY press DISPLAY and press press and DISPLAY press v vVCD2.0 select to the the to Press . twice back to VCD1.1 DVD-V DVD-A prohibited. • If parental •engineering parental control •or is control Ifadisassembly set parental and is.briefly the control disc the not within and is not the disc is not within Dimmer . .previous .modo .Setting .Press ./ .V .previous .to .PAUSE/STEP .and .previous .chapter/track. .. select .. .. v ..the ../during ..V .numbered ..DivX .. ..select ... .. .. .. .the .. 30 1. Press and SKIP/SCAN or > for abou Repeat previous chapter/track. chapter/track. chapter/track. your receiver. The region code for this receiver is 1option. 3. sair do SEARCH, Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame on aPara VCR, picture noise will Sleep Timer .appear. . ./. .V .hold .press .pressione ./play. .into 30PAUSE DVD-V DVD-A electric Playback playback. Advance the picture frame-by-frame by REPEAT DVD Video Discs Repeat Chapter/Title/Off number number or use or use b B. b / B. STARE INTO BEAM. Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19 select the next chapter/track or to return to the The DVD/CD Receiver will now go Unless stated otherwise, all operations described use (See “Lock (See Menu” “Lock on Menu” page on 21). page 21). On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 chapter/track chapter/track icon. Then, chapter/track icon. input Then, the icon. input chapter/track Then, the chapter/track input the chapter/track chapter/track. • settings DVDs may have achapter region code. Your receiver does •rating To go directly to any during DVD playback, voltar ao capítulo/faixa anterior. the rating the settings you the must rating you input settings must the input password. you the must password. input the password. can play title/chapter/all/track/group a.. disc. .discs ..directly ..To .. -a ..go ..two .. .to .. ..go ..another .chapter .. .To .during ..go .chapter. .during .. .playback. .. .technology ..to.on ..playback, .DVD .. .. 30 ThisYou incorporates copyright that seconds (one). DVD-Video Repeat Chapter/Title/Off Dimmer . ..To . directly .any .protection . chapter .to .any . ..DVD . ..any .chapter 30 to CHAPTER/TRACK •Mute To go •.Moving •DVD-V directly any directly chapter during during playback, DVD during play DV Notes: Notes: Notes: pressing PAUSE/STEP repeatedly. and ture Still Frame-by-Frame Picture and Frame-by-Frame and Frame-by-Frame DVD-A Playback DVD-V DVD-A DVD-A •product Chapter: repeats the SEARCH beginning of the chapter/track. REPEAT REPEAT DVD-V DVD-A � General Operation .Notes: .located .be .exposed . the .DVD-V .the .DVD-A .region 16 mode. number number oris use or/ REPEAT use number or use b B. b B. b•current / to B. the Some may also be SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is on Initial Settings .any .remote . page .chapter .•current .should ..control. .. .have .during ..may ..page ./.region .have ..21). .may ..features .playback, ..back ..toREPEAT .. .back ..DVD-V 16-19 � To go directly to DVD not play discs that code different from press DISPLAY and press v.a V to select CAUTION: The apparatus water ot within (See “Lock (See Menu” “Lock on (See Menu” “Lock on 21). Menu” 21). Press during to protected by method claims of and You can play a./.title/chapter/all/track/group disc. DVDs •not DVDs a region have code. Your code. receiver Your does does Using Headphone Jack ..DVD-V ./.U.S. .V .and ..patents .v .DVD-V ..desired ..ato ..the ..select .DVD-A ..V .mode. SERIAL serial number is located on the receiver will now go into SEARCH ote press DISPLAY and press DISPLAY press press DISPLAY press and press /.on V v tothe vselect / V tothe se Mute .the . the .DISPLAY .press .The . SEARCH .DVD-A .press . ote .playback .playing . SEARCH .certain .and . ..v .select . to . select .DVD-A .apress ./other . 30 30 •NUMBER: Ifdiretamente parental •page IfThe parental control •qualquer Iftwice parental is control set •on If.Setup and parental is control set the and disc is control set the is not and disc isa.within set the is16not and disc within the is not disc within is receiver not within VCD1.1 VCD2.0 DivX DVD-V optionofyou • Para ir a capítulo/faixa durante a this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available • Title: repeats the current title. ck Playback DVD-V DVD-A � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . available on the menu. Repetir • Press SKIP . briefly to step back to the To repeat currently chapter, chapter/track icon. Then, input the chapter/track 1. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or > for about (dripping splashing) no with liquids, such 3 2. To exit still motion mode, � General Operation . /4 .objects .information .to . press .can .filled .You .does .PLAY. .can .discs .aYour .and .available . that .receiver .aacan .title/chapter/all/track/group . 16 select the press DISP. Then, press receiver. The code for this receiver is 1 this unit. This number isand unique to this unit and not intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation ssword. angle repeat mode. Press REPEAT during playback to select desired not play not discs play that have region have acode region different code different from from CAUTION Slow motion playback in not applicable for 2.disc. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN > You can advance by chapter/track chapter/track icon. chapter/track Then, icon. chapter/track chapter/track the chapter/track input chapter/tra thepress cha Selecting the Input Source .input ..Then, ..the ..icon. ..the .picture ..input ..Then, ..a.icon. ..frame-by-frame ... .input .. .or 30 two-digit numbers, but You play title/chapter/all/track/group play You play ainput title/chapter/all/track/group on aHeadphone on aFor disc. on areverse disc. to others. You should record requested here • DVDs •of may DVDs have may a •oryour region DVDs have arecord may code. region have Your code. aregion receiver region receiver code. does does 1. Press on the remote during the rating the settings rating the settings you must settings you rating input must settings the you input password. must the you input password. must the password. password. tion. Using the Jack . is .press . .Then, . the . .the .numbered 30 •the Off :DVD-A does not play repeatedly. to others. You should requested information and previous chapter/track. reprodução DVD, aYour tecla DISPLAY e, em number or B. � Display .icon. .PAUSE/STEP .use .placed .Then, .b .on .rating .ofreceiver. .the .the .purchase. .receiver. .control REPEAT. DVD-A DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V as vases, should be apparatus. and other rights owners. Use ofa1. this techchapter/track DVD-V DVD-A DVD-A two seconds during playback. ce of retain (one). � that Language .have .discs .pressione .. record .a./ code .ELECTRIC .enter ..the .Press .different .your .. SHOCK ..aREPEAT .chapter/track .region ..from .. .. REPEAT ..here .code ..Press ..from .. .16-17 .code .REPEAT 16SEARCH Você pode reproduzir um Título/Capítulo/Tudo/Faixa em SEARCH SEARCH this guide as ado permanent When arepeatedly title on disc has or afor 1. Press and hold and . . > or repeat mode. your your The region The region forfrom code this receiver for this receiver isCD. 1number is 1number number oraDVD-A use orSource use number or.Press or use b /Sound) B. b /copyright B. / .protection /.the B. Video ing PAUSE/STEP repeatedly on to select the (0-9) in rapid Press during playback during playback to during select to playback aselect desired to desired select aRepeat desired XTS (Excellent True ..use .succession. .. ..b.more ..SKIP/SCAN .required ..than ..b .. .SKIP/SCAN .one ..speed: ..remote ..chapter 30 not play not discs play discs have not that play apermanent region that region have code different different RISK OF playback. Advance the picture frame-by-frame by retain this guide as a(See record ofon your purchase. (See “Lock Menu” “Lock (See on Menu” “Lock page (See Menu” 21). “Lock page on Menu” 21). page on 21). page 21). 1.Audio. Press PAUSE/STEP on the remote control during Selecting the Input .Chapter/Title/Off .TV .B. .hold .and 30 orcontrol. DVD Video Discs About the symbols for instructions The Repeat Chapter icon appears on the screen. nology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, is ng) � . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 number using the numbered buttons (0-9). • To go directly to any chapter during DVD playback, seguida, as teclas do capíNote: The will mode. DVD-V OPEN �The Display .Moving . code .region . . . DO . para . The .NOT .the .selecionar .another .picture .(one). .this . repeat .code .receiver .o.ícone .for . . this . is .1..1receiver 16-17 disc more one can to another DVD Audio Discs -.now Repeat Track/Group/Off two seconds two seconds playback. (one). to TITLE/GROUP um disco. repeat mode. mode. repeat mode. eiver does Press 1.code. and hold and 1. SKIP/SCAN hold Press and . hold or SKIP/SCAN . > or > about or > for about X16 or X100 XTS pro .receiver .SKIP/SCAN . has .does .X2, .True .other .X4, .Repeat .than .go .current . into .for ..Chapter/Title/Off ..SEARCH .track, ..during .. .for ..you ..about ..only .during .. ..unless .. .move ..playback. .. 30 your receiver. your receiver. region your The receiver. for code this region receiver for is 1 isPress 1does pressing PAUSE/STEP repeatedly. playback. Advance frame-by-frame by XTS (Excellent Sound) . . . . . 30 • Chapter: repeats the chapter. DVD Video Discs E/STEP PAUSE/STEP 1. Press on PAUSE/STEP the on remote the remote control on the control during remote during control during intended for home and limited viewing uses the • DVDs • may DVDs have • may DVDs a region have • may DVDs a code. region have may Your a code. region have receiver Your a code. region receiver does Your receiver Your receiver does DVD-V DVD-A press DISPLAY and press v / V to select the � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Model No. ___________________________________ ot within When using DVD audio disc that SEARCH Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or > chapter/track as follows: � Audio. . product . a.PAUSE/STEP . . . likely .may . . .not .o.número . .repeatedly. .used . . .harm .includes .capítulo/faixa . .to . .restricted . pictures, . . unit .two . 17 • 2. Track: repeats the current track. tulo/faixa. Então, entre com do CAUTION: This be outdoor, to The receiver will SEARCH SEARCH mode. VC m DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V To repeat the title Model No. ___________________________________ ferent from seconds two seconds during two playback. during seconds playback. To exit SEARCH mode, press PLAY. (one). (one). Pressione afrom tecla REPEAT durante reprodução SEARCH SEARCH SEARCH Indicates hazards to cause the pressing DVD-A DVD-V Motion otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. XTS pro .repeats .3..repeats .DVD-V .from . Slow .currently . during .the .DVD-A .SEARCH .receiver . playback. . playing, .The . DVD-A .achapter. .will . . now .press .VCD2.0 . go .Reverse . into .now .para .VCD1.1 .go . . into 30 VCD2.0 the current title. • •Chapter: current vance ck. (one). playback. Advance the picture the Advance picture frame-by-frame the frame-by-frame picture by frame-by-frame by not play discs discs play discs aDVD play that code have region have different from acode region different from code different chapter/track icon. chapter/track TO RISK Video Discs Video -Discs Video - Repeat Chapter/Title/Off Discs Chapter/Title/Off -Title: Repeat Chapter/Title/Off � Others . CAUTION: .not .DVD-A .may .play .motion .that .not . Then, .have .REDUCE . that . not ..input .. region .have .in ..the .by .discs ..> ..picture ..that .different .a. code ..DVD ..about ..Repeat 19 ssword. To exit still mode, press this operation be permitted some DVD-V repeatedly to select the required speed: indoor use Serial No. ___________________________________ • Group: repeats the current Group. � 2. Lock (Parental Control) .. .THE . DVD .a .region . for 18 � into Press . or > briefly during playback select Search 2. Press 2. and Press hold and SKIP/SCAN hold SKIP/SCAN .toor . > or REPEAT a second time. ote 1. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN or.PLAY. ceiver is 1Serial ou use as teclas numéricas. The receiver The will receiver now The go will now receiver SEARCH go into will SEARCH now mode. go into mode. SEARCH mode. No. ___________________________________ itself or only. other material damage. engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Reference • Off : does not play repeatedly. selecionar o modo de repetição desejado. • Title: repeats the current title. OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ng SE/STEP PAUSE/STEP pressing repeatedly. PAUSE/STEP repeatedly. repeatedly. number or use b / B. 1. Press 1. and Press hold 1. and Press SKIP/SCAN hold 1. and Press SKIP/SCAN hold . and SKIP/SCAN or hold . > SKIP/SCAN for or . > about for or . > about for or > a your receiver. your receiver. The your region receiver. The your code region receiver. The for code region this The receiver for code region this receiver for is code 1 this receiver for is 1 this receiver is 1 is 1 • Chapter: • Chapter: repeats • repeats Chapter: the current the repeats current chapter. the chapter. current chapter. segments. 2.two To seconds exit mode, X2, X4, X16 orchapter/track X100 •and Off :hold does not play repeatedly. the next orselect to to the beginning The Repeat Title icon appears on SLOW the TV screen. � Others . When .still . . motion .during . apress . disc . . .playback. .the . . .numbered .press . .(OR . than . PLAY. . . buttons .one . . . title/group, . . .Press . 192. and O Press -/+return during pause. For two-digit numbers, repeatedly repeatedly to to the select required the required speed: of spe has more you can 2. Press hold 2. SKIP/SCAN Press SKIP/SCAN and . hold SKIP/SCAN . > or > or K DO NOT REMOVE COVER Note: during Press •title. Off :seconds does not play repeatedly. Language Code List . or .m .seconds .during .or .two .M .press .seconds .during . .. . . .playback. .playback. .> . . . playback. . . . 31 two two seconds during two playback. playback. during (one). (one). (one). (one). Reference • Title: repeats •BACK) Title: repeats the • Title: current the repeats current title. the current title. 3. To exit SEARCH PLAY. DVD Audio Discs -mode, Repeat Track/Group/Off the current chapter/track. The receiver will enter SLOW mode. otion 2.still To motion mode, exitOperation still press mode, motion PLAY. press mode, PLAY. press PLAY. eiver does th (0-9) inNote: rapid succession. Indicates special features ofINSIDE this X2, X4, X2, X16 X4, orwill X100 X16 or X100 The receiver willoperating now go into SEARCH mode. otas: N OR NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS move to another title/group as unit. follows: repeatedly repeatedly to select to repeatedly the select required the to required select speed: the speed: required speed: The DVD/CD Receiver now go into SEARCH mode. When using a DVD audio disc that includes • To exit Repeat mode, press REPEAT a third DVD-V DVD-A DVD-V DVD-A SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located on the back Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 The receiver The will receiver now The go will receiver into now The SEARCH go will receiver into now SEARCH mode. go will into now SEARCH mode. go into SEARCH mode. mo • Off : does • Off not : does play • Off not repeatedly. : play does repeatedly. not play repeatedly. Note: SEARCH SLOW SCAN Language Code List .-To .twice .current . 3. . .briefly .To .Track/Group/Off .exit . .to.SEARCH .step .mode, . . back . . .press . to . . the . PLAY. 31 When using a DVD audio disc that SERVICE includes pictures,numbered Discos DVD – Discs Repetir Capítulo/Título/Desligado Note: • Track: repeats the track. DVD Audio Repeat REFER TO. QUALIFIED � Press . previous ferent fromDVD 19 3.isor exit SEARCH mode, press PLAY. 2.or Press and hold SKIP/SCAN > �SERVICING Press DISP., Video CD Operation .then ... . press . . .aor .sucessão .the . . .appropriate . . 19-22 X2, X4, X2, X16 X4, oryou X100 X16 X2, or X100 X4, X16 X100 of time. this unit. This number unique to this unit and not available Operation pictures, this operation may be permitted in some Use the SLOW -/+ to select the required sp 2. Press 2. and Press hold 2. and Press SKIP/SCAN hold 2. and Press SKIP/SCAN hold . and SKIP/SCAN or hold . > SKIP/SCAN or . > or . > or > Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 Para número de dois digitos, pressione de • If press SKIP (>) once during Repeat Chapter this operation may be permitted inspeed: some picture Country Code List .the . the .m .current . current . .or. .M . .Group. .repeatedly . . . . . . .here . .to. and .select . . 31 the PERSONNEL. using a DVD audio disc that includes pictures, Indicates tips hints for making the task easier. Press •Track: Group: repeats •SEARCH repeats track. 1.When Press andand hold SKIP/SCAN chapter/track. Note:is 1 Slow ceiver to others. You should record requested information Note: repeatedly to select the required DVD DVD Discs -.Discs Repeat Audio Repeat Track/Group/Off Discs Track/Group/Off -mode, Repeat Track/Group/Off button (0-9) to select VCD2.0 VCD1.1 DVD-V DVD-A Motion Playing a DVD and Video CD. .. .M . .Audio .a .or .title .> . .Audio .number. . .for . ..DVD .about 19 3. To exit 3. -SEARCH To exit 3. Torepete exit press mode, SEARCH PLAY. press mode, PLAY. press PLAY. • Capítulo: o capítulo atual. picture segments. The Repeat Off icon appears on the TV screen. DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 1. Press SLOW SCAN m or + during (Track) playback, the repeat playback cancels. 1/16, t 1/8, t 1/4 or t 1/2 (backward), repeatedly repeatedly to select repeatedly to the select repeatedly required to the select required speed: to the select required speed: the required speed: spee Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 pace retain this guide astrack. arequired of. your segments. this operation may be playback. permitted in some picture números (0-9) rapidamente. Troubleshooting .permanent . .DVD . . .current .audio . record .any . . disc .chapter .mX2, .that . . .purchase. . . . . . DVD . 32-33 • Off : does not play repeatedly. • Group: repeats the Group. speed: mX4, mX8, mX16, � two seconds during To go directly to during playback, VD ng When aaudio DVD using disc audio aGeneral that DVD disc includes audio that includes disc pictures, that pictures, includes pictures, • Track: • repeats Track: repeats the • Track: current the repeats current track. the track. current X2, X4, X16 or X100 When using a includes • Note: Note: Features . .Video . . . Dolby . .CD. . . .Laboratories. Playing a DVDlicense and .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..“Dolby”, .. .. .20-22 . . 19 playback. T or. .T 1/2 (forward). X2, X2, X16 or X16 or X2, X4, X16 Manufactured under from segments. .not .X4, .DISP. . X100 .X2, . .1/16, .X4, . . X100 .X16 .press . 1/8, .or . .X100 .T ./4 .1/4 .or . .X100 .MX4, .some .the . 34 Press -/+ during •Specifications Título: repete othis título atual. •the Off :X4, does play repeatedly. mX100 (backward) or MX2, MX8, The receiver will gopause. into SEARCH mode. ay tion this beoperation may permitted be permitted may in some beSLOW permitted in picture some picture innow some picture 3 press Then, select repeats repeats current the repeats current Group. Group. current Group. pictures, operation may permitted in 3. To exit SEARCH mode, press This lightning arrowhead symbol an When When abePLAY. using DVD audio atoPLAY. DVD disc audio that disc includes that inc • SEARCH • using � Moving to another .Dolby .•the .Group: . 20 Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK “Pro Logic”, and the double-D are DVD-V Note: Note: General Features . flash .SLOW .symbol .TITLE/GROUP .with . .mode. .enter .•DVD-A .Group: .trademarks .PLAY. . .• .Group: ..mode. .. .. of .. .Note: .within 20-22 DVD-V Model No. Note: 3.CDs To -___________________________________ exit 3. SEARCH To exit 3. To mode, exit 3. SEARCH To press mode, exit SEARCH press mode, press mode, PLAY. press PLAY. SCAN 3D SURROUND The DVD/CD Receiver will SLOW TheSLOW receiver will enter Video Repeat Track/All/Off MX16, MX100 (forward). chapter/track icon. Then, enter the chapter/track .segments.Laboratories. 2. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or > equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user To exit slow motion mode, press PLAY. • Off : does • Off not : does play • Off not repeatedly. : play does repeatedly. not play repeatedly. picture segments. Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright 1992pictures, pictures, this operation this operation may be may permitted be permit in s � Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . 20 • Desligado: Repetição desativada. When using When a using DVD When audio a DVD using disc audio that a DVD disc includes that audio includes disc that includes • • • DVD-V DVD-A VCD2.0 VCD1.1 DVD-V DVD-A DivX � Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20 • If you press SKIP (>) once during Repeat Chapter Note: SLOW SCAN Serial No.20 ___________________________________ Câmera Lenta With a Video CD, the Search speed changes: about the presence ofreserved. uninsulated dangerous number using the numbered buttons (0-9). repeatedly to select the required speed: 2. Use the SLOW SCAN m or M + to select the 1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights Toproduce repeat track currently playing, pressmultiUse the SLOW -/+ Note: picture segments. picture segments. To athe 3D surround effect thatRepeat simulates � Slow Motion. . .tothe .SCAN .select .CHAPTER/TRACK . .Note: .- the .m . . required .or . .M . . . +.speed: .during .. ..may ..pictures, ..t .. be 20 1. Press SLOW this this pictures, operation may be this may permitted operation be permitted inmay some be in permitted some in some playback, the repeat playback cancels. �DVD-A Moving to another 20 pictures, • operation If (Track) you press SKIP (>) once during Chapter(backward) DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V DVD-A DVD-A thin an voltage within product’s enclosure that Note: Note: Note: Note: Note: Note: SCAN SLOW SCAN mX2, mX4, mX8, mX16 or X2, X4, X16 or X100 1. Pressione a tecla SLOW/SCAN ou + durante a required speed: t 1/16, t 1/8, t 1/4, or t 1/2 When a title on a disc has more than one chapter or a REPEAT. channel audio from tworepeat stereo speakers (instead of When using aand DVD disc •1/16, t 1/8, t 1/4 (backward), Manufactured under license Theater Systems, Inc. � Still Picture Frame-by-Frame 20 playback. 1. Press SLOW SCAN -.•1/2 m +SKIP during picture segments. picture segments. picture segments. (Track) playback, playback cancels. er � Slow Motion. .magnitude . from .or .audio .t .Digital .press .constitute .orthat .•PLAY. .M .includes .Playback . press .risk .or .(>) .IfT .you . .. once 20 of sufficient to a of electric If. you press If.T you •or SKIP press (>) during SKIP once (>) during once Repeat Chapter during Chapter Repeat When When aMX2, using DVD When audio a using DVD When disc audio a using DVD that disc includes audio a DVD thatdisc includes audio thatdisc includes that inclu •Repeat • using • the •Chapter MX4, MX8, MX16 (forward). 3. To exit SEARCH mode, (backward), 1/16, T 1/4, T has more than one track, you move tothe another The Repeat Track icon appears on the TV US reprodução. Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,978,762 and ote five+ speakers normally required forscreen. multi-channel this operation may in some 1/16, 1/8, 1/4 T 1/2 (forward). ote � Search. .disc .T .or .or .M .T .or .+ .and .during .5,974,380, .pending. . .be .1/8, . permitted . playback, .“DTS” . . Playback . .and .mode. .the .(Track) .can . ..1/2 20 CDs –this Repetir Faixa/Tudo/Desligado playback. DVD-V shock persons. �pictures, Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame 20 SLOW 1. SCAN Press -SCAN m SLOW or-worldwide m M SCAN or +T during M -patents m +to during 3D SURROUND (Track) (Track) playback, repeat the playback, playback repeat Vídeo playback the cancels. repeat cancels. playback cancels. The DVD/CD Receiver will enter SLOW other issued “DTS pictures, pictures, operation pictures, this operation may pictures, this be operation may permitted this be operation may permitted in be some may permitted inbuttons be some permitte in som (forward). chapter/track as follows: 2 audio from a home theater system). For two-digit numbers, press the numbered picture segments. O reprodutor de DVD entrará agora no modo Slow. ay be Slow motion playback in reverse is not applicab To exit SEARCH mode, press PLAY. � Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 DVD-V To repeat the disc currently playing, press Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater ck. playback. To� 2. Search. .motion .Press . . Receiver . .mode, .. .SCAN . . or . press .> .-enter .m . .PLAY. .SLOW . .M . .during . +. . to . .playback . . 20 theto• select 3D SURROUND The DVD/CD will mode. exit slow segments. picture segments. picture segments. picture segments. Use the SLOW or select Faixa: repete faixa corrente. � briefly Note: electric Topicture produce a a3D surround effect that simulates multi(0-9) in rapid succession. Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, The exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle Video CD. REPEAT a second time. � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 3. To exit Slow Motion mode, press PLAY (N). DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V � Repeat .enter .the . . SLOW/SCAN .SLOW . .SCAN . chapter/track .t . .3D .- .m .SURROUND .3D . .1/8, .SURROUND . to .t .return .+3D .para . select . SURROUND .or . 20 1. Press DISPLAY during playback. ou 2.enter Use aenter teclas a tecla -. t Receiver VD/CD The Receiver will DVD/CD will SLOW mode. SLOW will mode. mode. required 1/16, 1/4, t 1/2 2. Use the SLOW or M + to the Inc. All rights reserved. next or to the beginning of When using aspeed: DVD disc • Receiver is intended to of channel audio from stereo speakers (instead of produce a 3D surround effect that simulates multiwner’s The Repeat All icon appears on the screen. • To Tudo: repete todas astwo faixas do TV disco. � .. alert .. ..audio .. .the .. ..user .. .. .. about .that .. .. ..includes .the .. ..presence .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 � Time Repeat A-B . ..current .1/16, .t 21 T T 1/8, T 1/4, or 1/2 (backward), or required speed: t 1/16, t.permitted 1/8, 1/4, orT t 1/2 About the chapter/track. the for instructions selecionar aSearch velocidade desejada: 1/16, Note: important operating and maintenance (servicing) this operation may be inasome W 2. ethe SLOW SCAN Use the -SCAN m SLOW or -�pictures, m M SCAN or + M to select m + to or the select M + the to select the the five+ speakers normally required for multi-channel d channel audio from two stereo speakers (instead of 2. Use 3 or 4symbols to select the sound option. VCD1.1 VCD2.0 To produce To produce a 3D To surround produce 3D surround effect a 3D that effect surround simulates that effect simulates multithat simulates multimultiDVD-A DVD-V Slow Motion Marker Searchor .. .T .. ..1/16, .. .. .. ..T .. .. 1/8, .. ..accompanying .. .T .. ..1/4, .. .. .. or .. .. T ..the .. 21 � Time Search . . . 21 angle To exit Repeat mode, press REPEAT a third (forward). instructions in the instructions (backward), 1/2 � Press . to step back to the speakers previous VCD2.0 VCD1.1 • the Desligado: Repetição desativada. DVD-V DVD-Afor multi-channel DivX •1/8, When using at DVD audio disc that includes pictures, ote ocapicture segments. ed: ed speed: required t 1/16, tspeed: t 1/16, t t 1/8, 1/4, 1/16, t or 1/4, t 1/8, 1/2 or t t twice 1/4, 1/2 orbriefly taudio 1/2 1/8, 1/4, ou audio from aoption home theater system). The sound will be highlighted. Repeat five+ speakers required OTES ON COPYRIGHTS: audio two audio two stereo from two speakers (instead stereo (instead speakers of normally of(instead of � Zoom. . Search . . chapter/track. . . 1/2 . .. ..(regredir), .. .. .. ..channel .. .. .. ou .. ..channel .. .. .1/16, .. .. .from ..channel .. .1/8, .. .from .. stereo 21 ce of Indicates hazards likely to cause harm to the unit � Marker . . . . 21 time. product. (forward). this operation may be permitted inapplicable picture Slow motion in,T reverse isfive+ not for Presstheater SLOW -/+-during pause. T(backward), 1/16, 1/8, T T T 1/8, 1/4, 1/16, T orT 1/4, T1/8, 1/2 or T 1/4, 1/2the or T 1/2 or ward), or T or , some broadcast broadcast, show ItT is1/16, forbidden byplayback law to copy audio from arequired home system). 1/4 ou 1/2 (avançar). DVD-Video discs Repeat Chapter/Title/Off the speakers five+ speakers the normally five+ normally speakers required required normally for multi-channel for multi-channel for multi-channel 3. To exit Slow Motion mode, press PLAY (N). About the symbols for instructions ng) Special DVD Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 1. Press DISPLAY during playback. itself or other material damage. The Repeat Off icon appears on the TV screen. 3. Use 1 or 2 to to select “3D SUR”. � Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � To go directly to any chapter during DVD playback, segments. Video CD. The receiver will enter SLOW mode. via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without ures rd). from audio from a. theater home theater system). a home system). theater system). the (forward).WARNING: Todo exit Slow �3.sair Title Menu . Slow, . .Motion . .DISP. .pressione .. ..mode, .audio ..OR .. .. ..ELECTRIC ..press .. .. ..a..PLAY .home ./4 ..audio .to .select .. .from TO PREVENT FIRE To turn DISPLAY off the To 3Drepeat Surround effect, select “Normal”. 1. Press during playback. Special DVD Features .to . SHOCK . (N). . . unit . 22 22the 3. Para modo apress tecla thesound currently playing chapter, press permission. 3 press s radiNote: Indicates hazards likely to.Then, cause harmPLAY the 2. Use 3 orspecial 4 tothe select the option. Indicates operating features of this otas: Use SLOW -/+ to select the unit. required speed: HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR Motion 3.Slow To Motion exit mode, Slow press mode, Motion PLAY press mode, (N). PLAY press (N). PLAY (N). � Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 23t This product features the copy protection function developed DVD-V DVD-A REPEAT. � Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 1. Press 1. DISPLAY Press DISPLAY 1. during Press playback. during DISPLAY playback. during playback. chapter/track icon. Then, enter the chapter/track • When using a DVD audio disc that includes pictures, 2. Use REPEAT A-B Note: itself or other material damage. The sound option will be highlighted. 3 or 4 to select the sound option. MOISTURE. 1/16, 1/8, Chapter t 1/4 or tappears 1/2 (backward), or T by Macrovision. Copy protection signals recorded some DVD-V � Changing Audio Language .. .includes .. .. ..on .. ..picture ..pictures, .. .. 22 Thet Repeat icon ondurante the TV screen. SEARCH ote � Disc Menu .a. DVD .may . . .using .be . .permitted . the .disc .are . numbered . that . .. in .some 22 number buttons (0-9). •TIME this operation pen • When usingthe audio K ) uma vez Se você pressionar a tecla SKIP ( Note: The sound option will be highlighted. Indicates tips and hints for making the task easier. 2. Use 2. Use 2. Use 3 or 4 3 to or select 4 to the select 3 or sound 4 the to select option. sound the option. sound option. To repeat a sequence. discs. When recording andAudio playingChannel the pictures discs 1/16, Tselect 1/8,must T orPBC T 1/2 (forward). UseCD 1 or 2 PBC, to to “3D1/4 SUR”. � Changing the . in . ..ofsome . these .. .. ..unit. ..picture .. .. .. .. 22 Video with you set to23 Off �disc Changing the Audio Language 22 On a a3. Indicates special operating features segments. otas: N•T ORaaudio this operation may beequipment permitted 23 press 23 WARNING: Do not install this in.of a .this confined space DVD ing When DVD using disc audio that DVD includes audio that includes disc pictures, that pictures, includes pictures, To repeat the title currently playing, reprodução de repetição detime capítulo (faixa), oon modo option sound option sound be will highlighted. option be highlighted. will highlighted. on a aVCR, picture noise will appear. To playing at any chosen on the disc: To turn off the 3D Surround effect, select “Normal”. 3. start Use 1beor 2To to tothe select “3D SUR”. � Subtitles . the .atote .or .Audio .similar . some . chosen . .Channel . .picture . The .starting . . ..sound .. The .. .point. ..The .will setup menu to use Repeat function. See page � Changing . .. .. .. ..“..Athat . ..” 22 22 theManufactured segments. 1. Press A-B your such as abe book case unit. under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, exit slow motion mode, press PLAY. may ation this beoperation may permitted be permitted may in some permitted in picture some picture in REPEAT a second time. * This product incorporates copyright protection technology repetição será cancelado. • Quando usar um DVD de áudio que contenha imagens, Indicates tips and hints for making the task easier. To turn off the 3D Surround effect, select “Normal”. 1. Press DISPLAY during playback. The time search 23 DVD-V DVD-A DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 . 19 Use 1 toand or select to 1 “3D select or buttons 2SUR”. to“3D toLogic”, select SUR”. “3Dthe SUR”. “Pro and double-D are appears trademarks of Dolby � REPEAT Subtitles . A-B .claims . . .on . .ofthe . certain .numbers, .3. . . Use .U.S. . .3..1press . or . . 2. .the .3. .tonumbered .2 .Use .to. 22 20 symbol appears briefly TV screen. The Repeat Title icon on the TV screen.23 er s.segments. is protected by method patents other For two-digit pace DVD-V essa função pode não.owned ser alguns box shows the elapsed playing time. Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright 1992TIME SEARCH turn off the Surround 3D off Surround the effect, 3D select effect, Surround “Normal”. select effect, “Normal”. select “Normal”. REPEAT A-B such DVD Audio .DVD-V . .permitida . succession. . Macrovision . DVD-A . To . . turn .para . . To .off .Corporation .the . . .3D . .To . .turn 22 intellectual propertyDiscs rights by (0-9) in.rapid To repeat alicense sequence. Manufactured under from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, 2. Press A-B again at your chosen end point. To exit Repeat mode, press REPEAT a third 1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. DVD-V segmentos de imagens. TIME SEARCH and otherDVD-A rights owners. this copyright protection techDVD-V DVD-V DVD-V DVD-A DVD-A Use ofsymbol 2. Press v / V to select the time clock icon TREPEAT A-B A-B “Pro Logic”, and the Dolby To start playing at any chosen time on the disc: otetime. To “A repeat a double-D sequence. B”authorized appears briefly on are the trademarks TV screenofand the nology must by Macrovision Corporation, and is SEARCH DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. and “-:--:--” appears. 1. be Press A-B at your chosen starting point. “ A ” TIME TIME SEARCH SEARCH TIME Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright 1992* VCD2.0 VCD1.1 DVD-V DVD-A Slow Motion Slow motion playback in appears reverse is the notsearch applicable start at any chosen time on The the disc: The Repeat Off icon on TV screen. for repeat sequence begins. 23 USTo1. Pat. No.playing 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and Press DISPLAY during playback. time ence. To a sequence. repeat 1997 a sequence. intended home and other limited viewing uses only unless Dolby Laboratories. rights reserved. appears briefly onchosen the TVstarting screen. 1.forPress A-B at All your point. “A*” cted to 3. Input the required start time in hours,“DTS” minutes, and other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS Video CD. 20 authorized by Press otherwise MacrovisionToCorporation. Reverse start To playing start playing atToany start chosen at playing any chosen time at on time the chosen on disc: the time disc: on the disc: box shows the elapsed playing time. CAUTION: 21 1.any Press DISPLAY during playback. The timeand search SLOW -/+ during pause. appears briefly on the TV screen. Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater 3. Press A-B again to cancel. seconds from left to right. If you enter the wrong A-B your 1. Press at chosen your A-B chosen starting at your starting point. chosen “ point. A starting “ A point. “ A ” ” ” Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. * at your chosen * engineering disassembly is prohibited. 2. orPress A-B*The again end mode. point. box shows elapsed playing time. DVD/CD receiver employs a1.laser system. Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Press 1. 5,978,762 DISPLAY Press DISPLAY 1. during Press playback. during DISPLAY playback. during The time playback. The search time search The- time search receiver will enter SLOW USThis Pat.TV No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, and 2.numbers, Press vVideo / the V toCLEAR select the time clock icon CDs Repeat Track/All/Off press to remove the numbers ly rs on briefly appears the TV on the briefly screen. on screen. the TV screen. “A patents B”A-B appears briefly on theshows TV screen and 2. Press again atproduct, your chosen end point. Inc. All rights reserved. other pending. “DTS” and “DTS box box the box thethe shows elapsed playing the playing time. elapsed time. playing time. and “-:--:--” appears. To worldwide ensure proper use issued of this and please readshows thiselapsed owner’s 2. Press v / V Then to select clocknumbers. icon you entered. inputthe thetime correct Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Recursos Gerais 1 2 Introduction Introduction DVD Video DVD Discs Video DVD-Discs Repeat Video- Repea Discs Chap pressing PAUSE/STEP repeatedly. •PAUSE/STEP Chapter: repeats the repeatedly. current chapter. • Chapter: repeat mode. Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame pressing pressing PAUSE/STEP repeatedly. PAUSE/STEP repeatedly. DVD-V DVD • Chapter: repeats • Chapter: repeats the current repeats the curr cha 1. Presspressing PAUSE/STEP on the remote control during REPEAT 2. To exit still motion mode, press PLAY. • Title: repeatsthe thepicture current title. 2. To exit still motion mode, press PLAY. Playback • Title: repeats • Title: the •Video Title: current repeats the current title. playback. Advance frame-by-frame by DVDrepeats Discs - the Re ti 2. To exit 2. To still exit motion 2. still To motion exit mode, press mode, motion press mode, PLAY. press PLAY. • Off : still does not PLAY. play repeatedly. You can play a title/chap • Off : does • Off not : does • play Off not : repeatedly. does play not repeat plac pressing PAUSE/STEP repeatedly. • Chapter: repeats the Note: DVD-V DVD-A Press REPEAT during pl Note: Audio Discs Repeat Track/Group/Off • Title: repeats the curre When using a DVD audio disc that includes picture Note: Note: DVD Audio DVD Audio Discs DVD -Discs Audio Repeat - Repea Discs Track 2. ToNote: exitDVD still motion mode, -press PLAY. repeat mode. PAUSE/STEP oncurrent the remote controlmay during When using a DVD audio disc that includes pictures, 1. Press • Track: repeats the • Off :indoes notpicture play rep thistrack. operation be permitted some When using When a using DVD When a audio DVD using disc audio a DVD that disc audio includes that disc includes pictures, that includes pictures, pictures, • Track: • repeats Track: • repeats the Track: current repeats the current track. th playback. frame-by-frame by this operation may be permitted in some picture • Group:Advance repeatsthe thepicture current Group. DVD Video Discs -th segments. this operation this operation may this be operation may permitted be permitted may in be some permitted in picture some in picture some picture • Group: • Group: repeats repeats Group: the current repeats the curren Grou Note: DVD •Audio Discs - Re pressing repeatedly. segments. •does Chapter: repeats th • Off : PAUSE/STEP does not play repeatedly. segments. segments. • Off : does • Off not : •play Offrepeats not :repeatedly. does play not repeat pla Whensegments. using a DVD audio disc that includes pictures, Track: the curr SLOW SCAN DVD-V •DVD-A • Title: repeats the cu To exit still mode, press PLAY. this2.operation maymotion be permitted in some picture • Group: repeats the cur Note: SLOW SCAN DVD-V DVD-A DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A • Off : does not play Note: Note: Note: SLOW SLOW SCAN SLOW SCAN SCAN segments. • Offor: M does+ not play rep Press SLOW SCAN -m during • If you press SKIP (>) once 1. during Repeat •Chapter If you •press If you SKIP press • If(>) you SKIP press once (>) SKIP during once (> Re du Note: DVD Audio Discs 1. Press SLOW SCAN - m or M + during (Track) playback, the repeat playback. 1. Press 1. SLOW Press1.SLOW SCAN Press-SCAN SLOW mDVD-V or- SCAN m M or + during -M mplayback +orduring M +cancels. during(Track) playback, (Track) (Track) the repeat playback, theplayback repeatthe pla cr DVD-A Note:playback, SLOW WhenSCAN using a DVD audio disc that includes pictures, • Track: repeats the playback. playback. playback. playback. The DVD/CD enter SLOW mode. If you SKIP (>) the onc this operation may be permitted in some pictureReceiver• will • press Group: repeats 3DThe SURROUND The DVD/CD Receiver will enter SLOW mode. The DVD/CD DVD-V+ the DVD-V 1. Press SLOW -enter mDVD-V or enter M +SLOW during (Track) playback, repeat 3D SURROUND 3D SURROUND 3D SURROUND Thesegments. DVD/CD Receiver DVD/CD Receiver will SCAN enter Receiver will SLOW mode. will SLOW mode. 2.mode. Use the SLOW SCAN -m or M to select • Off : does not play playback. 2. Use the SLOW SCAN - m or M + to the speed: t 1/16, t 1/8, t 1/4, or t 2. select Use2.the Use SLOW 2. the SLOW SCAN the-SCAN SLOW m SCAN m M or + -M tom select +orrequired to M the select + to the select To Use produce a 3Dor-surround effect that simulates multiTo produce Tothe produce a 3D Tosurround produce a 3D surround effect a 3D surro that effe DVD-V DVD-A DVD-V required speed: t 1/16, t 1/8, t 1/4, or t 1/2 SLOW (backward), ort T 1/2 1/16, T 1/8, T 1/4, or T 1/ 3DNote: SURROUND The DVD/CD Receiver will enter SLOW mode. required required speed: required speed: tSCAN 1/16, t speed: t 1/16, 1/8, t t t 1/16, 1/8, 1/4, t t or 1/4, t 1/8, 1/2 or tt 1/4, 1/2or channel audio from two stereo speakers (instead of channel channel audio from channel audio two from audio stereo two from speak stereo tw • If you press SKIP (>) T 1/2 2. (backward), or T 1/16, T 1/8, T 1/4, or (backward), (forward). T 1/16, TT 1/16, 1/8, T T 1/8, 1/4,T T orrequired 1/4, T 1/8, 1/2 Tto T 1/4, 1/2 or T (backward), or (backward), or speakers or T thethe five+ normally for multi-channel Use SLOW SCAN -1/16, m or M +or select the1/2 thespeakers five+ the speakers five+ normally speakers normally required nor ref General General Features General Features General Features Features To produce 3D surround 1. Press SLOW SCAN - m or M + duringthe five+ (Track) aplayback, the rep (forward). (forward). (forward). (forward). audio from a home theater system). required speed: t 1/16, t 1/8, t 1/2 audio from audio a from home audio aaudio theater home from a theater system). home the 3. t To1/4, exit or Slow Motion mode, press PLAY (N). channel from two syst ster playback. General DVD 1/8, T 1/4,Features or T 1/2 (backward), or T 1/16, T Note: Note: 3. To exit SlowNote: MotionPlaying mode, pressaPLAY (N). the five+ speakers normally 3. To exit 3. To Slow exit 3. Motion Slow To exit Motion mode, Slow press mode, Motion PLAY press mode, (N). PLAY press (N). PLAY (N). 1. Press DISPLAY during playback. DV General General Features General Features General Features Features a D•Note: DVD Press 1. DISPLAY Press 1. DISPLAY Press during DISPLAY playback. during play du 3D SURROUND The DVD/CD Receiver will enter SLOW mode.1. Note: (forward). Unless • stated Unless • otherwise, stated Unless • otherwise, stated Unless all operations otherwise, stated all operations otherwise, described all operations described all operations described described audio from a home theater General Features Note: •or When using a DVD disc that includes pictur Note: Note: Note: Note: 2.may the SCAN -m Moption. + to select 3SLOW or 4 to select the sound 2.Use Use use the use remote the use control. remote the use control. remote Some thefeatures control. remote Some features may control. Some also features may Some be3.also features may be also be Usethe 2.audio Use 3 Use or 4 3 toproduce or select 4 to3 the select 4 sound tothe sele op so To2. aor3D surrou rce put video source input source Note: To be exitalso Slow Motion mode, pressthis PLAY (N).2. may operation be 1. permitted in some picture Press DISPLAY duringhi • When using a Note: DVD audio Note: disc thatNote: includes pictures, PLAYBACK SETUP • Unless stated otherwise, all operations described • When • using When a using • DVD When a audio DVD using disc audio a DVD that disc audio includes that disc includes pictures, that includes pictures, pictures, The sound option will be highlighted. required speed: t 1/16, t 1/8, t 1/4, or t 1/2 The sound The option sound The will option sound be will highlight option be available available on the Setup on the menu. available Setup on the menu. Setup on the menu. Setup menu. channel audio from two eiver. UP SETUP • available Unless stated • Unless otherwise, stated Unless •all otherwise, stated Unless operations otherwise, stated all described operations otherwise, all operations described all operations described described Note: segments. this operation may be permitted in• some picture use the remote control. Some features may also be this operation this operation may this be operation may permitted be permitted may in be some permitted in picture some in picture some picture T 1/16, T 1/8, T 1/4, or T 1/2 (backward), or Note: General Features 1. remote Turn onthe theuse TV the and select the video input source the five+ speakers norm 3 orto 4to to“3D select the use use control. remote Some use control. remote features the control. remote Some may features control. Some also be features may Some may be also may be also 1 or 2 also tofeatures to select “3D SUR”. 3. Use 3. Use 3.1 2. Use 3. Use or 2Use 1 to or to 2 select 1 or select 2 toSUR”. to“3D se Unless stated otherwise, allTO operations described e) pplicable) elect and select and select segments. MOVING MOVING TO MOVING ANOTHER TOthe MOVING ANOTHER TITLE/GROUP ANOTHER TO TITLE/GROUP ANOTHER TITLE/GROUP TITLE/GROUP available onbe thepictures, Setup menu. t•nput ed the TV select video source and the select input video source the input video source input source segments. segments. segments. (forward). • When using a DVD audio that includes connected to the DVD/CD from home theat The sound option will To turn off the 3D disc Surround effect, select available onavailable the Setup available on menu. the available Setup on be thereceiver. menu. Setup on themenu. Setup menu. DVD-A ToDVD-V turnTo offaudio turn the 3D off To the Surround turna3D off Surround theeffect, 3Dbe use the remote control. Some features may also REPEAT A-B“Normal”. D/CD the DVD/CD to receiver. VD/CD the DVD/CD receiver. receiver. Note: operation may be permitted in some picture DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A 2.menu. Turn system (ifthis applicable) select MOVING ANOTHER TITLE/GROUP 3. ToA-B exit and Slow Motion mode, press TO PLAY (N). DVD-V DVD-Aon the audio available onA-B the Setup DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V 1. DISPLAY duri“ REPEAT General Features 3. UsePress 1 or 2 to to select REPEAT A-B A-B segments. •applicable) Unless stated otherwise, allTITLE/GROUP operations described le) e(if system audio applicable) and select (if system applicable) and (ifMOVING select and select andANOTHER select MOVING TO MOVING TOREPEAT MOVING ANOTHER TO ANOTHER TOREPEAT TITLE/GROUP ANOTHER TITLE/GROUP TITLE/GROUP To repeat a sequence. the input source connected to the DVD/CD DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V D TIME SEARCH To turn off the 3D Surro DVD-A DVD-V TIME TIME SEARCH SEARCH TIME SEARCH When aDVD/CD When disc has aDVD/CD When disc has aDVD/CD than When disc more one has a than disc title/group, more one has than title/group, more you one than can title/group, you one can title/group, you can you can d the tray and tray and Note: use the remote control. Some features may also onnected D/CD dource todisc the connected toTO tomore the 2. Use 3 or 4 to select To repeat athe sequence. MOVING ANOTHER TITLE/GROUP receiver. input source repeat To repeat aDVD-A sequence. To arepeat sequence. abe sequence. DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V DVD-A DVD-A ToDVD-V DVD-A Note: A-B at your chosen starting point. “ A ” move move another to move another title/group. to move another title/group. Press to another title/group. DISPLAY Press title/group. DISPLAY Press while DISPLAY Press while DISPLAY while DVD-Adisc 1. *will ray, the withtothe • When using a DVD-V DVD audio thatPress includes pictures, REPEAT A-Bwhile available on the Setup menu. The sound option To start playing at any chosen time on the disc: To start To playing start playing To at start any chosen at playing any chosen time at any on When a disc has more than one title/group, you can DVD-V DVD-A 3.otherwise, Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray and DVD-V TV screen. •playback Unless stated operations described playback is stopped is stopped then is the stopped then appropriate is the stopped then appropriate the number then the number (0-9) appropriate number (0-9) number (0-9) (0-9) ”1. 1. Press A-B atplayback your chosen starting point. “appropriate APress TIME SEARCH ”can ” briefly ” the A-B Press at 1.than A-B your Press at chosen your A-B chosen at starting your chosen point. point. starting A in “ Apoint. “ A * on this operation may be starting permitted some picture *has * appears *title/group. When aplayback disc When has more aall When disc than has a1. When disc one more title/group, athan disc more one has you title/group, more can than title/group, you one can title/group, you can“to you EN/CLOSE pen SE tray to the and open disc to the tray open disc and the traydisc and tray and move another while 1. Press DISPLAY during The timePress search To repeat aone sequence. 1. 1.Press DISPLAY Press 1.Use DISPLAY Press during DISPLAY during play du load chosen disc in the tray, with the ble) and select TO ANOTHER TITLE/GROUP 3.DISPLAY 1 or 2playback. to to sele remote Some features may also be or use or/use use use or use b B briefly tothe bor move /MOVING Bontoto b move another /control. B to to byour move another title/group. /title/group. Bmove totomove another title/group. toappears another title/group. title/group. appears the TV screen. appears briefly appears on briefly the TV on briefly the screen. TV onDISPLAY screen. the TVplayback. screen. segments. rce move to another move to another tomove another Press title/group. toDISPLAY another title/group. Press title/group. while DISPLAY Press DISPLAY Press while while while .he ck the Playback tray. Playback 2. Press A-B again at your chosen end point. When a disc has more than one title/group, you can chosen disc the tray, in the disc with tray, in the the with tray, the with the playback is stopped then the appropriate number (0-9) To start at any chos box shows the elapsed playing time. box shows box shows the box elapsed the shows elapsed playing the elap pla tim playback side down. VD/CD Toplaying turn off the 3D Su available on the Setup menu. You can You play can any You play title can any by You play inputting title can any by play inputting title its any number by inputting title its number by while inputting its number while its number while while DVD-V DVD-A 1. Press A-B at your chosen starting “appears A playback is playback stopped playback then is stopped the playback is appropriate stopped then is the stopped then appropriate number the then appropriate (0-9) the number appropriate number (0-9) number (0-9) (0-9) not ,kn. does start, start,again * ”to another “A briefly on the TV screen and the move tonot another title/group. Press DISPLAY while ide down. 2. Press at playback your chosen end point. 2. Press 2.close A-B Press again 2.A-B Press atagain your A-B chosen again your chosen at end your point. end chosen point. end point. or use b /point. Bclock toB”move title/group. 1. during DVD-A DVD-V playback playback isA-B stopped. playback stopped. is stopped. isbstopped. vat /on V to select the time icon Press 4. Press OPEN/CLOSE toto the tray. Playback 2. Press 2. v Press Press / Press V2.tovselect / DISPLAY V to v the select /V time tothe sele cloc ti appears briefly TVYou screen. bANOTHER /on B touse move / use to B another tobor move / use B title/group. to bmove another /“A B REPEAT to to2. move another title/group. to A-B another title/group. title/group. orisuse or orscreen repeat sequence begins.its number while playback is to stopped then the appropriate number (0-9) elect anythe titleand by the inputting MOVING TO TITLE/GROUP “A B” appears briefly the TV and “Athe B” appears B” appears “A briefly B” appears on briefly the the TV on briefly the screen TV oncan screen and theplay TV the and screen EN/CLOSE lose SE . Playback to the close tray. the Playback close tray. the Playback tray. Playback DVD When a disc has more than one title/group, you can box shows the elapsed and “-:--:--” appears. and “-:--:--” and “-:--:--” appears. and appears. “-:--:--” appear starts automatically. If playback does not start, TIME SEARCH c tray and You can play You any can title You play by can any inputting You play title can any by its play inputting title number any by inputting title while its number by inputting its number while its number while while playback is stopped. or use b / If Bnot todoes move tobegins. another title/group. repeat sequence repeat repeat sequence sequence repeat begins. sequence begins. begins. To repeat aagain sequence. ppear might appear 2. Press A-B at your chosen3.end point. yback ly. not matically. If start, playback does playback start, notdoes start, not start, move to another title/group. Press DISPLAY DVD-V DVD-A Press A-Bminutes, toand cancel. PLAY. th the 2. PressInput v start /V to select ths 3. while Input the required start time in hours, 3.again Input 3. the Input required the time required start in time hou playback ispress playback stopped. isCHAPTER/TRACK stopped. playback isCHAPTER/TRACK stopped. isCHAPTER/TRACK stopped. You can play anyMOVING title by MOVING inputting its playback number while To3.the startrequired playing at any c MOVING TO ANOTHER TO ANOTHER CHAPTER/TRACK ANOTHER TO ANOTHER “A B”Press appears briefly oncancel. the TV screen and the Y.MOVING playback isTO stopped then the appropriate (0-9) and left “-:--:--” appears. 3. Press 3.menu A-B Press again 3.number A-B toagain cancel. A-B to again cancel. to 3. Press A-B again to cancel. 1.might Press A-B atfrom yourleft chosen starting A seconds ” seconds from seconds from to right. left from toIfright. you leftetIf seconds to right. If youpoint. enter“ the wrong In some cases, the disc appear * playback is stopped. When a disc has more than one title/group, you can repeat sequence begins. d 1. Press DISPLAY duri DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A or use b / B to move to another title/group. appear ases, eenu might the menu disc appear might menu appear might appear MOVING TO ANOTHER CHAPTER/TRACK briefly on the TV screen. numbers, numbers, press CLEAR press CLEAR topress remove CL to tr instead: numbers, press CLEAR to remove the numbers y.disc Playback 3. Inputnumbers, the required start move to another title/group. Press DISPLAY while appears box the elaps You can play any title by inputting its number while MOVING MOVING TO ANOTHER MOVING TO MOVING ANOTHER CHAPTER/TRACK TO ANOTHER TO CHAPTER/TRACK ANOTHER CHAPTER/TRACK CHAPTER/TRACK you entered. youseconds entered. Then youshows input entered. Thenleft the input Then correc thei you entered. input the correct numbers. Press A-B again to cancel. select not start, from to righ DVD-V When When title onaWhen atitle disc onahas When atitle disc more on ahas atitle than disc more on one has athan disc chapter more one has than chapter more or 3. aone2. than chapter orPress aone chapter or a again orThen a your is stopped then the appropriate number (0-9) e apter title/chapter theaplayback title/chapter A-B at chosenDVD-A end point. playback isDVD-V stopped. 2. v / Vconfirm. to select MOVING TO ANOTHER CHAPTER/TRACK DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A numbers, press CLEAR 4. the Press 4. the ENTER Press 4.Press ENTER to Press confirm. ENTER to Playbac to cP 4.“AtoPress ENTER to confirm. Playback from disc has more has than disc more has disc track, more one has you track, more can one than you move track, can one to you move track, canto you move can move to toNTER start. todisc start. b / DVD-V Bone tothan move tothan another title/group. use B” appears briefly on the TV screenstarts and ckanotheror When a title on a disc has more than one chapter or a “-:--:--” appears. Useas the bB V buttons to select the title/chapter youand entered. Then input another chapter/track another chapter/track asanother chapter/track follows: follows: asvfollows: as follows: selected selected time. selected time. time. DVD-V DVD-A selected time. begins. tto appear You can play any title bychapter/track number while enu return the to the menu sequence a the title When on ainputting disc aWhen titleview, has onits amore When atitle disc on than ahas atitle disc one more onhas chapter arepeat than disc more has or than achapter more onethan chapter or disc aone has chapter or amoreorthan a one track, you3.can move to B title/chapter select v Vmenu buttons to the select title/chapter toWhen the select title/chapter title/chapter ,ebuttons you want to then press ENTER toone start. Input thetorequired st MOVING 4. Press ENTER to confir is stopped. TO ANOTHER CHAPTER/TRACK disc has more disc than has disc one more has track, than disc more you one has than can track, more move one than you track, to can one you move track, can to you move to move to • view, Press •playback SKIP Press SKIP Press or • . > SKIP Press briefly or . > SKIP during briefly or . > playback during briefly or > during briefly playback during to to to another chapter/track as follows: to then to ss start. ENTER press ENTER toon press start. ENTER to start. to start. Press TITLE or DVD MENU to to playback the menu When a then title a•. disc has more than one chapter orplayback ato 3.return Press A-B again tocan cancel. seconds from left to r selected time. another chapter/track another another chapter/track asor follows: another chapter/track chapter/track follows: follows: follows: select the select next the chapter/track select next the chapter/track select next or the chapter/track to next return chapter/track to toreturn the orasto to return the orastoto return theas to the DVD-V DVD-A VD LE to U to the or MENU return DVD menu to MENU to return the menu to to return the menu to the menu disc has more than one track, you can move to screen. numbers, presstoCLE • Press SKIP . or > briefly during playback beginning beginning of thebeginning current offollows: thebeginning chapter/track. current of the chapter/track. current of the chapter/track. current chapter/track. another chapter/track as • When Press SKIP •DVD-A Press . • or SKIP Press > briefly SKIP Press orthan . > during SKIP briefly orplayback . > during briefly or > toplayback brieflyplayback during to select playback to the next to chapter/track or toyou return to the Then in TO CHAPTER/TRACK entered. aANOTHER title on a disc has•. more one chapter or aduring he title/chapter n select you option anMOVING you option you • Press • SKIP Press • . SKIP Press twice • . SKIP briefly Press twice . SKIP to briefly step twice . back to briefly step twice to back the to briefly step to back the to step back the the select next select chapter/track the select next the chapter/track select or next the return chapter/track next or toto chapter/track to the return orto toto return the or totoreturn the to the of the current chapter/track. beginning disc has more than one track, you move to •ew SKIP or >the briefly during playback totocan toPress start. ption. the option. 4. Press ENTER to con DVD-V . DVD-A previous previous chapter/track. previous chapter/track. previous chapter/track. chapter/track. 2beginning 3offollows: 4the Use buttons tochapter/track. select optionchapter/track. you beginning ofthe beginning current chapter/track. beginning current of the current of thean chapter/track. current chapter/track as • Press SKIP . twice briefly to step back time. to the the next another chapter/track orthe to1 return to the selected n toselect the menu 3 2 an s to option select you to an select option an select you option an option want, then press ENTER to view the option. •buttons To4go •buttons directly Toof •title directly To any go •achapter to directly To any go chapter during to directly any DVD chapter during tobriefly any playback, DVD chapter during playback, DVD during playback, DVD When ago on disc has more than one chapter or. a chapter/track. beginning the current chapter/track. •toto Press SKIP •you Press . •you twice SKIP Press •. SKIP Press twice to . step SKIP briefly twice back tobriefly to step twice the playback, back tobriefly step to back the to step to previous back the to the apter •DISPLAY Press SKIP or briefly during to to option. NTER press view the to view option. the to more view option. the option. press DISPLAY press press and press DISPLAY press and press DISPLAY press and press vprevious /. Vand tov select /> V tothe vprevious select / V to the vselect / V playback tothe select the not disc within isENTER not within disc has than one track, can to previous chapter/track. previous chapter/track. chapter/track. chapter/track. • To go directly to any chapter during DVD playback, Notes: •in Press SKIP . twice briefly to stepyou back tomove the select the next chapter/track or to return to the chapter/track chapter/track icon. chapter/track Then, icon. chapter/track input Then, icon. the input Then, chapter/track icon. the input Then, chapter/track the input chapter/track the chapter/track assword. ut . the password. another chapter/track enu pressplayback, DISPLAY and press v / V to select the previous chapter/track. • To go • asTofollows: to go •control any directly Tochapter go • to directly To any during gochapter to directly DVD during to playback, chapter during playback, DVD during playback, DVD • Ifdirectly parental is set and theany discchapter is any not DVD within beginning of the current chapter/track. number number or use number or use number or use or use b / B. b / B. b / B. b / B. chapter/track icon. Then, input the chapter/track press DISPLAY press and DISPLAY press press DISPLAY press and DISPLAY and press and press v / playback Vpress to select vthe /V the tovselect / V tothe vselect / V tothe select the not set the within and disc is •set the isyou not and discwithin the is•SKIP not disc within isthe not within rating settings you must input password. t•ontrol an option Press . or > briefly during to To go directly to any chapter during DVD playback, Press SKIP . twice briefly toicon. step back to the theinput number or use b / B. chapter/track chapter/track Then, chapter/track icon. input chapter/track Then, the chapter/track input Then, icon. the input Then, chapter/track chapter/track the chapter/track oes Your receiver does does ettings tceiver ou assword. input must the you input password. must the input password. the password. (See on page 21). select the next chapter/track or to return to the option. press DISPLAY and press v“Lock / Vicon. toMenu” select the previous chapter/track. DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A SEARCH SEARCH SEARCH SEARCH or use number number or use number or use or use b / B. b / B. b / B. b / B. different n from code different from from beginning of the current chapter/track. Menu” 21). n page on 21). page 21). chapter/track icon.number Then, input the chapter/track • go DVDs may have a regionduring code. Your receiver does directly to any chapter DVD DVD-A DVD-V you 1. Press Press hold and Press SKIP/SCAN hold 1.receiver and Press SKIP/SCAN hold . and SKIP/SCAN or hold . > SKIP/SCAN for or . > about for orto. > about for orplayback, > aboutfor about receiver for is 1this receiver is•1.receiver 1and is1.receiver 1•b SEARCH number or use / To B. Press SKIP . twice briefly to step the not play discs that have a/ region code different from region ode. have ceiver awithin code. does region Your code. does Your does does 24 press DISPLAY and press vback V to select the is notYour DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V DVD-V DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A DVD-A two seconds two seconds during two seconds playback. during two seconds playback. during playback. during playback. SEARCH SEARCH SEARCH SEARCH previous chapter/track. 1. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or > for about your receiver. The region code for this receiver is 1 egion cs different ave that acode region have from different acode region different from code different from from chapter/track icon. password. 24Then,24input the 24 chapter/track The receiver The will receiver now The go will receiver into now The SEARCH go will receiver into now mode. go into now mode. go into SEARCH mode. mode. DVD-V DVD-A SEARCH two seconds (one). 1.directly Press and 1. hold Press SKIP/SCAN and Press hold 1. SEARCH and Press SKIP/SCAN . hold and or SKIP/SCAN > hold . for SKIP/SCAN about or . > for or . > aboutfor or > about for aboutduring playback. • 1receiver To go to any chapter during DVD playback, er. ode receiver egion The for code region this is for code this receiver for is 1this receiver is 1 is1. number or use b1SEARCH /will B. Press 2. and Press hold 2. and Press SKIP/SCAN 2. and Press SKIP/SCAN . and SKIP/SCAN or hold . > orselect . >seconds or >playback. or >playback. press andhold press / VSKIP/SCAN to the. The receiver will now go into SEARCH mode. twohold seconds two during seconds two playback. seconds during two playback. during during in2. Press 1. and holdDISPLAY SKIP/SCAN . orv> for about 24 receiver does repeatedly repeatedly to select repeatedly toreceiver the select repeatedly required toThe the select required speed: toThe the select required speed: the required speed: speed: chapter/track icon. Then, input the chapter/track Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or > Theplayback. will now receiver go into will receiver SEARCH now The go will receiver into now mode. SEARCH go will into nowSEARCH mode. go into SEARCH mode. 2.mode. . two DVD-V DVD-A seconds during SEARCH different from X2, X4, X2, X16X4, or X100 X2, X16 X4, orand X100 X2, X16 X4, or X100 X16 or hold X100 number or use b / B. repeatedly to select the required speed: Press 2. hold Press 2. SKIP/SCAN and Press 2. and Press SKIP/SCAN . holdand orSKIP/SCAN > hold . SKIP/SCAN or . > or . > or > The receiver will2.now go into SEARCH mode. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or > for about receiver 1 3. To exit 3.is SEARCH To exit 3.1.SEARCH To mode, exit 3. SEARCH To press mode, exit PLAY. SEARCH press mode, PLAY. mode, PLAY. PLAY. X2, X4, X16 or X100 repeatedly to repeatedly select repeatedly the topress required select repeatedly topress the select speed: required tothe select required speed: the required speed: speed: 2. . or > oesPress and hold SKIP/SCAN two seconds during playback. DVD-V DVD-A SEARCH 3. To exit SEARCH mode, press PLAY. X2, X4,required X16 X2, or X100 X4, X2, X16X4, or X100 X2, X16X4, or X100 X16 or X100 repeatedly to select the speed: from 24 The receiver will now go into SEARCH mode. Note: Note: Note: 3.and Tohold exit SEARCH 3. To exit 3.mode, SEARCH To exit 3. press To mode, exit PLAY. press mode,PLAY. press mode,PLAY. press PLAY. 1. Press SKIP/SCAN . orSEARCH > forSEARCH about X16 or X100 isNote: 1X2, X4, 2. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or > When DVD When audio a• using DVD When disc audio aplayback. using DVD thatdisc includes audio a DVD thatdisc includes audio that disc includes that includes • using Note: two aseconds during 3.• When To exit• using SEARCH mode, press PLAY. repeatedly to select the pictures,pictures, this operation pictures, this operation may pictures, thisbe operation may permitted thisbe operation may permitted inrequired be some may permitted in speed: be some permitted in somein some • When using a DVD audio disc that includes The receiver will now go into SEARCH mode. Note: Note: Note: X2, X4, X16 orNote: X100 picture segments. picture segments. picture segments. picture segments. pictures, this operation may be permitted in some and hold SKIP/SCAN . or > When using When a DVD When audio a• using DVD disc When that audio aPLAY. using DVD includes disc audio a DVD thatdisc includes audio thatdisc includes that includes •SEARCH • using Note: 2. Press• 3. To exit mode, press picture segments. pictures, this pictures, operation pictures, thismay operation pictures, be thispermitted operation may thisbe operation inmay permitted some be may permitted in be some permitted in some in some repeatedly to select the speed: a DVD audio disc thatrequired includes • When using picture segments. picture segments. picture segments. X2,operation X4,picture X16 orsegments. X100 pictures, this Note: may be permitted in some To exit SEARCH mode, press PLAY. picture 3. segments. • When using a DVD audio disc that includes pictures, this operation may be permitted in some Note: picture segments. • When using a DVD audio disc that includes pictures, this operation may be permitted in some picture segments. 1 2 1 2 1 3 2 3 1 1 2 2 3 3 1 21 32 3 1 2 Operação 3 1 3 2 Operation 2 Operation Operation Operation Operation 1 2 ation n Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation 3 3 1 1 1 2 1 2 3 3 DVD-A Search DVD-V DVD-A VCD2.0 VCD1.1 1 2 Introduction 1 12 2 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 23 3 3 4 4 Operation Introduction Operation When a disc has more than one title/group, you can Press m or M during playback. move to another title/group as follows: The DVD/CD Receiver will now go into SEARCH mode. Operação de DVD ou VCD (continuação) � Press DISP.,or then press theCD appropriate numbered (Continued) DVD Video Operation Press m or M repeatedly to select the button (0-9) to select a title number. required speed: mX2, mX4, mX8, mX16, DVD or Video CD Operation (Continued) Introduction VCD2.0 VCD1.1 DVD-V General Features (continued) Markerde Search mX100 (backward) or MX2, MX4, MX8, Marcador Busca Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Safety Precautions . . . . .CHAPTER/TRACK ....................2 Moving Repetir A-Bto another MX16, MX100 (forward). Como marcar um ponto de reprodução. You can start playback from a memorized to Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Discpoint. . . . .Up . 23 Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 VCD1.1 VCD2.0 DVD-V VCD1.1(continued) VCD2.0DVD-V DivX VCD2.0 VCD1.1 DVD-A Features DVD-V DVD-A . . . . . . . . . General 23 Repeat Marker Search A-B With apoints Video CD,bethe Search speed changes: nine can � Pause . . a. reprodução . . .memorized. . . . . . . a. partir . . . . .de. .9. pontos . . . . . memo. . . 23 Você pode iniciar Disc . . . Before . . 23 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 mX2, mX4, mX8, mX16 (backward) orUp to When title Discs onaasequence disc You can start playback a memorized To amarcar mark, follow these steps. Toa repeat in.DVD-A �enter Moving to another Track . . . . . .a.point. . . . .MARKER . . . . 23 Playable . .DVD-V . has . . . .more .a. title: .than . . VCD2.0 . .one . . .chapter . VCD1.1 . . . . .or. .a. 4 rizados. Para umfrom ponto, pressione tecla . . . . . . . . . Repeat 23 A-B MX2, MX4, MX8, MX16 (forward). discPrecautions has more nine points can disc be memorized. umathan seqüência. � ponto Repeat Track/All/Off. . .press . .ícone . . .MARKER . do . . marcador . . . . when . . . . 23 . . . one .at . .your .track, . . .chosen . you . . . can . . starting . .move . . . . to .point. .another .....5 . . . . . . . Para .chapter/track . 23repetir During playback, Press A-B em um desejado no disco. O as follows:in a title: DVD or Video CD Operation To enter a mark, follow these steps. To repeat a sequence To �exit SEARCH Search. . .reaches . .mode, . . . . the .press . . spot . . .PLAY. . that . . . .you . . . want . . . . .to. 23 (Contin Notes Aonappears . . . no . .on . .the . . TV .inicial . screen. . . . escolhido. . . . . . . . .“A . .–” ..5 briefly . . . . . . . 1. . . Pressione 23 playback aDiscs tecla A-B ponto aparece na tela rapidamente. Repita esse procedimento � Press . or > briefly during playback to select JPEG Disc Operation . . . press . . . . . MARKER . . . . . . . .when . . . . . . 24 About Symbols .again . . . chosen . . . .your . . .starting . . . . . . point. . end . . . .point. ....5 During disc playback, Press A-BA-B . . . . . . . . . aparece 23 memorize. na tela at dayour TV rapidamente. the nextPress chapter/track or at to returnchosen to the beginning of paraViewing marcar atéJPEG 9 pontos. a . .spot . . . on .that . .the . you .TV . . screen .want . . . . to . . . . 24 The marker icondisc will appear briefly. Aappears briefly onPanel the Panel Rear . . .screen, . . . . .and . . .the . .repeat ....6 General Features playback reaches the . . . . . . . Front . . 24 A-B and appears briefly onTV the.screen. TV the current chapter/track. � Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 aA-B tecla A-B no ponto Remote Control Overview . . . chosen .final . . . escolhido. . . . . . . point. . .“A . .–. B” ..7 . . . . . . . 2. .�. Pressione 24 sequence begins. memorize. Press again at to your Repeat step 1 to enter up to nine Marker points Press . twice briefly step back toend the previous VCD1.1 VCD2.0 DivX DVD-A DVD-V Repeat Como ou The marker iconeliminar will TV �buscar Still Picture . .appear . . . a. cena .on . .the . .marcada. . . .screen . . . . .briefly. . . . . . . 24 nacancel tela briefly da the TVonesequence, a repetição daand seqüência . . . . . . . . . aparece 24 A-B To appears the TV screen, the repeatirá press A-B. on discs a disc. chapter/track. ote - Repeat Chapter/Title/Off DVD-Video � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O . 24 1. Durante a reprodução, pressione a tecla SEARCH. sequence begins. . . . . . . . Preparation .�. iniciar. 24 go directly to any chapter during DVD playback, Repeat stepstated 1 to enter up to all nine Marker points To Unless otherwise, operations described use � To rotate picture. . .playing . . .Scene . .aparecerá . chapter, . . . . . . na .press . tela. . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . Connections . . 24 menu do Marcador de pesquisa ToDISP. cancel the sequence, press A-B. To repeat the currently on a disc. To Recall a Marked 3 press Then, press /4 to select the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 the remote control. Some features may also be a tecla A-B novamente para cancelar. Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . 3. . . Pressione 24 chapter/track icon. Then, the available on the Setup menu. TVTime Connections . . . DVD-V . . enter . . . . VCD2.0 . . . chapter/track . . . VCD1.1 ..........8 para 2. REPEAT. Dentro de 10 segundos, pressione as Search During disc playback, press SEARCH. Repeat Programmed . . the . . .TV . .screen. . . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . 25 Repeat Chapter icon Tracks. appears on ToThe Recall a Marked Scene number using the numbered buttons .(0-9). Optional Equipment Connections ...........9 selecionar número da marca você.deseja Erasing aum Track from Programme .on . . the . . buscar .screen. . 25 The MARKER SEARCH menuque will List appear . . . . . . . . . 25 The Search Time SearchDVD-V you Aerial Connections .function . . . . .VCD2.0 .allows . . . . .VCD1.1 . . . to . .start . . . .playing . . 10 at DVD-V To repeat the title currently playing, press Time Moving to another TITLE/GROUP Busca por Tempo During disc playback, press SEARCH. ou eliminar. Erasing the Complete Programme List . . . . . . 25 t . . . . . . . . 25 any chosen time on the disc. 1 Within 10 seconds, press /2 to select a. marker Speaker System Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 ote REPEAT a second time. iniciar aSearch reprodução em qualquer tempo escolhido noat MARKER SEARCH DivXThe Disc Operation . . .menu . . . .will . . appear . . . . . on . . .the . .screen. . . . . 26 DVD-A st . . . . . Para .For . The 25two-digit Time function allows you to start playing number that you want tothe recall. Pressione aTitle tecla ENTER e aonreprodução começa a Repeat icon appears TV screen. � Transmitter. . .during .press . . . . the .playback. . .numbered . . . . . .The . .buttons . on-screen . . . . . . 11 dis- 3. The numbers, Press DISP. Speaker Setup . . . . . . . press . . . . .1. /2 . . to . . select . . . . . a. .marker . . . . 27 . . . . . . . disco: .(0-9) . any 26 �in chosen time the Within 10 seconds, rapid Changing aon channel of screen. Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11 playsuccession. appears ondisc. the partir da cena Ou, pressione a. title/group, e can Press ENTER. When amarcada. disc has .press more than one To exit Repeat mode, REPEAT atecla Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . .third . . .CLEAR . . . you . 28 . . . . . . . 1. . . Pressione 27 �Press a tecla DISPLAY durante a reprodução. number that you want to recall. during playback. disTheDISP. Time Search box shows .the Setting a ID of Transmitter . The .elapsed . . .on-screen . . .playing . . . . .time 11 of o número da marca é apagado da lista. move to another title/group as follows: Playback will start from the Marked scene. time. Last Condition Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . . .A 28quadro theappears decurrent buscadisc. porthe tempo mostrará o tempo de 11 on screen. �play Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers VCD1.1 VCD2.0 DVD-A DVD-V Slow Motion Press � ENTER. Press The Repeat Off icon TV Screen Saver .DISP., .the . appears . .MARKER .then . . .on .press .the .marca, .SEARCH . the . .screen. .appropriate . . .menu, . . . .o. seu .numbered . 28 To remove press . . . . . . . . . reprodução 28 �The pode reproduzir qualquer teclando Timedecorrido. Search box showspress ofTime 4. Você Speaker Connections. . the . . .elapsed .3. /4 . . to . playing . select . . . . time . .the . 12 Within 10 seconds, Playbackbutton willthe start from scene. (0-9) a. title Controlling TV . to . the . select . .Marked . . .de .pesquisa. . . number. . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . Speaker . . 28Press the Positioning. current disc. SEARCH. SLOW -/+ during pause. número no menu do marcador . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Search icon( in the on-screen display. /) para selecionar o ícone do as teclas Operation withthe Radio . . . . .SEARCH . . . . . . . .menu, . . . . .press . . . . 29 To remove MARKER receiver enter . . . . . . . 2. . . Pressione 28The Within 10 will seconds, to Time Video CDs - Repeat Track/All/Off The “-:--:--” in Before Operation .appears . . . SLOW . .press . .the . mode. . Time .3. /4 . . Search . . select . . . box. . . .the . 14-19 Moving to another Presetting the radio stations . . .CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 e “-:--:-” aparecerá na tela. SEARCH. To clear a Marked Scene . . . . . . . . . relógio 29 Search icon in the display. To repeat the track currently playing, press Mini Glossary for Audio Stream &required Surround Use the SLOW -/+ to on-screen select thethe speed: t to Within 10 seconds, use number buttons Listening to theDVD-A radio . VCD2.0 . . . . . . VCD1.1 . . . . . . DivX . . . . . . . . 29 DVD-V . . . . . . . . . 29 ZOOM The Time box. REPEAT. Mode .“-:--:--” . .o1/8, . tempo .the .appears .t .required . inicial . . in . or .the .em . start . horas, . . . Search . . minutos . . .Enter . . . e. hours, .segundos .T . . . 14 3. Entre com 1/16, t 1/4 t 1/2 (backward), or enter time. During disc. .playback, Other Functions. . . . .Scene . . . on .press . . . . TV .SEARCH. . screen. . . . . . . . . . . 30 To clear apara Marked . . . . . . . . . 29 CAUTION Repeat Track icon 1. The Use Zoom ampliar imagem deappear vídeo. Sound Mode .T .and . 1/4 . . seconds .or . .use .Se . 1/2 .the . from . (forward). .number . teclou . .left . . .to . número .right . . . .in. to 14 When a title onappears a adisc hasthe more thanon one chapter or a Within 10 seconds, buttons 1/16, T 1/8, T minutes, the da esquerda para a direita. você o The MARKER SEARCH menu will Sleep Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .the . . .screen. . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen Display RISK OF .start ELECTRIC discdisc hasplayback, morecurrently than press one playing, track, youpress can move to another .para . . .time. .apagá-lo, . .SHOCK . Enter . . . . .hours, . . . . . . . 15 enter the required During box. repeat pressione CLEAR 2. To Pressione a. .reprodução Dimmer .athe .1tecla . /2 . disc . to . ZOOM . select . . . . durante . the . . . marker . . SEARCH. . . number . . . . . . ou .that . .com . 30 DO NOT press OPEN To exit slow motion mode, PLAY.em seguida Press you . . . . . . . . . errado, 30 chapter/track as follows: Initial Settings . .the . . wrong . . . . .numbers, . . . . .left . press . .to. .right . . . .in. 16-19 If you enter CLEAR to remove minutes, and seconds from the The MARKER REPEAT . . a.congelada .second . erase. . SEARCH . . . . time. . . .menu . ativar . . .will . .aappear . função . . . . on . ZOOM. . .the . .screen. . . A. . 30 oGeneral número correto. aMute imagem . . . . . . . . . tecle 30 �box. want to the numbers you entered. � Press . orpara >on briefly during playback to select Operation . . .Then . . .THE .enter . .RISK . the . . .correct . . . . .num16 The Repeat All icon appears the TV screen. CAUTION: TO. .REDUCE Using the Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . you .da . 30 1 Press /2 to select the marker number . . . . . . . 4. . . Pressione 30 �If Language bers. moldura quadrada aparece no canto the next chapter/track or to direito return inferior tothat the beginning of you enter the. wrong remove .para . .ELECTRIC . confirmar. .numbers, . . . . . SHOCK . press .A. reprodução . . CLEAR . . . . . .to.inicia . . . 16 ENTER a Press CLEAR. OF Selecting the Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 To exit Repeat mode, press REPEAT a third want to erase. . . . . . . . . . 30ote you entered. DO. NOT COVER current chapter/track. tela. Thethe Within 10 ENTER �the Display .selecionado. . .seconds, .REMOVE . . . . . .Then .press . . .enter . (OR . . the . BACK) . .correct . .to. .confirm .num16-17 the marker number will be erased from the list. partir donumbers tempo XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 time. bers. . . . . . . . .Slow . 30 �motion NO USER-SERVICEABLE playback � CLEAR. Press . twice briefly to step back to the previous Press start Audio. .time. . . . . . in . . reverse . . . . . . is. PARTS .not . . .applicable . INSIDE . . . . . . .for . . 17 2. The Cada vez for Repeat and Repeat TV XTS prochapter/track. .que .Off .steps .aicon . tecla . . appears .2.ZOOM . . . .3on . to .the . erase .pressionada, . . .screen. .additional . . . . . o. .tamanho . marker . . 30 REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE . . . . . . . .Video . 30 �Within CD. 10 seconds, press Playback starts from the selected on the you Lock (Parental Control) . ENTER . . . .time . . .to . .confirm . . disc. . . . If. the 18 The marker number will be erased from the list. PERSONNEL. numbers. da imagem na TV muda na seqüência: 100%, 400% , . . . . . . . . . 30 �start enter an invalid time, playback will continue from the current � To go directly to any chapter during DVD playback, time. Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Repeat stepsScreen 2 and fit 3 (ajustar to erasea additional marker Reference point. starts from the selected time on the disc. If you 800%, 100 %. Playback 3tela) press DISP. press /4 toe select the To1600%, remove the Then, MARKER SEARCH menu, press numbers. ote This lightning withwill arrowhead an enter an invalid time, flash playback continue symbol from thewithin current Language Codefit List . .icon. . . tela . .Then, . a. .partir . enter . . . de . .the .400%) . chapter/track . . . . . . 31 chapter/track ModoSEARCH. Screen (ajustar Operation equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user On a Video CD with must Country Code List .o.jeito . .you . da . .numbered .imagem . . . set . . .PBC .buttons .menu, . .to. .Off .(0-9). . on . tela . . 31 number using the To remove thePBC, MARKER SEARCH press . . . . . . . . . 31 point. about the presence of uninsulated dangerous Você pode mudar aparecer na DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 the setup menuDVD-V to use page Troubleshooting . . .the . . .Repeat . . .VCD2.0 . . function. . . . .VCD1.1 . . . See . . . .DivX . . 32-33 SEARCH. DVD-A . . . . . . . . . 31 Zoom quando você estiver reproduzindo um filme em DVD. voltage within the product’s enclosure that may be Playing a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 19Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 . . . . . . . 32-33 ote sufficient magnitude electric Pressione asfunction teclas / para selecionar entre Normal, GeneralofFeatures . . . . . . . .to. constitute . . . . . . . a. risk . . . of . 20-22 The Zoom allows you to enlarge the video VCD1.1 VCD2.0 DivX DVD-A DVD-V shock to persons. . . . . . . . . . 34 For two-digit numbers, press the numbered buttons Zoom � Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20 Enhanced e Máximo. image(0-9) and(melhorado) to rapid movesuccession. through the enlarged image. in � Moving to another mark CHAPTER/TRACK . . .triangle . . 20 The Zoom function allows you to enlarge the video The exclamation within an equilateral paraplayback mover através imagem to 3. Use as teclas Press ZOOM during or stilldaplayback � Slow . . . .the . . user . . . about . . . . .the . . presence . . . . . . 20 is Motion. intended .to. alert of image and to move through the enlarged image. VCD2.0 VCD1.1 activate the Zoom function. DVD-A DVD-Vinstructions Slow Motion ampliada. 20 � Still important About the symbols for operating and maintenance (servicing) Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20 Press ZOOM playbackthe or magnification still playback to If you press during ZOOM repeatedly, level instructions � Search. . . . . .in. .the . .instructions . . . . . . . .accompanying . . . . . . . . . .the . 20 4. Para retornar aZoom reprodução normal, pressione tecla Press SLOW -/+to during pause. Indicates hazards likely cause harm to athe unit activate the function. product. increases up to four steps. � Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 The receiver willdamage. enter SLOW mode. CLEAR. or other material Ifitself you press ZOOM repeatedly, 100% size → 400% size the → magnification 800% → level � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK Use increases upsize to the four steps. 1600% →SLOW 100% -/+ sizeto select the required speed: t � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Indicates special operating features of this unit. otas: HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR 1/16, t 1/8, t→ 1/4800% or t→ 1/2 (backward), or T 100% size → 400% size � Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Use the 1 2 3 4 buttons to move through the MOISTURE. size → 100% size 1/16, T 1/8, Tfor 1/4 or T the 1/2 (forward). • O1600% Zoom pode não funcionar em alguns DVDs. Indicates tips and hints making task easier. � Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 zoomed picture. WARNING: Do not install this. .equipment Special DVD Features . . . . . . .in. a. .confined . . . . . .space . . 22 1 3Fit 4slow Use theScreen buttons to move through the To2exit motion mode, press PLAY. • O modo (ajustar à tela) está disponível such�as a book case or similar unit. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 zoomed picture.disco DVD, VR e arquivo de filme. reproduzir “Proquando Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby ote � Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright 1992zoom function may not work for some DVDs. � Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22 1997The Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. ote ote � Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Slowunder motion playback in reverse is Systems, not applicable Manufactured license from Digital Theater Inc. for ThePat. zoom function may not work for some DVDs. � Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 US No. 5,451,942 Video CD. 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 CAUTION: 31 1 12 2 1 21 2 32 3 34 4 1 1 21 2 32 3 34 45 5 1 1 2 1 2 2 3 This DVD/CD receiver employs a laser system. To ensure proper use of this product, please read this owner’s manual carefully and retain it for future reference. Should the unit require maintenance, contact an authorized service loca22 tion (see service procedure). Performing controls, adjustments, or carrying out procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radi- Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, 21 Inc. All rights reserved. OTES ON COPYRIGHTS: 21 It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without permission. Installation and Setup Introduction Introduction Installation Installation and Setup a This lightning flash with arrowhead symbol withinDISPLAY an Initial Settings Progressive Scan Video provides the highest quality GENERAL OPERATION equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user 5. Press SETUP or PLAY to exit the Setup menu. DVD-V DVD-A Display Mode DISPLAY To go to theabout nextthe level: less flickering. DVD-V DVD-A presence uninsulated dangerous TVpictures Aspect with By using the Setup menu, canofmenu make various 1. Press Theyou Setup appears. B onSETUP. the Remote Control. Press 16 : 9 TV Aspect the Component voltage within the product’s enclosure that may be If you are using Video jacks for Display Mode setting works only when the TV Aspect adjustments to items such as picture and sound. You LANGUAGE Display a Mode Widescreen sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric 4:3: Select when standard 4:3 TVthat is connected. connection to“4:3”. TV or monitor is compatible with 2. go Use / of V select thesubtitles desired option mode is set to To to to the previous level: and can also setback avlanguage for the thethen press Progressive Scan Off shock to persons. B to move to theLANGUAGE second level. The screen shows a progressive scan signal, setwide Progressive Scan to Operação de DVD ou (continuação) 16:9 Wide: Select when a 16:9 TV is connected. SetupPress menu, among other things. For details on each on the Remote thebcurrent setting forControl. theVCD selected item, as well as Letterbox: Displays a wide picture with bands on the On. English within an equilateral triangle Menu Language Setup menu item,The seeexclamation pages 19mark to 22. alternate setting(s). upper and lower portions of the screen. alert the userOriginal about the presence of Discto Audio GENERALis intended OPERATION para gravações posteriores. ON progressive scan: DVD de áudio contém To Turn DVD-V DVD-AMuitos Mode v /exit V tothe select the second desired option then Display 3. Use ToIntroduction display and Menu: About the symbols for instructions Disc Subtitle Off important operating and maintenance (servicing) Panscan: Automatically displays picture texto de tela, como a biografia dosthe artistas, letras Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . .wide . to . . the .lista . . input . ou . .on . of .the . . 23 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . accompanying . . press . . . . .of. . .the .2 press B to move to the third level. 1. Press SETUP. The Setup menu appears. Introduction Discin Menu Press SETUP to instructions display the menu. A second the instructions Original Connect component out of thewhen DVD entire screen and cuts off the portions that do not fit. Display Modean setting works only the TV Aspect Verificando o conteúdo dos discos de DVD: Move Select Indicates hazards likely to cause harm to the unit de músicas. Alguns DVD de Áudio contém galeria Playing Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc .de .. .fotos .. .. 23 Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 product. SETUP take you Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Safety Precautions . . to . the . initial . . desired . . screen. . . . . setting . . . . . then . . . .press ....2 your monitor/television, set your television or monitor 4. will Use v // V V to toback select then 2. Use v select option mode is set or to other “4:3”.material damage. itself � Pause .Audio .Input. . . . .CD . . .and . . .MP3/WMA . . . . . . . . .Disc . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 Before Use . .to. .to . .the . ..your . .level. . .. .. .. ..The . .. ..shows ou vídeo clips. Menus ENTER confirm toContents move an 23 Table B of .. .. .second .. .. .. .selection. .. ..Some .. screen .. .. .. .items .. .. .4-5 .3 to Playing Component Progressive Scan To goPlayable tothe thecurrent next level: WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK require additional steps. DVD-V DVD-A � Track .. .. ..bands .. .. .. .. ..on . .. .the Discs . .. .. .. ..for . .. .. selected . .. ..possibilitam .as4TV Aspect Letterbox: Displays Os DVDs podem menus que � Moving Pause .to. .another .a. wide . . . .picture . . . .features . ..with . .. .. .. 23 23 Before Use . .DO .oferecer .setting .NOT .. .. .the .. .. .. .lhe ..item, .. .. .. ..as .. .. well .. .. .. 4-5 Indicates special operating of this .unit. otas: HAZARD, EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR B alternate on the Remote PressPrecautions 1. Select “Progressive Scan” on menu setting(s). � Track/All/Off. . screen. . .the ..the .. ..highest .DISPLAY . . especiais. .. ..or ..Control. ..PLAY .. .. .. ..Para ..to.. .exit .. .the ..do .. .. .. .. .. .. 54 Progressive Scan provides upper and lower portions of the � Repeat Moving toVideo another Track . .. .. .. .. .quality . .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 Playable Discs . ..usar . .. o.Move . .Setup . .. .. ..Select acessos a recursos menu 5. Press SETUP menu. MOISTURE. 4:3: Select when a standard 4:3 TV is connected. B. then press • Para usufruir da qualidade pictures with less � . flickering. . and . . . hints . . . . for .máxima .. .making .. do .. ..the .efeito .. ..task .. .surround .. .. .. .. ..do 23 Notes .. .. .. .. .the .. .. .second .. desired .. .. .. .. .. .. option .. .. .. then .. .. 55 v the /Discs Va.to Useon Todisco, go3. back to previous Indicates tips � Search. Repeat Track/All/Off. . .. .. wide .picture . ..easier. Precautions . .select . level: . .. .. .. ..Entre pressione tecla DVD MENU. com .o. ..número Panscan: Automatically displays the on the 23 Menu Language press toDomove IfJPEG you are using the not Disc Operation .. wide .. ..usar .. .. TV ..Video .o. ..canal .. ..saída ..for .. .. .. de .. .. áudio .. .. 24 About Symbols .. .install ..to.. .the .. .third .. .. ..level. .. .. .. .. in .. ..a..confined .. .. .. .. .. ..space .. .. 516:9 DVD de Áudio, Wide: Select when is.. .connected. bWARNING: on the PressLANGUAGE � Search. . você . a.Component .16:9 . deve .the . .jacks . ..de 23 Notes onBRemote Discs .Control. . ..this . equipment 5 entire screen and cuts off portions that do not fit. DISPLAY correspondente ou use as teclas para destacar a CAUTION such as a a book case or similar Manufactured under license Select language for menu connection aJPEG TV ordisc monitor that Viewing .. ..de .. Dolby .. saída .. .. .is .. compatible .. .. .Áudio ..“Dolby”, ..with .do Front Panel .. .. .. ..setting .. .. .. .. ..and .. .. .. on-screen ..press .. .. .. .. 65 analógico 5.1 (conectores de JPEG DisctoaOperation .from . Laboratories. . .. .. .. ..5.1 . .. .seu . .. 24 24 Symbols . . .Panel . the . the . .desired . .Setup .unit. 4.About Use v /and V toRear select then TV Aspect “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby sua seleção. Emtoseguida pressione ENTER. RISK OF ELECTRIC a progressive scan signal, GENERAL OPERATION � Slide Show . disc . . . ..set .. .. Progressive .. .. .. ..works. .. .. .. a.. .Copyright ..to ..1992.. .. .. 24 ENTER your selection. LANGUAGE Remote Control Overview . .. .. OPEN ..a..tecla .. SHOCK .. .Some .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 7Display Viewing a JPEG . .Scan . .. .. ..Digital 24 Frontdisplay. Panel andconfirm Rear Panel . .. .. .. .. items 6 Home Theater System). saída DVD-V DVD-A Laboratories. Confidential DO. NOT Progressive Scan DisplayUnpublished ModeSe você usar Mode require additional steps. On. � Picture ..na .. All ..sua .. rights ..Scan ..conexão .. ..reserved. .. .. ..On..de .. .. áudio, .. .. .. .. ..o..som .. .. .. .será 1997 Dolby � Still Slide Show Progressive . .. 24 24 Menu Language Control Overview . . . .appears. . .English ..............7 1. Remote Press SETUP. The Setup menu (Ótica ouLaboratories. Coaxial) Progressive Scan highest DVD-V DVD-A Mode setting works only � toVideo another file ..Off.Theater .TV .. ..Systems, ..quality .. .. .. .. .. Inc. .. 24 THE RISK Disc Audio / CAUTION: Subtitle /TO Menu Menu de Títulos (TITLE MENU) � Moving Still Picture . de . .provides .from . when . mesmo . Digital . .. .the .the .reproduzindo . .. ..Aspect 24 5. Disc Press SETUP or Audio PLAY toREDUCE exitOriginal the Setup menu. Display Turn ON progressive scan: To Manufactured under license similar a qualidade CD, um..DVD 2. Preparation Use v / V to select Disc theOF desired option then press ELECTRIC SHOCK Subtitle Off with less flickering. modepictures isUSset to “4:3”. � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 1. a .tecla TITLE. Se corrente um Connections .language . .second .NOT . . .REMOVE . you .level. . . oprefer . título .COVER . . Original . for . .(OR .the . .BACK) .shows .possui . . .track . 8-13 BPressione toSelect move the to the The screen Preparation áudio. audio DO Disc Menu other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS component out of the DVD to the input of IfConnect youdeare using the Component Video jacks for CAUTION: Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 �Surround” To rotate picture. . . trademarks .with . . . bands . . . .of. Digital . . .the . .Theater . . . . . 24 LANGUAGE the current setting item, DigitalDisplays registered aare wide picture on menu, este aparecerá na contrário, TV Connections .selected . ..TV. . ..INSIDE . o. 8Letterbox: (disc audio), subtitles, and Connections . NO . .receiver .USER-SERVICEABLE .for .. ..the ..employs .. .tela .. .. ..da .the .. disc ..PARTS ..Caso .. ..menu. .as ..well .. .. ..as .. .. 8-13 your monitor/television, setTracks. connection toProgrammed a TV or monitor Repeat .. ..compatible .. Theater .. .. .. or .. .. monitor ..Systems, .. with .. .. .. .. .. 25 This DVD/CD laser system. Systems, Copyright 2000 Digital alternate setting(s). REFER SERVICING TOa QUALIFIED DVD Audio Discs Programmed Playback .your . .that . .television . is 25 and lowerInc. portions of 1996, the screen. Optional Equipment Connections .. .. .. .SERVICE .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 9upper Moving to another GROUP menu do disco poderá não aparecer. TV Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 to Component Input. Inc. All rights reserved. a progressive scan signal, set Progressive Scan to PERSONNEL. Prev. LANGUAGE Erasing a Track fromGrupo Programme Original: Refers toofsecond the language which the To proper use thisoriginal product, please readinthen this owner’s Mudando para outro Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . Move . .List . . Enter . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 v ensure /V toEquipment select the desired option 3. Use Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Optional Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 On. Panscan: Automatically displays the wide picture on the manual carefully retain it level. for future Should disc was recorded. Erasing the Complete Programme List .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 Some DVD Audio discs divide content into Englishreference. Menu 2.press OSpeaker menu oferece recursos como ângulo da câmera, ethethe Erasing adeTrack from Programme List . .different . menu 25 B to move toand the DVD Audio is Language a third new disc format 1.Alguns Select “Progressive Scan” the DISPLAY DVD Áudio divide o on conteúdo em diferentes System Connection .Original . .. .. .building . ..Select . .. .on . .11-12 Move Aerial Connections . . . .contact . . with . .. .an .. .authorized ..symbol .. .service . loca. 10 unit require maintenance, screen and ON cuts off the portions OTES COPYRIGHTS: Disc Audio flash groups. Your player DivX Disc Operation .enables .de .v .DVD ./ .Vthat .you .lhe . do .to . quickly .not .List . fit. . .o ..access .. .. .. .. .. .. 26 This lightning arrowhead within an To success of DVD toeprovide highe quality, Erasing the Complete Programme 25 Turn ON progressive scan: B. then press opções idiomas em áudio legendas, capítulos para oentire grupos. O seu reprodutor permite acesso buttons. 2. Select “On” using the Other: select another language, press number 4. Use v Transmitter. / (see V toTo select the desired setting then press � . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 tion service procedure). Speaker System Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Disc Subtitle Off , broadcast , broadcast, show It is forbidden by law to copy equilateral triangle is intended to alert user different groups Speaker Setup . diferentes . .during . . .. .. ..playback .. .. .. .. .. durante .. via .. .. ..the .. ..a.on-screen .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27 uncompressed, multi-channel audio forthe a new DVD Audio Discs Menu Language DivX Disc Operation . reprodução, 26 ENTER to confirm selection. título. rápido eScan fácil aos grupos buttons then ENTER corresponding � a your channel .. ..procedures .. .. ..4-digit .. .. 11 Disc Original Moving to another GROUP via cable, play in public, or of rent copyrighted without Performing controls, adjustments, or component out the DVD to input of about the presence uninsulated dangerous � Changing Transmitter. .in.Menu .audio .to. .enter .of . Transmitter .of.the .Some . carrying . items . . .Audio .out 11 Progressive experience quality. A. .DVD disc can beConnect Additional Information .. .. .. ..selection. .. .. the .material 3. display. Press ENTER require additional steps. Speaker Setup .DISPLAY . to . . confirm . . ). .. .. .. your . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 27 Select a language for the Setup menu and on-screen number according to the language code list in the permission. other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radivia menus de tela (OSDs voltage within the product’s enclosure that may be � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 your monitor/television, set your television or monitor � Changing aby channel ofsair. Transmitter . . .disc . . . jacket . 11 or 3. Pressione a tecla TITLE para identified the DVD logo format on. the The confirm menu will. appear. Some DVD discs Last Condition Memory .. playback .. ..highest .. divide .. ..function .. ..on .quality .. in .. .developed .. .. .into .. .. .different TVprovides Aspect DVD Audio isenter aaudio new disc building on theAdditional Information .the .content .stop . mode. . .. 28 28 Progressive Scan Video 1. Press DISPLAY during This product features theAudio copy protection ation exposure. of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric display. reference chapter. If you the wrong language code, 5. Press SETUP or PLAY to exit the Setup menu. � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11 to Component Input. � Setting adisc ID of Transmitter . . . . . .high . . . quality, . . . . . 11 on the Display groups. Screen Saver . Your .Memory . Mode . .player . . . .signals .. .. .you .. .. .to .. ..on .. ..some .. ..access .. 28 Macrovision. Copy protection success of DVD to provide shock toitself. persons. picturesbywith flickering. Lastless Condition . .enables . .. .. .. are .recorded . .. quickly 28 press CLEAR. To prevent direct exposure to laser � Connections. . . . .beam, . to . . the .do . .not . . try . . to . .open . 12 3/4 2. When Press toTV select Group icon. 1.Select Pressione DISPLAY durante reprodução modo � Speaker Assembling and Connecting Speakers 11 different groups during playback the discs. recording and playing pictures these Controlling theProgressive ..Scan .. ..Video .. on .. ..athe .the .On .. .DISPLAY .. ..for .. ..ofvia .. ou .. ..menu .no .. discs .on-screen .. .. .. 28 uncompressed, multi-channel audio forthan aIfnew Scan” you1.are using“Progressive the Component jacks the enclosure. Visible laser radiation when open. DO NOT Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . 28 DVD Audio can provide higher quality stereo DVD-V DVD-A Move Select Off Speaker Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Disc Audio / Subtitle / Menu LANGUAGE MenuSTARE Disco (DISC MENU) on a VCR, picture noise will .appear. �do Speaker Connections. . . within . . quality. . . .an. .equilateral . .DVD . . . .Audio . . 12 display. Stop (parado). The exclamation mark triangle experience in audio A disc can be INTO BEAM. Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.topress Press 1/2 orTV the .numbered connection a TV B. or monitor that then Audio CDs. .with sampling 192kHz Controlling the . . . is . . compatible . . buttons . . . . . . (0-9) .with . . .to. .select . . . 28 Thisor product incorporates copyright protection technology that Before Operation .MENU . to .a.by .alert . .the .e..the . DVD . .user . .. rate .audio .do . .of . disco . up . .. .to .presence .on . .14-19 is intended about the of jacket Speaker Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Pressione a tecla DISC o menu identified logo the disc a group number. 19 Presetting the radio stations .. .o. U.S. ..ícone .Scan ..to .. ..on .and .. other ..stop .. .. 29 Menu Language Select the language you prefer for theexposed audioAudio trackdigital a progressive scan signal, set Progressive (compared to operating 44.1kHz fornot CDs). DVD 1. Press DISPLAY during playback mode. Operation with Radio . .of.for .certain . .instructions . .. .patents . ..Grupo. . .. in 29 / para selecionar 2. protected Pressione LANGUAGE CAUTION: Thefor apparatus should is by method claims About the symbols important (servicing) Mini Glossary & Surround Before Operation . be .Audio . disc . .and . Stream . .the . and . with .disc .maintenance . be .up . .to. .24. .bits . to. .water on the itself. DISPLAY aparecerá. Listening tothe the radio . . . by . . Macrovision .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Corporation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 (disc audio), subtitles, menu. sound can delivered of14-19 data On. intellectual (dripping orinstructions splashing) and noEnglish objects filled withon-screen liquids, such property rights owned Presetting radio stations 29 Select a language for the Setup menu and in the instructions accompanying the Menu Language Mode . . . . . . . for . . .Audio . . . . Stream ......& . . Surround . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Note: 3/4 2. / Press select icon. as.likely teclas 3. Pressione Mini Glossary Indicates hazards cause the (compared toplaced 16 bits a apparatus. standard CD). as vases, should be onfor the TV Aspect andListening other rightstoowners. Other Functions. .ou . .Use .to .of ..to .. .numéricas ..Group .. .. .. ..harm ..protection ..(0-9) .. .. to .. ..para .. .tech.. .. 30 Pressione-a novamente para sair. product. the radio . ..this .copyright . ..unit 29 DVD provide stereo than display. Disc Audio Audio Move Enter hidden Prev. disc Original: which ON progressive scan: To Turn Sound .. .. the .. .. ..original ..can .. .Original .. .. .. ..higher .. .. ..in .. ..quality .. .. .. .. ..the 14 Sometimes the author of the creates Mode . Mode . .Refers . Disc . . .Subtitle . .. to . .. .. ..language 14 selecionar um número de grupo. Display Modeby nology must beother authorized Macrovision Corporation, itself or material damage. Sleep Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .is. to 30select 3. Press 1/2 or the numbered buttons (0-9) Off a sampling rate of up to 192kHz Audio CDs with Other Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ..and AMode typical DVD Audio disc contains up to seven times intended disc was recorded. content that can only be accessed byuses entering a. . . . 30 On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Progressive Scan On for home and other limited viewing only unless Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK Disc Menu Connect Dimmer . .aIfout . group .Setting . of . lock .the .number. . icon ..DVD .. .. ..appears ..to..Off.the .. ..the . .of..TV .. .. screen, .. .. .. .. .. 30 (compared toaOriginal 44.1kHz foradditional CDs). DVD Audio CAUTION: This product may not be used outdoor, restricted to digitalcomponent Sleep Timer . .. .. .input .on 30 the data capacity of This space is password. the Disc Audio /DO Subtitle authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse Mudando ouseIdioma Initial Settings .NOT . .do . EXPOSE . ./Áudio . .. .. CD. . .. ..DVD-V . .. DVD-A . .. ..RAIN Indicates special operating features of. .this unit. HAZARD, OR On-Screen Display ..Menu .be .THIS ..PRODUCT ..press .. .with ..number ..up .. .TO .16-19 . bits . 15 otas: 2.otherwise Select “On” /..V.. ..buttons. indoor only. Other: To select another language, your monitor/television, sound can delivered to 24 of data Mute . .or..password ..using .. .. .set ..your .. (sometimes ..v .is .. .. ..you’ll .. or .. .. monitor ..find .. .. ..it.. on .. .. .the Dimmer . .. the . ..television . .. .. .. 30 30 used for music, either Advanced Resolution multiengineering disassembly prohibited. enter the �MOISTURE. General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Note: Pressione a tecla ÁUDIO repetidamente durante a reproInitial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19 buttonsthe then ENTER toquality enter the corresponding 4-digit (compared to 16 bits aaudio standard CD).to Component Select language prefer for the track Input. Using the .. cria .site). .. ..conteúdos ..the .This ..password .. ..easier. ..ocultos .. .. .. .. 30 channel soundyou that isfor closer to the artist’s • Press Algumas autor disco Mute .jacket . vezes . Headphone . tips . cover .to.oand .confirm . the . hints . on .do .Jack .afor .web . making . of .the . .. ..task 30 Indicates disc’s or 3. ENTER your selection. Sometimes author disc creates hidden � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 � General Operation . . the . equipment . ou .disc . faixa . code . menu. . recordings. . in .list .aáudio. .confined . . the . . Com .Many .space . 16DVD dução para ouvir diferente idioma de number according toinstall the language in (disc audio), subtitles, and Selecting the Input Source .DVD/CD .. .is. ..located ..com .. ..receiver ..o..on .uso ..the .. de .. back .. .. it.. .is WARNING: Do not this master recording or for longer control isn’t dictated by your — Using the Headphone Jack .by . 30 30 que somente podem ser acessados A typical DVD Audio disc contains up to seven times SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number 1. Select “Progressive Scan” on the DISPLAY menu content that can only be accessed entering a The confirm menu will appear. � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 � Language . .Ifcontain . you .or.no . enter . modo .on-screen . .Move . .VR .wrong .Select . .text, . possui .language .such . . . .tanto . .code, . 16 reference the such as achapter. book case similar unit. license from Dolby “Dolby”, discos DVD-RW gravados que o thenManufactured Audio discs as artist XTS (Excellent True Sound) ..aparecer .. Laboratories. ..appears .. .. .Enter ..on ..tela ..available .. ..da ..TV .. .. screen, 30 ofisthis unit. This unique to. this unit and not a function of the disc. Selecting the Input Source . .. ..na 30 additional Move Prev. icon senhas. Seunder onumber ícone de Bloqueio password. Ifis the lock the Original: Refers language B.You � . ..the . ..to .data .the . .. capacity .original . .. .. ..or.. ..of . .a. ..CD. . Some . ..This .in . ..which . .. .. 16-17 . the . 17 space “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby � Audio. Display . . . . . . . . . . . . topress others. should record requested information here and press CLEAR. biographies, playlists, lyrics. DVD Audio XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 áudio principal como o canal de áudio bilíngüe, você pode multiused for music, either Advanced Resolution XTS (Excellent True Sound) . .vezes .your . . você .purchase. .varies, . .poderá .find . .1992.it. on . 30 enter password (sometimes you’ll the disc was recorded. Menu Language retain this guide asthe permanent record of. Discs TV, entre com aa senha (algumas Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright Since the authoring of DVD Audio some � (Parental .. .. .. .. .or .. video .. .. .. .. .clips. � Lock Audio. .contain .channel . . . . Control) . .sound . . .galleries . .quality .that . .. .. .. .. .. 18 17 discs photo is closer to the artist’s1997 DISPLAY XTS pro . .na . jacket . embalagem . . display . . All . . rights . .choices .do.reserved. .disco . .amight .web .ou . .em .not . um . be . This . web . . .password . . 30 disc’s cover or on site). Laboratories. alternar entre Principal Bilíngüe misturá-los ofDolby the“On” on-screen Others . .for . another . the . .(E), .Setup . .CAUTION . . .menu . .. ..(D), .. and .press ..ou .. .on-screen ..number .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19 encontrá-la site). Select a��language 2. Select using the v / V buttons. Lock (Parental Control) . . 18 Other: To select language, master recording or for longer recordings. Many DVD Reference Model No. ___________________________________ control isn’t dictated by your DVD/CD receiver TVfor Aspect available disc you’re OF ELECTRIC Manufactured under license from Theater Inc. —19it is (Principal +then Bilíngüe) a.corresponding display. Essa senha dethecontrole não Digital éplaying. imposta peloSystems, seu Home � Others . .Audio . . pressionando . RISK . to . .enter .DO . contain . NOT .the . . OPEN .tecla .SHOCK . . ÁUDIO. . . . . text, . . 4-digit . .such . . 19as artist buttons ENTER discs on-screen aCode function of US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, Display Mode Serial No. ___________________________________ .the . . disc. . . .5,974,380, . selection. . . . . . . 5,978,762 . . . . . . .and . . . 31 Reference 3.Language Press ENTER toList confirm your Note: Theater System – ela é uma função do disco. Operation number according to the language code list in the other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS biographies, playlists, or lyrics. Some DVD Audio Progressive Scan CAUTION: Code List .will . .. appear. .. .. On .. trademarks .. .of .. .. .. ..Audio ..of.. Digital .. .. .Discs .. ..varies, .. .. .. 31 The confirm menu Language Code List . .. DVD . .. ..Theater 31some Digital Surround” are registered Since the authoring DVD-V DVD-A enjoy maximum sound and effect Country CAUTION: TO THE reference chapter. you enter wrong code, Off Disc Audio /ToSubtitle /IfMenu discs contain photo clips. Legendas (SUBTITLES) DVD or CD Operation .REDUCE .the . quality .galleries . .system. . .language .RISK .or . surround .video . . 19-22 Operation ThisVideo DVD/CD receiver employs a. laser Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 • Uma vez aon-screen autoria DVD Troubleshooting . . ..PAGE . .. .dos . ..display . .discos . .. ..Digital . .choices . de . ..Theater . .. .. might .de . .Systems, . Áudio . .not . .. .32-33 OF ELECTRIC SHOCK ofque theList be Country Code . . . . . . . . . . 31 Viewing another of DVD Audio, you must use 5.1 channel analog audio press CLEAR. Inc. All rights reserved. Playing a DVD and Video CD. . audio .please . .(OR . .. ..durante .read . .. ..this . ..a19-22 . . 19 Pressione aoutput tecla SUBTITLE repetidamente DVD or2ensure Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . DO NOT REMOVE COVER BACK) To proper use of this product, owner’s Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Select the language you prefer for the track mude, algumas das opções de tela podem não estar available. for Troubleshooting . . .the . . disc . . . .you’re . . . . playing. . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 (5.1CH AUDIO OUT jacks on the DVD/CD General Features .diferentes .Video . . .disc . for .CD. . idiomas .future . .. .PARTS . ..reference. . .. .20-22 Since DVD Audio discs can hold a lot of content, there NO manualsubtitles, and retain Playing acarefully DVD and .. das .. OUT .. INSIDE .. legendas. .. ..(OPTICAL .Should . . the 19 or Specifications reprodução para verUSER-SERVICEABLE os (disc audio), and the menu. disponíveis no receiver). If you useitthe DIGITAL . disco . . . . que . . . você . . . .esteja . . . . reproduzindo. . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED are various ways to see what’s available on the disc. unit require maintenance, contact an authorized � Moving toNote: another TITLE/GROUP .SERVICE . ..service . .. .. 20-22 . .loca20 OTES ON COPYRIGHTS: General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COAXIAL) for your audio connection, the sound will effect 19 PERSONNEL. To enjoy maximum sound quality and surround Move Enter Prev. tion (see service procedure). Original: Refers toto the original language in which the It is forbidden by law to copy , broadcast, show, broadcast � another CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . 20 � Moving Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20 only beofsimilar to CD-quality sound even though analog audio 1. Press DISPLAY duringPAGE playback. Viewing another DVDadjustments, Audio, youormust useout 5.1procedures channel disc wasPerforming recorded. via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without controls, carrying Assistindo uma outra Página � Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 � Slow Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . 20 you’re playing a DVD AUDIO Audio disc. (5.1CH OUT in jacks onwithin theradiDVD/CD permission. other than those specified herein result hazardous This lightning flash withmay arrowhead symbol 3 2. vez Press /4DVD tovselect Page icon. Since Audio discs canconter hold auma lot of content, there O DVDTo Áudio éoutput um novo disco desenvolvido � Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame 20 Uma que um DVD de Áudio pode grande 2.anSelect “On” using the buttons. �de Slow Motion. . . triangle . .Ifformato . you . . is.press .intended .de . the . number . .DIGITAL . .Playback . . . . . .user . .. (OPTICAL 20 Other: select another language, This product features the/ V copy protection function developed receiver). use or ation exposure. equilateral to alert theOUT are various waysa to see number. what’s available on the disc. � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 quantidade de1/2 dados, existem várias maneira de acessar no sucesso do DVD para fornecer áudio de alta qualidade, � Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20soundby to protection select page 3. Press buttons To then ENTER to exposure enter the 4-digit Macrovision. Copy signals are recorded on some o COAXIAL) for your audio do connection, the will about the presence of uninsulated dangerous prevent direct tocorresponding laser beam, not try to open 3. Press to confirm your selection. � .the .. within .. ..laser .similar .. .radiation .to .. CD-quality .. ..list .when .in .. the .. .. sound ..uma .. DO .. .. .nova .. .. 20 When recording and playing the pictures of these discs � Repeat Search. . .. multi-canal, . .. the . ..product’s .para . ..enclosure .obter .NOT 20 number according language code queENTER está disponível no disco. voltage that may be descompactado eto..only de se be even thoughdiscs. 1. Press DISPLAY during playback. the enclosure. Visible open. What appears onwill the screen will vary from disc to confirm menu will appear. VCR, picture noise appear. � Repeat A-B .. ..playing ..magnitude .. the .. .. ..wrong .constitute .. .. .. .. ..disc. ..a..code, .. .. ..of.. electric 21 ofIf risk reference you � chapter. Repeat .sufficient . . .. enter . ..to.. DVD .language 20 The on STARE INTO BEAM. you’re DVD Audio 1. aPressione DISPLAY durante aprotection reprodução. experiência na qualidade de som.a.. .Um Áudio pode..ser disc because information available depends This product copyright technology that 3/4 2.incorporates Pressthe to select Page icon. shock to � Time Search ..persons. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 press CLEAR. � Repeat A-B . 21 upon the way the disc created. CAUTION: The apparatus should not be exposeddo to disco, water is protected by / method claims ofwas certain U.S. patents and other identificado pelo logo DVD Áudio na embalagem para selecionar o ícone Página 2. Pressione � Search .. ..and .. .. .no .. .objects .. .. .. .. filled .. .. .. ..with .. .. ..liquids, .. .. .. .. .such 21 1/2 to select a page number. 3. Press � Marker Time or Search . . . . 21 (dripping splashing) intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation The exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle ou no as próprio disco. � . Search .intended . . be . . placed .. .to .. ..on .. the ..the .. ..user .. .. ..about .. .. .. ..the .. .. presence .. .. .. .. .. 21 Note: vases, apparatus. para selecionar um número de página. 3. Pressione � Zoom. Markershould . ..alert 21 and other rights/ owners. Use of this copyright techis of What appears on the screenprotection will vary from disc to 19 O DVD Áudio Special DVD .. .. .maintenance .. .. ..qualidade ..(servicing) .. .. .. .. .. 22 the DVD Audio Discs varies, some nology must beauthoring authorized Macrovision Corporation, and is About the symbols for instructions important �de Zoom. . pode .Features . . . fornecer . operating . . . .. .. .estéreo . ..and . .. .de . .. ..alta 21 OSince que aparece no telaofbyirá variar de disco para disco, disc and because the information available depends intended for home other limited viewing uses only unless of the on-screen display choices might not be instructions the accompanying � Title Menu .product . . . .incom .may .. .. .a.instructions ..faixa .. be .. .. used ..de .. ..amostragem ..outdoor, .. .. .. .. .. restricted .. .. .. de ..the 22 superior aos DVD CD deFeatures áudio, Special 22to CAUTION: This not porque a informação disponível depende daReverse maneira upon the Macrovision way the disc was harm created. Indicates cause to the unit otherwise authorized Corporation. product. available forhazards theby disclikely you’retoplaying. � Disc Menu .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..aos .. .. ..16 .. ..bits .. .. ..de .. .. um .. .. ..CD .. .. .. 22 only. ..(comparado até 24indoor bits deuse dados � Title Menu 22 como disco foimaterial criado.is prohibited. engineering or other disassembly itselfo or damage. � Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Note: � Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 padrão).WARNING: Um típicoTODVD de áudio possui até 7 vezes mais PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK Since the authoring offeatures DVD Audio Discs varies, some � Changing Channel . .. .. .. .. .. ..TO .. ..RAIN .. .. .. 22 � Changing the Audio Language Indicates special operating of this unit. otas: HAZARD, DO the NOTAudio EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT OR capacidade de armazenamento de dados do que um CD.22 SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located on the back of the on-screen display choices not be � Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . � Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 22 22 MOISTURE. of this unit. This number is unique to this unit andmight not available EsseDVD espaço adicional é usado para música, tanto em qua• others. Uma vez que a autoria discos deplaying. DVD de áudio available for hints thedos disc you’re Indicates tips and for making the task easier. to You should record requested information here and Audio Discs � Subtitles . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 retain this guide as adas permanent your purchase. WARNING: not install com this equipment a confined space lidade de som deDo multicanal resoluçãoinavançada, que mude, algumas opçõesrecord de telaof podem não estar DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 such as a book case or similar unit. Operação Recursos especiais do DVD. DVD de Áudio está bem próxima ao som master de gravação do artista, ou Manufactured under license Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, disponíveis no disco quefrom você esteja reproduzindo. Model No. ___________________________________ “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright 1992Serial No. ___________________________________ 1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. 23 2 CAUTION: Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater / V to select theplayback. time clock icon 2. 1. Press Press vDISPLAY during The time search and “-:--:--” appears. box shows the elapsed playing time. 3. Input the required start time in hours, minutes, and 2. Press v / V to select the time clock icon 2. at chosen your chosen end point. 1. Press PressA-B A-B again at your starting point. “A*” “A B” appears TV screen and the appears brieflybriefly on theon TVthe screen. repeat sequence begins. 2. Press A-B again at your chosen end point. Audio CD and MP3 / WMA Disc Features Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame n Audio CD or MP3/WMA DVD-V playback. The time search TIME SEARCH 1. Press DISPLAY during box shows the elapsed playing time. To start playing at any chosen time on the disc: Operação de DVD ou VCD (continuação) REP Playback You Introduction CD MP3 WMA um CD de Áudio ou DVD-V DVD-A PAUSE RepetirStill Faixa/Tudo/Desl. receiver canReproduzindo play MP3/WMA formatted Picture and Frame-by-Frame Pres RE MP3 / WMA disc compatibility with this player is Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 CD-ROM, CD-R, or CD-RW Você pode tocar uma ou PAUSE/STEP todas emremote um disco. repe Playback Playing andiscs. Audio CD or MP3/WMA 1.faixa Press during playback. 1. Press PAUSE/STEP on the control during Disco MP3/WMA limited as follows: Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . 23 Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 You . . . . . . . . . 23 1. Pressione a tecla REPEAT enquanto o disco estiver playback. DVD-V Playing Sampling (MP3), Pause . .DVD-A . .2.Advance . . To . . return . . .the . .to.picture .playback, . . . . frame-by-frame . . . press . . . . .PLAY, . . 23by Use . .an . de . . Audio . . . .pode . . . CD .reproduzir . . .• .or . . .MP3/WMA . . . . .frequency: . . . . . 4-5within 8 - 48� kHz ENTERPres orD Disc . . . Before . Este .Disc 23 reprodutor DVD discos CDsendo tocado. O ícone de repetição aparece na tela. pressing PAUSE/STEP repeatedly. within 32 48kHz (WMA) • repe � 1. Moving toPAUSE/STEP another .the . . .remote . . .again. . . control . . . . . during . 23 Playable Discs . . . . contendo . . . . . . . gravações . . . . . . . .em . . formato ......4 pressTrack PAUSE/STEP Disc .rt .an . .audio . . . . ROM, .CD 23 Press on CD-R ou CD-RW a DVD/CD menu appears on the play MP3/WMA within (MP3), • The receiver �2. Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . picture .this . . . player . frame-by-frame .PLAY. . .o. modo . . . . de . . 23by Precautions . . . . . .can . . . . . . . •. .Bit . . rate: . . . .formatted . . . . .8 .- .320kbps . 5 MP3 2. Pressione a tecla REPEAT para selecionar To exit still motion mode, press . . . . . . . . . 23 playback. Advance the / WMA disc compatibility with is ess v / V toMP3/WMA. select a track then press CD-R, 32 - 192kbps (WMA) •D recordings CD-ROM, The DVD/CD receiver MP3/WMA formatted � Search. . . .MOVING . . . . . . . . TO . . repeatedly. . ANOTHER . . . . . . . . . . .TRACK . . . 23 Notes onon Discs . . . can . . . .play . . .or . .CD-RW . . . . . .discs. . . . . . . . . 5 limited CD repetição desejado. . . . . . . . . . 23 pressing PAUSE/STEP as follows: • ER and playback MP3 / WMA disc compatibility with this player is • The player cannot read an MP3/WMA file that has CDAbout destarts. Áudio on CD-ROM, Note: Disc Operation . . 8. -. .48. .kHz . . . (MP3), . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Symbols . . . . . CD-R, . . . . . or . . CD-RW . . . . . . discs. . . . . . . . . 5 • JPEG D• Sampling frequency: within . . . . . . . . . recordings 23 • Faixa: repete a faixa atual. follows: a file extension other thanlimited “.mp3”as /2. “.wma”. MP3 WMA Toausing exit still motion mode, press PLAY. Uma vez inserido um CD de áudio, um Audio and MP3 / WMA Disc R When aCD DVD audio disc that includes pictures, Viewing JPEG disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 • CD and Rear Panel . . •. .CD-R . .menu . . physical . .aparecerá . . . . .format . . . 6 should within 32 48kHz (WMA) . . . . . . . Front . .Audio 24 Panel • • Sampling frequency: 8 - 48 (MP3), • Tudo: repete todaswithin as faixas dokHz disco. be ISO 9660 da TV. Pressione asCD teclas /. appears this operation some • an audio �32 Slide Show . Press . . be .(MP3), . .permitted . . . .(. . . .in. or . . >) . . .picture . briefly . . . . 24 Bit rate: within 8 - 320kbps Control . . a. .menu .para . record . . selecionar . . on . MP3 . .the . . /.aWMA 7 • files . . . . . . . Remote . na .Once 24tela you 1..may SKIP during playba Audio CDinsert Overview Features within - 48kHz (WMA) •. .If. you using software that 1. • Desligado(sem display): função desativada. Note: em seguida a tecla ou ENTER e asystem •D v audio / V to CD select aPLAY track then press Presspressione -rate: 192kbps (WMA) �segments. Still Picture . . to . .go . (MP3), . to . .the . . .next . . . track . . . . or . . to . . return . . . 24to the beginn . . . . . . . . faixa, .TV 24 screen. Once you insert an a menu appears ona the • 32 Bit within 8it- is 320kbps cannot create file (eg. Direct-CD) When using a DVD audio disc that includes pictures, • PLAY or ENTER and playback starts. • The player cannot read an MP3/WMA file that has � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 reprodução começa. of the current track. . . . . . . . Preparation . . TV 24 screen. Press v / V to select aimpossible track then to press - 192kbps (WMA) playback MP332/ WMA files. We this operation may DVD-V be permitted DVD-A in some picture • Note SLOW SCAN a file extension other than “.mp3” / “.wma”. � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 CDan MP3/WMA MP3 WMA The player cannot read file that has Creator, which . . . . . . . Connections . . PLAY 24 or ENTER Search -PAUSE Busca segments. . . . . and . . . playback . . . . . . . starts. . . recommend . . . . . . . . . that . . . you 8-13use••Easy-CD If2.y• 2. should Press be SKIP . twice briefly to go back to• the CD-R physical format ISO 9660 Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 a file extension other than “.mp3” / “.wma”. . . . . . . . . . 24 1. Press SLOW SCAN - track. m or M + during (Tr Pressione a tecla SKIP/SCAN durante a previous TV Connections . . . . . . . . . . .creates . . . . . .an . .ISO . . . 9660 . . . 8file system. If1. you record MP3 / PAUSE/STEP WMA files using 1. during Repeat Programmed Tracks. . .software . . .playback. . . . that . . . . . . . 25 DVD-V DVD-A CD-R physical format should be ISO 9660 • File names should have •a• maximum of 8Press letters Not . . . . . . . . . 25 SLOW SCAN playback. Optional Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 reprodução. cannot create a file system (eg. Direct-CD) it is 3. You can play any track by inputting its number. • If you record MP3 / WMA files using software and must incorporate an .mp3 or .wma Erasing aextension. Track from Programme List . .that .ENTER . . . . . 25 • If . . . . . . . . . 25 2.The To return to playback, press PLAY, or 3D DVD/CD Receiver will enter SLOW mode. Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . •. .They . . . .should . . . . . not . . .contain . 10 special impossible to / WMA files. We 1. Press SLOW SCAN - Direct-CD) m or List M cannot create atecla file system (eg. it+is letters such asPAUSE/STEP / MP3 (T Erasing the Complete Programme . during . . . . . . 25 repetidamente 2. Pressione aplayback SKIP/SCAN press again. t . . . . . . . . 25 Speaker System Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 recommend that you use Easy-CD Creator, which 2. Use the SLOW SCAN m or M + to select the impossible to playback We playback. ? * : “ < > l etc. V and press ENTER To3. pr CD MP3 DivX Disc Operation .MP3 . . . /. WMA .desejada: . . . .files. . . . x2, . . .x4, . . x8 . . . . . 26 para selecionar aREPEAT velocidade TRACK/ALL/OFF st to. select . . . . .a. folder, 25 � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 creates an ISO 9660 file system. required speed: t 1/16, t 1/8, t 1/4, or t 1/2 recommend that you Creator, folder • The total number of files onSpeaker the disc Setup should chan .be . . .use . Receiver . . Easy-CD . . . . will . . .enter . . . .SLOW . . which . . mode. . . . . CD . . 27 3D The DVD/CD . . . . .contents. . . . . 26 � Changing a channel of Transmitter avanço ou retrocesso. WMA MOVING TO ANOTHER TRACK • File names should have a maximum of 8 letters . . . . . . . . 11 T 1/16, T 1/8, T 1/4, or T 1/2 (backward), or creates an ISO 9660 file system. less than 650. V. to then press PLAY or Additional Information .SCAN . . . . .- .m . . .or . .M . . . +. . to . .select . . 28 the the f . . select . . . . .a. track 27 Setting 2. incorporate Use the SLOW must an busca, .mp3 or .wma extension. a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 • and To p (forward). MP3 File names should have a maximum of 3. Para sair do modo de a.letters tecla PLAY. WMA MP3 �/ WMA ayback starts. Last Condition Memory . .pressione .letters .t . such . 8.1/8, .on .t .a./1/4, . . . or . .t 28 1/2 audio You can play a. .track/all disc. . . . . . . . . .MP3 28 �/Assembling ThistoDVD/CD receiver11requires discs and recordings required speed: t 1/16, WMA • They should not contain special as chan and Connecting the Speakers and must incorporate an .mp3 or .wma extension. / para selecionar uma pasta, 1. Pressione as teclas Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3. To exit Slow Motion mode, press PLAY (N). to in>order to SKIP 3D . . . . . . . . .1. 28 Press T 1/16, T 1/8, Tas 1/4, T 1/2 The repea or(. 1. Press REPEAT when playing disc. 1. P *:“< l (backward), etc. v / V Connections. to select a folder, 1. Press orletters >) briefly during the MP3 / WMA � Speaker . .para . and . meet . ver . press . .ocertain . seu . .ENTER . conteúdo. . technical . . . . 12 standards • ?They should not contain special such / or aplayback em seguida pressione ENTER Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Pre-recorded icon appears. (forward). . . . . . . . . . 28 to see the folder contents. achieve optimal playback quality. to gooftofiles the next to return • The total number on thetrack discorshould be to the beginning audi 1 / 12 List CD AUDIO Track1 0:52:07 Program 1 / 12 Program • Offpress : does not(>) playonce repeatedly. • If you SKIP during Repeat Chapter (Track) playback, the repeat playback cancels. Track2 List Track3 Track1 Track4 Track2 Track5 Track3 Track6 Track4 Track7 Track5 Track8 Track6 Clear All Note: • When using a DVD audio disc that includes DVD-A this operation may be permitted in some REPEAT DVD-V pictures, picture segments. You can play a title/chapter/all/track/group on a disc. DVD-V Press REPEAT duringDVD-A playback to select a desired REPEAT repeat mode. You can play a title/chapter/all/track/group on a disc. DVD Video Discs Repeat Chapter/Title/Off Press REPEAT during- playback to select a desired • Chapter: repeat mode. repeats the current chapter. • Title: repeats the current title. Discs - Repeat Chapter/Title/Off •DVD Off : Video does not play repeatedly. • Chapter: repeats the current chapter. DVD Audio Discs Repeattitle. Track/Group/Off • Title: repeats the -current •• Track: repeats the current track. Off : does not play repeatedly. • Group: repeats the current Group. Discs Repeat Track/Group/Off •DVD Off : Audio does not play- repeatedly. • Track: repeats the current track. • Group: repeats the current Group. Note: Track7 PROGRAM Edit Track8 23 MUSIC 0:00:00 1 / 12 Note: PROGRAM Edit (Track) playback, the repeat playback cancels. 0:52:07 • If you press SKIP (>) once during Repeat Chapter 3D SURROUND DVD-V Clear All Track8 Clear All PROGRAM Edit Introduction Operation Introduction AUDIO CD Track7 Playback 1. Press PAUSE/STEP on the remote control during DVD-V DVD-A playback. Advance the picture frame-by-frame by pressing PAUSE/STEP repeatedly. 1. Press PAUSE/STEP on the remote control during 2. To exit still Advance motion mode, press frame-by-frame PLAY. playback. the picture by pressing PAUSE/STEP repeatedly. Note: 2. Tousing exit still motion mode, PLAY. pictures, When a DVD audio discpress that includes this operation may be permitted in some picture Note: segments. When using a DVD audio disc that includes pictures, this operation may DVD-V be permitted DVD-A in some picture SLOW SCAN segments. 1. Press SLOW SCAN - m or M + during SLOW SCAN DVD-V DVD-A playback. To produce a 3D surround effect that simulates multichannel audio from twoDVD-V stereo speakers (instead of 3D SURROUND the five+ speakers normally required for multi-channel To produce 3D surround effect that simulates multiaudio from aahome theater system). channel audio from two stereo speakers (instead of 1. DISPLAY normally during playback. thePress five+ speakers required for multi-channel audio theater 3 ora 4home to select thesystem). sound option. 2. Usefrom sound optionduring will beplayback. highlighted. 1. The Press DISPLAY Track6 The DVD/CD Receiver will enter SLOW mode. 3. selectthe “3D SUR”. or24tototoselect sound option. 2. Use Use 13or To turn off the 3D Surround effect, select “Normal”. The sound option will be highlighted. Track5 1. Press SLOW SCAN - m or M + during 2. Use the SLOW SCAN - m or M + to select the playback. required speed: t 1/16, t 1/8, t 1/4, or t 1/2 The DVD/CD Receiver will enter SLOW mode. (backward), or T 1/16, T 1/8, T 1/4, or T 1/2 2. Use the SLOW SCAN - m or M + to select the (forward). required speed: t 1/16, t 1/8, t 1/4, or t 1/2 3. To exit Slow Motion mode, PLAY Tpress 1/8, T 1/4, (N). or T 1/2 (backward), or T 1/16, 3. Use 1 or 2 to to select TIME SEARCH DVD-V “3D SUR”. To turn off the 3D Surround effect, select “Normal”. To start playing at any chosen time on the disc: Track4 DVD-A Program Track3 DVD-V 1 / 12 List Track2 (forward). Note: •3. When using a DVD audio discpress that includes pictures, To exit Slow Motion mode, PLAY (N). this operation may be permitted in some picture Note: segments. • When using a DVD audio disc that includes pictures, this operation be permitted DVD-A in some picture REPEAT A-BmayDVD-V segments. To repeat a sequence. 0:52:07 Track1 REPEAT A-B 1. Press A-B at your chosen starting point. “ A * ” on the TV screen. To appears repeat a briefly sequence. AUDIO CD Clear All 0:00:00 1 / 12 List PROGRAM Edit 0:00:00 Program 1 / 12 1-Music1 List 2-Music2 Program 3-Music3 1-Music1 4-Music4 2-Music2 5-Music5 3-Music3 6-Music6 4-Music4 7-Music7 5-Music5 6-Music6 DISPLAY Info 7-Music7 DISPLAY Info Clear All PROGRAM Edit Clear All PROGRAM Edit 2. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or > repeatedly to select the required speed: X2, X4, X16 or X100 3. To exit SEARCH mode, press PLAY. The receiver will now go into SEARCH mode. 1. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or > for about two seconds during playback. • DVD-A Operation Operation Use the b B v V buttons to select the title/chapter you want to view, then press ENTER to start. Press TITLE or DVD MENU to return to the menu screen. • Press SKIP . or > briefly during playback to select the next chapter/track or to return to the beginning of the current chapter/track. Press SKIP . twice briefly to step back to the previous chapter/track. To go directly to any chapter during DVD playback, press DISPLAY and press v / V to select the chapter/track icon. Then, input the chapter/track number or use b / B. Operation • DVD-A DISPLAY Info Use the 1 2 3 4 buttons to select an option you want, then press ENTER to view the option. 7-Music7 DVD-V 6-Music6 SEARCH 5-Music5 Notes: • If parental control is set and the disc is not within the rating settings you must input the password. (See “Lock Menu” on page 21). 3-Music3 4-Music4 Program • DVDs may have a region code. Your receiver does not play discs that have a region code different from your receiver. The region code for this receiver is 1 (one). 2-Music2 Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback DVD-V Picture DVD-A and Frame-by-Frame Still 1-Music1 Operation Operation ?A*compatibilidade : “ <Note: > l etc. dos discos MP3/WMA com este reprodu1. Press v / V to select Speaker Positioning. . . . . a. .folder, . . . . .and . . .press . . . . ENTER . . . . . . 13 2. To U with Radio . .track. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 DVDs are automatically set toOperation these standards. . Before . 2. .2.28 ofusing the current than 650. /asVfolder to .select then or Press para Pressione teclas toOperation seevthe The total number of onse the disc should be a desired •DVD When acomo DVD audio disc that includes pictures, . contents. ./ . . a. .track . . . .selecionar . . . press . . . . a.PLAY .faixa . . . dese14-19 • less 2.files Press REPEAT to 3. To exit Slow Motion mode, TP tor de é limitada segue: 1.ch There are many different types of recordable disc Presetting the radio stations . . . .press . .inselect . some . PLAY . . . .picture .(N). . . . 29repeat mod ENTER. Playback starts. . . . 2. 29 less than 650. this operation may be permitted v / V to select a track then press PLAY or Press jada Glossary e pressionefora Audio tecla PLAY ou ENTER. A reprodução This• DVD/CD Mini Stream & Surround the requires discs 2. receiver SKIP . briefly back the Freqüência de amostragem: de kHz e. 29 formats (including CD-R containing MP3 orPress WMA Listening to the radio . . dentro . twice .repeats . . .and . .8 .–recordings .48 . to .current . go . .(MP3), . . track . . to • Track: the Note: 3. UU . . . 29 2.au ENTER. segments. Mode . . . . Playback . . . MUSIC . . . . starts. . . . . . . . files) . . . . and . . . these . . . . .require . . . 14certain previous track. to meet technical standards in and order to começa. 32certain –Functions. kHz (WMA) This DVD/CD receiver recordings pre-existing a.disc. Other . .requires .All: . . .repeats .discs . . . .disc .all. .the . . tracks . includes . . . . on . . .pictures, 30 TT •48 When using a. •DVD audio that . . . 29 achieve optimal playback •standards quality. Pre-recorded Sound Mode . .MUSIC . . . . . . . . . . conditions . . . . . . . .(see . . . .above) . . . 14to ensure to meet certain technical in order to compatible display): 1. this operation may be permitted in picture Setting . DVD-V . .320 . .track . .DVD-A . .by . .inputting .does . e.some . .not .192 .play . kbps . .repeatedly. 30 3.Timer You can play number. • Sleep Taxa de bit: dentro de 32Off(No –any kbps (MP3), 32 –. its . . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 DVDs REPEAT A-B areoptimal automatically set to these standards. 3. U achieve playback Pre-recorded playback. segments. Dimmer . .different . . . . . .types .quality. . . . of . . recordable . . . . . . . . disc . . . . . . . . . 30 TIM (WMA) . . . . . . . . . 30 are many Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19 There Note: T DVDs are automatically set to these standards. To repeat a sequence. Mute . . . .is.CD-R . . . .TRACK/ALL/OFF . . . . . . . . MP3 . . . . or . . . . . .CD . . . . . MP3 . 30 triangle . . . . . . . . . 30 � General REPEAT 2. formats (including containing •permission Oare reprodutor não A-B consegue lerofSKIP um arquivo MP3/WMA If you press (>) WMA once duringque Repeat Track To playb Operation . . . . . Customers . . . . . . . . . should . . . . . .note 16 that General Features st There many different types recordable disc DVD-V DVD-A REPEAT nce Using the Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 such as track required in order to download MP3 / WMA files ” 1. Press A-B at your chosen starting point. “ A .a .file . of. containing . . . . . 30information and these require certain pre-existing * the repeat playback cancels. tenha outra extensão que não sejaMP3 “.mp3” “.wma”. � Language . . . . . . . .for . . . instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 files) WMA formats (including CD-R containing or/ WMA TIM About the symbols cing) 1. P by pressing DISPLAY. Selecting the has Source . TV . . .screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 and music from the Internet. Our company appears briefly on the .see . . the . . .information . . . 30 � Display (see above) tocertain ensure compatible To repeat aInput sequence. files) and these require pre-existing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 conditions g the Year, Comment Album, ] Note: b • O formato físico do CD-R deve ser padrão ISO 9660. XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 no right to grant such permission. Permission You can playtoaensure track/allcompatible on a disc. To s . . . . . . . . . 30 �Indicates • Unless conditions (see above) Audio. . hazards . . . .stated . . .likely . .otherwise, . . to . . cause . . . .all. harm .operations . . . .to. .the . .described .unit 17 playback. 2. Press A-B again at your chosen end point. ” 1. Press should always bemay sought from thevocê copyright 2. WMA pro .Press . . .A-B . REPEAT .SEARCH . at . .your . MP3/WMA . . when .chosen . . . CD . com . starting . . software . MP3 . . disc. . point. . . que . The . .“ A . .*30 nformation, TAG” on theFeatures Se gravou arquivos . . . . . . . .“NO .ID3 30ID3 General itself orappear other material damage. 1. playing use the remote control. be• XTS 1. PP playback. � Lock (Parental Control) . owner. . . .Some . . . . features . . . . . . . . 18alsoCustomers “A B” appears briefly the TV and repeat the TAG should note that isascreen deo input source appears briefly onpermission theon TV screen. a . . . . . . . . .•30 não cria um arquivo de sistema (por exemplo, Direct-CD) CK icon appears. available on the Setup menu. b When playing a file containing information such as track repeat sequence begins. �TAG Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 required in order to note download MP3 / (WMA ver. 1. Press SCAN m or M) during playback. ID3otas: Customers should thatatpermission isfiles Indicates of DISPLAY. this unit. 3. In Reference Note: AIN OR 2. Press A-B again your chosen end point. é impossível a sua reprodução. Recomenda-se utilizar o titles, you canspecial see the operating information features by pressing and musicin2. from the Internet. Our company hasrepeat mode. 2. P • When playing a file containing information such as track Press REPEAT to select a desired required order to download MP3 / WMA files plicable) and select MOVING TO ANOTHER TITLE/GROUP 3. Press A-B again to cancel. • Unless otherwise, 2. Press M “A B”such appears [ Title, Artist, Album,stated Year, Comment ] all operations described Easy-Cd Creator, que cria dethe Language Code List . . briefly .arquivos . .SCAN . . on . .Permission .(m .sistema . TV . or . .screen .no . ).padrão .repeatedly . and . . . the 31 to select sta right to grant permission. titles, youestiver cantips see information by pressing DISPLAY. • Se você nathe lista de arquivos MP3/WMA eeasier. deseja no and music from thesequence Internet. Our company has backward or forwa e DVD/CDOperation Indicates hints for making the task n use theand remote control. Some features may alsoshould be speed: repeat DVD-V DVD-A •be Track: ISO 9660. Country Code List .repeats . required . .from . .begins. .the .the . current . .copyright . . .X2, .track . .X4, . . .X8 . . . . . 31 Title, Artist, Album, Year,“NO Comment ] appear deo always sought .file . .input . . on . .source . .•31 If[ there isàno information, ID3 as TAG” onpara the 3. yI space no right to grant such permission. Permission retornar lista das pastas, use teclas/ list the MUSIC menu and want to DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . menu. . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 on the Setup • All: repeats all disc. Troubleshooting .3.. .again .To.devem .exit . to .the .SEARCH .the .tracks .nocopyright . .máximo . on .mode, . .a.oito . .press .caracte. . 32-33 display. available er. owner. . . . . list, . . .use . Manufactured . •the 31 PLAY. 3. Press A-B cancel. • Os nomes dos arquivos ter under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, s should always be sought from If there is no information, “NO ID3 TAG” appear on the When a disc has more than one title/group, you can v / V to highlight and Folder selecionar o ícone e pressione a tecla ENTER. e disc tray andPlaying a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 • Off(No does 4. P Specifications . . . .display): . . .mp3 . . . .ou . ..wma. . . not . . . play . . . .repeatedly. . . . . . . . 34 “Pro Logic”,MOVING and the symbol are trademarks of Dolby .. . . . . .and . 32-33 display. select n TO ANOTHER TITLE/GROUP res e conter a extensão move todouble-D another title/group. Press DISPLAY while owner. y,icable) with the Laboratories. General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22 s Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright 1992Pressione DVD MENU Para irthen à próxima página. number (0-9) . . . . . . . •. 34 e. DVD/CD y playback is stopped the appropriate Note: DVD-Vto another DVD-A �Dolby Moving TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20 • Eles não devem conter caracteres especiais como / ? * ; “ < ENU to move1997 to the next page. Laboratories. All rights reserved. orcom use b / B toMP3/WMA move to another title/group. If you press SKIP (>) once during Repeat Track playback, 4. P •Tip: Num CD arquivos e JPEG você pode � Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . 20 > ! etc. eMP3/WMA tray. Playback • If you are in a file list on the MUSIC menu and want to Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. can and JPEG you can switch When a disc has more than one title/group, you Tip: You can play any the repeat playback cancels. disc not traystart, and s alternar entre eles. Pressione a.by tecla e. a.number � Slow Motion. .5,956,674, . .use . . the .title . .v .inputting .to. TITLE . . .5,978,762 . .its .palavra .and .and . 20while • A quantidade does USTITLE Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,974,380, d JPEG. Press MUSIC or /. V highlight to the list, total de arquivos em um CD deve ser menor move to title/group. Press DISPLAY while • return If worldwide youand are in Folder apatents fileanother list on the MUSIC menu and want playback is stopped. with the issued and pending. “DTS” andto“DTS � is Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20 on top of theother menu highlighted. MÚSICA ou FOTO no topo do menu é selecionada. press ENTER. stopped then the number (0-9) que 999. Digital Surround” are is registered trademarks of Digital Theater return toplayback the Folder list, use the v/V to appropriate highlight and � Search. .b . . /. B . 1996, .to. .move . .2000 . . . Digital . another . . . .Theater . . . . . Systems, . . . . . 20 might appearSystems, Inc. Copyright CD MP3 WMA press ENTER. SEARCH or use • Press DVD MENU to move to thetonext page. title/group. Pause Esse aparelho de DVD requer discos e gravações que se e tray. Playback Inc. All rights reserved. � Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 MOVING TO ANOTHER CHAPTER/TRACK owner’s You can play any title bynext inputting its number while CD Audio CD MP3 / WMA Disc REPEAT A-B Press DVD MENU to. .move toand the page. enquadrem em certosSCAN padrões técnicos de) during qualidade a fim does not start, 1. Pressione PAUSE/STEP durante a reprodução. •• On aRepeat CD with MP3/WMA and JPEG you can switch 1. Press ( m or M playback. � A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 uld the playback isDVD-A stopped. MP3/WMADVD-V and JPEG. de atingir uma excelente qualidade de reprodução. DVDs On a retomar CDON with MP3/WMA � Time Search . .Press . . and . .TITLE .JPEG . . . and . you . . MUSIC .can . . .switch . or . . . . . . 21 e locaFeatures 1.2. ToPress repeat a sequence during disc playback press OTES 2.• PHOTO Para a reprodução, pressione PAUSE/STEP SCAN ( m or M ) repeatedly to select the word COPYRIGHTS: on top of the menu is highlighted. sãoatautomaticamente ajustados para The esses MP3/WMA and Press TITLE When aJPEG. title more than or pré-gravados a ghtthe appear ect title/chapter � Marker Search . on . ., a.broadcast, .disc . . . has . .and .show . .MUSIC . ,. broadcast . . .or.one . . . chapter . 21 It isnovamente forbidden by law to copy A-B your chosen Repeat icon required speed: X2,starting X4, X8point. backward or forward. PHOTO word on top of the menu is highlighted. disc has more than one track, you can move to padrões. Existem vários tipos de diferentes formatos de discos MOVING TO ANOTHER CHAPTER/TRACK TER to start. via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without edures � Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 and “A” appear on the menu screen. chapter/track regraváveis CD-R contendo arquivos ou WMA) 3. (incluindo To exit SEARCH mode, press MP3 PLAY. eturn to the permission. menu ous radiMudando de Faixa DVD-V DVD-A CD. . . . MP3 PAUSE Special another DVD Features .as . .follows: . . . WMA . . . . . . . . . . 22 2. Press A-B again at your chosen endacima) point.para The This product• features the copy protection function developed que requerem certas condições pré-existentes (veja 28 Press SKIP or to � Title Menu . .SKIP . . . .(. . . . .ou . .> . . . )briefly . brevemente . . . . during . . . . . playback . 22 1. Pressione a tecla Repeat icon and “A-B” appear on the menu by Macrovision. Copy protection signals recorded on some 1.select Press PAUSE/STEP during playback. When a title on a disc has are more than one chapter ct the title/chapter open to theor agarantir a compatibilidade de reprodução. � Disc Menu . . the . . .next . . . chapter/track . . . . . . . . . . or . . to . . return . . . . 22 List within . . . .an .. ser ...... us ...... may be ..... f .electric durantedisc arecording reprodução irone àthe próxima faixa ou move retornar screen, and the27 sequence begins to play andpara playing pictures ofcan these discsto has more than track, you TER OT to start.discs.�When of the current chapter/track. 2.beginning To return playback, press Changing the Audio Language . . . . PLAY, . . . . .ENTER . . 22 or O24usuário deve notar que é necessária a permissão para on a VCR, picture noise will to appear. ao início da faixa atual. another chapter/track as follows: repeatedly. eturn to the menu elect an option you • incorporates Press . twice briefly press PAUSE/STEP again. � Changing theSKIP Audio Channel . . . .technology . to . .step . . . back . that . 22to the baixar arquivos MP3 / WMA e músicas na Internet. Nossa This product copyright protection w the option.2. Pressione • byaPress or toempresa3.não previous duas tecla Totem exitcomo the sequence return toa normal play, ater is protected method other � Subtitles . . .SKIP .claims . chapter/track. . .. . of . .certain ..> . . vezes .U.S. .briefly . . patents .rapidamente . .during . . and . . .playback . 22 garantir taland permissão, qual deve select the next chapter/track or to return toplayback, the 24 press A-B again. The Repeat icon disappears from , such intellectual rights owned by Macrovision Corporation •faixa To go directly to any chapter during DVD para irAudio àproperty anterior. CD DVD Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 ser obtida diretamente do detentor do direito autoral. MOVING TO ANOTHER TRACK beginning of the current chapter/track. the menu screen. and other rights press owners. Use of this copyright tech- the DISPLAY and press vprotection / V to select 27 isc is not within lect an option 3. you Vocêmust pode tocar qualquer faixa, pressionando ochapter/track seu MP3 WMA • bePress SKIP . twice briefly tothe step backisto the nology authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and chapter/track icon. Then, input the 27 the password. option. intended for respectivo. home and other limited uses only unless previous chapter/track. número number or use b / viewing B. ricted to 3D SURROUND CD 1. Press SKIP (. Corporation. or >) briefly during playback otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse • To go directly to any chapter during DVD playback, our receiverengineering does to go to the next DVD-A track or to return to the beginning or press disassembly is prohibited. DVD-V DISPLAY and press v / V to select the To produce a 3D surround effect that simulates multisc is not within SEARCH 24from code different of the current track. chapter/track icon. Then, input the chapter/track channel audio from two stereo speakers (instead of 1. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or > for about rthe thispassword. receiver is 1 number or use b / B. SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located on the back the five+ speakers normally required for multi-channel 2.two Press SKIPduring . twice briefly to go back to the seconds playback. DVD-V When a title on a disc has more than one chapter or a disc has more than one track, you can move to another chapter/track as follows: DVD-V In some cases, the disc menu might appear instead: 4. Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the tray. Playback starts automatically. If playback does not start, press PLAY. load your chosen disc in the tray, with the playback side down. DVD-A MOVING TO ANOTHER CHAPTER/TRACK move to another title/group. Press DISPLAY while playback is stopped then the appropriate number (0-9) or use b / B to move to another title/group. You can play any title by inputting its number while playback is stopped. of this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available 28 >>> (Fast), >> (Normal), and > (Slow). Use v V b B to highlight the Speed. Then, use b / B to select the option you want to use then press ENTER. • On a disc with MP3/WMA and JPEG you can switch MP3/WMA and JPEG. Press TITLE and MUSIC or PHOTO word on top of the menu is highlighted. • Press RETURN, information of file is hidden. JPEG disc com limited as follo • Depending up files, it could t receiver to rea see an on-scr some of the fi JPEG Viewing a JPEG Disc ZOOM Introduction resolution of t JPEG Zoom SLIDE SHOW JPEG Viewing ZOOM as 2760 x 204 Audio CD and Disc no . . controle . . . . . . remoto, . . . . . . . 23 Safety Precautions . . . . .you . .a.can .JPEG . .view . . . Kodak . . Disc . . . . . . . . . Use 2 zoom Introduction to Ao enlarge theMP3/WMA photo image. Using this DVD/CD receiver pressionar a tecla ZOOM Usando este aparelho de DVD você pode visualizar an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc .. .. .. .. •.. 23 Table ofPrecautions Contents . .. this .. ..with .. DVD/CD .. ..JPEG .. .. .. .. .files. .. .. .. .. .. ..you .. .. ..can .. .. ..view .. .. (see 32Kodak Usepage v VPlaying bB to highlight the (Slide Show) then Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . 23 Safety .receiver 25) Use zoom to enlarge the photo image. PICTURE CDs and discs Using The total num a� palavra “. ZOOM ON” aparecerá no canto imagens de fotos e.discos JPEG.. 4-5 press ENTER. Pause . . . 25) . .CD . . .and . . .MP3/WMA . . . . . . . . .Disc . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 Before . . .CDs . . .Kodak . .. ..com . .. ..arquivos . .. .. ..JPEG Playing anpage Audio 23 Table ofUse Contents .. .. .. .. ..CDs . .. .. .and .discs .. .with .. .. .. .. .files. ..3 (see PICTURE should be less direito superior da tela. 1.Insira Insert a disc and close the tray. The PHOTO menu 1.Before um disco e feche a bandeja. O PHOTO Menu � Playable . TO 4 ROTATE � Moving Pause .to. .another . . .JPEG . . . Track . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 Use Discs . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4-5 PICTURE appears on the TV screen. • Some discs m 1. Insert a disc and close the tray. The PHOTO menu JPEG (Menu de Foto) � Track/All/Off. . . . ..você .. .. ..JPEG ..pode .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 Precautions .aparece . .. .. .. .. .na .. .. .da .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54STILL PICTURE Utilizando as � Repeat Moving to teclas another Track 23 Playable Discs .tela . .. ..TV. TO ROTATE PICTURE JPEG Viewing a. .. .JPEG Press v / VZOOM during showing different recor appears on the TVDisc screen. � . . . a. .picture . . . . .toEssa .. .rotate .. .. função .. ..the .. .. .. .varia .. .. .. da .. .. .. .. .. 23 Notes on Discs � Search. Repeato modo Track/All/Off. . . 23 Precautions . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 551. Press PAUSE/STEP controlar ZOOM. PHOTO slide show. a picture to rotate the clockwise or Operation counter Press v / during Vclockwise. during showing JPEG Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 About .. .. .. .. .. .. .receiver .. .. .. .you .. .. .. picture 55 • Ensure that a Use zoom to enlarge the photo image. � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Notes Symbols on Discs . .. ..PHOTO . .. .. .can . .. .. .view . .. .. ..Kodak Using this..DVD/CD seguinte forma: The player will now go into PAUSE mode. picture clockwise JPEG Viewing aOperation JPEG disc. ..or.. ..counter .. .. .. .. .. .clockwise. extensions wh Front Panel and Rear Panel .. .. ..JPEG .. .. .. .. files. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. TO 65 LISTEN Viewing (see page 25) ZOOM JPEG Disc . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 24 About Symbols .CDs . .a . and .JPEG . . discs . .. .. .. .with .Disc PICTURE TO MP3/WMA MUSIC 2. To return to the slide show, press PLAY or press JPEG Viewing aPanel JPEG 025 PCT; 050 PCT; ZOOM � Slide Show . disc . . .100 .. .. ..PCT; .. .. .. ..150 .. .. ..PCT .. .. .. .e. ..200 .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 Remote Control Overview . . .. .. .. .. .Disc .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76 Viewing aagain. JPEG 24 Front Panel and Rear . .. ..tray. TO LISTEN TO MP3/WMA MUSIC • If the files hav PAUSE/STEP 1. Insert a disc and close the The PHOTO menu Use zoom to enlarge the Using this DVD/CD receiver you can view KodakWATCHING PICTURE PCT. � Picture .. .JPEG .. .. photo .. .. .. .. ..image. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 � Still Slide Show . ..the 24 TO ROTATE PICTURE Remote Control Overview . . screen. . . . .you . . .can . . .view .......7 please renam Use zoom to enlarge photo JPEG image. Using this DVD/CD receiver appears onand the .discs TV (see page 25) JPEG PICTURE CDs with JPEG files. Kodak WATCHING PICTURE � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 You can display filesPicture while listening MP3/WMA � Still . .showing . uma . . to . .vez .a. picture .a .tecla . . . to .ZOOM . rotate . . . .a.the . . . . 24 Preparation (see page 25)during Pressionando mais PICTURE CDs and discs with JPEG files. JPEG Press vANOTHER /V MOVING TO FILE • File names wi � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 music files picture recorded on the same disc. You can display files 1. Insert menu � JPEG Moving to another file“while .JPEG . . listening . . . . no . . to .canto . MP3/WMA . . . . . . 24 Viewing Disc Connections . . .a . a. JPEG .disc . . .and .PHOTO . . close . . . . the . . .tray. . . . The . . . PHOTO . . . 8-13 clockwise or counter clockwise. Preparation ZOOM indicação “ ZOOM OFF aparecerá TO ROTATE PICTURE able to be rea 1. appears Insert a disc and the tray. The PHOTO menu Programmed Playback .. .. ..on .. .. the .JPEG .. ..same .. .. .. ..disc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 music files recorded on the TVclose screen. �(. To rotate picture. . 24 Press SKIP or >) or cursor (b or B) once TO ROTATE PICTURE TV Connections . . 1. 8 Insert thedireito Connections . . . . . ..on .. .. the .. .. ..TV .. .. screen. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 8-13 da though the file disc containing the two types file appears Repeat Tracks. .of .next .. ..to..in ..rotate .. .. .. ..the .. .. .. .. .. 25 UseProgrammed zoom toLISTEN the photo image. Press venlarge /Programmed V tela. during showing a. .the picture Using vthis DVD/CD receiver you can view Kodak Playback . . . . . . 25 TO TO MP3/WMA MUSIC 2. Press / V to select a folder, and press ENTER. while viewing a picture to advance to or Optional Equipment .. .. .. .. .. 98 the player. 2. Pressione / para Windows Exp TV Connections .selecionar . Connections . .PHOTO . with . . . uma .JPEG . . .pasta . .files. . .. ..e,.. .em . .. ..segui1. the disc containing the two in Press /aInsert VTrack during showing a picture to rotate (see page 25)v Erasing from Programme List .. .types .. .the .. .of .. .file 25 picture clockwise or counter clockwise. PICTURE CDs and discs Este indica que o modo ZOOM está desativado. Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . 25 A list of files in the folder appears. previous file. 2. Press v / V to select a folder, and press ENTER. PHOTO Aerial Connections . .Connections . . . Uma . . . .lista . . . de .. .. arquivos .. .. .. .. .. .. da .. .. .. 10 JPEG Optional Equipment . 2.9 Press TITLE WATCHING PICTURE picture or counter clockwise. theComplete player. da, pressione aatecla ENTER. toclockwise display PHOTO menu. Erasing the Programme List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 Erasing a Track from Programme List 25 If you are in file list and want to return to the A list of files in the folder appears. 1. aparece. Insert a disc and Speaker System Connection . .. .. .lista .The .PHOTO Aerial Connections .close . . . . the . . uma .tray. .. .. .de .. ..arquivos .. .. .. ..menu .11-12 . e. 10 TODivX TO MP3/WMA ithin an pasta Se list, você visualiza Press TITLE to PHOTO Operation . while .file. .JPEG . display . listening . . . . MUSIC . . to . .List . . menu. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26 You can display files MP3/WMA PICTURE If. .you list and want theROTATE Erasing the Complete Programme 25 on the. to previous Folder use the v /Disc VLISTEN to2.select aTO photo 3. to Press appears on the TV � Transmitter. . . screen. .are . . in .v.a./ .file .V.. buttons .return . 11 TO LISTEN TO MP3/WMA MUSIC Speaker Connection .. .. .. .. .. .. .. as .. .. teclas . .. 11-12 er music files recorded Speaker Setup . .PICTURE .v. /. V..on . .picture .select .photo .. .. .. ..file. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27 desejar vertoaSystem lista anterior de pastas, pressione DivX Disc Operation .the . .. .same . .JPEG . .to .a.. rotate .disc. 26 v / V buttonsPress on the previous Folder list, use the 3. Press remote highlight and press ENTER. v /select V during showing a.to the � a channel s B WATCHING to icon then press ENTER. 4. UseAdditional � Changing Transmitter. .PHOTO. . . . . .of. Transmitter . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11 11 WATCHING Information .. .. .. ..JPEG ..JPEG .. .. .. ..com .. .. .. .este .. .. .. .. .. 28 / no controle remoto para destacar e. pressione Speaker Setup . .PICTURE . de . . while . clockwise. . will . .. .. .. reprodu27 remote to highlight and press ENTER. picture clockwise or counter A compatibilidade discos ay be JPEG � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Playback starts. The playback continue until You can display files listening to MP3/WMA Viewing a JPEG Disc B to select icon then press ENTER. 4. Use ZOOM 1. Insert the disc containing the two types of file in � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11 3.ENTER. If you want to view press and Last Condition Memory .. .. .. .. .. ..to.. ..MP3/WMA .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 2. Press v a/ particular VConnecting to selectfile, a folder, press ENTER. Additional Information . . .The .listening 28 You can display files while electric STOP is pressed. tor se limita como segue: music files recorded on the same disc. Playback starts. playback will continue until � Assembling and to the Speakers 11 the player. 30 � Setting alist Transmitter . . appears. .a .particular . . or . . PLAY. . . .file, . . .press 11 3.IDof Ifaoffiles you want tofolder view v Using /V to this highlight file and press ENTER Screen Saver . the .Memory . . photo . . .the . image. ..MUSIC .. .. .. .. .disc. ADVD/CD in the UseLISTEN zoom tofiles enlarge TO TO MP3/WMA Last Condition . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 music recorded on same receiver STOP is pressed. � Connections. . .you . . .can . . the .view .and .pressione . Kodak .press . . . . . 12 • Controlling Dependendo doTV tamanho de arquivos � Speaker Assembling and Connecting Speakers 3. SeViewing você deseja ver um em 2. Insert Press TITLE to display PHOTO theIffile proceeding starts. v / arquivo V to highlight atofile PLAY. the .. .. JPEG .. .. .e ..do .. .. número .two .. ..menu. .types you are indiscs a file list particular, and want to return ENTER to 11 the (see page 25)Saver Tip: or PICTURE CDs and with JPEG files. Screen . . . . . . . .. .. .. ..of.. .file . .. ..in.. .. .. 28 28 1. the disc containing the Speaker Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 WATCHING PICTURE � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2. Press v / V to select a folder, and press ENTER. JPEG, pode demorar um pouco para que o aparelho viewing a file, you can press STOP to move iangle Viewing the file proceeding starts. asWhile teclas / para destacar o arquivo e pressione 1. Insert the disc containing the two types of file in Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 / V press buttons on previous list, use the vand v the / V to select file. 3. Press Tothe listen toControlling only the desired music Tip: the player. TV . . .watching .a.photo . . . . picture, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 2. APress /.Folder V to ENTER. Before Operation .v .files .(PHOTO .close . .the .select . ..the . .menu). .a.atray. . .file, .folder, .appears. .The . .. .. PHOTO . .. .. press . .. .14-19 1. Insert a disc and menu list of in folder ce of Speaker Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 to the previous menu While viewing you can STOP to move the player. You can display files while listening to MP3/WMA leia o conteúdo do disco. Se você não visualizar ENTERthe ou PLAY. Aofdemonstração dosand slides inicia a Presetting theRadio radio stations .. .. ..music .. .. .. .. ..watching .. .. .. .. .. .. picture, .. .. 29 programmed desired tracks from the remote to highlight press ENTER. Towith listen to desired Operation .the .icon .JPEG . . then .“MUSIC” 29 TO ROTATE PICTURE list files in.file 2. Press toonly display PHOTO menu. About symbols 4. the Use BTITLE to select press ENTER. ing) Mini Operation Glossary for Stream Surround appears on the screen. IfAyou are list want to the music Before .to .Audio .inTV . a.for .the . instructions . folder . .and .& . .appears. . .(PHOTO . .to. return . . . menu). . 14-19 the previous menu files recorded onde the same disc. tothe the radio .desired . .PHOTO . um . ..tracks ..longo ..will ..menu. .. ..continue .. .. .. the . . . de .. .. .. .. 29 .após menu and Listening then proceed as above programmed the from “MUSIC” 2. Press TITLE to display nenhum menu tela período partir do.arquivo se Presetting radio stations 29 and the the starts. The Tips: Mode .3.. previous .IfIf. you . selecionado, . for . are . .Audio .in. to .a .file .list, . list . a.use .opção .& .the .want . velocidade . ./ .to . return . .press . .não .to. on 14 /Playback V during showing a aplayback picture to rotate the. . .until v V buttons the Press3.v Press Folder v / V to select photo file. Mini Glossary Stream Surround you want view a particular file, Other Functions. . then . select .arquivos . .proceed .. .a. ..photo ..podem .. .as ..above .. .ser ...muito .. .. .. .. .grandes . . . . 30 menu and Indicates hazards likely to cause harm to the unit Listening tocontaining the radio . .. file. . .. file tempo, alguns dos desativada. Folder use the1.picture vis /or Vcounter to 3. Press STOP pressed. • estiver Press MENU to move to clockwise clockwise. Insert the disc the two types of in . . . . . 29 Sound Mode .. .. to ..to .PHOTO .highlight .. ..next .. ..list, ..page. .. ..and ..the .. ..press .v .. .. .. .. .. on 14 Mode . remote .previous .highlight .the . ../..V.. .ENTER. .buttons 14PLAY. v. /./Tips: a.. ..file and press ENTER or Sleep Timer Setting .. .. .arquivos .. ..JPEG .. .. .ENTER. .. .. .. menos .. .. .. .. 30 itself or. .visualiza other damage. B atoresolução select 4. Use 2. Press v VV to a folder, and press ENTER. Other Functions. . . . . .dos . icon . .then . .. .. ..press . .. ..para 30 •material Press MENU tovocê move the next page. remote toselect highlight and press ENTER. –player. reduza um arquivo, pode pressionar the4. • Enquanto There are Mode three Slide Speed options :to On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Viewing the file proceeding starts. B to select icon then press ENTER. Use CK Playback A list ofIf (Normal), files in the folder appears. Dimmer .TO . .starts. .Setting . .with . .The . this .. ..playback .. .player .. .. .. .will .. .. .. .. .. .. .until .. .. .. 30 Tip: JPEG disc compatibility is Sleep Timer . .2048 .MUSIC . .. ..continue . ..outro 30 TO LISTEN MP3/WMA 3. >> you want to view a.Slide particular file, press >>> (Fast), and >three (Slow). • There are Speed options : de 2M pixels, como 2760 x pixels e grave STOP para ir ao menu anterior (PHOTO Menu). Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19 Playback starts. The playback will continue until While viewing a file, you can press STOP to move 2. Press TITLE to display PHOTO menu. On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Indicates special operating features of this unit. N OR STOP pressed. IfVyou are in awant file the list and want to use return to the To listen picture, . JPEG . .to .. ..disc .. .the .. .. .. .. .. ..music . . . .with .watching . . this . . . .player . . . . .is. 30 3. Bv Iftoyou to view a Then, particular file, press limited asMute follows: Dimmer .isis.. only . .. .compatibility . desired b /ENTER to Use�vGeneral b highlight Speed. V.>>> to.previous file (Fast), and JPEG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . ..v.(PHOTO .and . ..press .B..on . .or16PLAY. STOP pressed. to/ Operation the menu disco. WATCHING PICTURE Initial .highlight .list, . to. use ..use ..>> ..aathen ..(Normal), .file ../ .V .. .. ..>menu). ..(Slow). .ENTER .. ..the 16-19 buttons previous the programmed the v / .the Vlimited afollows: file. 3. Using Headphone .. .. ..the .. .. ..“MUSIC” .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 v /Folder VUse towant highlight and press or use PLAY. select theSettings option you press ENTER. Mute . to .the . select . size . .as . desired .and . photo . .number .Jack .tracks . . . .of . .from . JPEG 30 v V b B to highlight the Speed. Then, b / Press B to Viewing the file proceeding starts. Indicates tips and hints for making the task easier. Dicas: • Depending upon � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Tip: General Operation .proceeding .and . .you .press . want .can . .starts. .to. use . . .then . . . press . . 16ENTER. menu and then proceed as above • On a� disc withWhile MP3/WMA and JPEG you switch remote to highlight ENTER. Viewing thethe filea.option You display files while listening to Selecting the Input Source .. ..MP3/WMA ... .. .. .num .. ..disco .. .. .. .. deve .. .. .. 30 select •it can O número total de arquivos e.DVD/CD pastas Using the Headphone Jack . ..number 30 viewing file, you can press STOP to move Tip: Tips: pace B to select icon then press ENTER. 4. Use files, could take a long time for the • Depending upon the size and of JPEG To listen to only the desired music watching picture, � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 � Language .viewing . Press .disc .página . TITLE .with .file, . MP3/WMA .próxima. .you . . MUSIC .can . . and .press . or. JPEG . . STOP . . you . . .to 16move MP3/WMA and JPEG. and • MENU On a. à can switch • Pressione DVD MENU While aDolby music files recorded on the samewill disc. XTS (Excellent True Sound) ..continue .. ..watching .. .. .. ..until .. .. ..picture, . .. .. .. .. .. 30 to menu (PHOTO menu). Selecting the Input Source 30 Manufactured license from •under Press to to.Laboratories. the next page. To to only desired Playback starts. The playback ser menor quer 650. tolisten read the disc’s contents. If.long you don’t files, itthe could take amusic time the. DVD/CD programmed the desired tracks from thefor “MUSIC” . the .previous . view .amove .menu . ..“Dolby”, . .. ..and . MUSIC . 17 receiver PHOTO wordwant on top 3.�� Audio. IfDisplay you ..the .. to .MP3/WMA .of ..the .. ..symbol .menu ..particular .and .. is ..are .highlighted. ..(PHOTO .. ..file, ..Press .. ..press .. .TITLE .. 16-17 JPEG. or to previous menu). “Pro Logic”, and the double-D trademarks of. Dolby XTS pro .receiver .display . the . . .True .after . .read .Sound) . .tracks . . .disc’s ..minutes, .. .. .. contents. ..the .. .. .“MUSIC” .. .. ..If.. .you XTS (Excellent . . .. .. .don’t . 30 30 programmed desired from STOP is pressed. • There are three Slide Speed options : : •Laboratories. quatro opções de velocidade de Slide see an on-screen several to the . menu and then proceed as above • Existem Press RETURN, information of file is hidden. � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 the thediscos disc containing theincompatíveis two types of file inis /Tips: V to.highlight press ENTER or �v Audio. . . PHOTO . . Unpublished . . a. word .file . . and .on . works. .top . . of . .Copyright . . menu . . . . is . highlighted. . PLAY. . . . 17 1. • Insert Confidential 1992Alguns podem ser em função do JPEG disc compatibility with this player and.may then above 2. Press /.(Normal) V a.(Lento). XTS pro . . .an .proceed .on-screen . . .large . .as . .— . .reduce . . .. .after . the . . several . . . . . .minutes, . . . 30 >>> >> > ofmenu the files be too see display >>> (Rápido), >> e. >.reserved. Use Press RETURN, General Features � Others .v .•(Fast), .file .to . proceeding .select . (Normal), .move .folder, ..information .and .. next .. and .. .(Slow). .. press .as .. .teclas .. .ENTER. .. .. .. 19 Tips: 1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights Viewing the starts. the player. � Lock (Parental Control) .the . page. .of .file .is.. hidden. 18 some Press MENU to to the Tip: limited asgravação follows:toou formato damay condição dos mesmos. A••list of files in B the folder appears. Reference to Use vMENU V b highlight Speed. Then, use b / B resolution of thede JPEG less than 2Mtoo pixels some files of the files be large — reduce the JPEG Press to.to.move to the next page. viewing aoption file, you can press STOP to move SLIDE SHOW para destacar Velocidade (Speed). Em � While Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. 2. Press TITLE to display PHOTO menu. To listen to only the desired music watching picture, • There are three Slide Speed options : select the you want to use then press ENTER. If you are in a file list and want to return to the Language Code List .the .the . os . .JPEG . .and . .this .number . .player . . less . of . .is . . . .2M . . 31 as 2760 x• 2048 pixels and burn another disc. resolution of files to than pixels Reference Note: Depending upon size JPEG JPEG • Certifique-se que todos arquivos selecionados US Pat. No. 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 to 5,451,942 the previous menu (PHOTO menu). JPEG disc compatibility with SHOW •• >>> There are three Slide Speed options :can Operation (Fast), >> (Normal), and > (Slow). seguida a opção desejada ethe pressione ENTER . switch On aSLIDE disc with MP3/WMA and JPEG youand programmed the desired tracks from the “MUSIC” v /Show) V buttons on the previous Folder list, vCode / disc V tofollows: select 3.Country Press other patents issued anduse pending. “DTS” and “DTS JPEG compatibility with this player 2760 2048 burn List . x.a“.jpg”, .. aphoto .. .long ..quando .file. .. .. .and .. .copiados ..the .. .. DVD/CD .. another .. ..is .para .. .. 31 files, itas could take for otherwise, all operations described Useworldwide v•VUnless bB to stated highlight the (Slide then Language Code List . ..pixels .time .the . disc . .. .. ..disc. 31 limited as >>> (Fast), >> (Normal), and >TITLE (Slow). tenham a extensão o MP3/WMA and JPEG. Press and MUSIC or b / B to Use v V b B to highlight the Speed. Then, use • The total number of files and folders on . menu and then proceed as above or Video CD Operation .JPEG . . . press .ofvocê . Digital . . .ENTER. . .Theater . . . . 19-22 Digital Surround” are registered trademarks Operation remote to highlight and limited as follows: •DVD EmTips: um disco com MP3/WMA . . ..icon . .. .. .press . ..contents. 32-33 receiver to read press ENTER. use the remote control. features may Use vBV byou BeDigital to highlight the (Slide then b Show) / be B to 4.Troubleshooting Use v V b to highlight the Speed. Then, usealso Country List ..the .. ..da .disc’s .. .. ..ENTER. .. .. ..folders .If. ..you .. .. ..don’t .. .. .the . . disc 31 select the option want toTheater PHOTO word on top ofSome the ispode highlighted. B toCode then Use Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 nput source be less than 650. •select The total number ofand files and on layout do CD, na hora gravação. Playing a DVD and Video CD. . menu .use . .. .then .then . Systems, . .press .press . .. .. .ENTER. .ENTER. . . 19 should • Depending upon the size number of JPEG DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . 19-22 • Press MENU to move to the next page. select the option you want to use available on the Setup menu. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 see an on-screen display after several minutes, press ENTER. •reserved. a disc with MP3/WMA can switch Inc.alternar All rightsentre eles. Pressione a teclaandTITLE ahidden. palavra • On Press RETURN, information ofJPEG file e isyou Playback starts. The Troubleshooting . be . .playback .the . . size .than . . will .and . . continue .number . . . . . of .until . JPEG . . . . 32-33 • files, Depending upon should less 650. wner’s 3. If •you want towith file, press General Features .view .Video .MP3/WMA . a. .particular .CD. . . .and . TITLE . .JPEG . .. .:. .and . .you . ..MUSIC .can . .. .20-22 it be could take a long time for the— DVD/CD On a disc switch Playing a DVD and . . . . . . 19 • Some discs may incompatible due to a MP3/WMA and JPEG. Press or some of the files may be too large reduce the JPEG • Se os arquivos possuírem extensões “.jpe” ou “.jpeg”, • There are three Slide Speed options STOPfiles, is pressed. STILL PICTURE Specifications . . take . . the . .a.disc’s . . . .time . . .for . . the . . If.DVD/CD . . . don’t . . . . . . 34 MP3/WMA ou JPEG no alto do menu éTITLE destacada. d the it could long le) and select v(Fast), / PHOTO V to highlight file PLAY. MOVING TO ANOTHER receiver to read contents. youdue JPEG disc compatibility with this player isthan MP3/WMA and JPEG. and �>>> Moving to another . .or20 different word top of.and the menu General Features . .on .a .TITLE/GROUP . .JPEG .(Slow). . .press .TITLE/GROUP .JPEG . .isENTER . highlighted. .. .. ..MUSIC .. ..or.. 20-22 recording format or JPEG the condition of disc. >> (Normal), and >Press • renomeie-os Some discs may be“.jpg” incompatible to a resolution the files to less 2M pixels por favor para STILL PICTURE locaSLIDE SHOW OTES ON COPYRIGHTS: receiver to of read the disc’s contents. If you don’t D/CD Viewing file proceeding PHOTO word on top ofSpeed. thestarts. menu isishighlighted. see an different on-screen display after several minutes, limited as follows: � Moving another CHAPTER/TRACK .. ..to.. 20 •vRETURN, Press RETURN, information ofThen, file hidden. Press PAUSE/STEP during show. •It 1. Pressione as informações do arquivo não b.. ./. B V bto Bthe to highlight theslide use Tip: DVD-V DVD-A recording format or the condition of disc. �Use Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . 20 as 2760 x 2048 pixels and burn another disc. is forbidden by law to copy , broadcast, show , broadcast see an on-screen display after several minutes, • Ensure that all the selected files have the “.jpg” • Press RETURN, information of file is hidden. While viewing a. want you press some of thenomes files may beatoo large —picture, reduce the option you ENTER. •listen Arquivos com sem extensão “.jpg” nãothe serão The player will now go into � Slow Motion. .rent .file, .copyrighted .CHAPTER/TRACK .toPAUSE . use . can . . then .the . mode. . press .during . .STOP .without . .slide .. to ..Show) ..move .. .. 20 Press PAUSE/STEP show. ToDepending to only the desired music watching �select Moving to1.V another 20 Use v b B to highlight (Slide then • upon the size and number of JPEG via desaparecem. cable, play in public, or material dures some of the files may be too large — reduce the extensions when copying into the CD layout. • Ensure that all the selected files have the “.jpg” • The total number of files and folders on the disc to the previous menu (PHOTO menu). • On a disc with MP3/WMA and JPEG you can switch When a disc has than resolution ofreprodutor the JPEG files tothe less than 2M pixels c tray The player go into mode. Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame 20 desired tracks from “MUSIC” lidos porthe este de DVD, mesmo que sejam SLIDE SHOW Slow . .more . . . .JPEG .will . . one .now .PLAY . .title/group, . .or .Playback .press . PAUSE . . .you . . ..can 20 programmed 2. To��return toMotion. the slide show, press press ENTER. us radi-and permission. files, it resolution could take a the long time for the of JPEG files to DVD/CD less 2M extensions when copying intothan the disc. CD pixels layout. MP3/WMA and JPEG. Press TITLE and MUSIC or while should be less than 650. JPEG move to another title/group. Press DISPLAY as 2760 x 2048 pixels and burn another SLIDE SHOW Demonstração em Slides h the � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 . menu and then proceed as above • If the files have “.jpe” or “.jpeg” extensions, This product features the copy protection function developed PAUSE/STEP again. �PHOTO Still Picture and Playback . 20 or press 2.onTo to the isslide show, press PLAY visualizados como arquivos imagem JPEG receiver readxthe disc’s contents. If you don’t Tips: word topreturn ofFrame-by-Frame the menu highlighted. asto2760 2048 pixels anddeburn another disc.no playback stopped then the appropriate (0-9) Use vis B then by Copy signals recorded some please rename as “.jpg” file. � Repeat ..V.protection .b ..para .. ..to .. .selecionar .. .the .file .again. ..isopage. ..hidden. ..on .. ..number ..Show) .. .. .. .. 20 UseMacrovision. as “.. .. ..”.(Slide •them IfExplorer. the files have “.jpe” “.jpeg” • The Some discs may beafter incompatible due tothe a disc JPEG Search. . PICTURE . PAUSE/STEP .highlight . ..of..next .are .the .(Demonstra20 •an total number of files andor folders onextensions, on-screen display several minutes, open Press MENU to move to STILL • •�setas Press RETURN, Use Vand b.information B to highlight the (Slide Show) then seeWindows orRepeat use bvA-B /ENTER. B to move to another title/group. discs. When recording playing the pictures of these discs press • The total number of files and folders on the please rename them as “.jpg” file. � . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 y. Playback different recording format or the condition ofdisc disc. JPEG OT ção de Slide), em seguida pressione a tecla ENTER. should be less than 650. � Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 some of the files may be too large — reduce the MOVING TO ANOTHER FILE • File names without “.jpg” extension will not be • There are three Slide Speed options : press ENTER. You can play any title by inputting its number while picture noise will appear. should be JPEG less than 650. 1. Search Press PAUSE/STEP not start, on a VCR, � Time .. JPEG .. .. .. ..TO ..and .. .. ANOTHER .. .during .. .. .. .. .slide .. .. ..show. .. .. .. .. .. ..JPEG 21 JPEG disc compatibility with this player ispixelswill not be resolution of the files to less than 2M �playback Repeat A-B . . . 21 MOVING FILE >>> (Fast), >> (Normal), > (Slow). able to be read by this DVD/CD receiver. Even • File names without “.jpg” extension SLIDE SHOW This product incorporates copyright protection technology that • Ensure that all the selected files have the “.jpg” is stopped. • Some discs may be incompatible due to a Imagem Congelada The player will PAUSE STILL PICTURE � Marker .. certain ..cursor .now .. ..JPEG .Speed. ..(b ..into ..patents .. Then, ..B) .. .. once ..and .. .. ..mode. .. ..to21 limited asx follows: (. >) or or as 2760 2048 pixels burn another disc. �SKIP Time Search . .. ..of . the .go 21 though b.. ./. B Use v V Search b or B to highlight use ter isPress protected method claims U.S. other • different Some discs may be incompatible due aof disc.Even the files are shown as JPEG image files able to beand read by or this DVD/CD receiver. JPEG extensions when copying into the CDinto layout. recording format the condition Pressione abySTILL tecla PAUSE/STILL durante whileUse viewing aTo to � Zoom. .picture .option .toPICTURE . .highlight .you ..to..advance .the .by ..the .Macrovision ..to .or ..the .a. ..demonstração .next .. or ..Show) ..or ..ENTER. .PLAY .. .then ..(b ..or ..or 21 select want to.. use then press 2. the return slide show, press press Press SKIP (. >) cursor B) once appear such intellectual property rights owned Corporation � Marker Search . . . . . . . 21 v1.V b B (Slide different recording format or the condition ofimage disc. files in Windows Explorer. though the files are shown asJPEG JPEG Press PAUSE/STEP during slide show. Depending upon the size and number of • •The total number of files and folders on the disc • On a disc with MP3/WMA and JPEG you can switch de Slides. If the files “.jpe” or “.jpeg” previous file. next or Special Features ..now .. copyright .a. ..picture .. during .. .into ..to .PAUSE ..advance .. .. ..show. ..tech.. .. to .. ..the .. 22 PAUSE/STEP again. ANOTHER and other rights owners. Use • • Ensure thathave all the selected files extensions, have the “.jpg” press ENTER. 1.DVD Press �MOVING Zoom. . .while .TO .PAUSE/STEP . .viewing .of . .this . .CHAPTER/TRACK . protection .slide 21 Windows Explorer. The player will go mode. files, itbe could take a650. long time for the DVD/CD should less than MP3/WMA and JPEG. Press TITLE and MUSIC or • Ensure that all the selected files have the “.jpg” please rename as “.jpg” file.CD layout. nology must be authorized previous file. extensions whenthem copying into the � Title Menu .modo . .by. .Macrovision . .. now .. .. .. .go ..into .. .. ..PAUSE .. .. .. .. and .. .mode. .. .. 22 O aparelho estará no Slow. The player will Special DVD Features . .. Corporation, . ..is.. or 22 DVD-V DVD-A receiver to read the disc’s contents. If you don’t PHOTO on top of the menu isuses highlighted. 2. Toword return tolimited slide PLAY press • Some extensions when copying into layout. intended� for home and other viewing JPEG discs may be incompatible duethe to CD a will Disc Menu .. .. ..TO .. ..the .JPEG .de ..slides, .. .. show, .show, .. .. .press ..only .. .. .unless .. .. .or MOVING FILE Para retornar àPICTURE demonstração a.. ..tecla cted to Title Menu .ANOTHER . ..slide . .. pressione .press . PLAY . .. 22 22 STILL File names without “.jpg” extension not be 2. To return to the press see• •an on-screen display after several minutes, If the files have “.jpe” or “.jpeg” extensions, •�When Press RETURN, information of file is hidden. PAUSE/STEP again. otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse a titlethe on a disc has more than one chapter or a different e title/chapter �� Changing recording format or the condition of disc. Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22 • If the files have “.jpe” or “.jpeg” extensions, Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 able torename be read by receiver. Even PAUSE/STEP again. PLAY oudisc pressione a tecla novamente. someplease of the files maythem bethis too large — the as DVD/CD “.jpg” file.reduce orhas disassembly isSLOW/SCAN prohibited. more than one track, you can move to 1.� Changing Press PAUSE/STEP during slide show. to start. engineering Press SKIP (. or >) or cursor (b or B) once the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 please rename them as “.jpg” file. � Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22 though files are shown as than JPEG image resolution files to less pixelsfiles in • Ensure that of allthe theJPEG selected files have the 2M “.jpg” JPEG JPEG another chapter/track asinto follows: SLIDE SHOW TO ANOTHER FILE to the menu TheMOVING player will now go PAUSE mode. Mudando de arquivo • File names without “.jpg” extension will not be while viewing a picture to advance to the next or � Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Windows Changing Audio Channel . .FILE . . the . . back . JPEG . . . . . 22 as 2760 xnames 2048Explorer. pixels and burn another disc. extensions when copying into the CD layout. MOVING TO ANOTHER 30 SERIAL�NUMBER: Thethe serial number is located on • able File without “.jpg” extension will not be to be read by this DVD/CD receiver. Even previous file. Pressione aPress tecla SKIP (.highlight ou o(Slide () SKIP . or 2. return to. the PLAY DVD Audio .. .. ..ou ..show, .. > ..the .. .. )press ..briefly .. ..and .. .cursor .. ..Show) ..or .. .playback .. .then .. 22 �• To Subtitles .slide . .during .not .press . .. once 22to of this unit. This unique to this unit available Use v Vnumber bDiscs B .tois. (. 30 Press SKIP or >) or cursor (b or B) able to be read by this DVD/CD receiver. Even total number of or files and folders on the disc files in though the“.jpe” files are“.jpeg” shown as JPEG image • •If The the files have extensions, select the next chapter/track or tohere return to the PAUSE/STEP again. to others. You should record requested information and uma vez durante enquanto visualiza uma imagem, para DVD Audio Discs .a .picture . .or. .>) . . .advance .or. cursor . . . . to . (b .the . or . .next . . .once 22 Press SKIP .(. B) press ENTER. while or though the filesas are shown should be less than 650. retain this guide as viewing a permanent recordto ofchapter/track. your purchase. beginning of the current Windows Explorer. please rename them “.jpg” file. as JPEG image files in while viewing a picture to advance to the next or avançar à próxima oufile. retornar à anterior. previous Windows Explorer. an option you • Press SKIP . twice briefly to step back to the JPEG MOVING TO ANOTHER FILE previous file. Some discs may be incompatible to abe JPEG • •File names without “.jpg” extension due will not STILL PICTURE option. Model No. ___________________________________ previous chapter/track. different format or thereceiver. condition of disc. able to be recording read by this DVD/CD Even Serial Press No. ___________________________________ 25 • To go directly to any chapter during DVD playback, SKIP (. or >) or cursor (b or B) once 1. Press PAUSE/STEP during slide show. though the files are shown as JPEG image files in 30 • Ensure that all the selected files have the “.jpg” press DISPLAY and press v / V to select the whileThe viewing a picture to advance to the next or not within player will now go into PAUSE mode. Windows Explorer. extensions when copying into the CD layout. chapter/track Then, input the chapter/track previous file. to theicon. password. 2. To return slide show, press PLAY or press Operação de Disco JPEG Introduction Introduction Visualizando um Disco JPEG Preview List JPEG Folder 1 JPEG Folder 2 List JPEG Folder 3 JPEG Folder 1 JPEG Folder 4 JPEG Folder 2 JPEG Folder 5 JPEG Folder 3 JPEG Folder 6 JPEG Folder 4 JPEG Folder 7 JPEG Folder 5 JPEG Folder 8 JPEG Folder 6 Preview JPEG Folder 7 JPEG Folder 8 Preview List JPEG Folder 1 JPEG Folder 2 JPEG Folder 3 JPEG Folder 4 JPEG Folder 5 List JPEG Folder 6 JPEG Folder 1 JPEG Folder 7 List JPEG Folder 2 JPEGFolder Folder1 8 JPEG JPEG Folder 3 JPEG Folder 2 JPEG Folder 4 JPEG Folder 3 JPEG Folder 5 JPEG Folder 4 JPEG Folder 6 JPEG Folder 5 JPEG Folder 7 JPEG Folder 6 JPEG Folder 8 JPEG Folder 7 List JPEG Folder 8 Preview Preview Preview JPEG Folder 1 JPEG Folder 2 JPEG Folder 3 JPEG Folder 4 JPEG Folder 5 JPEG Folder 6 JPEG Folder 7 JPEG Folder 8 Preview List JPEG Folder 1 JPEG Folder 2 JPEG Folder 3 JPEG Folder 4 JPEG Folder 5 JPEG Folder 6 JPEG Folder 7 Operação JPEG Folder 8 Note: • When using a DVD audio disc that includes pictures, this operation may be permitted in some picture segments. 2. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or > repeatedly to select the required speed: X2, X4, X16 or X100 3. To exit SEARCH mode, press PLAY. • DVDs may have a region code. Your receiver does not play discs that have a region code different from your receiver. The region code for this receiver is 1 (one). Notes: • If parental control is set and the disc is not within the rating settings you must input the password. (See “Lock Menu” on page 21). Use the 1 2 3 4 buttons to select an option you want, then press ENTER to view the option. The receiver will now go into SEARCH mode. 1. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or > for about two seconds during playback. SEARCH • • DVD-A DVD-V Operation Use the b B v V buttons to select the title/chapter you want to view, then press ENTER to start. Press TITLE or DVD MENU to return to the menu screen. In some cases, the disc menu might appear instead: • DVD-V DVD-A Press SKIP . or > briefly during playback to select the next chapter/track or to return to the beginning of the current chapter/track. Press SKIP . twice briefly to step back to the previous chapter/track. To go directly to any chapter during DVD playback, press DISPLAY and press v / V to select the chapter/track icon. Then, input the chapter/track number or use b / B. When a title on a disc has more than one chapter or a disc has more than one track, you can move to another chapter/track as follows: DVD-V DVD-A MOVING TO ANOTHER CHAPTER/TRACK 23 OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK) NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. 2. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or > repeatedly to select the required speed: X2, X4, X16 or X100 3. To exit SEARCH mode, press PLAY. Repetir asPROGRAMMED Faixas Programadas REPEAT TRACKS 1. Press and hold SKIP/SCAN . or > for about two seconds during playback. eceiver does different from receiver is 1 1. Pressione a tecla REPEATDisc durante Audio CD and MP3/WMA . . .a. reprodução . . . . . . . . .de . . um 23 Safety Precautions . . . .the . . product’s . . . . . . enclosure . . . . . . .that . . may . . . .be2 voltage within ATable função de programação lhe permite gravar suas. faixas 1. Press REPEAT when a disc. The repeat Playing an Audio CDplaying and aparece. MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . 23 of Contents . . . magnitude . . . . . . . to . .constitute . . . . . . a. .risk . of. .electric ..3 disco. O ícone de repetição of sufficient . . . . . . . . . 23 ithin an REPEAT PROGRAMMED TRACKS favoritas de qualquer reprodutor icon�appears. Playback Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Before Use . shock . .function . . to . disco .persons. . . enables . na . . memória . . . you . . . .todo . .store . . . .your . . . . de . 4-5 Disc . . . Programmed . . The 23 program er 2. Pressione a tecla REPEAT para .selecionar Uma programação � Moving to to another Track . The .repeat . . .repeat . .mode. .o.modo . . . . . 23 Playable Discs . . .any . pode . . disc . . conter . .in. the . . 30 . player . faixas. . . . . memory. . . . . . . .A. 4 1. 2.Press tracks from REPEAT when playing a disc. . . favorite 23 s . . . . . . . DVD. Press REPEAT select a desired The exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle desejado. program can contain � Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Precautions . . . . . .30 . . tracks. .....................5 o disco. ay icon appears. . .be . . . . . 1. .The . Insira 23 program function enables youuser to store is intended to alert the about your the presence of • Track: repeats the current track electric PROGRAMMED � Search. . a. .faixa . . TRACKS . atual. . .for . . . instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Notes on Discs .MP3/WMA .operating . disc . . . .in. and . . . maintenance . . . . . memory. . . . .(servicing) . . .A.REPEAT ..5 detracks áudio e Playback CDany About the symbols . . . Programmed . . . . favorite . . CD 23 • Faixa: repete from the player 1. Insert a important disc. 2. Press to a desired repeat mode. • All:REPEAT repeats all select the tracks JPEG Disc Operation . .faixas . .on . . programmed . . . . . . . . . .list. . . . . . . 24 About Symbols .áudio . . in . .the . . instructions . . MÚSICA . . . . . . . aparece . . . . . . na . . the ..5 instructions . . . . . . . program . .O 23 menu docontain CD deMP3/WMA ou de can 30 tracks. • Off(No Tudo: repete todas as programadas. 1.tela Press REPEAT when playing a disc. The repeat Audio CD or Discs: accompanying • display): does not play repeatedly. Indicates hazards likely to cause product. Viewing a JPEG disc . . . . . . . . . harm . . . . .to. .the . . unit . . . 24 • Track: repeats the current track Front Panel and Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . 24 iangle icon appears. AUDIO CD or MUSIC menu appears. da TV. • OFF (sem display): função desativada. itself or other material damage. The program function enables you to store your Insert Control a disc. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 � Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 • All: repeats all the tracks on programmed list. Remote ce . . of. . . . . 1. . . 24 Note: CAUTION WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK favorite tracks from any disc in the player memory. A Audio CD or MP3/WMA 2. Press •REPEAT to select a desired 2. Press PROGRAM. the symbols forDiscs: instructions 2. PROGRAM ng) Off(No display): does � Still Picture .operating . not . .Repeat .play . repeat . . features .repeatedly. . . .mode. . playback, . of . . this . . . unit. .the . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . About . .Pressione 24 If you press > once during Track Indicates special otas: HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK contain 30 MUSIC tracks. AUDIO CD or appears. the program Acan E aparecerá � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 The mark will appear to the right of the word • Track: marca à menu direita da palavra “PROGRAM”, DO OPEN repeat playback cancels. . . . . . . . Preparation . . 24 MOISTURE. repeats the current track Indicates hazards likely toNOT cause harm to the unit Note: • SeIndicates tecla SKIP �pressionar Tothe rotate . for . . .making . . .uma . .list. . vez . . task . durante . . easier. . . . . a. . 24 “Program” on the right side of the menu screen. • All: tipsapicture. and the aitself disc. . . . 1. . . .Insert . 2. . . no 24 lado direito de Press PROGRAM. repeats all tracks onhints programmed or other Connections .Do . do .material . menu . . . . .damage. .this . tela. . equipment . . . . . . THE . in. .aRISK .confined . . . . . .space 8-13 If you press > oncePlayback during Repeat CAUTION: TO REDUCE WARNING: not install Programmed . de . . Track .faixa, . . . playback, .a. repetição . . . . .the . . será . . . . . 25 reprodução de repetição CD or Discs: . . . . . .Audio . . . 24 CK • Off(No display): does not play repeatedly. E MP3/WMA The mark will appear to the right of the word ELECTRIC TV Connections . .similar . . . . unit. . . .SHOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 repeat playback cancels. such book case.OF or Note: Manufactured under license from Dolby “PROGRAM” ERASING A TRACK FROM Repeat Programmed Tracks. .Laboratories. . . . . . . . . “Dolby”, . . . . . . 25 Indicates special operating features of this unit. CD as or aMUSIC menu appears. otas: N. OR . . . . .AUDIO . . . 25 cancelada. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK) “Program” on the right side of the menu screen. “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Optional Equipment Connections . . . will . . .disappear ......9 PROGRAM again, then the E PARTS mark Note: LIST Erasing Confidential a Track from Programme . . . . 1992. . . . 25 NO USER-SERVICEABLE INSIDE . . . 2. . . .Press . . . Press 25 Unpublished works.List Copyright Connections . mode. . . for . . TO . . QUALIFIED . . . em . the . .seguida .task .SERVICE . . easier. . . a. marca . .If .you 10 pressLaboratories. PROGRAM. • Pressione PROGRAM novamente, Indicates tips and hints making toAerial exit the Program Edit Apagando uma faixa da lista de programação REFER SERVICING > onceALaboratories. during Repeat Track playback, the Erasing the Complete Programme List . . . . . . . 25 1997 Dolby All rights reserved. ERASING TRACK FROM “PROGRAM” tpace . . . . . . Note: . . 25 System Connection .of . . .de. .word . . . . .do . . progra11-12 1. Use v V B to select the track that you wish to PERSONNEL. The ESpeaker mark will appear tosair the right MUSICthe AUDIO CD desaparecerá para do modo edição repeat playback cancels. 1. UseDisc as setas DivX Operation . .para . .Digital . selecionar . . .Theater . . . . . aSystems, . faixa . . . . que . .Inc. . você . 26 st . . . . . Manufactured . . 25 PROGRAM Manufactured license. from Press again, the under license from Dolby erase fromunder the Program list. � Transmitter. . . .then .of. .the . . menu . E. Laboratories. . mark . .screen. . .will . . disappear . .“Dolby”, . . . . . . 11 LIST “Program” on the right side US deseja Pat. No.Setup 5,451,942 ma. Speaker . da . .5,956,674, . . . .de . .programação. . 5,974,380, . . . . . . . 5,978,762 . . . . . . . and . . . . 27 to the Program Edit mode. apagar lista Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of. .Dolby . . . . . . . “Pro . . exit 26 � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . 11 other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS This lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an1. Use CAUTION: V CLEAR. B to select the track you Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright 1992Information . .trademarks . that . . . .additional . . of.wish .Digital . . .totracks . Theater . . . . . . 28 MUSIC AUDIO CD . . .Note: . . . . Laboratories. . . 27 2.Additional Repeat to erase Digital Surround” are registered Avfrom TRACK FROM “PROGRAM” � Setting areceiver ID ofAlltriangle Transmitter . . . .to. alert . . . .the . .user . ERASING . . 11 equilateral is aintended 2. Press Pressione a Program tecla CLEAR. Repita 1997 Dolby Laboratories. rights reserved. erase the list.2000 DVD/CD employs laser system. Systems, Copyright 1996, Last Condition Memory . . Digital . . . .para .Theater . . apagar . . . Systems, . . .outras . . . . 28 on theInc. list. . . . Press . . . . PROGRAM . . 28This about the presence of uninsulated dangerous E mark again, then the will to disappear � Assembling and Connecting the Speakers 11 Inc. All rights reserved. faixas daSaver lista de. .programação. LIST under license Theater Systems, To ensure proper use offrom this product, please readthat thisInc. owner’s Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . .an . .exit . . Manufactured . . 28 voltage within theDigital product’s enclosure may be to the Program Edit mode. ithin � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2. Press CLEAR. Repeat to erase additional tracks US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and manual carefully and retain it for future reference. Should the Controlling thetrack TV . . . you . . . wish . .PROGRAM . . to . .por . . . completo . . . . . . . 28 of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric . other . . 28worldwide Use v V the B tolist. select the that ERASING THE COMPLETE patents issued er. . . . . .AUDIO Apagando aCOPYRIGHTS: lista de.programação CD Speaker Positioning. . . . MUSIC .and . . .pending. . .an . .authorized . .“DTS” . . . .and .service . .“DTS . . .1. . 13 on unit require maintenance, contact locaOTES ON shock to persons. Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 erase from the Program list. s . . . . . . . Digital .Before . 28tion (see service procedure). .1996, . . . .2000 . . . Digital . . . MP3/WMA . .Theater . . . . . Systems, . .Menu . . . 14-19 Audio CD Menu It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast Systems, Operation Inc. Copyright LIST ay Presetting the radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 . .be. . . . . Inc. . . 29 All rights reserved. via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without Performing controls, adjustments, or carrying out procedures The exclamation mark within an equilateral triangle Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Surround ERASING THE COMPLETE 1. Press Pressione para mover Programação. wner’s electric 2. Press CLEAR. Repeat to erase Listening to the radio .“Program” .à. lista . .PROGRAM . de . .tracks .list. . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 1.permission. B to move to theadditional . . . . . . . . . 29 other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiis intended to alert the user about the presence of d the Mode . . .CD: . . . Press . . . . .PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . while . . . . playback . . . . . . . is . . 14 Video on the list. Other Functions. . . copy . . . .protection . “Limpar . . instructions . . . function .Tudo”, . . . . .developed . . .seguida . . . . . 30 Audio CDimportant Menu operating and MP3/WMA Menu LIST About the symbols for This product features the ´stopped. para selecionar em 2. Use ation exposure. . . . . . . . . . 29 locaOTES ON COPYRIGHTS: The appears. Sound Mode . . program . . . . . . .menu . . . .maintenance . . . . . . . Press . .(servicing) . . . . . 14 v / V to select “Clear All”, then 2. Use by Macrovision. Copy protection are the instructions the Sleep Timer Setting . . .signals . . . . .list. . . recorded .press . . . . ENTER. . on . . some . . . . 30 . . . . . . . It. is . 30 ToOn-Screen prevent direct exposure to.hold laser beam, do not to. open iangle pressione ENTER. , .accompanying broadcast broadcast, forbidden by instructions law Display toagain copy,in 1. Press B to move to and thelikely “Program” PROGRAM and it.show down for a.try few . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Indicates hazards to cause harm to the Vídeo CD: pressione a tecla PROGRAM com a reprodiscs. When recording playing the pictures of these product. ERASING THE COMPLETE Video CD: Press while playback Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .discs . unit . . . 30 the enclosure. Visible lasercopyrighted radiation when open. DOisNOT ce play in public, orPROGRAM rent material without . . of. . . . . via . . cable, 30 ures seconds to exit the menu. Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19 on a VCR, picture noise will appear. itself or other material damage. About the symbols for instructions STARE INTO BEAM. paralisada. O menu de programação aparece. Note: ng) stopped. The program menu appears. Press permission. Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 s. radi2. Use v / V to select “Clear All”, then press ENTER. . . . . . .Audio . . dução 30 CD Menu TO MP3/WMA Menu LIST This product incorporates copyright protection technology that WARNING: PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK � General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 the programs areHeadphone also cleared when the product features the copy function PROGRAM again and protection hold itnovamente down for developed ae few Using the . .U.S. .disc . .patents .is. removed. . . .and . . .other . . . 30 ahazards tecla PROGRAM segure-a por The Note: . . . . . . . This . . Pressione 30 CAUTION: The apparatus be is protected by method ofJack certain Indicates specialclaims operating features of this unit. otas: HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS TO RAIN Indicates to harm the unit � Language . . .likely . . . should .signals . .cause . . not . .PRODUCT .recorded . exposed . . . to . .on . to .some .water . .1.. OR 16 by Macrovision. Copy protection are B toSelecting moveproperty to the “Program” list. seconds to exit the menu. pen the rights Inputowned Source . . . . . . . . Corporation . . . . . . . . . 30 (dripping orCD splashing) and no objects liquids, suchPress intellectual by Macrovision On a Video with PBC, you must setfilled PBCwith to Off on the segundos para sair do menu. . . . . . .Video . discs. . . alguns 30 MOISTURE. CD: Press PROGRAM while playback is Note: itself or other material damage. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 OT • AXTS programação também apagada as vases, should placed on the apparatus. other rights owners. Use of éthis copyright protection Indicates tipscleared and hints for making the menu tonoise use be the programmed playback (See “PBC” on The and (Excellent True Sound) . . . .iscom . removed. . . task .a.remoção . easier. . .tech. . . .do 30 . . . . . .stopped. . on . . asetup 30 programs are also disc The program CK VCR, picture will / V tomust select All”,when then the press ENTER. Use vnology � 22). Audio. . . .not . menu .install . .appear. . .appears. . . .equipment . . . .Press . . .in. a. confined . . . . . . .2.. 17 Note: be. “Clear authorized WARNING: Do disco. Indicates special operating features of this unit.thatspace XTS pro . . . . . . . by . . Macrovision . . . . . . . . Corporation, . . . . . . . . and . . . is. . 30 otas: N. OR product incorporates copyright protection technology again and hold it this down for a. .few . . . . .PROGRAM . This . . page 30 On a such Video CD with PBC, you must set PBC to Off on the intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 as book case or similar unit.U.S. patents and other Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, er byamethod claims of certain This product may not be used outdoor, restricted to to exit the menu. VIDEO CD . . . . . .seconds . is . .protected 30CAUTION: menu to use the programmed otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbolCorporation. are trademarks of Dolby �um Others . CD .rights . . com . hints . . .PBC, . for . by . making .você . playback . . .deve . the . . (See .ajustar . . .“PBC” . .PBC . . on .Note: . 19 •setup Em Vídeo Indicates and task easier. such intellectual property owned Macrovision Corporation indoor usetips only. Press SKIP . or > briefly during playback to select the next chapter/track or to return to the beginning of the current chapter/track. Press SKIP . twice briefly to step back to the previous chapter/track. To go directly to any chapter during DVD playback, press DISPLAY and press v / V to select the chapter/track icon. Then, input the chapter/track number or use b / B. • • • When a title on a disc has more than one chapter or a disc has more than one track, you can move to another chapter/track as follows: DVD-A Track4 Track4 Track1 7-Music7 E Clear All 2-Music2 1-Music1 PROGRAM Edit 4-Music4 DISPLAY Info 2-Music2 6-Music6 1-Music1 3-Music3 Track5 PROGRAM Edit 4-Music4 Track6 5-Music5 DVD-A 6-Music6 Track7 Clear All Clear All 7-Music7 PROGRAM Edit MOVING TO ANOTHER TITLE/GROUP Track8 PROGRAM Edit DISPLAY Info Note: • Unless stated otherwise, all operations described use the remote control. Some features may also be available on the Setup menu. General Features Reference Operation Operation Track7 Operation Track5 Track3 input source Track8 Track1 Track2 Program DVD-V 1-Music1 5-Music5 1 / 12 6-Music6 List Clear All PROGRAM Edit DISPLAY Info 4-Music4 0:00:00 E Clear All 6-Music6 3-Music3 Track1 PROGRAM Edit Track6 1 / 12 Track7 Program 4-Music4 2-Music2 Track5 List E 2-Music2 le) and select D/CD Track4 Track4 0:52:07 Program 5-Music5 c tray and h the Track8 Track3 4-Music4 6-Music6 1-Music1 7-Music7 Clear All When a disc has more than one title/group, you can move to another title/group. Press DISPLAY while playback is stopped then the appropriate number (0-9) or use b / B to move to another title/group. You can play any title by inputting its number while playback is stopped. List E Program Track5 Track7 1-Music1 3-Music31 / 12 0:00:00 Track1 1 / 12 y. Playback not start, 6-Music6 2-Music2 appear 2-Music2 DVD-V Track4 MOVING TO ANOTHER CHAPTER/TRACK 4-Music4 Track3 e title/chapter to start. to the menu 1-Music1 Track7 E Program Track7 Track4 0:52:07 Track5 List Track6 Track1 Track2 1 / 12 List E Program Track5 an option you option. DVD-A 0:00:00 1 / 12 List not within password. DVD-V Introduction SEARCH Operation 0:52:07 Track1 Track2 Introduction This lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user Introduction Reprodução Programada Programmed Playback about the presence of uninsulated dangerous The receiver will now go into SEARCH mode. Reprodução Programada engineering orConfidential disassemblyUnpublished is prohibited.works. Copyright 1992Laboratories. page 22). paceNote:and other rights owners. Use this copyright protection tech-The programs are also cleared when the disc is removed. “desligado” no menu deofajuste, para usar a reprodução 1997 Dolby Laboratories. Language Code ListAll. .rights . . . .reserved. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Manufactured license Dolby Laboratories. nology must beunder authorized byfrom Macrovision Corporation,“Dolby”, VIDEO CD On a Video CD with PBC, you “PBC” must set PBC to20) Off on the and is programada. (Veja na pág. Manufactured under license from Systems, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless SERIAL NUMBER: The serial located Country Code List . . . . .number . .Digital . . .is.Theater . . . . . on . . the . . .back . .Inc. . . 31 . . .setup . . . . menu . . 31to use the programmed playback (See “PBC” on cted to US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and DVD or authorized Video CDbyOperation .Corporation. . works. . . . . .Copyright . .Reverse . . . . 1992. . 19-22 Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished of this unit. This number is this otherwise Macrovision Troubleshooting . . issued . .unique .requested . .and . to . .pending. . .information .unit . . and . . . not .here .and .available . and .“DTS . 32-33 . . .page . . . .22). . . 31Dolby other worldwide patents “DTS” to others. You should record 1997 Laboratories. All rights reserved. CAUTION: engineering prohibited. Playingor adisassembly DVD and isVideo CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Digital Surround” are Specifications .a .registered . . . . . . .trademarks . . . . of . .your . of. .Digital . . . . Theater . . . . . . 34 retain this guide as permanent record purchase. . . . . . . . 32-33 VIDEO CD This DVD/CD receiver employs Manufactured under license. from Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, General Features . . . .Digital . . a. laser . Theater . . .system. . . Systems, . . . . . . .Inc. 20-22 List Operation Track5 Track2 Track2 Track3 Track3 Track4 List E Program Track1 Track1 Track5 Program Track1 Track5 Track2 Track2 Track3 Track3 Track4 E Clear All Track1 Track5 . . . . . . . US . . 34 Pat.�No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and Moving to another TITLE/GROUP .the . . this .“DTS . .owner’s . . 20 To NUMBER: ensure proper use of this product, please read SERIAL The serial number is seguida located onpressione back 3. Selecione uma faixa na lista, em other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and Video CD Menu of thismanual unit. This number is unique unitofreference. and not available carefully and retaintrademarks ittoforthis future Should � Moving toregistered another CHAPTER/TRACK . . de . . .the 20 Digital Surround” are Digital Theater ENTER para colocar a faixa selecionada na lista to others. You should record requested information here and locaunit require maintenance, contact an authorized service Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, 3. this aMotion. on. .the then �Select Slow . . .“List”, . . . . of . .your . outras .press .purchase. . . . faixas. .ENTER . . . . . .to20 retain guide astrack aRepita permanent record programação. para adicionar Inc. All rights reserved. tion (see service procedure). Video CD Menu wner’s selected track on the “Program” list. . 20 �place Still the Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback Performing controls, adjustments,tracks or carrying out procedures d the to the Model No. ___________________________________ . 4. �Repeat .place . specified . .the . additional . .“List”, . herein . . . then . .may . .press .result . .on . .ENTER . . .list. . . .to. . radi20 3. Pressione Select a track other than thoseon in hazardous 2Search. locaOTES ON COPYRIGHTS: Serial No. ___________________________________ �Press Repeat . . .que . .track .,você .broadcast, . .on .queira . the . . .show .que . ., .broadcast . . . a.list. .primeira . . . . . 20 Selecione aselected faixa seja a place thebyB. “Program” ation exposure. It is 4. forbidden law to copy Repeat A-B .de .you .Menu . .copyrighted .to. laser .tracks . to . .beam, . .on . .playing . . not .list. . .tryon . .to.the . . 21 Video CD Repeat place additional the tocada na lista programação. Select track want start via ser cable, playtointhe public, or rent material without To� prevent direct exposure do open ures � enclosure. Time Search . . . .radiation . . . . . .when . . . .open. . . . .DO . . NOT . . . 21 permission. Visible. laser s radilist. 3. Select athe“Program” track on the “List”, then press ENTER to 5. a tecla PLAY 4. Pressione Press B. This product features the copy protection developed STARE INTO BEAM. � Marker Search . . ou . . .ENTER . . . . function . .para . . . iniciar. . . . . .A . . . . 21 place thePress selected track on thesignals “Program” list.faixas thePLAY track the 5.Select or to start. Playback in by Macrovision. Copy protection are recorded some reprodução começa em � Zoom. . . .apparatus .you . ENTER .na .want .ordem . . .to . .start . not . .que .playing . exposed .as . . . on .on. to .begins .foram . . . 21 pen CAUTION: The water Repeat tothe place additional tracks onpictures thebelist. discs.“Program” When recording and playing the of these discs list. order inAFeatures which youshould the tracks. OT memorizadas. reprodução as Special DVD .programmed .pára . . . depois . .filled . . . with .que . .liquids, .todas . . . .such . 22 (dripping or splashing) and .no objects on a VCR, picture noise will appear. stops all the as�Playback vases, should placed 4. Press B. Title Menu .be. copyright .after . tocadas. . . to . on . start. .ofthe . the . .apparatus. . tracks . . technology . . . on . .begins . . that . . .in. 22 5. faixas Press PLAY or foram ENTER Playback gravadas This product incorporates protection “Program” list have played once. on Select the track you want er is protected by method � order Disc Menu .claims . .you .to. ofstart .programmed .certain . . playing . . U.S. . . . .patents .the . the . tracks. . .and . . other . . . . 22 the in which 6. Para retornar à reprodução normal, selecione uma faixa such intellectual property rights owned Macrovision “Program” list. stops after all ofby the tracks on �ToChanging the Audio Language .Corporation . the . . . .restricted . . . . 22to CAUTION: This product may not be used.programmed outdoor, 6.Playback resume normal playback from andde other rights Useplayed of CD this copyright techáudio deowners. uma lista de deAUDIO áudio.protection e. CD em seguida indoor use only. “Program” list have once. � Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . playback, select a track of (or MUSIC) 5. Press PLAY tobystart. Playback begins inand is . 22 nology must or be ENTER authorized Macrovision Corporation, pressione PLAY. and �list Subtitles . press .other . . . limited .PLAY. . . . .viewing . . the . . .uses . . . only . . . unless . . . . . . 22 for homethen and theintended order in which you programmed tracks. 6. To resume normal playback from programmed cted to DVD Audio Discs .track .the . . .of . AUDIO . Corporation. . . .on . . the . . . (or . . .MUSIC) . . . . . . 22 otherwise authorized by Reverse Playback stops after allaMacrovision of tracks playback, select CD engineering disassembly isonce. prohibited. “Program” listorthen have played list and press PLAY. List Program Track1 Track5 Track2 Track2 Track3 Track3 Track4 Track1 E Clear All Track5 Clear All 6. ToSERIAL resumeNUMBER: normal playback from programmed The serial number is located on the back playback, select a trackisofunique AUDIO CDunit (orand MUSIC) of this unit. This number to this not available to others. You should record requested information here and list and 26 then press PLAY. retain this guide as a permanent record of your purchase. Model No. ___________________________________ Inc. All rights reserved. Model No. ___________________________________ Serial No. ___________________________________ OTES ON COPYRIGHTS: It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without permission. This product features the copy protection function developed by Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on some discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs on a VCR, picture noise will appear. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located on the back of this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available to others. You should record requested information here and retain this guide as a permanent record of your purchase. 29 29 Model No. ___________________________________ Serial No. ___________________________________ 29 Operação com disco DivX A compatibilidade de discos DivX com este reprodu- Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 torPlaying se CD limita segue: ancomo Audio CD and MP3/WMA Table Contents . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32 Audio and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . Disc . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 SafetyofPrecautions Using this DVD/CD can play DivX. .disc. � Pause . . . . .CD . .with .and . . this .MP3/WMA . . .player . . . . . is .Disc . limited . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 . . . . e.Receiver .you 1Before Insira um. disco an .Audio 23 Table ofUse Contents ..feche .. .. .. .. a.. .bandeja. .. .. .. .. .. ..O .. ..Menu .. .. .. .. FILME . . .. .. .. .4-5 .3 DivXPlaying disc compatibility � to. .resolução another .. .. arquivo .. .. .. .. .. ..DivX .. .. .. 23 Playable Discs . .TV. . .. .. ..the .4 Insert a disc � Moving Pause .de . . . . . . Track . disponível . . . . .. .. .. ..do 23 Before Use . . tela . and . .. da .. .close .. .. ..tray. .. .. .. The .. .. .. ..DivX .. .. .. ..menu .. .. .. .. .. 4-5 aparece na as• follows: Operation Tamanho é � Track/All/Off. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 Precautions . . .. TV .. .. ..screen. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54 appears on the � Repeat Moving to another Track 23 Playable Discs abaixo de 720x576 (Larg x Altura) pixel. • Available resolution size of the DivX file is under � . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 Notes onDivX Discs � Search. Repeat Track/All/Off. Precautions . disc. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 Receiver you can play •720x576 O nome do arquivo .legenda DivX é limita-se a 56 23 (W x H) JPEG About .. .. .. ..disc .. .. .. ..compatibility .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 with this player isOperation limited �Disc Search. . . pixel. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 23 Notes Symbols on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..DivX caracteres. d close theFront tray. The DivX menu Viewing aOperation JPEG .. .. .. .. .. .is .. .. .. .. .. .. ..by .. .. .. .. .. 24 Panel and Rear .. .. follows: .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65 Disc . .. ..subtitle . ..available 24 About Symbols . . .Panel . . . . .as •JPEG The file name of thedisc DivX TV screen.Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Se houver um (different código � Slide Show . disc . . . ..impossível .. ..by .. ..language). .. .. .. ..para .. .. .. ..expressar .. .. .. .. .. .. .. um .. 24 Viewing JPEG 24 characters Front Panel and Rear Panel • . Available . . . . . . . .resolution . . . . . . . size . . 6 of the•20~40 DivX file isaunder � .. ..poderá .. .. .. .. .. .ser .. .. .. .. .. .. .. como .. .. .. .. ..marca .. .. .. 24 arquivo DivX, “ � Still SlidePicture Showele . .. ..mostrado 24 Remote Control Overview . . . 720x576 . . . . . . . (W . . .x. H) . . pixel. ....7 • If there is impossible code to express in the DivX � to another �-Moving Still Picture . . . . . file . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 24 “ na tela. Preparation file, it� available mayrotate be displayed as _. ." .mark • The file name of the DivX subtitle by picture. . .file . ".na ..on .. ..the .. ..que ..dis.. ..30 .. .. .. 24 � To Moving to another . .tela . .. ..é.. maior 24 •play.isSe o número de quadros Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Preparation 20~40 characters (different by language). Programmed Playback .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 � To rotate picture. 24 TV Connections ..8 por segundo, essa unidade pode não funcionar Connections . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 8-13 Programmed Tracks. .. .. over .. .. .. .. 30 .. .. .per • express If Repeat the number of the screen Playback . . . . frame . . .. .. .. is . .. .. .. 25 25 in the DivX Optional Equipment .. ..impossible .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. code .. 98 to Programmed corretamente. TV Connections . . Connections . . . . .• . If. .there . . . .. is Erasing athis Track 1 second, unitfrom mayProgramme not operate Repeat Tracks. . . . .List .normally. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 mark onProgrammed the disAerial Connections . . . . . .file, . . .it .may .. .. .. .be .. .. .. .. .. 10 Optional Equipment. .Connections . .. ..displayed . 9as " _• " Erasing Se a estrutura de vídeo e áudio do arquivo gravado theTrack Complete Programme List List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 Erasing from structure Programme Press v System / V to select a folder,. and press ENTER. A Speaker Connection • If the videoa and audio of recorded file 25 Aerial Connections . . . . . . . play. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12 . . 10 não intercalada, DivX Discestiver Operation . . . Programme . .tanto . . . .o.vídeo . . .List . como . . .. .. ..o..áudio .. .. .. 26 Erasing the Complete 25 list of files / in the .folder If you are. in file 2 Speaker Pressione is not interleaved, either video or audio is out� Transmitter. . . .selecionar . .appears. . .• . If . ..the . .em .a..the . . 11 Systempara Connection ..uma .. ..number .. pasta .. .. .. .. .e, .of 11-12 screenSpeaker frame is Setup over 30 . . per . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27 serão liberados. DivX Disc Operation 26 list and want to to theTransmitter FolderUma list, lista use the putted. � a return channel . . . . 11 seguida, pressione � Changing Transmitter. . . a. tecla . . . .ofENTER. . . 1. .second, . . . . . . .this . .. .. ..de . . . . 11 unit may notAdditional operate normally. Information .. .. .. .. .a .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 Speaker Setup . .for . . gravado . . . .. .. .. .com . .. .. ..GMC, . ..unidade 27 • Se o arquivo v�/ Setting V buttons onofthe remote to .highlight and a ID Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 daENTER. pasta aparece. você visualiza � Changing a channel ofSe Transmitter . . . .uma . . . lista . 11 •Additional If Last the file is recorded with Condition Memory ..do .. ..nível .. ..the .. ..de ..unit ..gravação. .. .. .supelect a folder, arquivos and press A Information . . ..GMC, . .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 press ENTER. • If thetovideo and audio structure of recorded file somente suporta 1 ponto � Assembling and Connecting the Speakers 11 Setting ID . . . . . . de . . pastas, . . . . . . 11 ports some of 1-point de�Ifarquivos eindesejar ver a lista anterior folder appears. you area a of fileTransmitter Saver . .Memory . . . .of . . the .. .. ..record .. .. .. .. .. .level. Last Condition . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 either videoScreen orOaudio outithin an Speaker .is. not .file, . to . .interleaved, . . .Speakers .v . . /. V. .to que é is GMC? Assembling and/ the 11 If��you want view a Connecting particular press * GMC? return to the Folder list, use the pressione astoConnections. teclas no. controle remoto para . 12 Controlling the. TV .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 Screen Saver . . . 28 putted. er Speaker Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 GMC- is the acronym for Global Motion Compensation. It GMC é o acrônimo para Compensação de � Speaker . . . . . or . .PLAY. . . . . . . . . . . 12 highlight a fileConnections. and press ENTER Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 n the remote to highlight and destacar “ “ e. pressione Controlling the specified TV . . . in . .MPEG4 . . . . . .standard. . . . . . . Some . . . . . . 28 s is an encoding tool Before Operation . .. .. .. .. .. .. .•.ENTER. .If.. ..the . .. ..file . .. .is . .. .recorded . .. .. .. .14-19 with GMC, the unit supSpeaker Positioning. . . . . . 13 Movimento Global. Ele é uma ferramenta de Presetting theRadio radio stations .. .. ..option. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 ay be Operation with . .or. .Xvid, . . .. .have . .. .. .. this 29 Press STOP to like DivX some record encoders, level. Mini Glossary forexit. Before Operation . .Audio . . . . Stream . . . .ports ..& . . Surround . . . . . of . . 1-point . . 14-19of the MPEG4 electric codificação especificada Listening tothe the radioof .GMC . . no . .encoding, .padrão .usually Presetting radio stations . .. .. .. .. ..MPEG4. . .. .. .. .. .called . .Alguns . .. .. .. 29 29 There are different levels 3 Mode Se em ew a particular file,você press . . .deseja . .v. /. for .Vver . to .Audio .um . . arquivo . Stream . . . .* .GMC? .& . .particular, . . . . . . . pressio. . . . 14 Mini Glossary Surround Other Functions. .Itradio . . . .GMC. .. ..como .. .. .. .. DivX .. .. .. ..ou .. .. Xvid, .. .. .. .. possuem .. .. .. .. .. 30 codificadores MPEG4, 1-point, 2-point, 3-point Listening to or the 29 is Global Motion Compensation. nd press ENTER or PLAY. Sound Mode .. .. .. ..destacar .. .. .. .. .GMC .. ..arquivo .. ..the .. .. acronym .. .e. ..pressione .. .. .. .for ne as Mode .teclas . . . . / . .. .. ..para . .. o . .. 14 14 Sleep Timer Setting .. .. .. .. .. .. .. níveis .. .. .. .. ..de .. ..codificação .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Other Functions. . . . . .. ..diferentes 30 is. an encoding tool specified in MPEG4 standard. Some essa opção. Existem iangle On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 otes Sound Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 ENTER ou PLAY. exit. . . . .Setting . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 MPEG4 encoders, like DivX or Xvid, Dimmer have this option. Sleep Timer 30 ce of GMC, sempre chamada GMC ponto-1, ponto-2 ou Initial Settings . . . . . . .. .. .ON” . .. .. ..mode . .. .. ..before . .. .. .. .playback . .. .. .. .16-19 • Be sure to select Display “SUBTITLE a15 On-Screen . . . . Playable DivX There are different levels of GMC encoding, Mute . usually . .. ..file .. ..called .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 About the symbols for instructions ing) Dimmer 30 DivX by pressing � file General Operation . . 16GMC. ponto-3 Initial Settings . . para .ENTER . . .sair. .. ..every .. .. ..1-point, ..time. .. .. .. ..2-point, .. .. .. .. .. or .. ..3-point .. 16-19 z ".avi the ", ".mpg Using 4• When Pressione STOP Mute .the . . Headphone . ",. .".mpeg . . . . . ". .Jack . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 the subtile has more than two languages in the file, � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Indicates hazards likely to cause harm to the unit � General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Selecting Input Source Using thethe Headphone Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 original subtile ismaterial only available. � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 itself or other damage. � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Playable Codec format Arquivos DivX reproduzíveis XTS (Excellent TrueSource Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Selecting the Input 30 • The Pro logic playback mode is. not available for DivX file. UBTITLE ON” mode before � .II..Sound . . 17 CK � Audio. Display .. .. ..will .. ..anot .. .. ..be .. .Playable .. .. .. .. .. .. ..DivX .. .. .. ..file .. .. .. .. 16-17 z •"DIVX3.xx ", XTS pro . ."DIVX4.xx . . . .“.mpeg” . . . .", . "DIVX5.xx . . . . .. .. .. .. ", .. .."XVID .. .. .. .. ..",.. .. .. .. .. 30 “.avi”, “.mpg”, • Subtitle in Chinese displayedofduring playback a XTS (Excellent True Sound) 30 gNENTER every time. Indicates special operating features this unit. OR � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 � file. Audio. . . . in . .English . . . . . is. z .available) . ".avi . . . .",. ".mpg . . . . . ",. .".mpeg . . . . 17 " "MP43 ", "3IVX ", "MP42 ". DivX (Subtitle as more than two languages in the file, XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 � . . . . . . .Control) . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19 � Others Lock tips (Parental 18 Indicates and hints for making the task easier. ly available. Dicas: Reference Formatos Codec reproduzíveis Playable Codec format Playable Audio format � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 pace nd mode is• not available forDVD DivX MENU. file. Pressione Language Code List . . . . “,. .“DIVX5.xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 •"AC3“DIVX3.xx “DIVX4.xx z "DIVX3.xx "DIVX4.xx ", "DIVX5.xx "XVID",“,","PCM zReference ",", "DTS ", "MP3 ", "WMA “,". “XVID “, Operation under license a from Dolby Laboratories.",“Dolby”, will not be Manufactured displayed during playback Code List .“.. ..within .. .. .. .. ..32 .. ..-.. 48 .. .. .kHz .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31 •available) Em umanddisco com arquivos MP3/WMA, JPEG e "MP42 DivX ". Country Language Code List . .. .. ..(MP3), 31 "MP43 ", "3IVX ", Logic”, the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby • Sampling frequency: “MP43 “, “3IVX n English is“Pro DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 Operation Troubleshooting . . .(WMA) . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33 Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright 1992- Foto Country Code List . . 31 Movie você pode alternar entre os menus Musica, within 24 48kHz Playing a DVD Videoreserved. CD. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19-22 . . 19 DVD or Video CD and Operation . . . . 1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Playable Audio format Troubleshooting . . -. 320kbps . . . . . . .(MP3), . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 • Bit rate: within 32 e Filme. aFeatures Pressione tecla General .Video . . . .TITLE . . . . ..e.. a.. .palavra . .. .. .. .. .. Música, . .. .20-22 Formatos de Áudio reproduzíveis Playing DVD and.afrom Manufactured license Digital Theater Systems, Inc.. . 19 .(WMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 zCD. "AC3 ", "DTS ",. "PCM ", "MP3Specifications ", 40 "WMA ". - 192kbps “Foto” eunder “Filme” no alto �No. Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . 20 General Features . . . .do .5,974,380, .menu . .• .Sampling . é. .destacada. . . . .. frequency: .. .. and .. .. .. 20-22 “AC3 “, “DTS “, “PCM “, “MP3 “, “WMA “. US Pat. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,978,762 within 32 - 48 kHz (MP3), other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and � to CHAPTER/TRACK .. .. .. .. .. 20 � Moving Moving to another another TITLE/GROUP .48kHz .“DTS 20 • Frequencia de amostragem: entre 8 - 48 kHz (MP3), within 24 .-Theater (WMA) Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital � Motion. . . . 2000 . .CHAPTER/TRACK . .Digital . . . .Theater . . . . . Systems, . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 � Slow Moving to another 20 Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, • Bit rate: within 32 - 320kbps (MP3), 32 - 48kHz (WMA) Picture and Inc. All � rights reserved. � Still Slow Motion. . . Frame-by-Frame . . . . . . . 40 . . .- .192kbps . . .Playback . . . .(WMA) . . . .. 20 20 wner’s • Faixa de Bit: entre 8 - 320kbps (MP3), 32 - 192kbps � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 � Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20 d the (WMA) � Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 loca� Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 OTES ON COPYRIGHTS: � .. .. .. .. .. .. ..show .. .. .. ,..broadcast .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 It is forbidden by lawA-B � Repeat Repeat .to. copy . .. .. .,. broadcast, 20 via cable, play in public, � Time Search .. .. .copyrighted .. .. .. .. .. .without dures � Repeat A-Bor. ..rent . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..material . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 21 permission. us radi� Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 � Marker Time Search 21 This product features. the developed � . . .copy . .. ..protection .. .. .. .. .. .. .function � Zoom. Marker. Search . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 21 by Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on some open Special DVD .. .. .. .. .. of .. ..these .. .. .. .discs � Zoom. . .Features .and . . .playing . . . .. .the . .. ..pictures . .. .. .. .. .. 22 21 discs. When recording OT � Title Menu . will . . appear. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 Special DVD Features 22 on a VCR, picture noise � Menu .. .. .. .. .. ..protection .. .. .. .. .. .. .technology .. .. .. .. 22 This product incorporates � Disc Title Menu .. ..copyright . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..that 22 ter is protected by method claims � .. .. ..other .. .. .. .. 22 � Changing Disc Menuthe . . Audio . . .of. certain . Language . . . .U.S. . . .patents . .. .. .. ..and 22 such intellectual property rights Macrovision � the Audio . .. Corporation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 � Changing Changing theowned AudiobyChannel Language 22 and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection tech� . the . . .Audio . . . . .Channel . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 � Subtitles Changing 22 nology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is DVD Audio Discs .. .. .. .. viewing .. .. .. .. .. uses .. .. .. ..only .. .. .unless �for Subtitles . other . . .. ..limited . .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 intended home and cted to otherwise by Macrovision DVDauthorized Audio Discs . . . . . . .Corporation. . . . . . . . .Reverse . . . . . . . . . 22 1 0:00:00 1 / 12 DIVX List Movie Folder 1 Movie Folder 2 Movie Folder 3 1 / 12 Movie Folder 4 Movie Folder 5 Introduction Introduction Usando este aparelho de DVD você pode reproduzir discos Introduction DivX Disc Operation DivX Movie. Safety Precautions .........................2 Introduction Movie Folder 6 Movie Folder 7 er 1 Movie Folder 8 er 2 er 3 er 4 er 8 2 3 4 engineering or disassembly is prohibited. SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located on the back 26 unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available of this to others. You should record requested information here and retain this guide as a permanent record of your purchase. 27 Operação er 5 er 6 er 7 Ajuste das Caixas Acústicas Introduction Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 This chapter includes importantimportantes reference information Este capítulo contém informações que lhe of you Contents . .DVD/CD . . . . . . .receiver. .................3 . . . . . . . Table . .to23help set your ajudarão no ajuste do seu equipamento. Disc . . . Before . . 23 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Playable Discsacústica ...........................4 da Caixa . . . . . . . Ajuste . .Speaker 23 Setup Precautions . . . .O. .menu . . . . Setup . . . . .aparecerá. ..............5 SETUP. . . . . . . . 1. . . Pressione 23 Notes Discs .settings . . . . . . for . . .the . . built-in . . . . . .5.1 . . .channel .....5 theon following . . . . . . . . .Make 23 ) para selecionar 2. surround Use as teclas (/ decoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .a.opção About Symbols . . . . .Áudio . . . . e, .5 . . . . . . . . . 23 pressione a tecla.() Panel and Rear Panel . . . para . . . .ir. ao . . segundo .......6 . . . . . . . Front . . em 24 seguida, Control Overview . . menu . . . . .appears. .............7 . . . . . . . Remote . .1.nível. 24Press SETUP. The setup . . . . . . . 3. . . Use 24 as teclas (/) para selecionar a segunda opção v / V to select the AUDIO option then press . . . . . . . Preparation . .2.de 24Use ajuste da caixa acústica to the second(Speaker level. Setup) e, em se. . . . . . . Connections . . 24B to move . . . .a. tecla . . . . () . . . para . . . .mudar . . . . .para . . . .o.terceiro . . 8-13 guida, pressione . . . . . . . . .3.24 Use v / V to select TV Connections . . .the .estará . .Speaker . . .destacada. . . . Setup . . . . . option . . . . . then ...8 nível. A palavra “Select” . . . . . . . . . 25 press BEquipment to move to Connections the third level. .“Select” Optional . . . . . .is. . . . . 9 . . . . . . . 4. . . Pressione 25 a tecla ENTER e o menu 5.1 Speaker Setup highlighted. Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 t . . . . . . . . aparecerá. 25 SpeakerENTER Systemand Connection . . . Setup . . . . .menu . . . . . 11-12 5.1 Speaker st . . . . . . .4.25Press � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . 26appears. � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . 27 � Setting a ID AUDIO of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . 28 � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11 . . . . . . . . . 28 � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Frontal Colunas Speaker FrontEL . . . . . . . Speaker . . 28 Positioning. . Pequeno . Large . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Tamanho Size . . . . . . . Before . . 28 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Volume dB Volume 0 . . . . . . . . . 29 Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Surround Distância Distance m(ft) 0 0.6(2) . . . . . . . . . 29 Mode . . .Teste . . Test . . . .Desligado . .Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . 29 Sound Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Selecionar Select Move Return Enter Mover . . . . . . . . . 30 Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19 . . . . . . . . . 30 � General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 as teclas (/) selecionar a caixa acústica b / B to selectpara the desired speaker. . . . . . . . 5. . .5.Use 30Use � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . desejada. 30 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 6. Adjust options using v / V / b / B buttons. . . . . . . . . . 30 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 /// 6. Ajuste as ENTER opções usando as teclas to confirm your selection. Returns to . . . . . . . . .7.30Press � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 previous menu. ithin ENTER para confirmar a sua seleção e . . .an . . . . 7. . . Pressione 30the � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 er s ay be ..... electric retornar ao menu anterior. Speaker selection Operation . . . .Select 31 a speaker that you want to adjust. (Front DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 Seleção da(Left), Caixa acústica . . . . . . . . .speakers 31 Center Speaker, Front speakers Playing a DVD and Video CD. ajustada.(caixas . . . . . . . . . . . . acús. . 19 Selecione a caixa acústica que será (Right), Rear speakers (Right), Rear speakers (Left), . . . . . . . 32-33 General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22 iangle frontais (Esquerda) e (Direita), caixa acústica Central, .ce. of. . . . . ticas . .or34SubWoofer) � Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20 About the symbols for instructions caixas acústicas Traseiras (Esquerda), caixas acústicas Note: ng) � Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . 20 the Certain speaker prohibited Traseiras (Direita) esettings Subwoofer � Slow Motion. .likely . . .are .to. .(Inferior)). . . . . .harm . . .by . to .the . the . .Dolby . unit . . . 20 Indicates hazards cause Digital licensing agreement. � Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20 CK N OR pace wner’s d the loca- ures s radi- pen OT Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Distância Distance Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . .receiver, . . . 23 Se você conectou as caixas acústicas ao seu DVD If you connected � Pause speakers . . . . reconhece . . . .to. .your . . a. DVD/CD .distância . . . . . . receiver, .necessária . . . . . . . .para 23 o ajuste da distância setting the Distance the speakers � Moving to lets another Track . .know . . . . how . . . .far . . . . . 23 o ponto de origem do aparelho. Assim, o som de thealcançar sound has to travel to reach your set listening � Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 cadaThis caixa acústica será ao point. allows the � Search. . . .sound . . . emitido . .from . . . .each . . mesmo . .speaker . . . .tempo. . . to . . . . . . 23 reach the listener at the same (1 ft=30,48 JPEG Disc Operation . . . time. . cm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Press b / B toaadjust Distance selected Pressione/ parathe ajustar Viewing JPEG disc . .a. distância . . .of. the . . .da . . caixa . . . . acústica . . . . . 24 speaker. � Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 selecionada. [0.3m(1ft) - 6.0m(20ft)] � Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Teste� To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Test Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 b / B ENTER to test the signals of speaker. Adjust Press Pressione para testar oseach sinais Repeat Tracks. . . .signals .de . .cada . . . .caixa . . . . . 25 the volume to Programmed match the volume of test acústica. Ajuste o volume para combinar os sinais Erasing a Track from Programme List . . . . dos . . . . 25 memorized in the system. testes memorizados no sistema. Erasing the� Complete . . . . . . . 25 Center �Programme Front RightList (R) � Front Left (L) DivX Operation .. . (L) . .Frontal .�. .SubWoofer . . Direita(D) ....... . . . . 26 Frontal � Rear. .(E) Left RearDisc Right (R)Esquerda Speaker Setup . . .. .Traseira . . . . . . Esquerda . . . . . . . (E) . . . . . . . . . . 27 Central You can adjust the volume during operating the test Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 DireitaVolume (D) Subwoofer tone, first vTraseira / V toMemory select Lastuse Condition . . . . . or . . Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Você podeuse ajustar o nível do volume, enquanto executa o b/B option then Screen Saver . . buttons . . . . . . to . .select . . . . .volume . . . . . .or. . . . . . 28 speaker, thatPrimeiro all testeControlling desotom. thespeaker’s TVuse . . .as.volume .teclas . . . . / .is. same . . .para . .from . selecionar . . . . . . 28a theOperation listener’s position. opção Volume ouRadio Caixas .Acústicas, with . . . . . . . em . . . seguida . . . . . . pressione . . . . . 29 DuringPresetting operating the the radio test tone, if you . então . adjust . . . .o. the . . . . . .de . .todas . 29 /para selecionar um stations dos dois, volume volume, it will be paused in the current speaker Listening to theserá radioo .mesmo, . . . . . .a. partir . . . . da . . posição . . . . . . do . 29 as caixas acústicas channel. Other ouvinte.Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Sleep Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Durante o teste de tom, se você ajustar o volume, ele pára Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 no canal Mute da . . caixa . . . . acústica . . . . . . .atual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Using the Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Selecting the Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Reference Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 itself or other material damage. � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 otas: Indicates special � Repeat . . . .operating . . . . . . .features . . . . . .of. .this . . .unit. . . . . . . 20 Size � Repeat A-B settings . . . . . . acústicas . . . fixed, . . . . são .you . . proíbidos . cannot . . . . . . .pelo . 21 • Since Alguns ajustes the speaker Indicates tips das and caixas hints forare making the task easier. � Time Search . . Dolby . . . . .Digital. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 change the contrato de settings. licença da � Marker Search . . . Dolby . . . . Laboratories. . . . . . . . . . “Dolby”, . . . . . . 21 Manufactured under license.from “Pro Logic”, and the � Zoom. . .double-D . . . . . . symbol . . . . . are . . .trademarks . . . . . . . of. .Dolby . . . . 21 Volume Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright 1992Laboratories. Specialdas DVDCaixas Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Tamanho Acústicas 1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. � Title Menu . . . .the . .ou . . grande), . . . .level . . .não . . the .pode . . selected . .ser . . . . 22 b /éBfixo to adjust output of O Press tamanho (pequeno Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Disc Menu .5,956,674, . . . . . . .5,974,380, . . . . . . .5,978,762 . . . . . . .and .... speaker. (-6dB ~ +6dB) US Pat.�No. 5,451,942 modificado pelo usuário. other worldwide patents andLanguage pending. “DTS” � Changing theissued Audio . . . .and . . .“DTS .... Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater � Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Volume Subtitles ........................... Inc. All � rights reserved. 22 22 22 22 Pressione ajustar DVD/ Audiopara Discs . . o. .nível . . .de . .saída . . . .da. .caixa . . . acústica . . . . . . 22 selecionada (-6dB ~ +6dB) OTES ON COPYRIGHTS: It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without permission. This 28product features the copy protection function developed by Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on some discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs on a VCR, picture noise will appear. 33 Operation Introduction Ajuste das Caixas Acústicas 5.1 Introduction title 5.1 Speaker Setup CK N OR pace wner’s d the loca- ures s radi- pen OT er such cted to Introduction Memória da condição anterior CAUTION Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Introduction Este aparelho de DVD .memoriza os. ajustes OF ELECTRIC SHOCKfeitos para o Table Contents .RISK .. .. .NOT SafetyofPrecautions . .. .. DO . .. .. .OPEN . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32 último disco. Os na memória mesmo. 3 Before . . ajustes . . . . .. ..permanecem Table ofUse Contents .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5 que o disco Playable Discs . .aparelho . ..REDUCE . ..RISK .4 Before Useseja . . removido . .CAUTION: .. .. .. .. .. do .. .TO .. .. .. .. .. de ..THE .. .DVD, .. .. ..ou .. ..este .. .. .. 4-5 . .você .. .. ..OF .. ..ELECTRIC .. .. .. um .. .. ..disco ..SHOCK .. .. ..que .. .. .. tenha .. .. .. .. ..suas .. .. .. .. 54 sejaPrecautions desligado.Discs Se inserir Playable DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK) About the symbols for instructions Notes on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .a.PARTS ..reprodução .. .. .. ..INSIDE .. .. .. .. .inicia-se últimas configurações Precautions . . ..memorizadas, . .. .. .. .. 55 NO. USER-SERVICEABLE About Symbols ..ponto ..likely .. .. .. em ..to.. TO ..que .. .QUALIFIED .. ..harm .. .. .. ..SERVICE .. .. the .. .. ..unit .. .. .. .. 55 Notes on Discs . ..parou. exatamente noREFER últimoSERVICING Indicates hazards cause to PERSONNEL. Front Panel andmaterial Rear About . . .Panel . damage. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65 itself orSymbols other Remote Control . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76 Front Panel and Overview Rear Panel This lightning flash features an Indicates special operating otas: Remote Control Overview . .with . . .arrowhead . . .of. .this . .symbol .unit. . . . .within ...7 equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user –Preparation OsIndicates ajustes armazenados na memória podem ser utilizaabout thehints presence of uninsulated dangerous tips and for making the task easier. dos a qualquervoltage be Connections .momento. . . . . within . . . . the . . .product’s . . . . . .enclosure . . . . . . that . . .may . 8-13 Preparation ofde sufficient magnitude Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. –Connections Este DVD TVaparelho Connections . ..não . .. ..memoriza . .. .. .. to . ..constitute . .os . .. ..ajustes . .. .a. “Dolby”, .risk . de . of . ..electric ..8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 shock to persons. “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Optional Equipment .. ..iniciar .. ..1992.. .. ..a.. .. 98 um disco, seConfidential você desligar TV Connections . . Connections . o. .gravador . . . .works. . . antes . . .Copyright . .. ..de Laboratories. Unpublished Aerial Connections .Connections . . mark . reserved. . . .within . . . .an .. ..equilateral .. .. .. .. .. .. ..triangle .. .. 10 1997 Dolby Laboratories. All. rights The exclamation Optional .9 reprodução doEquipment disco. is intended of Speaker System Connection .Theater . ..the .presence Aerial Connections .to . alert . .Digital . the . .não .user .. ..funciona ..about .. .. .Systems, .. .em .. ..alguns ..Inc. .11-12 . . 10 Manufactured under license from - A memória da condição anterior important operating and maintenance (servicing) US Pat. 5,451,942 5,956,674, �No. Transmitter. . Connection . . . . . .5,974,380, . . . .. .. .. ..5,978,762 . . 11 Speaker .. .. .. .. .. .. ..and .. .. 11-12 discos de DVDSystem instructions in the accompanying other worldwide patents issued andinstructions pending. “DTS” and “DTS the � a channel � Changing Transmitter. . . . . .trademarks . .of. Transmitter . . . . of . . Digital . . . .. .Theater . .. .. .. .. .. .. 11 Digital Surround” are registered product. - A função memória daof condição anterior um título 11 Systems, Inc. Copyright 2000ofDigital � a ID Transmitter . Theater . . para . . . .Systems, � Setting Changing a 1996, channel Transmitter . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11 11 Inc. All � rights reserved. anterior de DVD apagada, assim que diferente and Connecting WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR � Assembling Setting aé ID of Transmitter . ELECTRIC .toum . .the . título . Speakers . . .SHOCK . . . . . 11 11 for reproduzido. HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11 MOISTURE. OTES ON COPYRIGHTS: Speaker Positioning. . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 13 � Speaker Connections. 12 , broadcast show ItBefore is forbidden by law to copy Operation . install . .. .,. broadcast, . .. .. equipment Speaker Positioning. .. .copyrighted .. .. .. .. .. material .. .. in .. ..a..confined ..without .. .. .. .. .14-19 . . 13 WARNING: Do not this space via cable, play in public, or rent Mini Glossary for. .Audio Before . .similar . . Stream . . unit. ....& . . Surround . . . . . . . . . 14-19 suchOperation as a book case or permission. Mode . features . . tela . . . .aparece . . copy .Audio . . protection .quando . Stream . . . . .você .& . . Surround . . developed . . .o. DVD . . . .no . 14 This product the function Mini Glossary for O protetor de deixa by Macrovision. Sound ..protection .. .. .. .. .. .. .signals .. .. ..recorded .. .. .. .. .. ..on.. ..some .. .. .. .. 14 Mode . Mode . .Copy . . .muito . .. .. .. .. are 14 modo parado por tempo. discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs On-Screen Sound Mode Display . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15 14 on a VCR, picture noise will appear. Initial SettingsDisplay . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-19 On-Screen This product incorporates copyright protection technology that . . 15 � General Operation . .. .. ..patents . .. 16-19 . . 16 Initial Settings .claims . . . . of . ..certain .. .. .. .. .U.S. .. .. .. .. ..and .. .. .other is protected by method CAUTION: � . . owned . . . . ..by .. ..Macrovision .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Corporation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16 intellectual property receiver rights � Language General Operation 16 This DVD/CD employs a laser system. and other rights owners. � Display . . . . Use . .. .. .. .. .. .protection . .. .. .. .. .. ..tech�ensure Language .. ..of ..of ..this ..this .. product, .. .copyright .. .. owner’s .16-17 . . 16 proper .use please read and this nologyTomust be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, is. . 17 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . � Display . . .other . . retain . limited . . . it. for .viewing . .future . . . uses .reference. . . only . . . unless . Should . . . 16-17 manual carefully the intended for home and and � (Parental .. ..authorized .. .. .. .. Reverse .. .. ..service .. .. .. .. ..loca.. 18 unit require maintenance, � Lock Audio. . . by . . Macrovision . . Control) . . .contact . . .Corporation. . ..an 17 otherwise authorized tion (see service procedure). � . . . . . . .isControl) .prohibited. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19 � Others Lock (Parental 18 engineering or disassembly Protetor de tela Performing � Otherscontrols, . . . . . adjustments, . . . . . . . . .or. .carrying . . . . .out . . procedures . . . . . . 19 other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiSERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located on the back ation exposure. of this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available DVD or You Video CD exposure Operation . . . beam, . . . . .do. .here . . .and . to. 19-22 to others. should requested To prevent directrecord to laserinformation not try open retain this guide aVisible permanent record Playing a as DVD and Video CD. . . 19 DVD orenclosure. Video CD Operation . . of . ..your .. .. ..purchase. ..open. .. .. .. ..DO .. .. NOT .. 19-22 the laser radiation when General . . . . .CD. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22 STARE INTO BEAM. Playing aFeatures DVD and. .Video . . 19 Model No. ___________________________________ � Moving to another . . 20 General Features . . . .TITLE/GROUP . . . . not . . .be. .exposed . . .. .. .. to .. ..water .. 20-22 CAUTION: The apparatus should Serial No. ___________________________________ � to .. 20 � Moving Moving to another another TITLE/GROUP . .liquids, . .. .. .. ..such 20 (dripping or splashing) andCHAPTER/TRACK no objects filled with Slow Motion. . . . .CHAPTER/TRACK . . the . . .apparatus. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 as� should be .placed on �vases, Moving to another 20 � and � Still SlowPicture Motion. . . Frame-by-Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Playback . . . . . . . .. 20 20 � . .product . and . . . .Frame-by-Frame . . . not . . .be. .used . . . outdoor, . . Playback . . . .restricted . . . .. 20 CAUTION: This may � Search. Still Picture 20to indoor use only. � .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20 � Repeat Search. 20 Operation Operation � � Repeat Repeat A-B . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 20 � Search � Time Repeat A-B . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 21 � Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 � Marker Time Search 21 � . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 � Zoom. Marker. Search 21 Special DVD � Zoom. . .Features . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 21 � TitleDVD MenuFeatures . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 Special 22 � � Disc Title Menu Menu .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 � � Changing Disc Menuthe . . Audio . . . . . Language . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 � . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 � Changing Changing the the Audio Audio Channel Language 22 � . . .Audio . . . . .Channel . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 �2Subtitles Changing. the 22 DVD Audio Discs � Subtitles . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Controlando a TV Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 O seu controle remotoCD pode operar tanto o seu DVD Home Playing an Audio and MP3/WMA Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . Disc . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 Theater system como as � Pause . . . . algumas .CD . . .and . . .funções . . . . . .de . . sua .Disc . . TV. . .. ..siga .. .. .. 23 Playing an .Audio MP3/WMA 23 instruções abaixo para operar a sua TV LG. � � Moving Pause .to. .another . . . . . . Track . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 � . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 � Repeat Moving Track/All/Off. to another Track 23 � . . o. .controle . . . . . .remoto, .. .. .. .. .. .pressione .. ..tecla .. .. .. 23 1. Antes de usar � Search. Repeat Track/All/Off. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. a 23 JPEG .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..a.. ser .. .. ..operado. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Para .. .. 24 �Disc Search. . . . . . .o..dispositivo 23 TV paraOperation selecionar Viewing JPEG disc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 JPEG DiscoaOperation mudar modo de operação do controle (operar um24 � SlideaShow . disc . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 Viewing JPEG dispositivo diferente), certifique-se de pressionar a 24 � � Still SlidePicture Show .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 24 tecla TV primeiro. � to another � Moving Still Picture . . . . . file . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 24 � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 2. As� teclas POWER, CH. ,. VOLUME To rotate picture. . . . . . . . e. .INPUT . . . . . do . . controle . . . 24 Repeat Tracks. .. .. ..TV .. .. .LG. Programmed . . operar . . . . .. .a . ..sua . .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 remoto Programmed sãoPlayback usadas para Erasing a Track from Programme Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 Erasing Complete List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 Erasing acódigos Track from List 25 Ajustando osthe para Programme aProgramme TV LG DivX Disc Operation . . .for . . . instructions . . . . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26 Erasing the Complete Programme 25 About symbols •Speaker Segure athe tecla POWER e pressione PR/CH(+/-) repetidaSetup . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27 DivX Disc Operation 26 menteSetup até a .TV Indicates hazards Additional Information .. to .. .. cause .. .. .. .. ..harm .. .. .. .. .to .. .. .. 28 Speaker . .ligar . .likely . .e..desligar. . .. .the . .. .. unit 27 itselfCondition or other material damage. Last Memory Additional Information . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 Screen Saver . .Memory .operating . . . . . .. ..features .. .. .. .. .. .. of .. ..this .. .. ..unit. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 Last Condition 28 Indicates special otas: Controlling the. TV Screen Saver . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 Se o Indicates controle remoto não operar a sua TV, tente um outro Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Controllingtips theand TVhints . . . for . . .making . . . . . the . . .task . . . easier. . . . . . . 28 código. ou use o controle remoto originalmente fornecido Presetting theRadio radio stations Operation with . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 29 Manufactured license from “Dolby”, comListening a sua TVunder LG. (LG e Gold Star) to the radio . . .Dolby . . .. .Laboratories. .. .. .função .. .. ..vários .. .. .. 29 the radio stations .em . .. .. .. .. ..dos 29 “Pro Presetting Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Other Functions. . fabricantes, .Unpublished . . .. .. .. .. .. ..NOSSA .. .. .. .. ..Copyright ..EMPRESA .. .. .. .. .. 1992.. .. .. .. 30 códigos usados Listening topelos the. radio 29 Laboratories. Confidential works. Sleep Timer .. .. .reserved. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..com .. .. .. todos .. .. .. .. ..os 30 1997 Dolby Laboratories. Other Functions. . . All . . .rights . ..remoto . .. .. funcione 30 não garante que oSetting controle Dimmer . . .LG. .Setting . . . . . from .. .. .. .Digital .. .. .. .. .. Systems, .. .. .. .. .. .. .Inc. SleepdeTimer . .. .. .. ..Theater . .. .. 30 30 Manufactured under license modelos TV US Pat. No.. 5,451,942 Mute . .. .. .. .. .. ..5,956,674, .. .. .. .. .. .. ..5,974,380, .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 5,978,762 .. .. .. .. .. .. ..and .. .. .. .. 30 Dimmer 30 other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS Using .. .. .. ..Theater .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Mute .the . . Headphone . are . . .registered . . . . . .Jack . . . . .. .. .. ..of.. ..Digital 30 Digital Surround” trademarks Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Selecting the Input Source . .. .. .. ..Theater .. .. .. .. ..Systems, .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Using the Headphone JackDigital 30 Inc. XTS All rights reserved.True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 (Excellent Selecting the Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 XTS . . . . . .True . . . .Sound) . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 XTS pro (Excellent 30 OTES ON XTS pro . .COPYRIGHTS: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 It is forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast Reference via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Reference permission. This product features the. copy Country Code List . .. .. ..protection .. .. .. .. .. .. function .. .. .. .. .. ..developed .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31 Language Code List 31 by Macrovision. Copy .protection signals are recorded on some Troubleshooting Country Code List. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33 . . 31 discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Troubleshooting . .will . . appear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 on a VCR, picture noise Specifications . . . . copyright . . . . . . .protection . . . . . . technology . . . . . . . that . . . . 34 This product incorporates is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located on the back of this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available to others. You should record requested information here and retain this guide as a permanent record of your purchase. Model No. ___________________________________ Serial No. ___________________________________ 29 Introduction Introduction iangle ce of ng) the Informação adicional Operação ithin an er s ay be electric Operação comwith o Rádio Operation Operation with Radio Radio Introductionas estações de rádio Prefixando Presetting Presetting the the radio radio stations stations Ouvindo o rádio Listening Listening to to the the radio radio Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Você pode prefixar 50. estações para FM e.pode AM. .(MW). Prefixe estações de rádio primeiramente naDisc memória do Playing an Audio CDin . . . memory . . 23 of Contents . . stations . . . . . . for .for . .FM . . .and . .AM . . .(MW). . . .Before 3 You can can preset preset 50 50 stations FM and AM (MW). Before . . . . . . . Table . . 23You Preset Preset radio radio stations stations inand the theMP3/WMA DVD/CD DVD/CD Receiver’s Receiver’s memory Antes deUse sintonizar, certifique-se do Receptor de DVD/CD � (see Pause . . . . . (veja . . radio . . “Prefixando . . stations” .stations” . . . . . .“estações . . the .the . . left). .left). . de . . rádio . . 23 .make . . . .sure . . . .that . . .you . . de .have . .que . . turned .o. nível . . . down .down . . volume . .the . 4-5 tuning, make sure that you have turned the volvolfirst first (see “Presetting “Presetting radio on on Disc . . . Before . . 23tuning, baixo. Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 à esquerda). � Moving to another Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playable ume. ume. . . . . . . . esteja . . 23 Press Press BAND BAND until until AM AM (MW) (MW) or or FM FM appears appears in in the the � Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . 23 Press Press BAND BAND on on the the remote remote control control until until FM FM or or display display window. window. � Search.BAND . . . . . até . . .AM . . .(MW) . . . . ou . . .FM . . aparecer . . . . . . . na . 23 Notes on Discs . .no . . controle . . . . . . .remoto . . . . . .até . . .FM . . ou . . .AM .5 Pressione BAND 1 Pressione . . . . . . . 1. . 23 AM AM (MW) (MW) appears appears in in the the display display window. window. The The last last received received station station is is tuned tuned in. in. JPEG Disc Operation About Symbols na . . janela . . . . . do . . .Display . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . 23 (MW) aparecer janela do display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Viewing a PR( JPEG disc . . . . . . . .on . . the . . . remote . . . . . . control . . 24 And Andand then then every every time time.you you press press BAND, BAND, FM FM and and Panel Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 D D//E E Press Press PR( ) ) repeatedly repeatedly on the remote control . . . . . . . 2Front . . 24Então, cada vez que você pressiona BAND, FM e A última estação recebida é sintonizada. AM AM (MW) (MW) changes changes. alternately. � to Slide Show . . . . . .station . . . . . .you . . .want. . . . . . . . . . 24 Control Overview .alternately. ..................7 to select select the the. preset preset station you want. . . . . . . . Remote . . 24AM (MW) muda alternadamente. � Each Still . . . .the . . button, .button, . . . . the . . .DVD/CD . . . . . .Receiver . . . . 24 EachPicture time time you you.press press the the DVD/CD Receiver . . . . . . . . . 24 Press Press and and hold hold TUNING TUNING or or on on 2 Pressione PRESET(/) repetidamente ou tunes in in one one preset preset station station at time. � tunes Moving to another file .at . a.a.time. . . . . . . . . no . . .contro. . 24 . . . . . . . 3Preparation . . 24Pressione e segure TUNNING the the front front panel panel for for about about two two seconds secondsdois until until the the le� remoto para selecionar a. estação frontal durante aproximadamente To rotate picture. . .by . . rotating .rotating . . . . .VOLUME . .prefixada. . . . . . on .on . .the 24 . . . . . . . Connections . . 24no painel Adjust Adjust the the volume volume by VOLUME the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 frequency frequency indication indication starts starts to to change, change, then then Programmed Playback .pressing . tecla, ....o . .aparelho . . . . . . .de.++.DVD/CD . . --. on .on 25the A cada acionamento da segundos até que a indicação de freqüência . . . . . . . . . 24 front front panel panel or or by by pressing VOLUME VOLUME or or the TV Connections .........................8 release. release. Repeat Programmed Tracks. . .de . .cada . . . .vez. . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . 25 sintoniza as estação prefixadas comece a mudar, então libere a tecla. remote remote control control repeatedly. repeatedly. Scanning Scanning stops stops when when the the DVD/CD DVD/CD tunes Optional Equipment Connections . Receiver .Receiver . . . . . .tunes . . . .inin9aa Erasing a Track from Programme List . . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . 25 A busca pára quando o. Receptor sintoniza station. station. “TUNED” “TUNED” and “STEREO” stereo program) Aerial Connections . and . . .“STEREO” . . .de. DVD/CD . . . (for .(for . . stereo . . . . .program) . uma . . 10 To To turn turnthe off offComplete the the radio radioProgramme List . . . . . . . 25 Erasing t . . . . . . . . 25 estação. “TUNED” eConnection “STEREO” (para appear appear in in the the display display window. window. 3 Press Ajuste o volume girando VOLUMEReceiver no painel frontal Speaker System . . .programa . . . . . . estéreo) . . . . 11-12 Press POWER to to turn turn off DivX DiscPOWER Operation . . the .the . . DVD/CD .DVD/CD . . . . . . Receiver . . . . . . . off . . or .or. 26 st . . . . . . . 25apareça na janela do display. � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 ou pressionando +.ou no select select another another function mode AV etc.,). Speaker Setup . .function . . . VOLUME . . .mode . . . . (DVD/CD, .(DVD/CD, . . -. repetidamente . . .AV . . 1, .1,. etc.,). . . . . 27 . . . . . . . . . 26 � Changing Press Press PROG./MEMO. PROG./MEMO. on on the the remote remote control. control. a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11 controle remoto. Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . 4. . 27Pressione AA preset preset number will will flash flash the the display window. PROG./MEMO. noinincontrole � Setting a number ID of Transmitter . . .display . . . remoto. . .window. . . . . . . 11 To To listen listen to to non-preset non-preset radio stations Last Condition Memory . . radio . . . . . stations . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . . . 28 � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11 Um número prefixado piscará na janela do display. � � Use Useestações manual manual or automatic step 2. Screen Saver .or . .automatic . . . . .não . . tuning .tuning . . . . in .in. step . . . .2. . . . . . . 28 Escutar de rádio prefixadas . . . . . . . . . 28 � Speaker D//E E)) on Press Press PR PR ((D on the the select Connections. . . remote .remote . . . . . control .control . . . . . to .to. .select 12 thetuning, TV . .press . ou . . automática . TUN(-) .TUN(-) . . . . .b . .or . .TUN . . . .(+) .2.. B .B28 �Use For For amanual manual tuning, press b or TUN (+) on on . . . . . . . Speaker . . 28 • �Controlling sintonia manual no passo the the preset preset number number want. Positioning. . . . . . . you .you . . .want. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 o PRESET (/) no controle remoto with with Radio Radio Operation with control Radio .repeatedly. .Pressione . . . . . . . TUN . . . . (-) . . . .TUN . . . .(+) . 29 the the remote remote control repeatedly. . Operation .Operation . . . . . 5Before . . 28Pressione • Para sintonia manual, Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Presetting the radio stations . . . hold .hold . . .TUN(-) .....b .b. or .or29 para selecionar o número prefixado. Press Press PROG./MEMO. PROG./MEMO. on on the the remote remote control control . . . . . . . . . 29 � �no For For automatic automatic tuning, tuning, press press.and and TUN(-) controle remoto repetidamente. Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Surround Listening the radio . . .seconds . . . . . . on .on . .the . . .remote . . . . . 29 again. .Presetting . . . . . . . . 29 B B for for about about .two two seconds the remote TUN TUN (+) (+)to Presetting the the to to the the radio radio Mode .again. . . radio .radio . . . . . .stations .stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Listening .Listening . . 14 • Para sintonia automática, Pressione TUN (-) TUN Othercontrol. Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 The The station station is is stored. stored. . . . . . . . 6. . 29 control. Pressione PROG./MEMO. Sound Mode . . . . . . . . . .no . . controle . . . . . . .remoto . . . . . . . . 14 (+)inTimer aproximadamente Sleep Setting .Receiver’s . . . . . . dois . . memory .memory .segundos, . . . . . . . .no . . . 30 You can preset 50 50stations stationsfor forFM FMand andAM AM(MW). (MW).Before Before Preset Presetradio radiostations stations inpor the theDVD/CD DVD/CD Receiver’s .You . . .can . . .preset . . 30novamente. Repeat Repeat Display steps steps 33 .to to to store other On-Screen . .66. to . . store . . . . .other . . . . stations. .stations. . . . . . 15 controle tuning, make sure surethat thatyou youhave haveturned turneddown downthe thevolvolfirst first(see (see“Presetting “Presetting radio radio Dimmer .remoto. . stations” .stations” . . . . . .on .on . the .the . . left). .left). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 .tuning, . . . . .make . . . 30 Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19 To To select select a a preset preset radio radio station station directly directly A estação é armazenada. ume. Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 .ume. . . . . . . . . 30 � General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Press PressBAND BAND until AM(MW) (MW) or orFM FMbuttons appears appears in the the 16 You Youuntil can canAM use use the the number number buttons on onin the the remote remote control control Using the Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . Press . Press . . . . BAND . BAND 30 � Language Selecionar estação rádio. .directly. prefixada on onthe theremote remote control control until until FM FM or or display display window. window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 to to select selectuma aa preset preset radio radiode station station directly. diretamente To To tune tune in in a a station station with with a a weak weak signal signal 7 Repita os passos de 3 a 6 para armazenar outras Selecting the Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . AM . AM . . .(MW) . . 30appears pode usarisisastuned teclas no controle remoto (MW) appears in in. the The Thelast lastVocê received received station station tuned in. in.numéricas For For example, example, to to listen listen to to preset preset station station 4, 4, press press 44 on on the the � Display .the . . display .display . . . . . window. .window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Press Press TUNING TUNING or or repeatedly repeatedly in in step step 33 . . . . . . . . . 30estações. remote remote control. control. To To listen listen to to preset preset station station 19, 19, press press 11 para selecionar uma estação de rádio prefixada diretamen� Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 And And then then every every time time you you press press BAND, BAND, FM FM and and D D E E Press Press PR( PR( / / ) ) repeatedly repeatedly on on the the remote remote control control to to tune tune in in the the station station manually. manually. XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 then thenexemplo, 99 (within (withinpara 33 seconds). seconds). te.the Por awant. estação prefixada 4, Pressio(MW) changesalternately. alternately. to toselect select thepreset presetstation stationouvir you youwant. . . . AM . AM . . .(MW) . . 30changes Sintonizar uma.estação � Others . . . . . . com . . . . um . . . sinal . . . . fraco . . . . . . . . . . . Each 19 ne 4 no controle remoto. ouvirReceiver a estação prefixada 19, Eachtime time you you press press the the button, button, the thepara DVD/CD DVD/CD Receiver To To clear clear all all the the stored stored stations stations Reference For For your your reference reference Press Press and andhold hold TUNING TUNING or or on on Pressione TUNNING ou repetidamente tunes tunesininPressione one onepreset presetstation station atataatime. time. 1FM emprogram seguida 9is (em 3.segundos). Press Press and and hold hold PROG./MEMO. PROG./MEMO. for for about about two two seconds seconds Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 � � If If an an FM program is noisy noisy the thefront front panel panel for for about abouttwo two seconds seconds until untilthe the Operation passo 3 para sintonizar estação manualmente. and and “CLEAR “CLEAR ALL” ALL”ais is appeared appeared in in the the display display window window Adjust AdjustCountry the thevolume volume by byList rotating rotating VOLUME on Code . . .on .VOLUME .the . . .front . . . on .panel . .the .the . so . . that .that . . . . . . 31 Press Press MONO/ST. MONO/ST. on the front panel so . . . frequency . frequency . . . . . 31 indication indicationstarts startsto tochange, change,then then DVD and or CD Operation . . . . . again, . . . . . the . . .stations . . 19-22 andVideo then then press press PROG./MEMO. PROG./MEMO. again, the stations are are panel front front panel or by by pressing pressing +.+or on Troubleshooting . . VOLUME .VOLUME . . . . .in . .the .or .display .--.on . . the .the . . . . . . 32-33 Paraor sua referência "STEREO" "STEREO" disappears disappears in the display window. window. . . . release. . release. . . . . . 31 Playing a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . remote 19 cleared. cleared. Apagar todas armazenadas remoteSpecifications control repeatedly. repeatedly. . . no .no . .stereo . . FM . . .effect, . . . . .but .com . .the . ruídos . reception .reception . . . . . . .will 34 There There will will be be stereo effect, but the will ithin stops stops when whenas the theestações DVD/CD DVD/CDReceiver Receiver tunes tunesininaa •control Se um programa de estiver . . . an .Scanning .Scanning . . 32-33 General Features . .(for . . .stereo . . . .program) .program) . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22 er. . . station. eand segure PROG./MEMO. aproximadamente dois improve. improve. Press Press the the button button again again to to restore restore the theque stereo stereo “TUNED” and “STEREO” “STEREO” (forstereo you have have accidentally accidentally entered entered into into the the “CLEAR “CLEAR ALL” ALL” . station. . . . Pressione . .“TUNED” 34�� IfIf you Pressione MONO/ST, no painel frontal de forma To To turn turn off off the the radio radio �display Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20 s appear appear ininthe the display window. window. effect. effect. and and you you do do not not wish wish to to clear clearna the the memory, memory, do do not not POWERtoto segundos e “CLEAR ALL” aparecerá janela do display, turn turnthe theDVD/CD DVD/CD Receiver Receiver off offor or display. Não “STEREO” desapareça da janela do ay be � Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK . . Press .Press . . 20POWER press press any any key. key. After After a a few few seconds, seconds, the the “CLEAR “CLEAR ALL” ALL” � � To To improve improve reception receptionAV em seguida, pressione PROG./MEMO. novamente, as select select another another function function mode mode (DVD/CD, (DVD/CD, AV 1,1,etc.,). etc.,). electric haverá nenhum efeito de estéreo, mas a recepção � Slow Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Press PressPROG./MEMO. PROG./MEMO. on on the the remote remote control. control. display display will will go go off off by by itself itself and and change change to to mode. mode. Reorient Reorient the the supplied supplied antennas. antennas. estações sãoPicture apagadas. � Still Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20 melhorará. Pressione a tecla novamente para restabeAApreset presetnumber number will willflash flashininand the thedisplay display window. window. listento tonon-preset non-presetradio radiostations stations • Se� você acidentalmente não Search. . . . . . . . . . entrar . . . . .em . . “CLEAR . . . . . . .ALL” . . To .To .e.listen 20 iangle lecer o efeito estéreo. Use manualor orautomatic automatictuning tuningininstep step2.2. . . aremote .remote . . . . . control .control . .não . . . pressione .to . select .select . . . . .qualquer . . . �.�.Use . 20manual memória, ce of Press ote ote E PressPR PRdeseja (� (DD/Repeat /E ))apagar on onthe the to About the symbols ng) the � Repeat A-B . . . already . .for .segundos, . . instructions . been . . . . entered, .entered, . . . . .the . “CLEAR . �.FULL .For . 21manual � For manualtuning, tuning,press pressTUN(-) TUN(-)bbor orTUN TUN(+) (+)BBon on IfIf all all stations stations have have already been the FULL thepreset preset number number you you want. want. tecla. Depois de alguns a .exibição • control Melhorar recepção the remotecontrol repeatedly. repeatedly. � Time Search .likely . . .in .to .modo. . .display . . .harm . . window . . to . . the . . for . unit . .athe . 21remote message message will will eappear appear in the display window for athe ALL” apagará mudará a.the Indicates hazards cause Posicione melhor as antenas fornecidas . � Marker Search .aa.remote . . . . . number .number . . . . . will .will . . flash. . . . . �.�.For . 21automatic moment moment and and then then preset preset flash. Press PressPROG./MEMO. PROG./MEMO. on on the the remote control control For automatictuning, tuning,press pressand andhold holdTUN(-) TUN(-)bbor or itself or other material damage. � Zoom. . . .preset . . . . .number, . . . . . .follow . . . . .the . . steps .steps . . . .5-6 .TUN . as 21 To To change change. the the preset number, follow the 5-6 as (+) again. again. CK forabout abouttwo twoseconds secondson onthe theremote remote TUN (+)BBfor Indicates special operating Thestation station is isstored. stored. Special DVD Features . . .features . . . . . .of. .this . . .unit. . . . . .control. . 22 above. above. otas: N ORThe control. �todas Title Menu .store . . . .other . . estações . . stations. .stations. . . . . já . .estiverem . . . . . . . sido . . . 22 Se steps em as as Repeat Repeat steps 33to to 66memórias to to store other Indicates tips and hints for making the task easier. � Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 gravadas, a mensagem FULL aparecerá na janela do pace To Toselect selectaapreset presetradio radiostation stationdirectly directly � Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Manufactured under license from Dolby “Dolby”, display por um momento e então umLaboratories. número prefixado You Youcan canuse usethe thenumber numberbuttons buttonson onthe theremote remotecontrol control � Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . of. .Dolby . . . . 22 “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks totoselect selectaapreset presetradio radiostation stationdirectly. directly. piscará. ParaConfidential Mudar oa. número prefixado, To Totune tuneLaboratories. in inaastation station with with weak weak signal � Subtitles . .a .Unpublished . . . . .signal . . .works. . . . . Copyright .siga . . . os . . passos .1992. . . . 22 For Forexample, example,totolisten listentotopreset presetstation station4,4,press press44on onthe the 1997 DolbyAudio Laboratories. 5-6 como acima. Press PressTUNING TUNING or orDiscs All DVD . . rights .repeatedly .repeatedly . . reserved. . . . . . in .in.step .step . . .33. . . . . . . 22 remote remotecontrol. control.To Tolisten listentotopreset presetstation station19, 19,press press11 under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. tototune tuneininManufactured the thestation stationmanually. manually. then then99(within (within33seconds). seconds). US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and Introduction Introduction Operation 1 1 2 3 2 3 7 11 22 33 11 22 Operation Operation 4 5 6 33 44 55 66 77 other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS Surround” arestations registered trademarks of Digital Theater To Toclear clearDigital all allthe the stored stored stations For Foryour yourreference reference Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2000 Digital Theater Systems, Press Pressand and hold hold PROG./MEMO. PROG./MEMO. for forabout abouttwo twoseconds seconds Inc. All rights reserved. ��IfIfan anFM FMprogram programisisnoisy noisy wner’s 30ALL” and and“CLEAR “CLEAR ALL”isisappeared appearedininthe thedisplay displaywindow window d the and andthen thenpress pressPROG./MEMO. PROG./MEMO.again, again,the thestations stationsare are locaOTES ON COPYRIGHTS: cleared. cleared. Press PressMONO/ST. MONO/ST.on onthe thefront frontpanel panelso sothat that "STEREO" "STEREO"disappears disappearsininthe thedisplay displaywindow. window. 29 29 CK N OR pace wner’s d the loca- dures us radi- open OT ter such cted to ithin an er s ay be electric iangle ce of ng) the OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK) Introduction Ajuste do Sleep Timer NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE Safety Precautions . . . . . . .TO . .QUALIFIED . . . . . . . SERVICE .........2 Introduction REFER SERVICING Você podeContents ajustar o aparelho de DVD/CD para desligar Table . .. .. .. ..PERSONNEL. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32 SafetyofPrecautions automaticamente momento pré determinado. Before . . . em . . .um Table ofUse Contents .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5 .3 1Before Pressione marcar Playable . .. .para . .. .. ..flash . 4an Use Discs . SLEEP . . . .lightning .. .. .. with .. .. .a. arrowhead ..hora .. .. .. desejada. .. .. .. symbol .. .. .. .. ..within .. .. 4-5 This • Precautions O indicador SLEEP . . .. .. .. e..triangle .o. ..tempo .. .. ..is.. intended ..aparece .. .. .. .. ..to..na ..alert ..janela .. ..the .. ..user .do equilateral Playable Discs . .. .. .. 54 about Notes .. .. presence .. .. .. .. .. .. .of .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .dangerous display.on Discs Precautions . . .the . ..uninsulated . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 voltage. within .. .. product’s .. .. ..do .. .. SLEEP .. enclosure .. .. .. .. ..muda .. ..that .. ..na .may Notes on Discs . .. .. .o. ..the . .. .. .be . 55 2 About A cadaSymbols acionamento, tempo of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric About the symbols Front Panel and Rear .Panel About Symbols .for . . . instructions . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65 seguinte ordem. shock to. .persons. Remote Control Overview . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76 Front Panel and Rear Panel SLEEP 180 1501209080706050 Indicates hazards likely to cause harm to the unit The exclamation Remote Control Overview . . . within . . . . an . . equilateral . . . . . . .triangle ...7 itself or other material damage. 40302010OFF .mark is intended to alert the user about the presence of Preparation important operating and maintenance (servicing) Indicates special otas: Connections .instructions . . . .operating . . . in. .the . .features . . . . . .of. accompanying .this . . unit. . . . . . . 8-13 Preparation instructions the •Connections Você pode TV Connections .for . .. .. task . .. ..que ..8 product. . conferir . and . . . hints .. .. o..CAUTION .tempo .. ..making .. .. ..restante .. .. .the .. antes .. .. .easier. .. .. ..o8-13 Indicates tips aparelho de DVD/CD se desligue. Optional Equipment RISK TV Connections . . Connections .OF . .ELECTRIC . . . . . . SHOCK . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 98 DO NOT OPEN WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK Manufactured under licenseO.from Aerial Connections .Connections . .Dolby . . restante . .Laboratories. . . . . aparece .. .. .. ..“Dolby”, .. .. na .. .. .janela Pressione SLEEP. tempo Optional Equipment . .. .. 10 .9 HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE PRODUCT OR “Pro Speaker Logic”, andSystem the double-D symbol THIS are. trademarks ofTO Dolby Connection . ..RAIN Aerial Connections . . . TO . . REDUCE . . works. . .. .. ..THE .. .. ..RISK .. .. .. .1992.. .11-12 . . 10 doMOISTURE. display. CAUTION: Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Copyright � Transmitter. .OF .rights .ELECTRIC . . reserved. . . . . ..SHOCK . . 11 System.All Connection .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12 1997 Speaker Dolby Laboratories. DOa NOT COVER � channel Transmitter .. .. .. .. .. ..space .. .. 11 WARNING: Do not � Changing Transmitter. . install . REMOVE . . .this . .of.equipment . .Theater . . . (OR . .inSystems, .aBACK) . confined 11 Manufactured under from Digital NOlicense USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDEInc. as a book case similar unit. . . 5,978,762 � Setting a ID of or Transmitter . . . . .. .. ..and .. .. .. .. .. 11 US Pat.such 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, �No. Changing channel of 11 REFERa SERVICING TOTransmitter QUALIFIED SERVICE other worldwide patents issued and pending. to “DTS” and “DTS � Connecting PERSONNEL. � Assembling Setting IDoand of Transmitter .do .display .the . . Speakers .Theater .do . . painel . . . . 11 11 Digital Surround” area registered trademarks of. Digital Esta função mudará brilho da janela � Speaker Connections. . . . .Theater . to . . the . .Systems, .Speakers . . . . . . . 12 Systems, Copyright 1996, Digital � Inc. Assembling and 2000 Connecting 11 frontal, quando ligado. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Inc. All rights reserved. Speaker Positioning. DIMMER � Speaker . . arrowhead . . . . . . . .symbol . . . . within . . . 12 ThisConnections. lightning flash with an Pressione DIMMER repetidamente. Before . . ..triangle . ..alert equilateral SpeakerOperation Positioning. .. .. .. .. .. is .. ..intended .. .. .. .. .. .to .. .. .. the .. .. ..user .14-19 . . 13 OTES ON COPYRIGHTS: aboutfor the presence Mini Operation Glossary Before . .Audio . . . . Stream . . of . .uninsulated ..& . . Surround . . . .dangerous . . . . . 14-19 CAUTION: voltage be ,.broadcast ,. broadcast, It is forbidden Mode . .by. .law . .to. for .copy .within .Audio . .the . Stream .product’s . . .show ..& . enclosure . . . . . .that . . may . . . 14 Mini Glossary Surround Thisplay DVD/CD receiver employs a to laser system. of sufficient magnitude constitute a risk of electric via cable, in public, or rent copyrighted material without Sound Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 persons. permission. To ensure shock propertouse of this product, please read this owner’s On-Screen Display .. .. it..temporariamente .for .. .. .. .reference. .. .. .. ..de ..the 15 Pressione MUTE para som Sound Mode . .and .eliminar . retain . .protection . .. .future . function . .. .developed . .. .. ..o.. Should 14 This product features the copy manual carefully Initial Settings . . . . . . .signals .contact .an . .. .equilateral . .. .on . ..service . .. .. .triangle 16-19 by Copy protection The exclamation On-Screen Display ..mark .. .. .. are .within .. ..recorded .. .an .some .loca. 15 unit require maintenance, authorized seuMacrovision. aparelho de DVD/CD. discs.Initial When recording and is intended of � General Operation . ..the .presence . . 16 tion (see service Settings . procedure). . .playing . to. .alert .. .the ..pictures .. user .. .. .. about .. of .. ..these .. the .. .. .discs .. .. .. 16-19 on a VCR, pictureimportant noise.will appear. � . .operating . . . .. .. ..and .. .. or ..maintenance ..carrying .. .. .. .. .. out .. .. .(servicing) .. .. .. .. .. 16 Performing controls, adjustments, � Language General Operation .procedures 16 This product incorporates copyright technology that instructions in the protection instructions accompanying the � . . .claims . .. .. .. of . .. .. .patents .result . .and .hazardous other than those herein may � Display Language .specified .. ..certain .. .. .. .. .U.S. .. .. .. .in .. ..other .. .. .16-17 . .radi16 is protected by method product. ation exposure. � . .rights . .. .. .. owned . .. .. .. ..by.. .Macrovision . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Corporation . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-17 . . 17 intellectual property � Audio. Display . . Conecte um plugue de fone estéreo (3.5mm) no conector To prevent direct exposure to laser beam, do not try to open and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection tech� Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 PHONES. nology must be authorized Macrovision and the enclosure. laser HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE � . . Visible . . . .by .Control) . . . radiation . . THIS . .. ..Corporation, .PRODUCT .. .. .. ..open. .. .. ..TO ..DO .. RAIN ..isNOT .. .. ..OR 19 � Others Lock (Parental .when 18 intended foracústicas home and otherautomaticamente limited viewing usesdesligadas, only unless quanSTARE INTO BEAM. MOISTURE. As caixas � authorized Others . .by.são .Macrovision . . . . . . . Corporation. . . . . . . . . Reverse . . . . . . . . . . 19 otherwise CAUTION: The apparatus should not be exposed to water do você insere osDo fones de ouvido (não fornecidos). engineering or disassembly is prohibited. WARNING: not install this equipment in a confined space (dripping splashing) no objects filled with liquids, such as a or book or and similar unit. DVDsuch or vases, Video CDcase Operation . . apparatus. . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 as should be placed on. the SERIAL NUMBER: The and serialVideo numberCD. Playing a DVD . .. .. .. 19-22 . . 19 DVD or Video CD Operation . is. located . .. .. .. .. on .. .. the .. .. .back of this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available General Features . requested .Video . . . . .CD. .information . . .. .. .. .. ..here . .. ..and Playing a DVD and . .. .. .. .20-22 . . 19 to others. You should record CAUTION: This product may not be used outdoor, restricted to retain this guide asVideocassetes atopermanent purchase. VocêGeneral pode usar � Moving another . . 20 Features . . . record .TITLE/GROUP . ou . . outras .of. your . . . unidades . . . .. .. .. ..conecta.. .. 20-22 indoor use only. Moving CHAPTER/TRACK 20 das ao��AV 1, AV 2to ou conector Óptico. Veja .o.manual Moving toINanother another TITLE/GROUP . .. .. .. .. ..da 20 ModelCAUTION: No. ___________________________________ � Slow Motion. . .adicional . . .CHAPTER/TRACK . . . na . . .operação. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 � para Moving to another 20 unidade informação Serial This No. ___________________________________ � Picture and Frame-by-Frame DVD/CD � Still Slow Motion. . .employs . repetidamente . . . . a. .laser . . . system. . .no . .Playback . . . . . . . .. 20 20 Pressione AUX e receiver D.INPUT controle Search. . . .use . . of . .Frame-by-Frame . . .product, . . . . . please . . . . .read . . . this . . .owner’s . .. 20 To� proper this �ensure Stillselecionar Picture and Playback 20 remoto para a fonte de entrada desejada. manual carefully � .. .. and .. .. ..retain .. .. .. ..it..for .. .. future .. .. .. .. reference. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Should .. .. .. .. ..the 20 � Repeat Search. 20 a cada acionamento, o. modo unit require maintenance, � A-B .. .. .. ..contact .da .. ..função .. ..an .. ..authorized ..muda .. .. .. .. na .. ..service .seguinte .. .. .. ..loca.. 21 � Repeat Repeat . . . . . . 20 tion (see service procedure). sucessão: � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Performing controls,os adjustments, orde carrying out procedures • AV 1: por selecionar conectores sinal analógico de � Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 � Marker Time Search 21 other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radi� . Search . . (L/R) . . . ..&.. .VÍDEO .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 AV1 AUDIO IN � Zoom. Marker . .. .. .. .. ..IN 21 ation exposure. DVD Features ..conectores .. .. ..beam, .. .. .. ..do ..do ..not ..sinal .. .try ..open .. .. 22 Zoom. . .selecionar . exposure . . . . . . .os .to.. laser . .. .to .digital 21 • AVSpecial 1To�OPT: para prevent direct � enclosure. Title Menu . . .INlaser . .&. OPTICAL ..radiation .. .. .. .. .. ..when .. .. ... .open. .. .. .. 22 the Visible Special DVD Features . .. .. .. .DO . .. ..NOT 22 2 VÍDEO óptico AV1 IN STARE INTO BEAM. � Disc Menu .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 Title Menu • AV 2:� por selecionar os conectores do sinal analógico 22 � the .. .. .. .. .. ..to .. ..water .. .. .. 22 � Changing Disc Menu . . Audio . . . for . should . Language . .instructions . . be . . exposed 22 About the symbols CAUTION: The apparatus AV2 AUDIO (L/R) & VÍDEO IN. ..not � the Channel . .. ..with .. .. ..liquids, .. .. .. .. ..such .. 22 (dripping or splashing) and no objects filled � Changing Changing the Audio Audio Language 22 • AV Indicates 2as��OPT: por selecionar digital hazards likely unit vases, should on the Subtitles . the .be. .placed . . .Conector .to .Channel .cause . . .apparatus. .do .harm ..sinal .. .. ..to .. ..the .. .. ..óptico .. .. .. 22 Changing Audio 22 Mute Usando o conector do Fone Operation Operation Selecionando a Fonte Entrada itself or other material de AV2 DVD Audio Discs ..damage. .. .. .. .. ..IN. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 �VÍDEO Subtitles . IN . . &.. ..ÓPTICO 22 CK N OR • CAUTION: This product DVD Audio Discs . . .may . . .not .features . be . . used . . .of.outdoor, .this . . unit. . . restricted . . . . . 22to Indicates special operating otas: indoor use only. A função de entrada Óptica só está disponível quanIndicates tips and hints for making the task easier. pace Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright 19921997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. do as frequências de amostragem das outras unidades forem ~ 96kHz. Audio CD 32 and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playing an Audio CDselecionar and MP3/WMA •Audio Você pode de CDtambém and MP3/WMA Disc .a. fonte . . . . Disc . . entrada . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 � Pause . .a. tecla . .CD . . FUNC. .and . . .MP3/WMA . no . . .painel . . . . frontal. .Disc . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 pressionando Playing an .Audio 23 � � Moving Pause .to. .another . . . . . . Track . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 � . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 � Repeat Moving Track/All/Off. to another Track 23 � . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 � Search. Repeat Track/All/Off. 23 JPEG�Disc Operation Search. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 23 Viewing JPEG disc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 JPEG Disc aOperation 24 � SlideaShow . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 Viewing JPEG. disc 24 � Picture .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 � Still Slide Show do Você pode desfrutar som estereofônico víndo da fonte24 � to another � Moving Still Picture . . . . . file . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 24 original digital sem qualquer distorção About the symbols � rotate .file . . instructions .. .. .. .. ..de .. ..sinal. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 � To Moving topicture. another.for 24 Cada acionamento da tecla XTS durante o modo de canal Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 � To rotate picture. . . . . .harm . . . .to. .the . . .unit . . . 24 Indicates hazards likely. .to. .cause 2, osRepeat ajustesother mudam na ordem Tracks. Programmed Playback . . . .seguinte. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 itself or Programmed material damage. a Track XTSErasing - 1 XTS - 2 from XTSProgramme - 3 NORMAL... Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 Erasing Complete Programme List Indicatesthe operating features of this. .unit. Erasing aspecial Track from Programme List . .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 DivX Disc Operation . . . Programme . . . . . . . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26 Erasing the Complete 25 Indicates tips. and Dicas Speaker Setup . . . hints . .. .. ..for .. .. making .. .. .. .. .. ..the .. .. .task .. .. .. .. .. .. 27 DivX Disc Operation . .. .. ..easier. 26 Additional Information .. .. ..grave .. .. .. .. .fraco .. .. ..relação .. .. .. .. .. 28 •Speaker XTS-1: Para filme à Setup . . .com . . . o. ..som . .. .. .. ..com 27 Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, Last Condition Memory ..are .. .. .trademarks ..of.. som .Dolby .. 28 Additional Information . . ..a.. sensibilidade . .. .. .. .. .. ..do . .. .. ..do 28 música geral. Ele reforça “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol Screen Saver . .Memory . .Unpublished . . . . .. .. .. ..works. .. .. .. .. Copyright .. .. .. .. .. .. ..1992.. .. .. .. 28 Laboratories. Confidential Last Condition 28 woofer para lhe satisfazer. 1997Controlling Dolby Laboratories. the. TV .. .. .. ..reserved. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 Screen Saver . . All . .. rights 28 Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Manufactured under license Controlling the TV .from . . .Digital . . . . Theater . . . . . .Systems, . . . . . .Inc. . . . 28 • XTS 2: No modo 2 CH BYPASS, cria um alto efeito de US Pat. No. 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762 and Presetting theRadio radio stations .. .. .. .. .. 29 Operation with . . . . .pending. . .. .. .. .. .“DTS” . .. .. .. .and . .. .. “DTS 29 other exibição, worldwide patents issued and reproduzindo o. .som Listening the radiostations . trademarks . . .. das .. .. .of .. Digital .. .. .. .. acústicas .Theater Presetting the radio . caixas . .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 29 Digital Surround”toare registered traseiras igual Systems, Inc. Copyright Other Functions. .1996, .das . . 2000 ..frontais, .. .. ..Digital .. .. .. .. Theater .. .. .. .. .. .Systems, Listening to the.ao radio . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 29 Inc. All rightsTimer reserved. Sleep Setting Other Functions. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 Dimmer . . pode . .Setting . . operar . . . .. .. com .. .. .. ..ambos .. .. .. .. ..XTS .. .. .. ..- .1 .. .. .. .. 30 Sleep Timer . ..e.. XTS 30 • XTS 3: Você OTES Mute .ON . .. .COPYRIGHTS: .. .. .. ..complementar .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..a..relativa .. .. .. .. 30 Dimmer . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..e..pode 30 - 2 simultaneamente It is forbidden law to copy, broadcast, Using Jack .. .show .. .. .., .broadcast .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 About the Mute .the .by. Headphone .symbols . .do. .pico . . . de . .for . . . instructions .no . woofer . .. .no . .. ..modo 30 degradação som via cable, play in public, or rent copyrighted material without XTS Selecting Input Source Using thethe Headphone Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 permission. - 2. (Excellent Indicates hazards likely to cause the unit True Sound) .. ..harm .. .. .. developed .. .to Selecting the Input Source . .. ..function . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 ThisXTS product the copy protection itself orfeatures other XTS . Copy . . . material .protection .True . . . .Sound) .damage. .signals . . . .. are .. .. .recorded by Macrovision. XTS pro (Excellent . .. .. .. .. .. .on . .. .some . .. .. .. .. 30 30 discs.XTS When recording and playing the pictures of these discs pro . special . . . . . .operating . . . . . . .features . . . . . . of . .this . . .unit. . . . . . . 30 Indicates otas: XTS (Verdadeiro Som Excelente) on a VCR, picture noise will appear. Reference • O modo XTS - 2 é temporariamente quando This product incorporates copyright protectioninválido technology that Indicates tips and hints. for Language List . .making . . U.S. . . . the . . . task . easier. . . other . . . . 31 Reference is protected byCode method claims of .certain patents and muda o canal de 2.1 CH. .para 5.1 CH, e fica. .novamente Country Code List . .owned .. .. .. ..by .. ..Macrovision .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Corporation .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31 Language List intellectual property rights Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, 31 disponível aoCode mudar 2.1 CH. Troubleshooting . .para . .. .protection . .. .. .. .. ..of and other rights Use Country Code .. .. .. of ..symbol ..this .. .. copyright .. ..are .. .. .trademarks ..tech..Dolby .. .32-33 . . 31 “Pro Logic”, andowners. theList double-D nology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..is32-33 . . 34 Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished works. Copyright Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..and .. .1992intended for Laboratories. home and other viewing uses only unless 1997 Dolby All limited rights reserved. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse XTS Pro Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. engineering disassembly is prohibited. US Pat. No. or 5,451,942 5,956,674, 5,974,380, and para A qualidade de som exclusiva LG cria um5,978,762 ótimo som other worldwide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital uma Theater você reproduzir o perfeito som original e sentir fonte SERIAL NUMBER: The serial is located on the back Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996,number 2000 Digital Theater Systems, of This number is unique to this unit and not available dethis som vivo. Inc. Allunit. rights reserved. to others. You should record requested information here and retain this guide as a permanent record of your purchase. OTES ON COPYRIGHTS: Cada acionamento da tecla XTS PRO, os ajustes mudam It forbidden by law to copy, broadcast, show, broadcast Model No. ___________________________________ nais ordem seguinte. via cable, in public, or rent copyrighted material without Serial No. play ___________________________________ permission. This productON features the copy protection function developed XTS-PRO XTS-PRO OFF by Macrovision. Copy protection signals are recorded on some discs. When recording and playing the pictures of these discs on a VCR, picture noise will appear. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. SERIAL NUMBER: The serial number is located on the back of this unit. This number is unique to this unit and not available 31 to others. You should record requested information here and retain this guide as a permanent record of your purchase. Introduction Introduction iangle nce of ing) the Outras funções CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK Operação ithin an er s ay be electric CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN Códigos de Idiomas Language Codes Use a lista para entrar com o idioma desejado para os ajustes iniciais: Introduction Introduction Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . 23 Contents . . . . . .Disc . . . .Menu. ................3 . . . . . . . Table . .Disc 23 of Audio, Disc Subtitle, Language � Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Use . . . . . . .Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Disc . . . Before . . 23 Idioma Código Idioma Código Idioma Código Idioma Código Language Language Code Language Code � Moving to another Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playable Discs . Code . . . . . . . . . .Language . . . . . . . . . . . . .Code ...4 . . . . . . . . . 23 Abkhazian 6566 Finnish 7073 Macedonian 7775 Slovenian 8376 Use this list to input your desired language for the following initial settings: � Repeat Track/All/Off. . .Somali . . . . . . . . . . . . 8379 . . . . 23 Precautions . . . .6565 . . . . . . . . .French . . . . . . . . . . . . .7082 ...5 . . . . . . . . . 23 Afar Malagasy 7771 Audio, Disc Subtitle, � Search. . . 7783 . . . . . . . . . .Spanish . . . . . . . . . . . . 6983 . . . . 23 Notes on Discs .6570 . . . . .Disc . . . .Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . .7176 ...5 Afrikaans Galician . . . . . . . . . Disc 23 Malay JPEG Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 8385 . . . . 24 About Symbols .8381 . . . . . . . . .Georgian . . . . . . . . . . . . .7565 ...5 Albanian Malayalam 7776 . . . . . . . . . 23 Language Code Language Code Language Code . . . . . .Sudanese Language Code Ameharic 6577 Maltese 7784 Viewing a JPEG disc . . . . .Swahili . . . . . . . . . . . . 8387 .8376 . . . 24 Panel and Rear Panel . .German . . . . . . . . . . . . .6869 ...6 Abkhazian 6566 Finnish 7073 Macedonian 7775 Slovenian . . . . . . . Front . . 24 Arabic 6582 Maori Afar Control Overview 6565 French 7082 Malagasy 7771 Somali � Slide Show7773 . . . . . . . . .Swedish . . . . . . . . . . . . 8386 .8379 . . . 24 . . . .Greek . . . . . . . . . . . . .6976 ...7 . . . . . . . Remote . . 24 Armenian 7289 Greenlandic 7576 Marathi 7782 Tagalog 8476 Afrikaans 6570 Galician 7176 Malay � Still Picture7783 . . . . . . . . .Spanish . . . . . . . . . . . . .6983 . . . 24 . . . . . . . . . 24 Assamese 6583 Guarani 7178 Moldavian 7779 Tajik 8471 Albanian 8381 Georgian 7565 Malayalam 7776 Sudanese � Moving to another file .Tamil . . . . . . . . . . . . 8465 .8385 . . . 24 . . . . . . . Preparation . . 24 Azerbaijani 6590 Gujarati 7185 Mongolian 7778 Ameharic 6577 German 6869 Maltese 7784 Swahili 8387 � To rotate picture. . . . . .Tatar . . . . . . . . . . . . 8484 .8386 . . . 24 . . . . . . . Connections . . 24 Bashkir Nauru 7865 Arabic 6582 6976 Maori 7773 Swedish . . . . . 6665 . . . . . . . . . Hausa .Greek . . . . . . . . . . . . 7265 . 8-13 Programmed Playback . . . . .Telugu . . . . . . . . . . . . 8469 .8476 . . . 25 Basque 6985 Hebrew 7387 Nepali 7869 . . . . . . . . . 24 Armenian 7289 Greenlandic 7576 Marathi 7782 Tagalog TV Connections . . . . . . . . .Hindi . . . . . . . . . . . . .7273 ...8 Bengali; Bangla 6678 Norwegian 7879 Thai Repeat Programmed . . . . . . . . . . . 8472 .8471 . . . 25 Assamese 6583 Guarani 7178 Moldavian 7779 Tracks. Tajik . . . . . . . . . 25 Optional Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . .7285 ...9 Bhutani 6890 Hungarian Oriya Tibetan Azerbaijani 6590 Gujarati 7185 Mongolian 7778 Tamil List . . . . 6679 Erasing a Track7982 from Programme .8465 . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . 25 Aerial . . . . . . . .Icelandic . . . . . . . . . . . . .7383 . . 10 Bihari 6672 Panjabi 8065 Tigrinya BashkirConnections 6665 Hausa 7265 Nauru 7865 Tatar Erasing the Complete Programme List . . . 8473 .8484 . . . 25 t . . . . . . . . 25 Breton Pashto, Pushto 8083 Tonga 8479 Speaker Connection Indonesian .Hebrew . . . . . . . . . . . . 7378 11-12 Basque System6682 6985 7387 Nepali 7869 Telugu 8469 DivX Disc Operation . . . . . . .Turkish . . . . . . . . . . . . 8482 . . . . 26 st . . . . . . . 25 Bulgarian Persian 7065 � Transmitter. .6678 . . . . . . . . .Interlingua . . . . . . . . . . . . .7365 . . 11 Bengali; Bangla 6671 Hindi 7273 Norwegian 7879 Thai 8472 Speaker Setup . . 8076 . . . . . . . . . .Turkmen . . . . . . . . . . . . 8475 .6679 . . . 27 . . . . . . . . . 26 Burmese 7789 Irish Polish Bhutani 6890 Hungarian . . . . . .7165 7285 Oriya 7982 Tibetan � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . 11 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Byelorussian 6669 Italian 7384 Portuguese 8084 Twi 8487 . . . . . . . . . 27 Bihari 6672 Icelandic 7383 Panjabi 8065 Tigrinya 8473 � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Cambodian 7577 Japanese 7465 Quechua 8185 Last Condition Memory . . .Ukrainian . . . . . . . . . . . . 8575 .8479 . . . 28 Breton 6682 Indonesian 7378 Pashto, Pushto 8083 Tonga . . . . . . . . . 28 � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11 Catalan 6765 Javanese 7487 Rhaeto-Romance Bulgarian 6671 Interlingua 7365 Persian 7065 Turkish Screen Saver . 8277 . . . . . . . . . .Urdu . . . . . . . . . . . . 8582 .8482 . . . 28 . . . . . . . . . 28 � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Chinese 9072 Kannada 7578 Rumanian Burmese 7789 Irish 7165 Polish 8076 Turkmen Controlling the 8279 TV . . . . . . .Uzbek . . . . . . . . . . . . 8590 .8475 . . . 28 . . . . . . . Speaker . . 28 Corsican 6779 Kashmiri 7583 Russian 8285 Vietnamese 8673 Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Byelorussian 6669 Italian 7384 Portuguesewith Radio 8084 . . . . . .Twi Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 8679 .8487 . . . 29 . . . . . . . Before . . 28 Croatian Samoan 8377 Volapük Operation .7282 . . . . . . . . . Kazakh .Japanese . . . . . . . . . . . . 7575 14-19 Cambodian 7577 7465 Quechua 8185 Ukrainian 8575 Presetting the radio stationsWelsh . . . . . . . . . . . . 6789 . . . . 29 . . . . . . . . . 29 Czech 6783 Kirghiz 7589 Sanskrit 8365 Catalan 6765 Javanese 7487 Rhaeto-Romance 8277 Urdu 8582 Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Surround Listening radio . . . . .Wolof . . . . . . . . . . . . 8779 .8590 . . . 29 Danish 6865 Korean 7579 Scots Gaelic to the7168 . . . . . . . . . 29 Chinese Rumanian 8279 Uzbek Mode . . . . . . . . .9072 . . . . . . . . . Kannada . . . . . . . . . . . . .7578 . . 14 Dutch 7876 Kurdish 7585 Serbian Other Functions. 8382 . . . . . . . . . .Xhosa . . . . . . . . . . . . 8872 .8673 . . . 30 Corsican 6779 Kashmiri 7583 Russian 8285 Vietnamese . . . . . . . . . 29 Sound Mode . . .6978 . . . . . . . . .Laothian . . . . . . . . . . . . .7679 . . 14 English Serbo-Croatian 8372 Yiddish 7473 Sleep Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . .8679 . . . 30 Croatian 7282 Kazakh 7575 Samoan 8377 . . . . . .Volapük . . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Esperanto 6979 Latin 7665 Shona 8378 Yoruba 8979 Czech 6783 Kirghiz 7589 Sanskrit Dimmer . . . . . 8365 . . . . . . . . . .Welsh . . . . . . . . . . . . .6789 . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 Estonian Initial . . . . . . . . . Latvian, .Korean . . . . . Lettish . . . . . . . 7686 16-19 Sindhi 8368 Zulu 9085 DanishSettings . .6984 6865 7579 Scots Gaelic 7168 Mute . . . . . . . 8373 . . . . . . . . . .Wolof . . . . . . . . . . . . .8779 . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 Faroese 7079 Singhalese � General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .7678 . . 16 Dutch 7876 . . . . .Lingala Kurdish 7585 Serbian 8382 Xhosa 8872 Using the Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 Fiji Slovak 8375 English 6978 Laothian 7679 Serbo-Croatian 8372 Yiddish 7473 � Language . .7074 . . . . . . . . .Lithuanian . . . . . . . . . . . . .7684 . . 16 Selecting the Input . . . . . . . . . . . . .8979 . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 Esperanto Shona 8378Source .Yoruba � Display . . . . 6979 . . . . . . . . . .Latin . . . . . . . . . . . . 7665 16-17 XTS (Excellent 8368 True Sound)Zulu . . . . . . . . . . . . .9085 . . . 30 Estonian 6984 Latvian, Lettish 7686 Sindhi . . . . . . . . . 30 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Country Codes XTS pro . . . . . 8373 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Faroese 7079 Lingala 7678 Singhalese . . . . . . . . . 30 Control) . Lithuanian . . . . . . . . . . . . .7684 . . 18 Fiji� Lock (Parental 7074 Slovak 8375 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Reference Choose a country code from this list. Language Code List . . . . . .Country . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Code . . . 31 Country Code Country Code Country Code Country Codes Operation Country . . . . . . . .Saudi . . . .Arabia . . . . . . . . . . SA . . . 31 . . . . . . . Escolha . . Afghanistan 31 um país da lista. AF Ethiopia ET Malaysia Code ListMY DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 Troubleshooting . .MV . . . . . . . Senegal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SN 32-33 AR Fiji FJ Maldives . . . . . . . .Introduction . Argentina 31 Choose aacountry code from this .list. Playing DVD and .. 19 Specifications . . . MX . . . . . .Disc . .Singapore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SG . . . 34 Australia Mexico CD and MP3/WMA Audio 23 Safety Precautions .AU .Video . . . . .CD. . Finland . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. FI .2 . . . . . . . 32-33 General Features.Code . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..France . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22 Monaco MC Slovak SK Country Country Code Country Code Country Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc .Código .Code . . . 23 of Contents .AT .. .. .País .FR ..3 País Código Código País Código PaísRepublic . . . . . . . .Table . Austria 34 � Moving to another . 4-5 20 Belgium Mongolia SI. . 23 Afghanistan AF Ethiopia Malaysia MY Saudi � Pause . . . .MN . . . . . . . .Slovenia . . . . Arabia . . . . . . . . . . .SA Before Use . . . . . . . BE . . . .TITLE/GROUP . . . .Germany . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..DE .ET � Moving to another .. 20 Bhutan Morocco MA South Argentina AR Fiji FJ Maldives MV Senegal � Moving to another Track . .Africa . . . . . . . . . . ZA .SN . . 23 Playable Discs . . .BT . . . CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . Great . . . . Britain . . . . . . . .. .. .. ..GB .4 Bolivia Nepal NP South Korea KR � Slow Motion. .BO .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Greece .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..GR .. 20 Australia AU Finland FI Mexico MX Singapore SG � Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Precautions . . . . .BR .5 Brazil Greenland GL Netherlands NL Spain ES Austria ATFrame-by-Frame France FR Monaco MC Slovak Republic SK � Still Picture and Playback . 20 � Search. . . . AN . . . . . . . .Sri . .Lanka . . . . . . . . . . . . LK .SI. . 23 Notes on Discs . .KH . . . . . . . Germany . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DE ..5 Cambodia Dutch Antilles Belgium Mongolia MN Slovenia � Search. . . . . .BE .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Islands .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..HM .. 20 JPEG Disc Operation . . . . Africa . . . . . . . . . . SE .ZA . . 24 About Symbols . .CA .5 Canada Hong Kong HK New Zealand NZ Bhutan Morocco MA . . . . .Sweden South � Repeat . . . . .BT . . . . . . . Great . . . . .Britain . . . . . . . . . .GB . 20 Viewing a JPEGNG disc . . . .Switzerland . . . . Korea . . . . . . . . . . CH .KR . . 24 Chile CL Nigeria Front Panel and Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HU ..6 Bolivia BOPanel . Hungary Greece GR Nepal NP South � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 China CN Norway � Slide Show NO . . . . . . . .Taiwan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TW .ES . . 24 Brazil Control Overview BR Greenland GL Netherlands NL Spain Remote . . . India . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .IN ..7 � Time Search .CO . . . . . . . Indonesia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HM . 21 Colombia ID Oman Cambodia KH Islands Dutch�Antilles AN Sri Still Picture OM . . . . . . . .Thailand . . Lanka . . . . . . . . . . . . TH .LK . . 24 � Marker Search . . . . . . . Israel . . . . Kong . . . . . . . . . . .HK . 21 Congo CG IL Pakistan PK Canada CA Hong New Zealand NZ Sweden � Moving to another file Turkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR .SE . . 24 Preparation � Zoom. . . . . . .CR . . . . . . . Italy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HU . 21 Costa Rica IT Panama PA Chile CL Hungary Nigeria NG . . . .Uganda Switzerland CH � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UG . . . 24 Connections . . .Features . . .HR . . . .. .. .. .. .Jamaica 8-13 Croatia Paraguay PY Ukraine UA China CN India IN Norway NO Taiwan TW Special DVD . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..JM . 22 Programmed Playback . . . .United . . . . States . . . . . . . . . . US . . . 25 Czech Republic CZ Japan JP Philippines PH Colombia Oman OM Thailand TH TV� Connections .8 Title Menu . . .CO . . . . . . . Indonesia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ID . 22 Repeat Programmed . . . . . . . . . . . . UY .TR . . 25 Denmark Poland PL Uruguay Congo CG Israel IL Pakistan PK Tracks. Turkey Optional Equipment .9 � Disc Menu . . .DK . .Connections . . . . . Kenya . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .KE . 22 Erasing a Track PT from Programme List . . . . . UZ . . . 25 Ecuador EC Kuwait KW Portugal Uzbekistan Costa Rica CR Italy IT Panama PA Uganda UG Aerial Connections . . . . .Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 10 � Changing the Audio Erasing the Complete Programme .UA . . 25 Egypt EG Libya LY Romania RO Vietnam Croatia HR Jamaica JM Paraguay PY Ukraine List . . . . VN Speaker System . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12 � Changing theConnection Audio Channel .LU . 22 El Salvador SV Luxembourg Russian Federation RU DivX Disc Operation . . . . .States . . . . . . . . . ZW .US . . 26 Czech Republic CZ Japan JP Philippines PH . . . . . .Zimbabwe United Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 � Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Denmark DK Kenya KE Poland Setup . . . PL Speaker . . . . . . . .Uruguay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UY . . . 27 � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11 DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Ecuador EC Kuwait KW Portugal PT . . . .Uzbekistan Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .UZ . . 28 � Setting a ID ofEG Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . .LY . 11 Egypt Libya Romania RO Last Condition Memory . .Vietnam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VN . . 28 � Assembling and to the Speakers El Salvador SVConnecting Luxembourg LU11 Russian Federation RU Zimbabwe ZW Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 . . 28 Speaker Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 32 Before Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Presetting the radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Surround Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31. 29 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Reference Reference Introduction Áudio disco, Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Safety Precautions . do . . disco .desired . . . .e.Menu . . . . do . . .disco .for . . the . . .following ..2 Usedo this list toLegenda input .your language initial settings: Introduction Códigos de Países Resolvendo problemas • O aparelho de DVD/CD fica próximo a TV. • Distancie a sua TV dos equipamentos de áudio 33 Referência Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Introduction Sintoma Correção Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Table Contents . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Causa .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32 Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . Disc . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 SafetyofPrecautions � Pause .Audio . . . . .CD . . .and . . .MP3/WMA . . . . . . . . .Disc . . . . . .. .. .. 23 Before . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5 Playing an 23 Table ofUse Contents .3 • Conecte o cabo de força com firmeza na. .tomada � Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playable . ..cabo .4 Sem energia. � Moving Pause .to. .another 23 Before Use Discs . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .•. .O .. .. .. ..de .. .. força .. .. .. .. está .. .. .. ..desconectado. .. .. .. .. 4-5 da parede. . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 � Precautions . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54 � Repeat Moving Track/All/Off. to another Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playable Discs EstáNotes ligado, � . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 on mas Discs � Search. Repeat Track/All/Off. 23 Precautions . o. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 • Insira um disco. (verifique se o indicador DVD ou, JPEG�Disc Operation About Symbols .. .. .. .. .. .. ..disco .. .. .. ..está .. .. .. inserido. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 aparelho Search. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 23 Notesde onDVD/CD Discs .. .. .. ..•..Nenhum CD de Áudio esteja aceso) Viewing JPEG disc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 Front Panel and Rear JPEG Disc aOperation 24 Symbols . . .Panel . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65 nãoAbout funciona. � SlideaShow . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 Remote Control . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76 Viewing JPEGo. disc 24 Front Panel and Overview Rear Panel • Selecione modo de entrada de vídeo apropriado � Picture .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 • A .TELEVISÃO � Still Slide Show 24 Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . .não . . . foi . . ajustada . . . . . 7 para na TV, para que a imagem do DVD apareça na � to another receber o sinal de saída do DVD. � Moving Still Picture . . . . . file . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 24 Preparation tela. � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Connections Sem imagem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Preparation Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 � To rotate picture. . . Vídeo . . . . .com . . . firmeza . . . . . .nos . . . . . 24 • Conecte o cabo de TV Connections . .. .. .está . .. .. ..conectado . . 8 com Connections . . . . . .. .. .. •.. O .. ..cabo .. .. .. ..vídeo .. .. .. .. .não .. .. 8-13 Repeat Programmed Programmed Playback Tracks. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 Optional Equipment conectores. TV Connections . . Connections .firmeza. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 98 Erasing a Track from Programme Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10 Optional Equipment. .Connections .9 Erasing the Programme List List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 Erasing a Track 25 • Ligue aComplete TV.from Programme Speaker System Connection Aerial Connections . .•.A. .TV . . está .. .. .. ..desligada. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12 . . 10 DivX Disc Operation . . . Programme . . . . . . . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26 Erasing the Complete 25 � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12 . . 11 Speaker System. Connection Speaker Setup . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27 DivX Operation 26 equipamento de Disc • Selecione o modo de entrada correto do receptor � a channel .. 11 � Changing Transmitter. . . . .• .O. .of . Transmitter . . . . . . . . conectado . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. com 11 o cabo Additional Information Speaker Setup . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 27 � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 de Áudio, afim de que você possa ouvir o aparelho Áudio não foi ajustado para receber a saída � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11 Last Condition Memory Additional Information . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11 � Setting a ID of Transmitter do DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 DVD/CD. Screen Saver . .Memory . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 Lastde Condition 28 � Connections. . . . . . to . . the . . .Speakers . . . . . . . 12 � Speaker Assembling Connecting 11 Controlling the. TV Sem som ou nível deand Screen Saver . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 Speaker Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 • Os cabos conectados • Conecte o cabo. de áudio com firmeza nos � Speaker Connections. . . . . de . . Áudio . . . . .não . . . estão . . . 12 Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 som muitoPositioning. baixo. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .14-19 Before SpeakerOperation . . 13 com firmeza. conectores. Presetting theRadio radio stations Operation with . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 29 Mini Operation Glossary for. .Audio Before . . . . Stream ......& . . Surround . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Listening theradio radiostations . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 Presettingtothe 29 Mode . . . . . . . for . . .Audio . . •. O . Stream . equipamento .....& . . Surround . . . de . . som . . . .está . . 14 Mini Glossary desligado. • Liguetoothe equipamento. Other Functions. . radio . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Listening 29 Sound Mode . Mode . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14 14 Sleep Timer Setting Other Functions. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 On-Screen .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15 Sound Mode Display . . . . . .•..O 14 Dimmer . . . .Setting . . .por . . ..um .. .. novo. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 cabo de áudio está danificado • Substitua-o Sleep Timer 30 Initial SettingsDisplay . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-19 On-Screen . . 15 Mute . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Dimmer 30 � General Operation . . 16 A imagem da reproduInitial Settings . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-19 Using Mute• Limpe .the . . Headphone . .o. disco. . . . . . . .Jack . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 •. O. .disco está sujo. � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 ção é �ruim. Selecting Input Source Using thethe Headphone Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 XTS (Excellent TrueSource Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Selecting the 30 � . . 17 • Insira umInput disco. � Audio. Display. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. •.. Nenhum .. .. .. .. .. .. ..disco .. .. .. ..inserido. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-17 XTS . . . . . .True . . . .Sound) . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 XTS pro (Excellent 30 � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 XTS• pro . . um . . . disco . . . . reproduzível. . . . . . . . . . . (Confira . . . . . . o. .tipo . . .de . 30 � . . . . . . .Control) . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19 insira � Others Lock (Parental 18 inserido. Reference • Um disco não reproduzível está disco, sistema de cor e código Regional.) � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Reference Operation Country Code List . . .. .. com .. .. .. ..o..lado .. .. .. .de .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .para Language Code . .. ..reprodução . .. 31 31 • Coloque oList disco DVD or Video CD Operation . . . .é.colocado . . . . . . .de . . cabeça . 19-22para Troubleshooting Operation • O disco baixo. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33 Countrybaixo. Code List . . 31 Playing a DVD Video CD. . . 19 DVD or Video CD and Operation . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19-22 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 General . . . . .CD. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22 O aparelho DVD/CD Playing de aFeatures DVD and. .Video . . 19 • Coloque. .o.disco Specifications . . . . corretamente . . . . . . . . . . na . . bandeja . . . . . . de . . . 34 � Moving to another . .guia. 20 Features . . •. O .TITLE/GROUP . disco . . . . não . . . está . . . ..dentro .. .. .. .. ..da 20-22 nãoGeneral inicia a reprodução disco dentro da guia. � � Moving Moving to to another another CHAPTER/TRACK TITLE/GROUP . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 20 � Motion. . . . •. O .CHAPTER/TRACK .disco . . . . está . . . .sujo. . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 • Limpe o disco. � Slow Moving to another 20 � and � Still SlowPicture Motion. . . Frame-by-Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Playback . . . . . . . .. 20 20 � . . . and . . . .Frame-by-Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . Playback . . . . . . .. 20 � Search. Still Picture •. Um menu está na. tela de TV.20 • Pressione a tela SET UP para desligar o menu. � � Repeat Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20 20 � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 � Search .. ..nível .. .. .. ..de .. ..censura .. .. .. .. .. ..está .. .. .. .definido. � Time Repeat A-B . .. .. ..•..O . .. .. 21 21 • Cancele a função ou mude o nível de censura. � Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 � Marker Time Search 21 � . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 � Zoom. Marker. Search 21 Special DVD .. .. .plugues .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. estão .. .. 22 • Limpe-os com um pano umidecido em álcool. � Zoom. . .Features . . . . . .•.Os . .. .. .. .. .. ..e..conectores 21 sujos. � TitleDVD MenuFeatures . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 Special 22 � .. ..disco .. .. .. ..está .. .. .. .sujo. � Disc Title Menu Menu .. .. .. .. ..•..O . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 • Limpe o disco. Alto zumbido ou barulho � � Changing Disc Menuthe . . Audio . . . . . Language . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 é ouvido. � . .. .. .. .. .. .e .. ..componentes .. .. 22 • AsChannel caixas acústicas � Changing Changing the the Audio Audio Language . ..os 22 • Conecte-os corretamente e com firmeza. � . . .Audio . . estão . . .Channel . .mal . . .conectados. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 � Subtitles Changing. the 22 DVD Audio Discs � Subtitles . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Introduction Introduction Confira o guia seguinte para a possível causa de um problema antes de contatar serviço. Introduction Resolvendo problemas (continuação) Sintoma Causa Correção Introduction Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA . . . . . . . Table . . 23 of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 • Conecte a antena com firmeza. Disc . . . . . 23 � Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 . . . . . .está . . . mal . . . posicionada . . . . . . . 4-5ou Disc . . . Before . . 23 Use . . . . . . . . . .A. antena • Ajusteto asanother antenasTrack e conecte � Moving . . . uma . . . .antena . . . . . externa . . . 23 Playable Discs . . . . . conectada. ......................4 . . . . . . . . . 23 � Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 se necessário . . . . . . . . . 23 � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Notes on Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . 23 rádio não JPEG Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 About de Symbols ..........................5 . . . . . . . .Estações . 23 O sinal das estações é muito fraco (ao ser sintonizadas. Viewing a JPEGa disc . . . manualmente . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 and Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . Front .podem . 24 Panel • Sintonize estação sintonizar � Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Control Overview . . . . . .automaticamente). ..............7 . . . . . . . Remote . . 24 � Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . Preparation . . 24 Nenhuma estação foi prefixada ou toda � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . Connections . . 24 as • Prefixe as estações (página 30). . . . . . . . . .a. memória . . . . . . .foi . .apagada . . . . . . .(ao . . procurar 8-13 Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . 24 TV Connections . . . estações . . . . . . . ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . 25 Optional Equipment Connections . . . .não . . .está . . . direcionado ..9 O controle remoto para Erasing a Track from Programme List . . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . 25 Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 the Complete List .remoto . . . . . do . 25 o sensor do controle remoto no aparelhoErasing • Aponte o controleProgramme remoto ao sensor t . . . . . . . . 25 Speaker System Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 DivX Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 st . . . . . . . 25 � Transmitter. . . . . de Receptor de DVD/CD. . . DVD/CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Speaker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . . . . . . . . . 26 � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . . . 27 � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 O controle remoto também está longe do Last •Condition Use o controle remoto Memory . . .dentro . . . . .de . . aproximada. . . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . .O. 28 controle remoto não � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11 aparelho de DVD/CD. mente 7 m. Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . .funciona . 28 � Speaker corretamente. Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . Speaker . . 28 Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 um obstáculo no entre o controle remoto . . . . . . . Before . . 28 Operation . . . . .Há . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 • Remova obstáculo. Presetting the o radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 . . . . . . . . . 29 e oStream aparelho& de DVD/CD. Mini Glossary for Audio Surround Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 . . . . . . . . . 29 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Other Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 29 Sound Mode . . . . . . •. As . . .baterias . . . . . .no . .controle . . . . . . remoto . . . 14 estão Sleep• Substitua Timer Setting . . . . . por . . .novas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 as baterias . . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 fracas. Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19 Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 do display do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . .A. exibição 30 � General Operation Using• Pressione the Headphone Jack . . . . . . .remoto. . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . .painel . 30 �frontal está muito painel frontal. DIMMER no controle Language . . . . . •. Nada ....é . .exibido . . . . . no . . .display . . . . . do . 16 Selecting the Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . .escura. . 30 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Reference Operation . . . . . . . . . 31 DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 . . . . . . . . . 31 Playing a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . . . . . . . 32-33 General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22 . . . . . . . . . 34 � Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20 � Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . 20 � Slow Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 � Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20 � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 � Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Special DVD Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 34 Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Introduction Introduction Especificações - LH-T752TA FM AM (MW) 35 Referência AMPLIFICADOR CAIXAS ACÚSTICAS SINTONIZADOR VÍDEO DVD/CD GERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Table Contents . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32 Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . Disc . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 SafetyofPrecautions Massa 3.9 kg � Pause . . . . .CD . . .and . . .MP3/WMA . . . . . . . . .Disc . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 Before . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5 Playing an .Audio 23 Table ofUse Contents .3 Dimensões Externas (L x A x P) 430 x 54 x 350 mm � Playable .4 � Moving Pause .to. .another . . . . . . Track . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 Before Use Discs . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4-5 � . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 Precautions . . .. .. .. ..Operacionais .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Temperatura: .. .. .. .. .. 54 � Repeat Moving to Operação,: another Track 23 Playable Discs Condições 5°C a 35°C, estado Track/All/Off. de Horizontal � . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 Notes on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 � Search. Repeat Track/All/Off. 23 Precautions . . . .. ..Operacional Umidade 5% para 85% JPEG�Disc Operation About Search. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 23 Notes Symbols on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 LaserRear comprimento de disc onda. .650 Viewing aOperation JPEG .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 Front Panel and .. .. .. ..de .. 65semicondutor, JPEG Disc . .. .. nm 24 About Symbols . . .Panel . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Laser � SlideaShow . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 Remote Control . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..PAL .. .. .. 625/50, .. .. 76 NTSC 525,/60 Viewing JPEG. disc 24 Front Panel and Rear Panel SinalOverview de Sistema � � Still SlidePicture Show .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 24 Remote Control Overview . . . . . (áudio) . . . . . . . . . .140 . . .Hz . .a720 kHz Resposta de Frequência � to another � Moving Still Picture . . . . . file . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 24 Preparation Relação de Sinal-Ruído (áudio) Mais de 75 dB (1 kHz, �� NOP, 20 LPF/A-filtro de kHz) To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Preparation Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Faixa 70 dB TV Connections .de. 8 Connections . . . .Dinâmica . .. .. .. .. ..(áudio) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Mais .. .. .. 8-13 Repeat Programmed Programmed Playback Tracks. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 Optional Equipment .. .. .. ..(1.. kHz, 98 a 12W TV Connections . Connections . . . . . . (áudio) . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..0.5% Distorção.Harmônica posição) (20 LPF/A-filtro kHz) Erasing a Track from de Programme Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 Aerial Connections . .Connections . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10 Optional Equipment . 9 Erasing the Complete Programme List List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 Entrada de vídeo 1.0 V (p-p), 75 Ω, sync negativo., RCAjackx Erasing a Track from1 Programme 25 Speaker System Connection Aerial Connections . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12 . . 10 DivX Disc Operation . 1. . Programme . . . . . . . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26 Erasing theRCAjackx Complete 25 Saída de. Connection V. .(p-p), negativo., � Transmitter. .vídeo . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1.0 11 75 Ω, sync Speaker System .. .. 11-12 Speaker Setup . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27 DivX Disc Operation 26 � a channel .. .. 1.0 .. .. 11 V 75 Ω, sync negativo., 4-alfinete de ESTRONDO de míni x 1 (C) 0.3 � Changing Transmitter. . . . . . . .of. Transmitter . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. ..(Y) 11(p-p), Additional Information Saída S-vídeo Speaker Setup . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 27 � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 V (p-p), 75 Q � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11 Last Condition Memory Additional Information . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11 � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Screen Saver . RCAjackx .Memory . . . . . .1 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 Saída Vídeo Componente (Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 Ω, syncCondition negativo., Last 28 � Connections. . . . . . to . . the . . .Speakers . . . . . . . 12 � Speaker Assembling and Connecting 11 Controlling the. TV Screen Saver . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 Speaker Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Faixa de Sintonia . . . . . . . . . . . . .87.5 ou 65.0 - 74.0 MHz, 87.5 - 108.0 MHz � Speaker Connections. . . . -.108.0 12 MHz Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Before . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .14-19 SpeakerOperation Positioning. . . 13 Presetting theRadio radio stations Freqüência Intermediária 10.7 MHz Operation with . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 29 Mini Operation Glossary for. .Audio Before . . . . Stream ......& . . Surround . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Listening theradio radiostations . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 Presettingtothe 29 Mode . . . .Relação . . . for . . de .Audio . Sinal . . . Stream .Ruído .....& . . Surround . . . . . . . 60 . . dB . . (Mono) 14 Mini Glossary Other Functions. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Listening to the. radio 29 Sound .. ..Freqüência .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..140.. .. .. 10,000 .. 14 Mode . Mode . . .Resposta . . .. .. .. ..de 14 Hz Sleep Timer Setting Other Functions. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 On-Screen Sound Mode Display . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15 14 Dimmer . kHz . . .Setting . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Sleep Timer 30 FaixaDisplay - 1,720 Initial Settings . de . . Sintonia . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..522 On-Screen .. .16-19 .- .1,620 15 kHz ou 520 Mute . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Dimmer 30 � General Operation .kHz . 16 Initial Settings . . . . Intermediária . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 450 .. .. 16-19 Frequência Using Mute .the . . Headphone . . . . . . . . . .Jack . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 � General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Selecting the Input Source Using the Headphone Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 Modo Estéreo 100W + 100W (6Ω a 1 kHz, THD 10%) � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 XTS (Excellent TrueSource Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Selecting the Input 30 � . .. .. ..Surround . . 17 Modo � Audio. Display .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Frontal: .. .. 16-17 XTS pro . . . . . .True . . . .Sound) . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 100W + 100W.(THD 10%) XTS (Excellent 30 � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 � Audio.(*.Dependendo . . . . . . . . .das . . .configurações . . . . . . . . . . . .Central . . . . 17 *: 100W XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 � . .modo . . . . de .Control) . som . . . e. .da.. .fonte, .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19 do � Others Lock (Parental . .. .. .. ..não 18 100W Surround*: + 100W (6Ω a 1 kHz, THD 10%) Reference � Otherspode . . . haver . . . . saída . . . . de . . som.) . . . . . . . . . . . .Subwoofer . . . . 19 *: 200W (4Q a 30 Hz, THD 10%). Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Reference Operation Country Code List . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31 Language Code List 31 Entradas AV IN, OPTICAL AUDIO DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 Operation Troubleshooting . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33 Country Code List . . 31 Playing a DVD Video CD. . . 19 MONITOR Saídas E FONES: (32 Ω, 1.0 V) DVD or Video CD and Operation . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. S-VÍDEO, .. .. 19-22 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 General . . . . .CD. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..Saída Playing aFeatures DVD and. .Video .. .20-22 . .de 19transmissão: 2.4GHz, Alimentação: Specifications . . . . . . . .7V . . DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Transmissor � Moving to another . . de 20recepção: 2.4GHz General Features . . . .TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. Sáida .. .. 20-22 � .. .. 20 � Moving Moving to to another another CHAPTER/TRACK TITLE/GROUP . . . .. .. ..Caixa 20Acústica Caixa Acústica Caixa Acústica � Motion. . . . . .CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 Subwoofer � Slow Moving to another 20 sem fio frontal central � and � Still SlowPicture Motion. . . Frame-by-Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Playback . . . . . . . .. 20 20 Tipo 1 caminho 1 caminho 1 caminho 1 caminho � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 � Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20 2 Caixas Acústicas 1 Caixa Acústica 2 Caixas Acústicas � .. .. 20 � Repeat Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..2.. Caixas 20 Acústicas � A-B � Repeat Repeat . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 206Ω Impedância 6Ω 4Ω 6Ω � Search � Time Repeat A-B . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 21 Resposta de Frequência 150-20000 Hz 150-20000 Hz 40-1500 Hz 150-20000 Hz � Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 � Marker Time Search 21 � . Search . . da . . Pressão . .. .. .. .. ..de .. ..Som .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..86dB/W(1m) .. 21 86dB/W(1m) 82dB/W(1m) 86dB/W(1m) � Zoom. MarkerNivel 21 Special DVD � Zoom. . .Features . . . de . . Entrada . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 21 Potência 100W 100W 200W 100W � TitleDVD MenuFeatures . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 Special 22 Max. Potência 100W 200W 400W 200W � .. .. .. .. .. ..de .. ..Saída .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 � Disc Title Menu Menu 22 � the .. .. 22 Dimensões x1190x270 500x83x105 300x440x10 270 x1190x270 � Changing Disc Menu . . Audio . .(L. .x .ALanguage . x. P) . .mm . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 270 22 � Audio . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 Pesothe líquido � Changing Changing the Audio Channel Language 22 2.9 kg 1.2 kg 8.5 kg 3.6 kg � . . .Audio . . . . .Channel . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 � Subtitles Changing. the 22 DVD Audio Discs � Subtitles . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 e especificações sem notificação. (LH-W752TA e LH-T752TB) DVD Desenhos Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . .estão . . . . sujeitos . . . . . . a. mudança . . 22 Introduction Introduction Introduction Alimentação Veja etiqueta principal Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc Safety Precautions . . energia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Veja . . . etiqueta . . 2 principal Introduction Consumo. de Especificações - LH-T752TB Veja etiqueta principal AMPLIFICADOR AM (MW) FM SINTONIZADOR VÍDEO DVD/CD Introduction GERAL Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Veja . . .etiqueta . . . 2 principal Consumo .de. .Energia Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . 23 . .kg. . . . 3 . . . . . . . Table . . 23 of Contents Massa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9 � Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Disc . . . Before . . 23 Use . Dimensões Externas (L x A x P) 430 x 54 x 350 mm � Moving to another Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playable Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . 23 Condições Operacionais Temperatura: 5°C a 35°C, de Operação,: Horizontal �estado Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . 23 � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Notes on Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5% . .para . . .85% .5 Umidade. Operacional . . . . . . . . . 23 JPEG Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 About Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Laser . . . de . . semicondutor, .5 . . . . . . . . . 23 Laser comprimento de onda 650 nm Viewing a JPEG disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . Front . . 24 Panel and Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Sinal de Sistema NTSC 525,/60 � Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . Remote . . 24 Resposta de Frequência (áudio) 200Hz a 20 kHz � Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . . . 24 � Moving to another . . . . . . . Preparation . . 24 Relação de Sinal Ruído (áudio) Mais de 75 dB (1 kHz, NOP, 20 LPF/A-filtro de kHz) file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . Connections . . 24 . . . .Dinâmica . . . . . .(áudio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mais . . . de . 8-13 Faixa 70 dB Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . 24 TV Connections . . . . . . .(áudio) . . . . . . . . . . .0.5% . . . (1. .kHz, . 8 a 12W posição) (20 LPF/A-filtro de kHz) Distorção .Harmônica Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 . . . . . . . . . 25 Optional Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Erasing a Track from Programme List . . . . . . . . 25 Entrada de Vídeo . . . . . . . . . 25 Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.0 . .V. (p-p), . . 1075 Ω, sync negativo., RCAjackx 1 Erasing the Complete Programme List . . . . . . . 25 t . . . . . . . . 25 Saída deConnection Vídeo Speaker System . . . . . . . . . .1.0 . . V. (p-p), 11-1275 Ω, sync negativo., RCAjackx 1 DivX Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 st . . . . . . . 25 � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(Y). .1.0 . .V. (p-p), 11 75 Ω, sync negativo., Mini DIN 4-pin x 1 (C) 0.3 V (p-p), 75Ω Saída S-Vídeo Speaker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . . . . . . . . . 26 � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . . . 27 � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Saída Vídeo Componente (Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75 Ω, sync negativo., RCAjackx 1, (Pb)(Pr) Last Condition Memory . . .0.7 . . V. (p-p), . . . .75Ω . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . . . 28 � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11 Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . . . 28 � Speaker Faixa de Sintonia Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . .87.5 . . .- 108.0 . . 12MHz Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 . . . . . . . Speaker . . 28 Positioning. . .Intermediária . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10.7 . . .MHz . . 13 Freqüência Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 . . . . . . . Before . . 28 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Relação de Sinal Ruído 60 dB (Mono) Presetting the radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 . . . . . . . . . 29 Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Surround Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 . . . . . . . . . 29 Mode . . . .Resposta . . . . . .de. .Freqüência . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140. . .10,000 . . 14Hz Other Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 29 Sound Mode . . Sintonia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520 . . -. 1,720 . . 14kHz Faixa. de Sleep Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Freqüência Intermediária 450 kHz . . . . . . . . . 30 Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19 Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 � General Modo Estéreo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100W Operation . . . +. .100W 16 (6Ω à 1 kHz, THD 10%) Using the Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Modo Surround Selecting 100W + 100W.(THD 10%) the Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frontal: . . . 16-17 (* Dependendo das configurações XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Central *:100W . . . . . . . . . 30 � Audio.do. .modo . . . .de. .som . . .e .da. .fonte, . . . .não . . . . . . . . . . . 17 XTS . . . THD . . . 10%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Surround* 100W + 100W (6Ω pro à 1 kHz, . . . . . . . . . 30 � Lock (Parental pode haverControl) saída de som.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 *: 200W (4Ω a 30 Hz, THD 10%). . . . . . . . . . 30 � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Subwoofer . . . . . 19 Entradas Reference AV IN, ÁUDIO OPTICO Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 S-VÍDEO, MONITOR E FONES: (32 Ω, 1.0 V) Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 . . . . . . . . . 31 DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 . . . . . . . . . 31 Playing a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 . . . . . . . 32-33 Caixa Satélite Caixa Central Passivo General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Caixa 20-22 Frontal Caixa Traseira Caixa Central Subwoofer alto-falante . . . . . . . . . 34 (LHS-75TBS) (LHS-75TBC) (LHS-55SBS) (LHS-55SBC) (LHS-75TBW) (LHS-55SBW) � Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . .(LHS-75BS) . . 20 � Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK . . .11.caminho . 20 1 caminho Tipo caminho 1 caminho 1 caminho 1 caminho 1 caminho � Slow Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31. caixas .alto-falante . 20 acústicas 1 alto-falantes 1 alto-falante 1 caixa 1 alto-falantes acústica 3 caixas acústicas � Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20 4Ω4Ω Impedância 8Ω 8Ω 8Ω 6Ω 6Ω � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 20,000 - 1,500 Hz Resposta Hz Hz 110-20,000 Hz- 20,000 110-20,000 Hz 40 40-1,500 Hz 150 Hz � Repeat . . . . .de. .Freqüência . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110-20,000 .150 . . 20 86 dB/W (1m) � Repeat A-Bda.Pressão . . . . . de . .Som . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82dB/W(1m) .86. 21 dB/W (1m) 86 82dB/W(1m) dB/W (1m) Nivel 82dB/W(1m) 82dB/W(1m) � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100W 21 200W 100W Potência de Entrada 70W 70W 70W 150W � Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 200W 140W 200W Max. Potência de Saída 140W 140W 300W 400W � Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 280 x.1200 500 x 83 x300x116x91mm 90 mm 195 x180x400x355mm 402 x 306 mm Dimensões (L x A. .x .P). mm Special DVD Features . . . . . . . . . . . .140 . . .x220x153mm 22 x 280 mm140x220x153mm Peso Líquido � Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . o.95 . 2,5 22kg 9,18 Kg 1.2 kg 0,84 Kg 1.0 kg 5.6 Kg kg � Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Changing the Audio .Channel 22 Cabo das Caixas Acústicas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Caixas Acústicas. . . . . . . . . ... .. .. ... .. .. . .. .. ... .. ... .. .6 � Subtitles . . AM. . . .. . .. . .. . ... .. . ... .. .. ... . .. ... . .. ... . .. . .. . ... 22 Antena 1 Antena FM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 DVD AudioControle DiscsRemoto. . . . . . .. . .. . ... .. . ... .. .. ... . .. ... . .. ... . .. . .. 22 .1 Pilhas (AAA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Acessórios Fornecidos CAIXAS ACÚSTICAS OperationSaídas 36 Cabo de Vídeo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Acessórios válidossem paranotificação. os modelos LH-W752TA e LH-T752TB Desenhos e especificações estão sujeito a mudança Introduction Introduction Alimentação .........................2 Table Contents . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32 SafetyofPrecautions Before . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5 Table ofUse Contents .3 Playable .4 Before Use Discs . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4-5 Precautions . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54 Playable Discs Notes on Discs Precautions . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 About Notes Symbols on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 Front Panel and Rear About Symbols . . .Panel . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65 Remote Control . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76 Front Panel and Overview Rear Panel Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Preparation Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Preparation TV Connections ..8 Connections . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 8-13 Optional Equipment TV Connections . . Connections . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 98 Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10 Optional Equipment. .Connections .9 Speaker System Connection Aerial Connections . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12 . . 10 � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12 . . 11 Speaker System. Connection � a channel � Changing Transmitter. . . . . . . .of. Transmitter . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11 11 � a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11 � Setting Changing a channel of Transmitter 11 � Connecting. .to. .the � Assembling Setting a IDand of Transmitter . . Speakers . . . . . . . . 11 11 � Connections. . . . . . to . . the . . .Speakers . . . . . . . 12 � Speaker Assembling and Connecting 11 Speaker Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Before . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .14-19 SpeakerOperation Positioning. . . 13 Mini Operation Glossary for. .Audio Before . . . . Stream ......& . . Surround . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Mode . . . . . . . for . . .Audio . . . . Stream ......& . . Surround . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Mini Glossary Sound Mode . Mode . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14 14 On-Screen Sound Mode Display . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15 14 Initial SettingsDisplay . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-19 On-Screen . . 15 � General Operation . . 16 Initial Settings . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-19 � . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16 � Language General Operation 16 � . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-17 � Display Language . . 16 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 � (Parental � Lock Audio. . . . . . . Control) . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 18 17 � . . . . . . .Control) . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19 � Others Lock (Parental 18 � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Operation DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 Operation Playing a DVD Video CD. . . 19 DVD or Video CD and Operation . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19-22 General . . . . .CD. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22 Playing aFeatures DVD and. .Video . . 19 � Moving to another . . 20 General Features . . . .TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. 20-22 � � Moving Moving to to another another CHAPTER/TRACK TITLE/GROUP . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 20 � Motion. . . . . .CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 � Slow Moving to another 20 � and � Still SlowPicture Motion. . . Frame-by-Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Playback . . . . . . . .. 20 20 � . . . and . . . .Frame-by-Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playback . . . . . . . .. 20 � Search. Still Picture 20 � � Repeat Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20 20 � � Repeat Repeat A-B . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 20 � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 � Marker Time Search 21 � . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 � Zoom. Marker. Search 21 Special DVD � Zoom. . .Features . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 21 � TitleDVD MenuFeatures . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 Special 22 � � Disc Title Menu Menu .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 � � Changing Disc Menuthe . . Audio . . . . . Language . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 � . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 � Changing Changing the the Audio Audio Channel Language 22 � . . .Audio . . . . .Channel . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 � Subtitles Changing. the 22 DVD Audio Discs � Subtitles . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . Disc . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 � Pause . . . . .CD . . .and . . .MP3/WMA . . . . . . . . .Disc . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 Playing an .Audio 23 � � Moving Pause .to. .another . . . . . . Track . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 � . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 � Repeat Moving Track/All/Off. to another Track 23 � . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 � Search. Repeat Track/All/Off. 23 JPEG�Disc Operation Search. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 23 Viewing JPEG disc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 JPEG Disc aOperation 24 � SlideaShow . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 Viewing JPEG. disc 24 � � Still SlidePicture Show .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 24 � to another � Moving Still Picture . . . . . file . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 24 � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Repeat Programmed Programmed Playback Tracks. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 Erasing a Track from Programme Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 Erasing Complete Programme List List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 Erasing the a Track from Programme 25 DivX Disc Operation . . . Programme . . . . . . . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26 Erasing the Complete 25 Speaker Setup . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27 DivX Disc Operation 26 Additional Information Speaker Setup . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 27 Last Condition Memory Additional Information . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 Screen Saver . .Memory . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 Last Condition 28 Controlling the. TV Screen Saver . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Presetting theRadio radio stations Operation with . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 29 Listening theradio radiostations . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 Presettingtothe 29 Other Functions. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Listening to the. radio 29 Sleep Timer Setting Other Functions. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 Dimmer . . . .Setting . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Sleep Timer 30 Mute . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Dimmer 30 Using Mute .the . . Headphone . . . . . . . . . .Jack . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 Selecting Input Source Using thethe Headphone Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 XTS (Excellent TrueSource Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Selecting the Input 30 XTS . . . . . .True . . . .Sound) . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 XTS pro (Excellent 30 XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Reference Language Code List Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Country Code List . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31 Language Code List 31 Troubleshooting . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33 Country Code List . . 31 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Referência Introduction Safety Precautions Introduction Introduction Introduction Assistência Técnica 37 Assistência Técnica Introduction Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . Table . . 23 of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Disc . . . Before . . 23 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Playable Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . 23 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . 23 Notes on Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . 23 About Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . 23 . . . . . . . Front . . 24 Panel and Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . Remote . . 24 . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . Preparation . . 24 . . . . . . . Connections . . 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 . . . . . . . . . 24 TV Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . 25 Optional Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . 25 Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 t . . . . . . . . 25 Speaker System Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 st . . . . . . . 25 � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . 26 � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . 27 � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . 28 � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11 . . . . . . . . . 28 � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . Speaker . . 28 Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . Before . . 28 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 . . . . . . . . . 29 Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Surround . . . . . . . . . 29 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . 29 Sound Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . 30 Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19 . . . . . . . . . 30 � General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Operation . . . . . . . . . 31 DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 . . . . . . . . . 31 Playing a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . . . . . . . 32-33 General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22 . . . . . . . . . 34 � Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20 � Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . 20 � Slow Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 � Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20 � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 � Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Special DVD Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 38 Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . 23 � Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 � Moving to another Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 � Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 JPEG Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Viewing a JPEG disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 � Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 � Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Erasing a Track from Programme List . . . . . . . . 25 Erasing the Complete Programme List . . . . . . . 25 DivX Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Speaker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Last Condition Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Presetting the radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Other Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Sleep Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Using the Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Selecting the Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Reference Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Introduction Introduction .........................2 Table Contents . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32 SafetyofPrecautions Before . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5 Table ofUse Contents .3 Playable .4 Before Use Discs . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4-5 Precautions . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54 Playable Discs Notes on Discs Precautions . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 About Notes Symbols on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 Front Panel and Rear About Symbols . . .Panel . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65 Remote Control . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76 Front Panel and Overview Rear Panel Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Preparation Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Preparation TV Connections ..8 Connections . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 8-13 Optional Equipment TV Connections . . Connections . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 98 Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10 Optional Equipment. .Connections .9 Speaker System Connection Aerial Connections . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12 . . 10 � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12 . . 11 Speaker System. Connection � a channel � Changing Transmitter. . . . . . . .of. Transmitter . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11 11 � a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11 � Setting Changing a channel of Transmitter 11 � Connecting. .to. .the � Assembling Setting a IDand of Transmitter . . Speakers . . . . . . . . 11 11 � Connections. . . . . . to . . the . . .Speakers . . . . . . . 12 � Speaker Assembling and Connecting 11 Speaker Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Before . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .14-19 SpeakerOperation Positioning. . . 13 Mini Operation Glossary for. .Audio Before . . . . Stream ......& . . Surround . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Mode . . . . . . . for . . .Audio . . . . Stream ......& . . Surround . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Mini Glossary Sound Mode . Mode . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14 14 On-Screen Sound Mode Display . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15 14 Initial SettingsDisplay . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-19 On-Screen . . 15 � General Operation . . 16 Initial Settings . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-19 � . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16 � Language General Operation 16 � . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-17 � Display Language . . 16 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 � (Parental � Lock Audio. . . . . . . Control) . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 18 17 � . . . . . . .Control) . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19 � Others Lock (Parental 18 � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Operation DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 Operation Playing a DVD Video CD. . . 19 DVD or Video CD and Operation . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19-22 General . . . . .CD. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22 Playing aFeatures DVD and. .Video . . 19 � Moving to another . . 20 General Features . . . .TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. 20-22 � � Moving Moving to to another another CHAPTER/TRACK TITLE/GROUP . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 20 � Motion. . . . . .CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 � Slow Moving to another 20 � and � Still SlowPicture Motion. . . Frame-by-Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Playback . . . . . . . .. 20 20 � . . . and . . . .Frame-by-Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playback . . . . . . . .. 20 � Search. Still Picture 20 � � Repeat Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20 20 � � Repeat Repeat A-B . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 20 � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 � Marker Time Search 21 � . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 � Zoom. Marker. Search 21 Special DVD � Zoom. . .Features . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 21 � TitleDVD MenuFeatures . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 Special 22 � � Disc Title Menu Menu .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 � � Changing Disc Menuthe . . Audio . . . . . Language . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 � . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 � Changing Changing the the Audio Audio Channel Language 22 � . . .Audio . . . . .Channel . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 � Subtitles Changing. the 22 DVD Audio Discs � Subtitles . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . Disc . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 � Pause . . . . .CD . . .and . . .MP3/WMA . . . . . . . . .Disc . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 Playing an .Audio 23 � � Moving Pause .to. .another . . . . . . Track . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 � . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 � Repeat Moving Track/All/Off. to another Track 23 � . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 � Search. Repeat Track/All/Off. 23 JPEG�Disc Operation Search. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 23 Viewing JPEG disc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 JPEG Disc aOperation 24 � SlideaShow . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 Viewing JPEG. disc 24 � � Still SlidePicture Show .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 24 � to another � Moving Still Picture . . . . . file . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 24 � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Repeat Programmed Programmed Playback Tracks. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 Erasing a Track from Programme Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 Erasing Complete Programme List List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 Erasing the a Track from Programme 25 DivX Disc Operation . . . Programme . . . . . . . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26 Erasing the Complete 25 Speaker Setup . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27 DivX Disc Operation 26 Additional Information Speaker Setup . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 27 Last Condition Memory Additional Information . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 Screen Saver . .Memory . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 Last Condition 28 Controlling the. TV Screen Saver . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Presetting theRadio radio stations Operation with . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 29 Listening theradio radiostations . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 Presettingtothe 29 Other Functions. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Listening to the. radio 29 Sleep Timer Setting Other Functions. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 Dimmer . . . .Setting . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Sleep Timer 30 Mute . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Dimmer 30 Using Mute .the . . Headphone . . . . . . . . . .Jack . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 Selecting Input Source Using thethe Headphone Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 XTS (Excellent TrueSource Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Selecting the Input 30 XTS . . . . . .True . . . .Sound) . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 XTS pro (Excellent 30 XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Reference Language Code List Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Country Code List . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31 Language Code List 31 Troubleshooting . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33 Country Code List . . 31 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Referência Introduction Safety Precautions Introduction Introduction Introduction Assistência Técnica 39 Assistência Técnica Introduction Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . Table . . 23 of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Disc . . . Before . . 23 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Playable Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . 23 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . 23 Notes on Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . 23 About Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 . . . . . . . . . 23 . . . . . . . Front . . 24 Panel and Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 . . . . . . . Remote . . 24 . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . Preparation . . 24 . . . . . . . Connections . . 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 . . . . . . . . . 24 TV Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 . . . . . . . . . 25 Optional Equipment Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 . . . . . . . . . 25 Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 t . . . . . . . . 25 Speaker System Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 st . . . . . . . 25 � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . 26 � Changing a channel of Transmitter . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . 27 � Setting a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . 28 � Assembling and Connecting to the Speakers 11 . . . . . . . . . 28 � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . Speaker . . 28 Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 . . . . . . . Before . . 28 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 . . . . . . . . . 29 Mini Glossary for Audio Stream & Surround . . . . . . . . . 29 Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . 29 Sound Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 . . . . . . . . . 30 On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 . . . . . . . . . 30 Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19 . . . . . . . . . 30 � General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Lock (Parental Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 . . . . . . . . . 30 � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Operation . . . . . . . . . 31 DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 . . . . . . . . . 31 Playing a DVD and Video CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 . . . . . . . 32-33 General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22 . . . . . . . . . 34 � Moving to another TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . 20 � Moving to another CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . 20 � Slow Motion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 � Still Picture and Frame-by-Frame Playback . 20 � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 � Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Marker Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Special DVD Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Title Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Changing the Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Changing the Audio Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 � Subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 40 Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . 23 � Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 � Moving to another Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 � Repeat Track/All/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 � Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 JPEG Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Viewing a JPEG disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 � Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 � Still Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Erasing a Track from Programme List . . . . . . . . 25 Erasing the Complete Programme List . . . . . . . 25 DivX Disc Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Speaker Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Last Condition Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Presetting the radio stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Other Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Sleep Timer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Dimmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Using the Headphone Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Selecting the Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 XTS (Excellent True Sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Reference Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Country Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Introduction Introduction .........................2 Table Contents . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 32 SafetyofPrecautions Before . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .4-5 Table ofUse Contents .3 Playable .4 Before Use Discs . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 4-5 Precautions . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54 Playable Discs Notes on Discs Precautions . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 About Notes Symbols on Discs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 55 Front Panel and Rear About Symbols . . .Panel . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65 Remote Control . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 76 Front Panel and Overview Rear Panel Remote Control Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Preparation Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Preparation TV Connections ..8 Connections . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 8-13 Optional Equipment TV Connections . . Connections . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 98 Aerial Connections . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 10 Optional Equipment. .Connections .9 Speaker System Connection Aerial Connections . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .11-12 . . 10 � Transmitter. . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11-12 . . 11 Speaker System. Connection � a channel � Changing Transmitter. . . . . . . .of. Transmitter . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11 11 � a ID of Transmitter . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 11 � Setting Changing a channel of Transmitter 11 � Connecting. .to. .the � Assembling Setting a IDand of Transmitter . . Speakers . . . . . . . . 11 11 � Connections. . . . . . to . . the . . .Speakers . . . . . . . 12 � Speaker Assembling and Connecting 11 Speaker Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 � Speaker Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Before . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .14-19 SpeakerOperation Positioning. . . 13 Mini Operation Glossary for. .Audio Before . . . . Stream ......& . . Surround . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Mode . . . . . . . for . . .Audio . . . . Stream ......& . . Surround . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Mini Glossary Sound Mode . Mode . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 14 14 On-Screen Sound Mode Display . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 15 14 Initial SettingsDisplay . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-19 On-Screen . . 15 � General Operation . . 16 Initial Settings . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16-19 � . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 16 � Language General Operation 16 � . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .16-17 � Display Language . . 16 � Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 � Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17 � (Parental � Lock Audio. . . . . . . Control) . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 18 17 � . . . . . . .Control) . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19 � Others Lock (Parental 18 � Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Operation DVD or Video CD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22 Operation Playing a DVD Video CD. . . 19 DVD or Video CD and Operation . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 19-22 General . . . . .CD. . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .20-22 Playing aFeatures DVD and. .Video . . 19 � Moving to another . . 20 General Features . . . .TITLE/GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. 20-22 � � Moving Moving to to another another CHAPTER/TRACK TITLE/GROUP . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 20 � Motion. . . . . .CHAPTER/TRACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 20 � Slow Moving to another 20 � and � Still SlowPicture Motion. . . Frame-by-Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Playback . . . . . . . .. 20 20 � . . . and . . . .Frame-by-Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playback . . . . . . . .. 20 � Search. Still Picture 20 � � Repeat Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 20 20 � � Repeat Repeat A-B . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 20 � Time Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Repeat A-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 � Search. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 � Marker Time Search 21 � . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 21 � Zoom. Marker. Search 21 Special DVD � Zoom. . .Features . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 21 � TitleDVD MenuFeatures . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 Special 22 � � Disc Title Menu Menu .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 � � Changing Disc Menuthe . . Audio . . . . . Language . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 � . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 � Changing Changing the the Audio Audio Channel Language 22 � . . .Audio . . . . .Channel . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 � Subtitles Changing. the 22 DVD Audio Discs � Subtitles . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 22 22 DVD Audio Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Playing an Audio CD and MP3/WMA Audio CD and MP3/WMA Disc . . . . . . Disc . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 � Pause . . . . .CD . . .and . . .MP3/WMA . . . . . . . . .Disc . . . .. .. .. .. .. 23 Playing an .Audio 23 � � Moving Pause .to. .another . . . . . . Track . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 23 � . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 � Repeat Moving Track/All/Off. to another Track 23 � . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 23 � Search. Repeat Track/All/Off. 23 JPEG�Disc Operation Search. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 23 Viewing JPEG disc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 JPEG Disc aOperation 24 � SlideaShow . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 Viewing JPEG. disc 24 � � Still SlidePicture Show .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 24 � to another � Moving Still Picture . . . . . file . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 24 24 � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 � Moving to another file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Programmed Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 � To rotate picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Repeat Programmed Programmed Playback Tracks. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 Erasing a Track from Programme Repeat Programmed Tracks. . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 25 Erasing Complete Programme List List . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 25 Erasing the a Track from Programme 25 DivX Disc Operation . . . Programme . . . . . . . . . .List . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 26 Erasing the Complete 25 Speaker Setup . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 27 DivX Disc Operation 26 Additional Information Speaker Setup . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 27 Last Condition Memory Additional Information . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 Screen Saver . .Memory . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 Last Condition 28 Controlling the. TV Screen Saver . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 28 28 Operation with Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Controlling the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Presetting theRadio radio stations Operation with . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 29 Listening theradio radiostations . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 29 Presettingtothe 29 Other Functions. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Listening to the. radio 29 Sleep Timer Setting Other Functions. . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 Dimmer . . . .Setting . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Sleep Timer 30 Mute . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Dimmer 30 Using Mute .the . . Headphone . . . . . . . . . .Jack . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 Selecting Input Source Using thethe Headphone Jack. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 30 XTS (Excellent TrueSource Sound). .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 Selecting the Input 30 XTS . . . . . .True . . . .Sound) . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 30 XTS pro (Excellent 30 XTS pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Reference Language Code List Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Country Code List . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 31 Language Code List 31 Troubleshooting . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .32-33 Country Code List . . 31 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-33 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Referência Introduction Safety Precautions Introduction Introduction Introduction Assistência Técnica 41 P/N 3834RH0099R REV 00 - AGO/2005
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project